Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
AMERICAN IN TITUTE
OF
STEEL CONST UCTION
INe.
STRUCTURALSTEEL
EDUCATIONAL OUNCIL
¡
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !NC.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CON TRUCTION, !Nc.
viii
1-1
PART1
GENERAL DESIGN CO SIDERATIONS
AMERICAN !NSTm.rrn OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CON TRuenoN, !Nc.
1-3
1-2 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS SEISMIC DESIGN OVERVIEW
system is expected to provide. A system designated as ordinary is detailed to meet certain <C
8
ductility and redundancy requirements, but the requirements are not as stringent as those of
systems classified as intermediate or special. Also, structures not specifically designed or
detailed for seismic resistance by the Seismic Provisions are referred to as low-seismic 0.2 sec 1.0 sec Period, T
sttuctures throughout this SeisrnÍc Manual. It is important to note, however, that even low-
seisrnic steel strUctures possess sorne inherent amount of seismic resistance, which may be a) Typical acceleratlon s ectrum
adequate to resist a limited amount of seisri:ric demando See the discussion "R Equal to 3
Applications" below.
Earthquakes cause vibratory ground IilOtions that may occur in all directions. The horizon-
tal components of these motions produce horizontal ground accelerations, which cause ~-------- ..--*-~ I
ent vibration frequencies so that the energy imparted to the structure is caused by the
combined effect of many accelerations acting at many frequencies. A spectral plot of these Ground motion Ground motion
acceierations is a graphical surnrnary of the peak response (acceleration) for a large number
of ground motion natural periods of Vibration. b) Stiff structure (T '" o. sec)
Figure l-la (using natural period instead of frequency) shows a typical earthquake spec-
tral acceleration plot. Each point on the curve can be thought of as the amount of energy at
that vibration frequeIicy that the earthquake can impart to the structure. The closer the fun-
damental frequency of the structure is to a frequency containing energy, the more the I
I
I
structure will feel the earthquake. I
LW!~~_......""" J--l.---~~!f~
Figure l-la shows that for this ground motion most of the earthquake accelerations (and I I
I
hence the energy imparted into a stru~ture) fall in a natural period range of 0.2 second to 1.0 I
second. Thus, strUctures with natural periods in this range will collect more energy than ~-\!!"!!!~~...._"" "--,--~~!!II- -;
I
I I
structures with periods outside this range. A typical two-story building has a period near I I
0.2 second, and the period for a lO-story building is approximately 1.0 second. Since these I
¡-- --¡
I
frequencies are in the portion of the spectrum that contains most of the earthquake energy, I I
I I...._.-I!!!~~~---l
buildings with 10 stories and less tend to "feel" the earthquake more than taller structures. 1- - _~~~!too--'"
I
..._---......
I I
Low-rise buildings also tend to be stiff and tall structures tend to be flexible (Figures 1-1 b I I
and l-lc). Stiff structures tend to attract a larger percentage of displacement-induced force ~--""--_-01 ---,
1
than do flexible structures. For these two reasons, earthquake-induced forces in stiff struc- I
IiII_.
I
I
tures (genera11y those of 10 stories or less) tend to be a larger percentage of the structure's L __ ~~!!!'!!I--_", t--~!!"!!!!'~--~
weight than those in flexible (taller)structures. Tall, flexible structures generally experience
a greater total deflection (drift). c~-=-
I
I
__ ••__ ".-=-~":J
I
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CON TRucnoN, !Nc.
code-specified earthquake design spectrum produces several mode-deflected shapes, the the margin against collapse inherent in structures de .gned to the NEHRP Provisions. This
most significant of which are shown. Although the deflected shapes are shown separately, lower-bound margin was judged, based on experien e, to correspond to the factor of 1.5
the actual building motion is based upon the combination of these deflected shapes that used to determine the design ground motion. Conse uently, the design earthquake ground
occurs at any instant. The participation percentage indicates the mode(s) that "attract" the motion is established at a ground shaking level that is 1 1.5 (or 2/3) of the MCE ground motion.
greatest amount of energy from the earthquake. As can be seen, Mode 1 dominates the way . For most regions of the nation, the MCEground otion is defined with a uniform prob-
this particular building responds to the earthquake. The participation percentages shown in ability of exceedence of 2 percent in 50 years, which orresponds to a return period of about
Figure 1-2 do not add up to 100 percent because there are additional modes whose partici- 2500 years. While stronger shaking than this could occur, it is considered economically
pation is les s than 1 percent.
impractical to design for such rare ground motions, d the selection of the 2-percent prob-
ability of exceedence in 50 years as the MCE grou motion is considered an acceptable
Seismic Use Groups, Maximum Considered Earthquake, level of seismic safety.
and Design Earthquake
The expected performance of a structure is determined by assigning it to a Seismic Use Seismic Design Category
Group (SUG). There are three SUGs (l, n, ID), based on the nature of the structure's OCCU- Buildings subject to seismic forces are designed o allow controlled inelastic, ductile
pancy and the risk to society that would be a consequence of earthquake damage to the deformations of the system. A building's Seismic D sign Category (SDC) establishes the
structure. The SUGs are used in determining the Seismic Design Category (SDC) for a minimum required performance level of the structu e, based on the location, soil condi-
structure. AIso, Importance Factors (1) are based on the SUG, and hence are related tion, and intended occupancy. The SDC may limit e system types that are permitted for
to structure occupancy and use. The·Importance Factor, 1, is used in the Equivalent Lateral use, based on the required leve! of ductile performan e for the structural system. There are
Force analysis method (described later) to compute earthquake-induced forces on and in six SDCs, designated by the lbtters A through F, wi A being the leastsevere and F being
the structure.
the most severe.
The NEHRP Provisions (FEMA 368/369) define earthquake ground motion hazards Determination of the SDC involves three primary eps. First, the mapped spectral accel-
based on the seismicity of the site. The approach of the NEHRP Provisions is intended to erations for a building, Ss and S1> are determined fr m maps found in ASCE 7. Next, the
provide a uniform margin against collapse at the design ground motion. In order to accom- design earthquake accelerations at short periods, S ,and at one-second, SDI, are found
plish this, ground motion hazards are defined in terms of maximum considered earthquake by adjusting the accelerations:Ss and SI for soil con itions, and then multiplying by 2/3 as
(MCE) ground motions.
prescribed in ASCE 7. Finally, the design earthqu e accelerations and the Seismic Use
The MCE ground motions are based on a set of rules that depend on the seismicity of an Groups are used to determine the SDC, according to SCE 7. The acceleration (SDS or SDI)
individual region, while the design ground motions are based on a lower-bound estimate of that yields the higher category must be used in desig .
ANALYSIS PROCEDURES
Seismic forces on the structure result from the later acceleration due to the earthquake
ground motion, essentially as a function of F = ma. he seismic force resisting system is
designed to resist the induced forces and dissipate t e energy causing the acceleration of
the structure.
ASCE 7 describes six procedures for determining e distortions and forces in structures
subject to earthquake ground motion. These are e order of increasing difficulty and
expected accuracy):
1. lndex Force procedure !
2. Simplified Analysis procedure
3. Equivalent Lateral Force (ELF) procedure
4. Modal Analysis procedure (response spectrum alysis)
The numbers al each ~: ~: ~: ~:
5. Push-over Analysis (an inelastic static analysis f progressive yielding through
floor level are !he relative Frequency: 027 Hz
masses that were usad
Penod: 3.70sec
Frequency: 0.80 Hz Frequency: 1.42 Hz Frequency: 2.12Hz the structure)
lo compute !he modal Penod: 1.25see Penod: 0.71 sec Penod: 0.47see
shapes shown. Participation: 79.2% Participation: 13.8% Participation: 5.4% Partieipalion: 1.5%
6. lnelastic Response History Analysis (~tepwise i tegration of equations of motion)
The index force and the simplified analysis procedures e "alternate" methods that have limited
Figure 1-2. Vibration modes for a multi-degree-of-freedom building caused by application of a application and must be approved by the authority hav· g jurisdiction. The remaining methods
typical earthquake acceleration design spectra. account for dissipation of earthquake input energy by inelastic distortion of the structure.
AMERICAN INsTlTUTE OF S1EEL CONSTRUCTION, INC.
AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF STEEL Co STRUCTION, INc.
1-6 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ANALYSIS PROCEDURES 1-7
The Equivalent Lateral Force (ELF) procedure and the Modal Analysis procedure involve The response modification coeÍficient, R, represents e ratio of forcés that w~uld develop
linear elastic analyses that use earthquake effects adjusted to account for expected inelastic in the seismic load resisting syst~m (SLRS) under the s ecified ground motion ¡f the sttuc-
behavior of the structure. Both are approximate methods of analysis useful within the ture possessed apure linearly elastic response to the réscribed forces. When a higher
limitations of their applicability (see FEMA 369). The last two methods (Push-over R-factor is applied, the system is expected to exhibit a gr ater deformation capacity and may
Analysis, Inelastic Response History Analysis) are generally not required except in spe- be designed for a lower equivalent lateral for~e in the linear elastic analysis. Figure 1-3
cial situations.
shows the relationship betweén R and thé design-Ievel D rces, along with the corresponding
According to ASCE 7, the Equivalent Lateral Force (ELF) analysis is permitted for aU lateral deformation of the structutal system (FEMA 200 ).
structures except those with certain structural irregularities, and the Modal Analysis is per- Factors that determine the magnitude of the response odification factor are the predicted
mitted for all structures. Both analyses use four important seismic parameters: the response performance of the system subjected to strong ground m tion, the villnerability of the grav-
modification coefficient, R; the overstrength factor, no; the deflection amplification factor, ity load resisting system to a failure of elements in the S RS, the level and reliability of the
Cd ; and the reliability or redundancy coefficient, p. inelasticity the system can attain,' and potential backiIp ame resistance such as that which
is provided by dual-frame systems. As illustrated in Figu e 1-3, in order for a system to uti-
Equivalent Lateral Force Method lize higher R factors, the lateral system must have mlilti le yielding elements, and the other
The Equivalent Lateral Force method involves the application of a set of representative or elements of the system must have adequate strength and eformation capacity to remain sta-
equivalent forces on each level of the structure that produce horizontal deflections that ble at the maximum lateral deflection levels. If the system redundancy and element
approximate the deflections caused by the ground motion. A total horizontal force, called overstrength cannot be achieved, a lower value of R shou be incorporated in the design and
the seismic base shear, Vs , is fust computed. The base shear is di stributed "vertically to detailing of the structure.
each level of the structure as forces, F'x, at each level, x. A linear elastic analysis is then
performed to determine the seismic force effects, QE, (axial force, shear, moment) in the R Equal to 3 Applications ,
structural components. Buildings designed utilizing R equal to 3 must meet the req . ements of the AISC Specification
The base shear, Vs, depends on" estimated mass, stiffness, period of vibration, and damp- based upon the code-specified forces distributed through ut the framing. The resulting sys-
ing of the structure, as well as the characteristics of the soil and the earthquake ground motion tems have ductility associated with conventional steel fr 'ng not specificalIy detailed for
accelerations. The magnitude of Vs also depends on the amount of earthquake energy that high-seismic resistance. The Seismic Provisions are n t intended to apply to structures
the structure is expected to dissipate by inelastic distortion. A typical form of the expression
for Vs is
(Equation 1-1)
where:
[SDCA-D]
(Equation 1-2)
[SDC E-F]
SDS and SD1 are the design ground accelerations (based on structure and soil properties, as
well as spectral acceleration Ss and SI); 1 is the occupancy importance factor; Wis the effec-
tive seismic weight of the structure (the total dead load plus applicable portions of other
loads); T is the fundamental period of the structure, for which a simplified approximate
building period, Ta , may be used; and R is the response modification coefficient.
minimum level of inelastic, ductil e performance that is required for a structure. The cor-
responding expected system performance is codified in the form of an R-factor, which is a Lateral Deformation (Dri ), d
reduction factor applied to the lateral force to balance the level of ductility in a structural
system with the required strength of the system. Figure 1-3. Relationship between R, design levelfo es, and lateral defonrtation.
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, INC. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTR enON, !Nc.
1-8 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ANALYSIS PROCEDURES 1-9
designed with R equal to 3 or less. These systems are permitted in Seismic Design The code-specified base accelerations used to calculat the seismic forces are not neces-
Categories A, B, and C, but not in Seismic Design Categories D, E, or F. sarily maximums. Rather, they nipresent the intensity f ground motions that have been
selected as reasonable for design purposes. Accordin y, the requirements in both the
R Greater Than 3 Applications Seismic Provisions and the Specification must be met to sure that the resulting frames can
R greater than 3 applications are intended for buildings that are designed to meet the require- undergo controlled deformations in a ductile, well-dis buted manner. The design provi-
ments of both the Seismic Provisions and the AlSC Specification. The use of R greater than sions are also intended to result in distributed deformatio s throughout the frame: to increase
3 in the calculation of the seismic base shear requires the use of a seismically detailed the level of available energy dissipation and correspondi g level of ground motion that can
system that is representative of the R selected in the designo Consider the foIlowing three be withstood.
examples: The connections will also be much more robust to tr smit the member-strength-based
force demands. Net sections will ofien require special ttention to avoid having fracture
1. Special Concentrically Braced Frame (SCBF) systems-SCBF systems are generally limit states control. Special material requirements, desig considerations, and construction
configured so that energy dissipation will occur by tension yielding and/or compres- practices must be followed.
sion buckling in the braces. The connections of the braces to the columns and beams
and between the columns and beams themselves must then be proportioned to remain
essentially elastic as they undergo these deformations. See Figure 1-4.
2. Eccentrically Braced Frame (EBF) systems-EBF systems are generally configured
so that energy dissipation will occur by shear yielding and/or flexural yielding in
the link. The beam outside the link, connections, braces, and columns must then be
proportioned to remain essentially elastic as they undergo these deformations. See
Figure 1-5.
3. Special Moment Frame (SMF) systems-SMF systems are generally configured so
that energy dissipation will occur by flexural yielding in the girders near, but away
from, the connection of the girders to the columns. The connections of the girders to
the columns and the columns themselves must then be proportioned to remain es sen-
tially elastic as they undergo these deformations. See Figure 1-6. ~I-==---I~ominally Elastic
lements
As a result of these special requirements, which force the deformations to occur in specific
locations, R greater than 3 design and construction will generally cost more than R equal to
3 design and construction.
Figure ]-5. Ductile EBF.
Buckling
Yielding
Nominally Elastic
Elements Yielding
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, !Nc.
1-10 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS LOAD COMBINATIONS USED IN DESIGN EXAMPLES 1-11
d, is also amplified by this multiplier. The maximum value, 8 max , given in ASeE 7, repre- TABLES
sents a level of deformation that is considered excessive.
Table 1-1. Workable Seismic Weld Acc ess Hole
Drift Limits Configurations
Seismic design requirements inc1ude drift limits, usually expressed in terms of story drifts. Fourteen configurations are given based upon the miniml m seismic weld access hole pro-
Limiting story drift helps to control component inelastic strain in the SLRS and to maintain file. This table is intended to be used in conjunction wiü Table 1-2 for quick selection of
structural stability. Drift limitations also help to reduce damage to nonstructural building weld access hole geometry for wide-flange beams wheIl the special seismic weld access
components. Design story drift limits are given in ASCE 7. Where second-order effects must hole is used. Otherwise, see Specification Section J1.6. 1 should be noted that the geome-
be inc1uded, the amplified d is used in the drift limit check. tries shown represent only one set of configurations ~at satisfy the dimensions and
tolerances in Seismic Provisions Figure 11-1. Other (onfigurations that comply with
Seismic Provisions Figure 11-1 can also be used.
Flange Web
u.
al
Brace 0.30~E/Fy 1.12~E/ Fy (2.3 -Pu/cfJbPy ):?1.49~E/ Fy
O
UJ Column 0.30~E/Fy l.l2~E/ Fy (2.3 -pu/cfJbPy ):?1.49~E/ Fy
Brace 0.38~E/Fy [7
3.76J1 Fy See note a.
a If the brace is designed for compression with no flexure, the web wi~th-thickness ratio limit is 1.49JEiii;,.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl ON, !Nc.
1-14 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-15
Table 1-3. Single Angles That Satisfy Seismic Local Table 1-5. Round HSS That Satisfy Sei ~mic Local
Buckling Requirements Buckling Requirements
Single angles that satisfy Seismic Provisions local buckling requirernents for use as braces Round HSS that satisfy Seismic Provisions local bucklin~ requirernents for use as braces
in SCBF, OCBF and EBF systems are indicated with a "." in the corresponding colurnn. A and columns in SCBF and OCBF systerns and praces in IEBF systerns are rndicated with
single angle satisfies these requirernents if its greatest leg width-thickness ratio is less than a "." in the corresponding column.: A round HSS satisfie these requirernents if its width-
or equal to the corresponding limits listed in the following table, which is surnmarized frorn thickness ratio is less than or equal to the corresponding lim .t listed in the following tableo
the requirernents in the Seismic Provisions.
1.12~E/Fy 2.42~ E/ Fy
La.
al Brace See note a.
w
a If the braee is designed for eompression with no flexure, all four walls must meet the width-thiekness
eriterion for the flanges.
AMERICAN !NsTITUlE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITOTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTI pN, !Ne.
1-16 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 REFERENCES 1-17
Table 1-7. Design Strength of Gusset Plates (Fy =36 ksi) PART 1 REFERENCES
Design strengths in axial compression are given for l-in.-wide plate segments of various
thicknesses and E'y = 36 ksi. The tabulated values have been determined in accordance American Institute of Steel Construc~on, 2005. Seismic Provi ions for Structural Steel Buildings,
with Specification Section E3 using the effective length with respect to the y-y axis (axis ANSIIAISC 341-05, AISC, Chicago, IL.
paralIeI to the plane of the gusset plate). The maximum recornmended Iength of the free
American Institute of Steel Construction, 2005. Specificatz nfor Structural Steel Buildings,
edge of the gusset plate, Lfe , is also tabulated (Astaneh-AsI, 1998), where,
ANSIIAISC 360-05, AISC, Chicago, IL.
American Institute of Steel Construction, 2005. Steel Const tion Manual, 13th Edition, AISC,
Lfe = 0.75t [f Chicago, IL.
~Fy
American Society of Civil Engineers, 2005. Minimum esign Loads for Buildings and
Table 1-8. Design Strength of Gusset Plates (Fy 50 = ksi) Other Structures, SEllAS CE 7-05, ASCE, Reston, VA.
Table 1-8 is similar to Table 1-7, except that it covers plates with E'y = 50 ksi. Astaneh-AsI, A. (1998). "Seismic Behavior and Design of G sset Plates." Steel Tips, Structural
Steel EducationaI Council, Moraga, CA.
Federal Emergency Management Agency, 2000. NEHRP Re mmended Provisions for Seismic
Regulations for New Buildings arld Other Structures, FE 368/369, Washington, De.
GaIambos, T.y. (1998). Guide to Stability Design Criteria or Metal Structures, 5th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.
Table 1-2
Table 1-1
Workable Seismic Weld Access Secti.ons That Se tisfy
Hole Configurations
Fy = 50 ksi Local Buckling
Requirement s
W Shapes
SMF SCBF EBf pumaxa Py Access
Shape
Beam Column Brace Column Link Brace b (kips) (kips) Hole
W44x335 4080 4930 F
x290 2540 4270 E
x262 1700 3850 E
x230 909 3390 D
W40x593 8700 J
x503 7400 I
x431 6350 H
x397 • 5850 G
1\
x372 5450 G
v x362 5350 G
x324 4770 F
x297 3800 4370 E
A
v x277 2940 4070 E
x249 2110 3670 E
x215 1080 3170 D
x199 1000 2930 D
W40x392 5750 H
x331 4880 G
x327 4800 G
x294 4320 F
x278 4100 F
x264 3880 F
x235 2490 3450 E
x211 1780 3100 E
x183 911 2670 D
x167 841 2460 D
x149 625 2190 C
Dimension from Provisions Figure 11-1
Access W36x800
Hole Type ® ® @ ® x652
! • 11800
9600
L
K
degrees in. in. in. in.
x529 7800 I
A x487 7150 I
B x441 6500 H
C x395 5800 G
D x361 5300 G
E x330 4850 F
F x302 4440 F
G x282 3690 4150 E
30 x262 3170 3850 E
H
I x247 2750 3630 E
J x231 2350 3410 D
K
a Pu greater than Pu max results in a noncompact web per AlSC SeiSmic Provisions Sec1 on 8.2 tor members in combined flexure
L b and axial compression with Pu/CPbPy> 0.125. A dash indicates that Pu max exceeds cP Py and tlJe web is compact.
M If tlJe brace is designed for compresslon with noflexure, check that tlJe web widtIJ-~ ickness ratio is equal to or less tlJan
N 1.49JBF;,. .
N4ERICAN INSTl'I1ITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI ON, !Nc,
.... - ....
1-20 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES
1-21
~
puma/ Py Access SMF
Shape
b Shape SCBF EBe Pumaxa py . Access
Beam Column Brace Column Link Brace (kips) (kips) Hole
Beam Column Brace Column Link b (kips) (kips) Hole
··
Brace
W36x256
x232 ·· ·· ·· ·· ·· -
2900
3770
3410
F
E
W27x539
x368
··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ···
-
-
7950 K
x210
·· ·· ·· ·· ·· ·· 2450 3090 E x336
·· ··
-
5400
4950
H
G
x194 1940 2850 O x307
··· · ···
-
··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ···
~
4520 G
··· ··
x182 1610 2680 O x281 -
··· ···
x170
4150 F
1270 2510 O x258
- 3800 F
···
-
-
3470 E
~
··· ··
3200 E
x135 579 1990 e x194 - 2860 E
·· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ···
W33x387 - 5700 G x178
- o
x354 - 5200 G x161
·· ·· · 2120
2630
2380 o
··· ···
x318 - 4680 F x146 1690 2160
·· ·· ··
C
·· ·· ··· ··· · ···
x291 - 4290 F W27x129
o
··
1460 1890
···
x263 - 3880 E xl14
·
788 1500
x221 2650 3260 o x94
· · ·
C
···
617 1390 C
···
x201 2090 2960 o x84 420
··
1240
···
B
W33x169
x152 ·· ··· ···
1500
1170
2480
2240
o
o
W24x370
x335
··· ··· ··· ·· ···
- 5450 I
·· ·
· ··
- 4920 H
··· ···
x141 919 2080 e x306
x130
xl18 · · ·· 712
483
1920
1740
e
C
x279
x250
··· ··· ··· ···
-
-
-
4490
4100
3680
G
G
F
W30x391
··· ··· ·· ·· ·· ···
- 5750 H x229
·· ··· · -
···
3360 F
·· ··· ···
x357 - 5250 G x207 - 3040 E
···
2820
···
E
x292
·· ·· ·· - 4300 F x176
···
- 2590
···
E
··· ···
x162
x261 - 3850 E - 2390 o
··
1010 1530 C
···
xl 08 701 1590 C x68 364 1010 B
x99
x90
· · 531
236
1460
1320
C
B
W24x62
x55
·· ·· ·· ·· ·· 387
223
910
810
B
AorB
a Pu greater than Pumax results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Section 8.2 for.members in combined flexure a Pu greater tIlan Pumax results in a noncompact web per AlSC Seismlc Provisions Se cti n 8.2 for members in combined flexure
and axial compression with PuI(jlbPy> 0.125. Adash indicates that Pu max exce~ds (jIb~ and the ~~b is compact. b and axial compresslon with Pu/(jIbPy> 0.125. A dash Indicates that Pu m~ exceeds (jIb and tIle web is compacto
b If the
brace is designed for compression with no flexura, check .that the web wldth-thlckness ratio IS equal to or less than If tIle brace is designed for compression with no flexure, check tIlat the' web width -thl kness ratio is equal to or less than
1.49 /EiFy. 1.49/EiFy.
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, lNc.
...... - --01IIIIIIII
1-22 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-23
a Pu greater than Pu max results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Section 8.2 for members in combined flexure a Pu greater than Pu max results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Secti n 8.2 tor mempers in combined flexure
and axial compression with Pul<PbPy> 0.125. A dash indicates tlJat Pumax exceeds <PbPy and tlJe web is compact. and axial compression with PUI<PbPy> 0.125. A dash indicates that Pumax exceeds <Pb IV and tlJe web is compact. :
b If the
braceis designed for compression with no flexure, check that the web width-thickness ratio is equal to or less than brace is designed tor compression with no flexure, check tlJat thé web width-th kness ratio is equal to or less than
b If the
1.49!EiFr . 1.49!EiFr.: :
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRuCfrpN, !Ne.
.......
-
1-24 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-25
.. ·
Beam Column Brace Column Link Brace
W12x22
W14x82
x74
x68
1200
1090
1000
C
C
C
x19
x16
. 228
155
106
324
279
236
AorB
AorB
A
x61 x14 59.3 208
W14x53 · .
895
780
B
B Wl0x112 · . ·· .. 1650 D
x48 705 B xl00
·· .. · 1470 D
.. . .
x43 535 630 A orB x88 1300 C
W14x38
x34
· . 434
329
560
500
AorB
A or B
x77
x68
x60
· . · 1130
1000
880
C
C
C
x30 258 443 AorB x54 790 B
W14x26 189 385 Aor B x49
. ·
720 AorB
x22
W12x336
103 325
4940
AorB
I
Wl0x45
x39
· . 665
575
B
AorB
x305 4480 I x33 486 AorB
x279
x252
x230
4100
3700
3390
H
G
G
Wl0x30
x26
· . ·· .. 442
381
AorB
AorB
x22
.. ··
281 325 AorB
· . ·· ..
x210 3090 F
x190 2790 F Wl0x19 281 AorB
x170 2500 E x17 216 250 A
x152 2240 E x15 179 221 A
x136 2000 D
x120
xl06
x96
· . 1770
1560
1410
D
C
C
x87 1280 C
x79 1160 C
x72 1060 C
W12x58 850 B
x53 780 A or B
W12x50 730 B
x45 655 A or B
x40 585 A or B
W12x35 458 515 AorB
x30 309 440 AorB
x26 200 383 A or B
a Pu greater tlJan Pumax results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Section 8.2 for members in combined flexure a Pu gre~ter tlJan Pu max results in a noncompact web par AlSC Seismie Pro~isions Seetion 8.2 for members in combined flexure
b and axial compression with PU/<Pbl} > 0.125.A dash indicates tlJat Pumaxexceeds <PbPy and tlJe web is compacto b and axial co~pre~fon with Pu/<Pbl}::: 0.12.5. A dash ipdicates tlJat fu mix exceeds <Pbl} nd tlJe web is compacto
If the brace is designed for compression with no flexure, check tlJat the web width-tlJickness ratio is equal to or less tlJan If the brace IS deslgned for compresslon WltIJ no flexure, check tlJat tlJe web width-tlJié~ ~ess ratio is equal to or less tlJan
1.49!EiFr . 1.49 ./EiFy . ,
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CCPNSTRUCTIOI , !Nc.
1-26 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-27
D
Sections That Satisfy Sections That Sa'Usfy
L Local Bupkling
Requirements
SCBF
Single Angles
EBF
Fy
SCBF
=36 ksi
EBF
Fy =46 ksi Local Bucklin!~
SCBF
Requirement~
Rectangular HSS
EBF SCBF EBF
Shape Shape Shape Shape
Brace Brace Brace Brace Brace Col. Brace Col.
L8x8x1'/a L5x3'f2X3/4 HSS20x12x5/a • HSS12x10x' 2
x1 x5/a x l l2
x7/a x'f2 HSS20x8x5/B HSS12x8x5 a
X 3/4
L5x3x'f2 Xl/2 x, 2
x5/a x3/a x3 a
x7h6
5
L8x6x1 X '6
L4x4x3/4
x 7/a HSS12x6x 5 B
X5/B
X 3/4 X, 2
x'f2 HSS18x6x5/a
x 5/a x3 a
x 7h6 x l l2
L8x4x1 x3/a ¡ X5 '6
x3/a X, 4
x 7/a xSh6 x5h6
X 3/4
L4x3'f2x'f2 HSS12x4x5 a
x5/a HSS16x12x5/a
x3/a Xl/2
X'2
L7x4x3/4 x5h6 x3 a
x5/a HSS16x8x5/a x5 6
L4x3x5/a x l f2 X,
L6x6x1 x'f2 x 3/a
x7/a x3fa HSS12x3'/2x3 ~
x 5h6
X 3/4 x 5h6 x5 6
x5/a HSS16x4x5/a
L3'l2x3'l2x' /2 Xl 12
HSS12x3x 5, 6
x 9h6 xli
x7h6 x3/a
x'l2
x3/a x5h6 HSS12x2x5/ 6
L6x4x7/a x 5h6
x'/
X 3/4 HSS14x100/a
L3'f2x3x'f2 x l f2 HSS10x8x5/
x5/a
x7h6 x3/a x'/
x 9h6
x3/a x 3/
x'f2 HSS14x6x5/a
x5h6 X 5/6
L6x3'f2x'f2 x l f2
x3/a HSS10x6x51
L5x5x'/a x5h6 x'l
X 3/4
xl/4 x 3/
x 5/a X 5/6
x'f2 HSS14x4x5/a
x'/
x7h6 Xl/2
x3/a HSS10x5x3/¡
0h6 x 5h6
Xl/4 x'l
x3h~
b Tabulation assumes compresslon with strong-axis flexure. If the brace is designed tor ~ompression with no tlexure, check that
all walls have width-thickness ratio equal to or leSS'than 1.12 Mr.lt'the brace is dE~lgned tor compression with weak-axis
tlexure, the tabulated intol1l.lation is not applicable.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc . AMERICAN !NST,ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIPN, !Nc.
--
.
1-28 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-29
D D
Sections That Satisfy Sections That Sé.tisfy
Local Buckling Fy = 46 ksi Fy = 46 ksi Local Bucklir, 9
Requirements Requirement$
Rectangular HSS Rectangular HS~
~
SCBF EBF SCBF EBF SCBF EBF SCBF EBF
Shape Shape Shape Shape
Brace Col. Braceb Brace Col. Braceb Brace Col. Braceb Brace Col. Braceb
HSS10x4x5/s
x 1f2 · · ·· HSS8x6x5/s
X1/2 ·· ·· ·· ,
HSS7x2x1/4
X3/16 ·· HSS5x21f2 1/4
3/16 ··
x 3/s
·· x3/s
·· x1/a
· 1/a
·
X5/16
X1/4
X3/16 ··
X5/16
X1/4
·· HSS6x5x1f2
x 3/a ·· ·· ·· HSS5x2 3/a
5/16
·· ·· ··
·· ·· ··· ···
HSS8x4x5/a X5/16 1/4
HSS1 Ox31f2x112
x 3/a ·· x 112
x3/a ·· X1/4
x3hs
3/16
1/a ~
·· X5/16
··
·· ·· ··· ·· ·· ···
x 5/1s
HSS6x4x1f2 , HSS4x3 3/a
X1/4 x1/4
x3/a
·
5/16
x 3/1s X3/16
· X5/16 1/4
· ·
HSS10x3x3/s
x 5h6 ·· HSS8x3x112
x 3/a · · ···
X1/4
X3/16
··
3/16
1/a ··
·· ·· ·· ··· ··· ··· ···
X1/4 X5/16
HSS6x3x1f2 HSS4x21f2> 3/a
x 3h6 X1/4
X3/16 ·· x 3/a >5/16
···
HSS10x2x3/a x 5h6 >1/4
··· ··· ··
x 5h6 HSS8x2x3/a X1/4 >3/16
X1/4 X5/16 x 3h6 >1/a
x 3h6
· X1/4
·
X1/S
HSS4x2'> 3/a
·· ·· ··
HSS9x7x5/a
x 1f2 · · ·· HSS7x5x1f2
x 3h6
· · ··
HSS6x2x3/a
x5h6 · · ·· >5/16
x 1/4
· · ··
·· ···
x3/a x3/a X1/4 X~h6
X5/16
·
x 5h6
·· x 3h6 >< la
·
x1f4 X1/4
·
x1/a
H$S3 1f2x2 112>< ~/a
·· ·· ··
· · ·· ··· ··· ···
x3h6 HSS5x4x1/2 X /16
HSS9x5x5/a
x 1f2 HSS7x4x1f2
· · ·· x 3/a X /4
· · ··
···
x 3/a x 3/a X5/16 X /16
·· ·· ·
x 5h6 X5/16 X1/4 x/a
X1/4
x 3h6
·
X1/4
X3/16
·
x3h6
HSS5x3x1/2
·· ·· ··
HSS3 1/2X2x /4
X /16 · · ···
HSS9x3x1f2
·· HSS7x3x1f2
· · ···
x3/a
· · ··
x/a
x 3/a
x5h6
··
x 3/a
x5h6
x 5h6
X1/4
HSS3 1/2X1 1/2X 14
· · ··
··· ··
X /16
X3/16
X1/4
x3h6
·
X1/4
x 3h6
x1/a
x1/a
x/a
·
b b Tabulation assumes compression witll strong-axis flexure. If tIle brace is designed f r compression with no flexure, check tIlat
l1abulation assumes compression with strong-axis flexure. If tIle brace is designed for compression with no flexure, check tIlat
a11 walls have width-tIllckness ratio equal to or less tIlan 1.12 /EiF.y. If tIle brace is designed for compression witll weak-axis all walls have width-thickness ratio equal to or leSs tIlan 1.12 /EiF.y. If tIle brace is ~esigned tor compression with weak-axis
f lexure, tIle tabulated information is not applicable. flexure, the tabulated information is not applicable.
AMERICAN !NSTlTUI'E OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUC pON, !Nc.
.....
..
- - ----- -
1-30 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-31
D
Sections That Satisfy
o
Sections That Satisfy
Local Buckling Fy =46 ksi Fy =46 ksi Local Qucklirg
Requirements Requiremen1s
Rectangular HSS SquareHSS
SCBF EBF SCBF EBF SCBF EBF SCBF
Shape Shape Shape Shape
Brace Col. Brace Col. Brace Col. Brace Brace Col. Brace
HSS3x21/2x5ha HSS2 1/2x1 1/2X1/4 HSS16x16x5/s HSS4112x41/ xll2
X 1/4 x 3ha x 3/s
x 3ha Xl/S HSS14x14x 5/s
xl/2 x 5h6
Xl/S X1/4
HSS2 1/2X1x 3h6
HSS3x2x511a Xl/S HSS12x12x 5/s x 3h6
x l l2
X 1/4 HSS4x4pc:112
HSS21/4X2x 3h6
x3ha HSS1 Ox1 Ox5/s pc:3/s
Xl/S
Xl/S xl/2 pc:5h6 •
HSS3x1 1/2x 1/4 HSS2x1 1/2X 3h6 x3/s pc:l/4
~3h6
x 3ha HSS2x1x3h6 HSS9x9x5/s
Xl/S Xl/S x l l2 HSS3 1/2X3 112pc:3/S
HSS3x1x3ha
Xl/S
x3/s
x 5h6
p<5h6
p<1/4
p<3h6
.
l'
HSS8x8x%
HSS2 1/2x2x 1/4 ~l/S
x3ha xl l2
Xl/S x 3/s HSS3x3p<3/S
x5h6 ~5h6
r-l/4
HSS7x7x5/s
k 3/16
xl l2
xa/s r-1/ S
x 5h6 HSS2112x2112'r<5h6
Xl/4 kl/4
'('-3h6
HSS6x6x5/s
~l/S
xl l2
x3/s HSS21/4X21/4~1/4
x5h6 3/16
Xl/4 l/S
HSS5 1/2x5 1/2X3/S HSS2x2 1/4
x5h6 3/16
Xl/4 l/S
HSS5x5x l12
x 3/s
x 5h6
Xl/4
x3h6
b Tabulation assumes compression with strong-axis flexure. If the brace is designed for compression with no flexure, check that
fEiFr.
all walls have width-thickness ratio equal to or less than 1.12 If the brace is designed for compression with weak-axis
flexure, the tabulated information is not applicable.
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU~ON, !Nc.
1-32 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-33
O Local Buckling
Requirements
Round HSS
Fy =42 ksi Fy =42 ksi Local Bucklin~1
Requirements
Round HSS
O
Shape
HSS20.000xO.500
Braee
SCBF
Col.
EBF
Braee
·
·
Shape
HSS7.000xO.500
xO.375
Braee
··
··
SCBF
Col.
··
··
EBF
Braee
··
Shape
HSS4.500xO.375
xO.337
Braee
SCBF
··
Col.
··
EBF
Braee
··
Shape
HSS2.875xO 250
xO 203
Braee
SCBF
···
Col.
···
EBF
Braee
·· 4
···
HSS18.000xO.500
HSS16.000xO.625
xO.500 · · ··
xO.312
xO.250
xO.188
xO.237
xO.188 ·· ·· ···
xO 188
xO 125
· · ··
·· ·· ··· ···
xO.125
HSS2.500xO 250
xO.438
xO.375 HSS6.875xO.500
·· ·· ·· HSS4.000xO.313
·· ·· ·· xO 188
·
HSS14.000xO.625
xO.500 ·· ·· ··
xO.375
xO.312
xO.250
· · ·· ···
xO.250
xO.237
·
·· ·· ··
xO 125
HSS2.375xO 250
··· ··· ·· 4
··
xO.226
xO.375 xO.188
·· ·· xO 218
···
xO.220
xO.312
··· ·· ·· · xO 188
··
··
HSS6.625xO.500 xO.188
HSS12.750xO.500
· · ··
xO.432 xO.125
· xO 154
xO 125
··· ··· ·· ·· ··
xO.375 xO.375
HSS1 O. 750xO.500
· · ·· xO.312
···
HSS3.500xO.313
xO.300
HSS1.900xO 188
·· ·· ··
xO.375
xO.250
·
xO.280
xO.250
· ··
xO.250
xO.216
··· ··· ·· xO 145
xO 120
· · ·
·· ··
xO.188 xO.203
·· HSS1.660xO 140
· · ·
·· ·· ·· ·· ·· ··
HSS10.000xO.625 xO.188
HSS6.000xO.500
xO.500
·
· · ···
xO.375 xO.125
xO.375
xO.312
xO.312
xO.280 ·· ·· ·· HSS3.000xO.250
xO.216
··· ··· ···•
xO.250
·· ··
xO.250
· · ··
···
xO.203
HSS9.625xO.500 xO.188 xO.188
·· ··
·· ·· ··· ···
xO.375 xO.152
HSS5.563xO.500
xO.312
xO.250
· xO.375
xO.258
· ·
xO.134
xO.125 ·· ··
HSS8.625xO.625
xO.500 ·· ·· ·· xO.188
xO.134 ··
·· ·· ··
··· ··· ···
xO.375
HSS5.500xO.500
xO.322
xO.250
· xO.375
xO.258
HSS7.625xO.375
xO.328 ·· ·· ·· HSS5.000xO.500
xO.375 ·· ·· ··
HSS7.500xO.500
··· ·• ·
···
xO.375 xO.258
xO.312 xO.250
··
·· ·
xO.250 xO.188
xO.188 xO.125
· i
. --- l .........
SCBF
Local Buckling
Requirements
EBF
Pipe
Fy
SCBF
=35 ksi
EBF
Design Strength pf
Gusset Plates, <l>1i-n'
kips/in. Width
Fy = 36·ksi
··· ...
Pipe 12 x-strong 3 11.7 16.2 20.3 24.3 28.4 32.4 40.5 48.6 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 10 Std. Pipe 10 x-strong 4 11.3 15.6 20.3 24.3 28.4 32.4 40.5 48.6 56.~ 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 8 Std. 5 10.9 15.2 19.4 24.3 28.4 32.4 40.5' 48.6 56. 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 8 x-strong
6 10.3 14.8 19.1 23.3 28.4 32.4 40.5 I 48.6 56.7 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 6 Std.
··· ...
Pipe 6 x-strong 7 9.75 14.3 18.7 23.0 27.2 32.4 40.5 48.6 56.7 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 5 Std. Pipe 5 x-strong 8 9.11 13.8 18.3 22.6 26.9 31.1 40.5 48.6 56. 7 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 4 Std; Pipe 4 x-strong 9 8.44 13.2 17.8 22.2 26.5 30.8 40.5 48.6 56.i7 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 3'/2 Std. 10 7.75 12.6 17.2 21.7 26.1 30.4 38.9 48.6 56.17 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
··· ...
Pipe 3'12 x-strong
Pipe 3 Std. 11 7.06 11.9 16.7 21.2 25.7 30.0 38.6 47.0 56. 17 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 3 x-strong
12 6.36 11.3 16.0 20.7 25.2 29.6 38.21 46.7 56. 17 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 2112 Std. Pipe 2112 x-strong 13 5.69 10.6 15.4 20.1 24.7 29.1 37.8 46.3 54.~ 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 2 Std.
Pipe 1'12 std.
Pipe 1'/4 Std.
·· .. Pipe 2 x-strong
Pipe 1112 x-strong
.5
14 5.04
15 4.41
16 3.88
9.87
9.17
8.48
14.7 19.5
14.1 18.9
13.4 18.2
24.1
23.5
23.0
28.6
28.1
27.6
37.4
37.0
36.5
46.0
45.6
45.2
54.1)
54.
53.~
64.8
62.5
62.2
72.9
72.9
72.9
81.0
81.0
81.0
89.1
89.1
89.1
97.2
97.2
97.2
··· ...
Pipe 1'/4 x-strong
Pipe 1 Std. Pipe 1 x-strong
~ 17 3.44 7.80 12.7 17.6 22.3 27.0 36.0 44.8 53. 61.9 70.3 81.0 89.1 97.2
S 18 3.06 7.14 12.0 16.9 21.7 26.4 35.5! 44.4 53.D 61.6 70.0 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 3/4 Std.
Pipe 112 Std.
Pipe 3/4 x-strong =
~ 19 2.75 6.51 11.3 16.2 21.0 25.8 35.0 43.9 52.p 61.2 69.7 78.1 89.1 97.2
Pipe '12 x-strong Q) 20 2.48 5.88 10.6 15.5 20.4 25.2 34.5 43.4 52.D 60.8 69.4 77.8 86.2 97.2
Double-Extra Stroog (xx-stroog)
:g 21 2.25 5.34 9.92 14.8 19.'7 24.5 33.9 i 42.9 51.~ 60.4 69.0 77.5 85.9 97.2
! 22 2.05 4.86 9.26 14.1 19.0 23.9 33.3 42.4 51.p 60.0 68.6 77.1 85.6 94.0
Pipe 8 xx-strong w 23 1.88 4.45 8.61 13.4 18.3 23.2 32.7 41.9 50.~ 59.6 68.2 76.8 85.2 93.7
Pipe 6 xx-strong 24 1.72 4.09 7.98 12.7 17.6 22.5 32.1 41.3 50.~ 59.2 67.8 76.4 84.9 93.3
25 1.59 3.77 7.35 12.0 16.9 21.8 31.5 40.8 49.~ 58.7 67.4 76.0 84.6 93.0
Pipe 5 xx-strong
26 1.47 3.48 6.80 11.4 16.2 21.1 30.8 40.2 49. ~ 58.2 67.0 75.7 84.2 92.7
Pipe 4 xx-strong
27 1.36 3.23 6.30 10.7 15.5 20.4 30.2 39.6 48. ~ 57.8 66.6 75.2 83.8 92.4
Pipe 3 xx-strong 28 1.27 3.00 5.8610.1 14.8 19.7 29.5 39.0 48. D 57.3 66.1 74.8 83.5 92.0
Pipe 2112 xx-strong 29 1.18 2.80 5.47 9.44 14.2 19.0 28.8 i 38.4 47. 56.7 65.6 74.4 83.1 91.6
Pipe 2 xx-strong 30 1.10 2.61 5.11 8.82 13.5 18.3 28.1 37.7 47. 56.2 65.2 74.0 82.6 91.2
31 1.03 2.45 4.78 8.26 12.8 17.7 27.5' 37.1 46. 55.7 64.7 73.5 82.2 90.9
32 0.970 2.30 4.49 7.76 12.2 17.0 26.8 36.5 45. 55.1 64.2 73.0 81.8 90.5
33 0.912 2.16 4.22 7.29 11:5 16.3 26.1 35.8 45. 54.6 63.6 72.6 81.4 90.0
34 0.859 2.04 3.98 6.87 10.9 15.6 25.4 35.1 44. 54.0 63.1 72.1 80.9 89.6
35 0.810 1.92 3.75 6.48 10.3 14.9 24.7' 34.5 44. 53.4 62.6 71.6 80.4 89.2
36 0.766 1.82 3.55 6.13 9.73 14.3 24.0 33.8 43. 52.8 62.0 71.1 80.0 88.7
. Max. Lfe, io. 7.98 10.6 13.3 16.0 18.6 21.3 26.6 31.9 37. 42.6 47.9 53.2 58.5 63.9
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF S1EEL CONsTRucnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF S1EEL CONSTRUC ON, !Nc.
2-3
2-2 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 BRACED FRAMES
and
AMERICAN !NSTITIJTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, INc.
2--4 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 BRACED FRAMES 2-5
t-
.....I-'R.=o=of'----->i...._
25'-0" Ka = 1.0(5.90 ft)(12 in.lft)
r.I
o.k.
81.0
COLUMN SPLlCE
48in.ABOVE
FINISHED FLOOR
(TYPICAL) Since Tu < <PtPn, the 2L6x4x5h6 is adequate.
Use a 2L6x4x51t6 LLBB with a 3/S_in. sep ration and two inte:rmediate
connectors for braced-frame Brace BR-l.
Note that the intermediate connectors be welded or pretensioned
bolted. If bolted interlnediate connectors a e used, a net-section rupture
check is also required.
The net-section must also be checked at the end connection; see
Example 2.3.
FX2
Example 2.2. Braced-Frame Column De ign
Given: Refer to Column C-l in Figure 2-1. Select ASTM A992 W-shape (F'y =
50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) with a nominal depth of 1 in. to resist the following axial
forces. The Applicable Building Code specifie the use of ASCE 7 for calcula-
tion of loads.
So/ution: Using the basic load combinations in ASCE 7 Section 2.3.2 with Exception 1,
Design the brace-to-gusset connecti n
the maximum compressive force in the column is,
From Example 2.1,
Pu = (1.2+ O.2SDS )PD +PP +0.5PL +O.2P (AS CE 7)
QE S P =56.0 kips .
u
Pu = 1.23(143 kips) + 1.0(52.4 kips) + 0.5 (37 kips) + 0.2(8 kips) Tu = 18.5 kips
= 248 kips
And the maximum tensile force in the column is, Using Manual Table 7-4 for 3/4-in.-diameter STM A325SC bolts in double-
shear, Class B faying surfaces, oversized holes in the gusset, and standard holes
Tu = (0.9-0.2S DS )PD +POP +1.6P (ASCE 7)
QE H in the brace,
Tu = 0.869(143 kips) + 1.0(-52.4 kips) + 1.6(0 kips) P
N u 56.0 kips
= 71.9 kips
bmin Q>R 1.43(16.0 kips/bolt)
n
Per ASCE 7, since Tu> O, there is no net tension (uplift) on the column.
Using Manual TabIe 4-1 with KL = 14 ft, the lightest W12 section with a com- Try three 3/4-in.-diameter bolts at 3-in. spacin .
pressive strength greater than 248 kips is a W12x40.
Q>cPn = 304 kips > 248 kips Check brace net sectian far tensile st ngth
The net area of the brace is
Since Pu < Q>cPn' the W12x40 is adequate.
Use a W12x40 for braced-frame Column C-l.
An =Ag -2(dh + X6 in}
=6.05 in.
2
"':2(J{ in.)(X6 in.)
2
Example .2.3. Braced-Frame Brace-to-Beam/Column =5.50 in.
Connection Design
U=l-~ (Specification Table D3.1)
Given: Refer to Joint J-1 in Figure 2-1. Design the connection between the brace, 1
beam, and colmilIl. Use a gusset plate concentric to the brace and welded to = 1- 0.908 in.
the beam with 70-ksi electrodes. CoIinect the gusset and the beam to the 6 in.
column using a bolted single-pIate connection with ASTM A325 bolts. Use = 0.849
ASTM A36 (E; = 36 ksi, Fu = 58 ksi) for all pI ate material; as sume the col-
umn and brace are as designed in Examples 2.1 and 2.2, respectively, and that
=UA =0.849(5.50
Ae n . in. 2 )=4.67 in.
the beam is anASTM A992 (E; = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) W18x35. The Applicable
Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.
Q>tPn =0.75FuAe (Specification D2-2)
The shear force in the beam coincident with the axial force in the brace is
Ru = 5.40 kips. =0.75(58 k~)( 4.67 in. 2
)
Wl8x35 d = 17.7 in. tw = 0.300 in. t¡ = 0.425 in. = 203 kips > 18.5 kips . o.k.
kdes = 0.827 in.
So/ution: From Examples 2.1 and 2.2, the brace is an ASTM A36 2L6x4x5h6 double- Check balt bearing strength in brace
angle section and the column is an ASTM A992 W12x40 wide-flange section. For compression, using Manual Table 7-5 with = 3 in., the bearing strength is,
W12x40 d = 11.9 in. tw = 0.295 in. t¡ = 0.515 in. Q>Rn =2NbQ>rnt
kdes = 1.02 in.
=2(3)(78.3 kipsfm.)(}(6 in.)
L6x4x5h6 x = 0.908 in. y = 1.90 in.
=147 kips>56.0 kips o.k.
2L6x4x5h6 LLBB Ag = 6.05 in. 2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU N, INC.
2--8 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 BRACED FRAMES 2--9
A similar check for the tension force using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6 with From Manual Table 4-22, <!>Fcr = 30.0 ksi. The compression buckling strength
s = 3 in. and Le = 2 in. shows that is then,
<!>Rn = <!>FcrAg
By inspection, block shear rupture will not control for the 2L6x4x5J¡6 brace KL = 0.65(6.25 in.) =4.06 in.
member.
Interpolating from Table 1-7 for a 3/8-in.-thick usset with KL = 4.06 in., the
Use (3) ASTM A325SC bolts to connect the brace angles to tbe gusset plate. design compression buckling strength of the gu set is,
Use Class B faying surfaces, standard boles in the brace, and oversized
boles in tbe gusset. <!>Rn =<!>rn L w =l1.3kip&lin.(6.93 in.)=78.3 kips
A similar check for the tension force using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6 with
s = 3 in. and Le = 2 in. shows that the minimum thickness is less than that aboye
for compression.
W18x35BEAM
The average length of the gusset plate beyond the connection on the Whitrnore
width is approximately 6.25 in. Assuming a fixed-fixed buck1ing condition,
K=0.65, and
Using the connection geometry given in Figure 2-2 and the analysis found in The forces along the gusset-to-beam interface e,
Manual Part 13, page 13-10,
17.1 kips
fv 1.49 kips/in.
db . 11.5 in.
eb = - = 8.85 m. ec = ;- + 2.5 in. = 8.45 in. e = 45.0°
2 I
23.6 kips
2.05 kips/in.
~ = 6.00 in. fa
11.5 in.
a= X(16.5 in. + Xin.-5 in.- Xin.)+2 Xin. + Xin.=8.75 in. fb 55.5 kip-in. 2.52 kipsfm.
22.0 in. 3{m.
Since the gusset-to-beam connection is more rigid than the gusset-to-column
connection, the beam can be assumed to resist the moment generated by eccen-
tricity between the actual gusset connection centroids and the ideal centroids f peak = f} + (¡a + fb )2
calculated using the Uniform Force Method. Therefore,
~ = ~ = 6.00 in.
=~1.492+(2.05+2.52)2 =4.81 kips in.
a = (eb + ~)tane- ec
=(8.85 in.+6.00 in.)tan(45.00)-8.45 in. fav. = X[fpook + Jfv2 +(¡a -1b l' J
= 6.40 in.
r= ~( a + ec )2 + (~ + eb )2
= X( 2
4.81+ 1.49 +(2.05-252)2 J=3.19 K1ps/in.
= ~( 6.40 in.+ 8.45 inl + (6.00 in.+ 8.85 inl f peak = 4.81 in. =1.51
= 21.0 in. f avg 3.19 in.
Since fpeak/favg > 1.25, the weld stress distribu on factor need not be applied.
v = ~ P = 6.00 in. (56.0 kips) = 16.0 kips For a discussion of the weld stress distribution actor of 1.25, see Manual Part
uc r u 21.0 in. 13, page 13-11.
H ec 8.45 in. (5 .) .
=-P = - - 6.0 kIps =22.5 kIps 4.81 kips/ in. 1 73' th
uc r u 21.0 in.
D> =. SIXteen s
2(1.392 kips/in.)
V b eb =8.85
=-P - -in.
- (56 .O kIps
. ) =2 36'
. klpS For a derivation of the fillet weld shear stre , <j>rn = 1.392 kips/in., see
u r u 21.0 in.
Manual Part 8.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL 'CONSTRUCTI N, INc.
BRACED FRAMES 2-13
2-12 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3
From Specification Table 12.4, the minimum size fillet weld allowed for the
From Manual Table 7-1, (2) 3/4-in. diameter AS A325N bolts are required
parts being connected is 3116 in.
(<I>Rn = 2 x 15.9 kips = 31.8 kips).
Use an U l l2-in.-Iong, double-sided, 31I6-in. fillet weld to connect the gusset
plate to the beam. Use (2) ASTM A325N bolts to conne~t the gus et plate to the column.
Using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6 for gusse bearing with s = 3 in. and
Check gusset plate rupture at beam weld
Le = 2 in.,
A conservative method to determine the minimum gusset plate thickness required
to transfer the shear and tension forces is to set the shear rupture strength of the <l>Rn =Nb<l>rnt
gusset plate equal to the weld strength (based on the resultant force). Thus, one
check satisfies both the shear rupture and tension rupture criteria (see Manual = 2(78.3 kips/in.)(Ys in.)
Part 9). = 58.7 kips > 27.6 kips o.k.
(6.19 kips/in.)D By inspection, block shear rupture does not co trol for this connection.
t .
mm F
u Use a 3/s-in.-thick gusset plateo
6.19 kips/in.( 1.73)
58 ksi
=0.185 in.
Design beam-to-column single-plate connection Based on the assumptions above, the maximum orce in the weld will occur at
The forces on the connection are, the shorter (gusset) bolt group. The connection rces at this location are,
The resultant force that will be resisted by the bolts is, i, = 22.5 kips = 3 75 k'
a 6 in. . lpS
l'm.
Use (3) ASTM A325N bolts to connect the beam to the column. 5.48 kipsl in. I .97'
D> SlXteen th s
2( 1.J92 kips/in.)
Using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6 for beam web bearing with s = 3 in. and
Le = 2 in.,
Considering the column flange thickness and assu .ng the single-plate thickness
<l>Rn = Nb<l>rntw will be similar to the gusset plate thickness fro Specification Table J2.4, the
=3(87.8 kipslin.)(0.300 in.) minimum-size fillet weld is 3116 in. This Specifica 'on requirement for minimum
weld size can be revisited after the single plate thi kness is determined.
=79.0 kips>36.7 kips o.k.
By inspection, block shear rupture does not control. Size the single plate
Using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6, the minim m single-plate thickness for
Design weld between column and single plate bearing of the gusset to single-plate connection lts is,
The forces at the connection of the single plate to the column flange are,
27.6 kips 0206 .
t. ( ) . m.
Vu = Ru + Vub + Vuc = 5.40 kips + 23.6 kips + 16.0 kips = 45.0 kips mm 78.3 kipsfm.+55.5 kipslin.
Hu = 22.5 kips
Note that edge distance controls for one bolt.
Mu =Vu e=45 kips(2.5 in.)=113 kip-in.
Using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6, fue minim m single-plate thickness for
It will be assumed that tlle tension and compression loads are resisted by the bearing of the beam to single-plate connection bits is,
plate segments extending 11/2 in. from the outer bolts in each bolt group, and
the shear force and moment are resisted by the entire plate length. Treating the 36.7 kips I 0.173'
welds as a line, tmm.
2(78.3 kipsfm.) + 55.5 kipsfm.
lw =eb +~+3.00 in.+4.50 in. (see Figure 2-3)
The pIate thicknesses required to resist the shear d tensiIe forces individualIy
=8.85 in.+6.00 in.+7.50 in.
are,
=22.4 in.
2.0Ikipsfm.
t . 0.093 in.
(22.4 in.)2 3 vmm
Sw = = 83.6 in. Ijn. 1.0( 0.6)( 36 ksi)
6 .
Again using plate segments extending 1112 in. from the outer bolts to resist the
compression,
.!:JL + ~( Mu J::; 1. O Figure 2-3. Final connection design for E ample 2.3.
$Pn 9 $Mn
Use a 3/s-in.-thick single plate to connect the beam and gusset to the colomn.
Per Specification Table 12.4, the 31l6-in. fIllet weld between the column and the
single plate meets the mínimum weld size requirements.
Use a full-Iength, double-sided, 3/16-in. fillet weld to connect the single plate
to the column.
AMERICAN !NSTITUI'E OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfI N, !Nc.
MOMENT FRAMES
Moment frames resist lateral forces and displacements through flexure and shear in the Example 2.4. Moment-Frame Story Drift Check
beams and columns. The necessary restraint must be provided by the moment connections
between the beam and the columns. Given: Refer to the moment frame elevation shown' Figure 2-4. The Applicable
Moment frames tend to have larger and heavier beam and column sizes than braced Building Code specifies the use of AS CE 7 for 'ft requirements. Determine if
frames, as the beams and columns in moment frames are often sized for drift control rather the second level of the frame satisfies the drift
than strength. The increase in member sizes and related costs, however, is often accepted to From ASCE 7, the Seismic Use Group is 1, the Seismic Design Category is A,
gain the increased flexibility provided in the architectural and mechanical layout in the Cd = 3, 1 = 1.0
structure. The absence of diagonal bracing members can provide greater freedom in the con-
figuration of walls and in the routing of mechanical ductwork and piping. Moment frames Solution: From a second-order elastic analysis of the struc e, the inter-story drift between
are often positioned at the perimeter of the structure, allowing maximum flexibility of the the base and second levels is,
interior spaces. Drift control is required by the Applicable Building Code to help limit dam-
age to both the structural and nonstructural systems. bxe = 0.277 in.
In addition to the requirements of the Applicable Building Code, members and connec-
tions of moment-frames systems for applications with R equal to 3 need only comply with The Design Story Drift and the story drift li its are those stipulated by the
the Specification. The Seismic Provisions are not required for use in the design of moment Applicable Building Cdde. From ASCE 7, th allowable story drift, ¿la, is
frame systems when R is taken equal to 3. 0.025hsx ' where hsx is the story height below 1 vel x.
cp 30'-0"
cp 30'-0" 30'-0" cr
~ROOF W18x50 W18x50 W18x50
COLUMN SPLlCE
48" ABOVE FINISHED
FLOOR (TYPICAL)
Figure 2~. Moment frame elevation for Exampl s 2.4, 2.5, and 2.6.
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INc.
2-20 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES
2-21
ASCE 7 defines the Design Story Oríft as bx ' the deflection of Level x at thej Solution: Check column element slenderness
center of mass as, i The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is,
b = Cdb xe (ASCE 7)[
x 1 b
A¡ = --L = 8.22 (Specification B4.1)
2t¡
3( 0.277 in.)
bx
1.0 The limíting width-thickness ratio for compact anges is,
= 0.831 in. < 4.20 in. o.k. i
i A = 0.38 ~ = 0.38 29,000 ksi = 9. 5
(Specification Table B4.1)
Comment: Comparing the design story drift to the allowable drift, it appears that this frame ¡ p ~ Fy 50 ksi
has been significantly overdesigned. However, it should be noted that the seis-I
Since Al < Ap , the flanges are compact.
míe drift requirements may not govern the design of this frame. In this case, the
frame proportions resulted from serviceability drift requirements for wind. The width-thickness ratio for the web is,
h
Aw =-=20.7 (Specification B4.1)
Example 2.5. Moment-Frame Column Design tw
Given: Refer to Column C-l in Figure 2-4. Determine the adequacy of the ASTM
(Specification Table B4.1)
A992 W-shape (Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) to resist the following loading between
the base and second levels. The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of
ASCE 7 for calculation of loads. The governing load combination that ineludes 29,000 ksi
Ap = 3.76 ¡--5-0-k-Sl-.-
seismic effects is,
=90.6
(ASCE 7)
Since Aw < Ap , the web is compact.
The factored column forces and moments are,
Determine K
Pu = 224 kips M nt top =2.7 kip-ft Mnt bot =- 0.9 kip-ft
For the x-x axis,
Vu = 8.2 kips Mlt top =38.9 kip-ft Mlt bot =- 66.4 kip-ft
where
Mnt = first-order moment assuming no translation
M lt = first-order moment caused by lateral translation of the frame only With two lateral frame beams and two lateral fr e columns at the connection
located at the column top;
W12x79 d = 12.4 in. tw = 0.470 in. Ix = 662 in. 4 Ag = 23.2 in.2
rx = 5.34 in. ry = 3.05 in. Sx = 107 in) Zx = 119 in) 4
2( 662 in. /14 ft)
1.59
2( 890 in. /3o ft)
W18x55 Ix = 890 in. 4 4
The leaning column amplifier (Lim and McNamara, 1972) is: Determine the flexural strength
From Specification Section F2, with compact f anges and web and L Lb < Ln
1+ I, P leaning the applicable limit states are yielding and late al-torsional buck1ing~
Lp = 10.8 ft Lr = 39.9 ft
(Specification C2-2)
Lp < Lb = 14.0 ft < Lr
(Specification C2-I b)
AME~CAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrI PN, INc.
2--24 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES 2--25
MI = 0.9 kip-ft
5=9,000 ft2 (20 lb/ ft2 )=180 kips
M 2 = 2.7 kip-ft
_ _ (0.9 kip-ft/ ) The total dead load supported by the second-Itjvel columns is,
Cm - 0.6 0.4 /2.7 kip-ft
= 0.467 r,PD =612 kipS+3(765 kips) + 3(70 kip )=3,120 kips
u= 1.0 Assuming a 0.60 live load reduction factor on the columns, the totallive load
supported by the second-Ievel columns is,
Using Cornmentary Figure C-C2.3 (no sway case) with Gtop = 1.59 and Gbot = 1.0,
Kx is detennined as 0.8. A1temate1y, Kx can conservatively be taken as 1.0 per
Specification Section C 1.3a. r,PL =0.60(3)(720 kipS) = 1,300 kips
2 4
n (29,000 ksi)( 662 in. )
10,500 kips Dfloor = 85psf CURTAIN WALL =70 kips/level
[0.8(14 ft)(12 in./ft)Y Droof =68psf
L floor =80psf
S=20psf
Therefore,
-------------1==:1, ~
m _______
u=l.O
D ".A
I_:::._-\---------="_.:.':._----------~_.:.':._,_.:_------~--,
From Figure 2-5,
~
~
MOM NTFRAMEINVESTIGATEO
Ajloor = Aroo! =75 ft(120 ft)=9,000 ft2 . IN DEjslGN EXAMPLES. FOR
ELEI.J~TION SEE FIG. 2-6
D fioor = 9,000 ft2 ( 85 lb/ ft2 ) = 765 kips BRACEO FRAME INVESTIGATEO
IN DESIGN EXAMPLES. FOR
ELEVATION SEE FIG. 2-1
Droo! =9,000 ft2 (68 lb/ ft2 )=612 kips
Figure 2-5. Floor planfor Examples 2.1, 2.2, 2.~ 2.4,2.5, and 2.6.
AMERICAN !NSTITIJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTP'U'TE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlPN, !Nc.
-- -
2-26 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES
2-27
M rtop =1.0(2.7 kip-ft) + 1.24(38.9 kip-ft) Gíven: Refer to Beam BM-l in Figure 2-4. Determine e adequacy of the ASTM A992
wide-flange section (F'y = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ks) for the following forc~~ and
= 50.9 kip-ft
moments. The Applicable Building Code speci s the use of ASCE 7 forcalcu-
lation of loads. The governing load combination that ineludes seismic effects is,
M rbot = 1.0( 0.9 kip-ft) + 1.24(66.4 kip-ft)
=83.2 kip-ft (1.2 + 0.2SDS )D + pQE + 0.5L + 0.2S (ASeE 7)
P 8(M
; +"9 M TX + M ry M JS; 1.0 (Specification Hl-la)
ha = 17.5 in. ~=O.OO 965
Sh
·xo
e ex cy
A. = 0.38 [ [ = 0.38 /29,000 ksi = 9.15 (Specification Table B4.I) =40.1 ksi
P VFy 50 ksi
Mn = 40.1(98.3) = 3,940 kip-in. == 328 kif-ft::; Mp
Since A.f < A.p , the flanges are compacto
The width-thickness ratio for the web is,
Mp = FyZx (Specification F2-1)
3
= 50 kSi( 112 in. )(1 o/¡2 inJ
(Specification B4.1) = 467 kip-ft
The limiting width-thickness ratio for a compact web is, M n =328 kip-ft
'1
"" p = 3.76p; Fy
= 3.76 /29,000 ksi -_ 90.6
50 ksi
(Specification Table B4.1) <l>bMn =0.90(328 kip-ft) = 295 kip-ft>121 k~-ft o.k.
Since A.w < A.p , the web is compact. Check shear strength
,
Check unbraced length 2.24 ~ =2.24 /29,000 ksi =53.9
From Manual Table 3-2, VFy 50 ksi
Lp = 5.90 ft Lr = 17.5 ft
Since h/t w <2.24~E/Fy ,
Determine the flexural strength
Vn =0.6Fy Aw Cv (Specification G2-1)
From Specification Section F2, with compact flanges and web and Lb > Ln the
applicable limit states are yielding and lateral-torsional buckling.
<l>Vn =1.0(0.6)(50 ksi )(18.1 in.)( 0.390 in.)11.0)
(Specification F2-3) = 212 kips > 21.4 kips o.k.
The Wl8x55 is adequate to resist the loads gi¡Ven for Beam BM-l.
0.078~( Lb J2
2
F Cb1t E 1 + (Specification F2-4)
cr = (Lb J2 Sx ho Yrs Note that load combinations that do ~ot includ~ seismic effects must' also be
Yrs investigated. For example, considering the load ce mbination I.2D + 0.5L + 1.6W,
the following can be determined by a similar pro edure:
12.5M
C
b
= max R ::;3.0 (Specification FI-l) Mu = -166 kip-ft Vu = 24.6 kips
2.5Mmax +3MA +4MB +3MC m
Cb = 2.39 <l>Mn =320 kip-ft
Rm =1.0, doubly syrnmetric members
Mu<<l>Mn o.k.
where,
Vu < <l>Vn o.k.
M c =IM 3/ 4 1
----- AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, lNc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, !NC.
2-30 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES 2-31
Example 2.7. Moment-Frame Beam-to-Column Using Manual Table 7-5 with s = 3 in., the be . g strength of the beam web is,
Corinection Design <l>Rn =Nb<l>rnt w
W18x55 d = 18.1 in. bf = 7.53 in. tw = 0.390 in. Determine the required number of bolt in the flange plate
f¡ = 0.630 in. Sx = 98.3 in.3 The flange force is,
FuAfn < YtFyAfg Try six boIts on a 4-in. gage. Using Manual L bIes 7-5 and 7-6 for bearing
strength and assuming Le = 2 in. and s= 3 in., e bearing strength of the beam
Since Fy/Fu = 50/65 = 0.77 < 0.8, flange is,
<l>Rn =<l>rntfNb ,
Assuming two rows of 3/4-in.-diameter ASTM A325N bolts in standard holes, =87.8 kipsfm.( 0.630 in.)( 6)
=332 kips>80.2 kips o.k.
Afg = bft f = 7.53 in.( 0.630 in.) = 4.74 in.2
Size flange plate for tension force
(Specification D3.2)
Assuming a 7-in. plate width, the minimum thi ess for tension yielding is,
= 4.74 in.2 - 2(Ys in.)(0.630 in.) = 3.64 in.2
YtFyA fg = 1.0(50 ksi)(4.74 in.) = 237 kips
FuAfn = (65 ksi)(3.64 in. 2 ) = 237 kips Try a PL 3/8 in. x 7 in. The tension rupture stre gth of the pIate is,
Since FuAfn z YrFyAg, the limit state of tensile rupture of the flange does not apply. <l>Rn = <l>FuAe = <l>FuUAn
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfI N, !Nc.
2-32 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENTFRAMES 2-33
Using Manual Tables 7-5. and 7-6, with Le = 2 in and s = 3 in., the bearing From Manual Tables 9-3a, 9-3b, and 9-3c,
strength of the flange pI ate is,
<j>FuAnt = 2(46.2 kips/in.)(0.375 in.) = 4.7 kips
<j>Rn = <j>riwNb
= 176 kips > 80.2 kips o.k. <j>0.6FyAgv = 2(130 kips/in.)(0.375 in.) = 9 .5 kips
The first case involves the tearout of the two blocks outside of the two rows of <j>Rn = 132 kips > 80.2 kips o.k.
bolt holes in the flange plateo For this case, the tension area has a width of
2(11/2 in.). The second case involves the tearout of the block between the two Use (2) rows of 3/4 -in.-diameter ASTM A3 5N bolts at a 4-in. gage to
rows of holes in the flange plateo For this case, the tension area has a width connect each flange plate to the beam flang . Use 2-in. edge distance and
of 4-in. Thus, the first case governs. 3-in. spacing for the bolts.
t 0.375 .
r= J12 = J12 = 0.108 lll.
Assuming K = 0.65 and 1== 2112 in. (2-in. edge dis ce plus 1/2 in. beam setback),
Kl 0.65(2.50 in.)
15.0
r 0.108 in.
Since KI/r ~ 25, Fcr = Fy, and the compressive s ength of the flange plate is,
<j>Pn =<j>FyAg
=0.90(36ksi)(7in.)(X in.)
= 85.1 kips> 80.2 kips
Design the weld between the flange pI. tes and column flange
1 1/2" 4"· 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 4" 1 1/2"
D. 80.2 kips =2.74
mlJ'!
2(1.5)( .392 kipslin.)(7 in.)
CASE 1 CASE 2
Use double-sided, 3/16-in. fillet welds to con ect the flange plates to the
Figure 2-6. Block shear failure paths for Example 2.7. column flange.
By similar calculations, it can be shown that the be flange has adequate strength.
AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF S1EEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF S1EEL CONSTRUCTI N, !Nc.
2-34 SYSTEMS UTll.JZING R = 3 PART 2 REFERENCES 2-35
Comment: The colurrm must be checked for panel zone and stiffening requirements. For fur- PART 2 REFERENCES
ther information, see AISC Design Guide No. 13 Wide-Flange Column Stiffening American Institute of Steel Construction fuc. (AISC). (2005). Ste 1Construction Manual, AISC,
at Moment Connections-Wind and Seismic Applications (Carter, 1999). Chicago, IL.
The final connection design and geometry is shown in Figure 1r-7. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). (2005). Minimu Design Loads for Buíldings
and Other Structures, SEIIASCE 7-05, ASCE, Reston, VA.
Blodgett, O.W. (1966). Design of Welded Structures, The J es F. LincoIn Arc Welding
W12X79 COLUMN Foundation, Cleveland, OH.
Galambos, T.v., ed. (1998). Guide to Stability Design Crite 'a for Metal Structures, 5th
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, fuc., New York.
Lim, L.e. and McNamara, RJ. (1972). "Stability of Novel uilding Systems," Structural
21/2" (6) 3/4"0 A325N Design of Tall Steel Buildings, Vol. ll-16, Proceedings, ASCE-IABSE futemational
BOLTS @ 4" GAGE Conference on the Planning and Design of Tall Buildings, B thlehem, fA, pp. 499-524.
(TOP & BOT.)
Tamboli, A.R. (1999). Handbook ofStructural Steel Connection esign and Details, McGraw-
Hill, New York.
3/8" SINGLE PL
CONNECTION PER
MANUAL TABLE 10-9
W18x55 BEAM WI
STO HOLES
PL 3/8"x7" W/
(3) 3/4"0 STO HOLES
A325N BOLTS (TOP & BOT.)
NOTE:
ALLOW FOR FINGER SHIMS AS NEEOEO.
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITIITE OF STEEi:. CONSTRUcnO ,!Nc.
2-36 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 3-1
PART3
BRACEO FRAME SYSTEMS U ILIZING R > 3
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !NC. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI1 N, !Nc.
3--2 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTnJZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
SCOPE derness limit does not apply to braces in two-storyIX-brace frames, because1:hat configura-
The Seismic Provisions requirements and other design considerations summarized in this tion prevents the development of unbalanced forces on the b amo
Part apply to the design of the members and connections in braced frames that utilize a
response modification factor, R, greater than 3.
OCBF OESIGN EXAMPLES
AMERICAN !NsTIfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, mc.
3-4 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-5
The length of the brace is, Since /..,::; /..,ps,the HSS4x4x 1/4 is seismically c mpact.
.
This length has been determined by calculating the distance between the work
4.71 [f = 4.71 29,000 ksi = 118
points based on the intersection of the centerlines of the brace, column, and
beams. Shorter lengths of the brace may be used if justified by the Owner's
VFy 46 ksi
(Specification E3-3)
Ag = 3.37 in. 2 r = 1.52 in.
2
tnom = 0.250 in. tdes = 0.233 in. n (29,OOO ksi)
(Specification E3-4)
(197)2
Check slenderness
From Specification Section Cl.3a and Specification Cornmentary Table C-C2.2,
K = 1.0 for both the x-x and y-y axes. =7.38 ksi
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, !Nc.
3-6 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 3-7
Tu =(0.9 - 0.2SDS )PD + POPQE + 1.6PH 4.71 ~ = 4.71 [29,000 ~si = 113
VFy 50 kSI
Tu =0.793(5 kips) + 1.3(-7 kips) +1.6(0 kips)
= -5.14 kips Kl> 113
r
Try a W8X18,
when ->4.71
Kl
r
-
Fy
[!;
Ag = 5.26 in. 2 b¡= 5.25 in. d = 8.14 in.
rx = 3.43 in. f¡= 0.330 in. tw = 0.230 in.
Fcr = 0.877 Fe (Specification E3-3)
ry = 1.23 in. 2
rt E
Fe=(~r
(Specification E3-4)
ChecklocalbuckHng
The stiffened and unstiffened elements of columns must comply with Specification
Table B4.1.
- 2(29,000 2kSi] = 10 . 4 k SI.
Fe -rt
The width-to-thickness ratio for the flanges is, (166)
bf
/..f=-=7.95 (Specification B4.1) ~r =0.877(1O.4ksi)=9.12ksi
2tf
Pn = FcrAg I
AMERICAN INsTITUlE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN INsTITUlE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI( N, 1Nc.
3-8 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-9
From the AS CE 7, the Seismic Design Category is D, p = 1.3, and SDS = 0.533. = 1.45 kips
h
Aw =-=47.2 (Specification B4.1)
tw
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, !Nc.
3-10 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-11
= FcrAg
~+(Mrx
Pn (Specification E3-1)
+ Mry.J:::; 1.0 (Specification Hl-lb)
<l>ePn =<l>FerAg 2P Me M ex ey
Pe = <l>ePn = 10.2 kSi( 7.65 in.2 ) = 78.0 kips
~+(
2(78.0)
6.88 +0)=0.116<1.0
140 kip-ft
o.k.
Consider second-order effects
e
Bl=-_m_~l
(Specification C2-2)
aP
r
1-_
P
el
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COlI/SnmCl:lOJI¡, !Ne.
3-12
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
Check shear strength Solution: From Examples 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3,
2.24 JFE ~2.24 29,000 ksi ~53.9 Beam W12x26 d = 12.2 in.
k des = 0.680 in.
tw = 0.230 in.
h = 6.49 in.
tf= 0.380 in.
T= 10 1/8 in.
yw
50 ksi f
~ = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Since h/tw < 2.24JE/~w '
Column W8x18 d = 8.14 in. t w = 0.230 in. tf= 0:330 in.
k des = 0.630 in. Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
(Specification G2-1)
Use a W12x26 for OCBF Beam BM-l. Determine required tensile strength of brace connection
Per Seismic Provisions Section 14.4, the brace dormecticm must be designed to
Comments: In this case, the beam has significant margin between its strength and the actual develop the expected yield strength, in of the braceo Therefore, the
load it resists. When the beam is more heavily loaded, the Owner's Designated required tensile strength of the connection is,
Representative for Design may be able to justify a shorter unbraced Iength
about the y-y axis for the beam in compression, resulting ina lighter designo Tu = RyFyAg =1.4( 46 kSi)( 3.3~ in.2 ) =
For example, transverse beams or joists framing into Beam BM-l could have
connections deep enough to brace the beam laterally, or bracing couId be added The required brace connection strength need exceed the maximum force
when transverse beams do not existo However, least weight is not always syn- that can be developed by the system or a effect based upon using the
onymous with least cost, and the decreased material cost for a lighter beam amplified seismic load. From Example 3.1,
should be compared against any additional material, fabrication, "and erection
costs that may result, as a lighter beam does not often offset the additional cost PD =O kips PL = O kips = 10 kips PS =Okips
of special bracing or connections.
~ =(1.2+0.2 SDS)PD +ºo PQE +O.5PL +
Example 3.4. OCBF Brace-to-Beam/Column Connection Pu = 1.31( O kips) + 2.0( 10 kips) + 0.5( O
Design - Welded
=20 kips
Given: Refer to Joint J-1 in Figure 3-1. Design the connection between brace, beam, Therefore the required tensile strength of the cormelctIcm is 20 kips.
and column. Use a welded gusset plate concentric to the brace to connect the
brace to the beam and column. Use a welded connection between the beam and
Design brace-to-gusset weld
the column. Use ASTM A36 (~ = 36 ksi, ~ = 58 ksi) for aH pIate material and
The maximum fillet weld size that can be de'fel()pe:a by the brace can be deter-
assume the member sizes and their material specifications are as determined in
mined bysetting the weld strength equal to shear rupture strength of the
Examples 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3. The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of
ASCE 7 for calculation of loads. HSS wall.
AMERICAN !NSIDUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR~uQrl0N, !Nc.
3-14 BRACEO FRAME SYSTEMS UrnJZING R > 3 OCBF OESIGN EXAMPLES 3-15
F t
D< uHSS des
3.09 kips/in. An =Ag - 2(~ in. + jg in.)tdeSign
2
58 ksi( 0.233 in.) = 3.37 in. - 2(% in.)( 0.233 in.)
<-_....:...-_,--...:...
3.09 kips/in. = 3.08 in.2
::;;4.37 sixteenths
B2+2BH
(Specification Table 03.1)
Try (4) 31I6-in. fillet welds to connect the brace to the gusset plate. x= 4(B+H)
The minimum Iength of the four fillet welds is,
For square HSS, this reduces to,
P
1 > u _ 3B
w 4(1.392 kiPS/in.)D x=8
> 20 kips __ 3(4 in.) _ 50'
x-----l. lll.
4( 1.392 kipS/in.)( 3 sixteenths) 8
~1.20 in.
U=I-~ (Specification Table D3.1)
1
It is good practice to select the length of longitudinal fillet welds at least equal
to the distance between the welds, and shear lag effects are reduced by increas- =1_1.50 in.
ing connection length. 5 in.
Try 5-in.-Iong fillet welds to connect the brace to the gusset plateo =0.700
The strength of (4) 5-in.-Iong 31I6-in. fillet welds to connect the brace to the 2
Ae =UAn =0.700(3.08 in. )=2.16 in. (Specification D3-1)
gusset plate is,
<pRnw = <pFwAw <PtPn = 0.75( 58 ksi)( 2.16 in. 2 ) = 94.0 kip > 20 kips
= 0.75 (0.60FEXX )(Aw)
Since Pu < <pPn, the HSS4x4x 1/4 is adequate, n coverplates are requirea.
= 0.75(0.60 x 70 ksi)( 0.707 x X6 in. x 4 x 5 in.)
Use (4) 3/16-in. fillet welds, 5 in. long to conne t the brace to the gusset plateo
= 83.5 kips> 20 kips . o.k.
Assume an initial connection geometry as sho n in Figure 3-2.
The minimum gusset plate thickness required to develop the force delivered by
the welds is, Check the Whitmore section
The Whitmore width is,
. =
mm Pu _ 20 kips = O 077 .
t 2<P(0.6Fug )L - 2(0.75)(0.6)(58 ksi)(5 in.) . lll.
Lw = 21w tan30+B=2(5 in.)tán30+4· .=9.8 in.
This is well below the minimum practica! thickness. Try a 112-in. gusset thickness. However, approximately 3/8 in. of the Whitmo e width is in the beam. Using
the 112-in. gusset plate,
Check shear lag rupture of brace
Rn =Fy Ag (Specification J4-1)
Assume that the width of the sIot in the HSS brace will allow a lh6-in. gap
[
between the HSS walI and the gusset on each side of the gusset. The net area
of the HSS is then, (36ksi)(9.8in.-0~375)(X· .)]
<pR =0.90 . )
n +(50 ksi)(0.375 in.)(0.230· .
8.50 kips
=J(6.5 in.+4.07 inf +(5.0 in.+6.10 inf fv
11 in.
0.773 kips/in.
To account for weld stress distribution, the cprmelcticm is designed for the
greater offpeak or 1.25favg.
W8x18 ---JI
COLUMN f r= 1.25favg= 1.25(1.06 kips/in.) = 1 kips/in.
L BRACE
The fillet weld strength is, lwc =9.0 ÍD.-LOO ÍD.=8 ÍD.
5 6.54 kips
<j>rn =1.392 kiPsl"m.(1.o+0.50sin1. e)
fv 0.818 kips/ ÍD.
8 in.
0
= 1.392 kiPsl"m.( 1.0+ 0.50 sin 1.5 (43.2 ))
5.32 kips
fa 0.665 kips/in.
= 1.79 kipslin. 8 ÍD.
6.19D
t . =--
mm F
a=mn-1[~: J=mn-l( !~~::]
u
The fillet weld strength is,
6.19(0.4 78)
58 ksi
<j>rn = 1.392 kiPslin.( 1.0 + 0.5 oSÍll 1.5 e)
= 0.051 ÍD. < Ji' ÍD. o.k.
= 1.392 kipsl"m.[ 1.0 + 0.50sin1.5 (39. ]
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CO~STRUcrION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIPiN, !Nc.
._-------_._---_.. _-----------
3-20 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-21
fillet weld is greater than Ih6 in., the size of the fillet weld must be increased To facilitate erection of the beam, a shear plate
by the root opening. Therefore, a thickness and grade and
with the number, diameter, and grade of bolts to resist erection loads
Use (2) full-Iength 1/4_in. filIet welds to connect the gusset plate to the column. may be provided. The shear plate can also as backing for the weld
between the beam web and column flange. that these elements could be
Check gusset plate rupture at weld designed similarly to Example 3.5 to eliminate CJP groove weld.
As determined previously, a 0.051-in. gusset plate will develop the strength of
a l/s-in. fillet weld on each side of the plate e/4-in. fillet welds, les s the l/s-in. Determine the compression strength
root opening allowance). The length of the brace from work point to point is 25.3 ft. However,
based on the connection geometry shown in 3-2, the actual Iength ofthe
112 in. > 0.051 in. o.k. ft
brace is approximately 22 11 in. The actual will be used to determine
the maximum expected strength of the brace
Check gusset plate yielding at column weld yield strength of the brace is,
The yielding strength of the gusset plate is adequate for the same reasons stated
Fye = RyFy = 1.4 (46 ksi) = 64.4 ksi
previously for the check at the beam weld.
Use a 112-in.-thick gusset plateo
KL 1.0(22.9 ft)(12 %)
181
Check column web local yielding r 1.52 in.
Since the column force is applied at (B + d b ) > de from the end,
4.71 [K = 4.71 29,000 = 99.9 < KL
(Specification JI 0-2)
VFy 64.4 r
Rn = (5k+N)Fyw t w
When KL >4.71 [K
$Rn = 1.0[ 5( 0.630 in.)+8 in.J( 50 ksi)( 0.230 in.) r VFy
=128 kips>5.32 kips o.k. Fcr = 0.877 Fe (Specification E3-3)
Determine torces at beam-to-column connection
Assuming the weld access holes do not extend past the k dimension, the beam 2
Pn = 0.90( 7.66 ksi)( 3.37 in. )
web shear yielding strength is,
=23.2 kips
$vVn =1.0(0.6F)t
y wT The required strength of the gusset need not the amplified seismic load.
= 1.0 ( 0.6)( 50 ksi)( 0.230 in.)( 10 Xin.) Therefore,
Check compression buckling ot gusset plate Using Manual Table 9-4 with N/d > 0.2,
Based on the connection geometry shown in Figure 3-2, the average unbraced
length of the gusset plate is approximately 5 1/2 in. <1>Rs = 22.3 kips
Lwmuz.
p
u 20.0 kips
0.90( 36 ksi)( 0.5 in.)
L w =9.8 in.-0.375 in.=9.43 in. > 1.23 in. o.k. = 0.80 (0.230 f [1 + 3(_8_.. )( 0.23
8.14 O.
29,000(50)( 0.330)
0.230
= 166 kips
Determine connection interface torces
The forces at the gusset-to-beam and gusset-to-column interfaces are determined
using the Uniform Force Method.
<1>Rn = O.75( 166 kips) = 125 kipSI> 5.32 o.k.
eb = 6.10 in. ec = 4.07 in. r = 15.3 in. Determine torces at beam-to-column ,...h,nn.=>,....,.¡nn
a = 6.5 in. ~ = 5.00 in. Vu = Vub + RUb = 7.97 kips + 1.45 kips =
a =
H b=-P 6.5-in.
- ( 20.0kIps
. ) =8. 50 k·lpS
u r u 15.3 in.
N/ = 11 in.! . = 0.90
Id 712.2 m.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm¡STRucr¡O¡"¡, !Ne.
3-24 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-25
Given: Refer to Joint J-l in Figure 3-1. Redesign connection given in Example 3.4.
Use a welded gusset plate concentric to the Use a single-plate connec-
tion to connect the beam and the gusset to the column and a welded
rCOLUMN CJP GROOVE WElD connection between the beam and the gusset Use ASTM A36 (~ = 36 ksi,
BEAMWEBTO
COlUMN FLANGE Fu = 58 ksi) for all plate material and the member sizes and their mate-
I rial specifications are as determined in EX,illll)1es 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3. TheAppticable
Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 calculation of loads.
I
I
ASREQD FOR
From ASCE 7, the Seismic Design is D, no = 2.0, P = 1.3, and
ERECTION lOADS ON
SINGLE PLATE SDS= 0.533.
I
Solution: From Examples 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3,
Beam W12x26 d= 12.2 in. tw = 0.230 in. t¡= 0.380 in.
b¡= 6.49 in. T= 101/8 in.
W12x26 Fu = 65 ksi Ru = 1.45 kips
PLATE W/ BOlTS BEAM
ASREQD. FOR
ERECTION lOADS Column W8x18 tw = 0.230 in. t¡ = 0.330 in.
& WELD BACKING
~= 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
BOLT(S) AS REQD. _---1L~
FOR ERECTION lOADS Brace tdes = 0.233 in. r'= 1.52 in.
Fu = 58 ksi
W8x18
COlUMN
As in Example 3.4, the connection design based on the amplified seismic
load. The brace to gusset connection and buckling checks are similar to
HSS 4x4x1/4 those illustrated in Example 3.4.
BRACEW/
1/4 STD. HOlES Use (4) 5-in.-long, 31t6-in. fillet welds to
1/4 plate and a 112-in. gussetplate thickness,
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STlfEL COIN"STRt(¡C:TION, !Nc.
3-26 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-27
f3 =5.00 in. a= ){(12 in. + ){ in.-5 in.+ ){ in.) v = eb p = 6.1 Oin. (20.0 laps) = 7
ub r u 16.5 in. •
=6.50 in.
H =~p = 5.67 in. (20.0 kips)=6.8
Since the gusset-to-beam connection is more rigid than the gusset-to-column ub r u 16.5 in.
connection, the beam can be assumed to resist the moment generated by eccen-
tricity between the actual gusset centroids and the ideal centroids calculated
MUb = vub!a - ~ = 7.39 kips!5.67 in. - .50 in.! = 6.13 kip-in.
using the Uniform Force Method. Therefore,
These forces are illustrated in Figures 3-5 3-6.
f3 =~ = 5.00 in. COL.
a=(eb +f3)tane-ee
=( 6.10 in. + 5.00 in.) tan (47.8° )-6.57 in.
= 5.67 in.
r= (a+eet +(f3+ eb t
=~(5.67 ih.+ 6.57 iny +(5.00 in. + 6.10 iny
=16.5 in.
fLCOLUMN
2"
t=
Vu Vub+Vuc+Rub
W.P.
(a) THROUGH AXIS OF BOLTED
LBEAM
W.P.
f:t~b3---
-t--1f----.¡,---r--
CD I
I I
W8x18
COLUMN L (4)3/4"0
ASiMA325N
BOLTSIN
sto. HOl.ES (b) THROUGH GUSSET
fa
7.39 kips j
1.06 kips in.
2.06 kips / in. O 40
D> ( ) .7 """......,,,'u.'"
7.00 in. 2 1.392 kips/ in.
h 6.13 kip-in 0.750 kipm. For a derivation of the ¡fillet weld sHear <j>rn = 1.392 kips/in. per six-
8.17 in. 3 1m. teenth see Manual Part 8.
f peak = f} + (fa + fb )2 Altematively, the Eccentrically Loaded Weld Tables found in Part 8 of
= 2.06 kipm.
e=tan-1 [ Vub J=tan-1 (7.39kipSJ=
Hub 6.87 kips
CLCOL.
AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STR.uCIjloN, !Nc.
3-30 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-31
From Specification Table J2.4, the minimum size fillet weld allowed for the Both of these values exceed the 10.0 kips l~'-IIUllqU, but at least 2 bolts are
parts being connected is 3116 in. required. By inspection, block shear rupture does
Use (2) full-Iength 3f¡6-in. filIet weIds to connect the gusset pIate to the beam. Use (2) 3/4-in.-diameter ASTM A325N bolts in d9nlf:ilIrlf holes to connect
the gusset pIate to the shear plateo
Check gusset plate rupture at beam weld
A conservative method to determine the minimum gusset plate thiclrness required Design beam-to-column single-plate
to transfer the shear and tension forces is to set the weld strength (based on the As given in Example 3.4, Ru = 1.45 kips
resultant force) equal to the shear rupture strength of the gusset plateo Thus, one
check satisfies both the shear rupture and tension rupture criteria. Vu = Ru + Vub = 1.45 kips + 7.39 kips = 8.84
I
Design gusset-to-single-plate connection
The resultant force on the bolts in the gusset plate is, The tension and compression loads are assumed to be by the plate segments
extending 1112 in. from the outer bolts in each bolt (6 in.) and the shear forces
R =
u
IV 2+Huc 2
Vuc and moments are assumed to be resisted by the entire length, which is 17.1 in.
sw z2
(17.1 inf 3
48.7 in. / in.
<l>rn =78.3 kipslin.( 05 in.)=392 kipSlboh 6 6 '!",
ti
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
~32 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES ~33
Since Kl/r :::; 25, ~r = ~ and the compressive strength of the single plate is,
6
<j>M = 0.90F Z = 0.90(36 kSl.J[ in.(0.375 ini ] = 6.83 kip-in.
n y 4
AMERICAN !NSTITIn'E OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTI11JTE OF STEEL C01'lST!RljJcTION, INc.
---------------------------------------~------_._------------~-------
3-36 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SPEClAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME .(SCBF) SYStEMS 3-37
any case, no fewer than two stitches are allowed with unifonn spacing, and bolted stitches
are not pennitted in the middle quarter of the clear brace length. The limitation on the loca-
tion of bolted attachments is included to guard against premature fracture due to the
fonnation of a plastic hinge in the buckled braceo
fu the past, a great deal of emphasis was placed upon the strength and stiffness of the
brace member. More recently, emphasis has been placed upon the detailing of the connec-
tions in order to increase ductility and energy dissipation of the system. Cur,rently, there are
two approaches used in the design of these connections. The first creates enough strength
and rigidity in the connections to force the brace to fonn plastic hinges at the ends and mid-
dIe of the brace under compressive forces. The second approach utilizes out of plane
. buckling of the gusset plate such that plastic hinges occur in the gusset plate at the brace
ends with a hinge still occurring at the midpoint of the braceo This is accommodated by
detailing the connection such that the end of the brace is located two times the thickness of
the gusset from the intersection of the gusset and the beam or column. This configuration is
shown in Provisions Figure C-I-13.2. The value of two times the thickness of the gusset was
developed through research and analysis.
The design requirements for most basic frame configurations are covered by the condi-
tions listed earlier in this section. V-type and inverted V-type frames, however, are required to
(A) INERTEO V (CHEVRON)
meet additional criteria, as noted in Seismic Provisions Section 13.4. These requirements BRACEOFRAME
include the folIowing:
1. Beams must be continuous between columns .
. 2. Beam must be designed for gravity dead plus live loads, assuming the bracing does not
existo
3. Beams intersected by braces must be designed for the additional verticalloads result-
ing from 100 percent of the tension brace expected yield strength and 30 percent of the
compression brace nominal strength.
4. Beam top and bottom flanges must be braced at the intersection of the brace members
and beam in accordance with Appendix 6 of the AISC Specification.
These requirements are intended to reduce the effect of a loss in strength of the compres-
sion brace relative to the tension brace in the post-buckling range (see Figure 3-8). As the
compression brace buckles under load, its capability to resist the vertical load is diminished
relative to the strength of the tension braceo This results in an unbalanced vertical load
between the two members, which exerts additional vertical force on the beam. Braced
frame configurations utilizing two-story X configurations and zipper columns, as shown in
Figure 3-8b and 3-8c, distribute this unbalanced vertical load to other levels that are not
experiencing high seismic demands, providing for better overall frame perfonnance.
The final check covered in the Provisions relates to columns that are part of the SCBF
system. Columns are required to meet the same compactness criteria as bracing members
and have special consideration for their splices. According to Provisions Section 13.5,
splices are required to develop L ~. This requirement is intended to account for the pos- (C) TWO STORY X BRACEO FRAME
sibility of the columns sharing sorne of the lateral force demand through frame action as the
brace elements inelastically defonn, deflecting the frames beyond what elastic calculations
Figure 3-8. Assumed inelastic deforrnation of various braced configurations.
might predict. Additionally, it is noted that the column splices must be located in the middle
one-third of the column clear height.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, INc.
3-38 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-39
Assume that the ends of the brace are pinned and against translation for
Example 3.6. SCBF Brace Design - Pipe both the X-X and y-y axes.
Given: Refer to Brace BR-l in Figure 3-9. Select an ASTM A53 Pipe section (~ = Solution: From analysis, the total horizontal force in the line braced frame is 271 kips.
35 ksi, Fu = 60 ksi) to resist the following axial loading. The Applicable The horizontal component of the axial force in BR-1, when it is in
Building eode specifies the use of AseE 7 for calculation of loads. tension, is,
I
From AseE 7, the Seismic Design eategory is e, no = 2.0, P = 1.0, and which is 50 percent of the total,horizontal force in
SDS= 1.0. Therefore, it meets Seisrnic Provisions Section 13 since the brace resists
more than 30 percent but less than 70 percent of the horizontal force.
Using the basic load combinations in the ASeE 7, maxirnum compressive
force in the brace is,
= 254 kips
And the maximum tensile force in the brac¡e is,
Check slenderness
=28.8 ksi
From Specification Section C1.3a and Specification Cornmentary Table C-C2.2,
K = 1.0 for both the x-X and y-y axes. P =F A (Specification E3-1)
n cr g
2
(Provisions 13.2a) <l>cPn =0.90(28.8 ksi)(15.0 in. )
KL
1.0(18.8 ft)(12 %) 62.0
Determine tensíon strength of brace
r 3.64 in. For yielding on the gross section,
(Specification D2-1)
4.0Jf=4.0 29,000 ksi =115
Fy 35 ksi
2
<l>tPn = 0.90( 35.ksi)( 15.0 in. )
4.71 II
VFy
Comments: The Owner's Designated Rep~esentative fOI Design be able to justify a
shorter unbraced length for the braceo In this I:'AlILUIJ.-'ll:',¡if an unbraced length of
16 ft could be justified, a Pipe 10 Std. could be for the braceo Since the
4.71 29,000 ksi = 136 end connections must be designed to resist the axial strength of the
35 ksi brace, a 26 percent decrease in the required force would result from
this reduction in brace size. The implications on requirements must
KL ~4.71 fK be considered in making such a reduction.
r VFy
AMERICAN lNSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCITON,lNC. AMERICAN lNSTITUfE OF STEEL CONSTRUCITON,
._-----------_.----------
3-42 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-43
Example 3.7. SCBF Brace Design - W-Shape Example 3.8. SCBF Column Design
Given: Refer to Brace BR-l in Figure 3-9. Select an ASTM A992 wide flange section Given: Refer to Column C-1 in Figure 3-9. Select 'an A992 wide-flange section
(~= 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) with a 14-in. nominal depth to resist the axialloading (~ = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) to resist the following loading between the
given in Example 3.6. The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of ASCE base and the second level. The Applicable tlullo:m21 Code specifies the use of
7 for calculation of loads. ASCE 7 for ca1culation of loads.
Assume the Seismic Design Category as well as the values of no' p, and SDS PD = 135 kips PL == 34 kips Ps =7 kips
are the same as those given in Example 3.6.
Based on the end connection geometry illustrated in Example 3.12, the brace is From the AS CE 7, the Seismic Design Category is C, no = 2.0, P = 1.0, and
designed with fixed ends and braced against translation for both the X-X and SDS= 1.0.
y-y axes. The unbraced length of the brace is assumed to be 9 ft (see Example
3.12 to determine the actual connection geometry and to verify the adequacy of 0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2
the unbraced length assumption).
Assume that the ends of the column are pinned and braced against translation
for both the X-X and y-y axes.
So/afion: From Example 3.6,
;
P u = 254 kips So/ufion: Using the basic load combinations in ASCE 7, the m~LXirnUln compressive force
in the column is,
KLx = KLy = 9 ft
Using Manual Table 4-1 with KL = 9 ft, Pu = (1.2+0.2SDS )PD +PPQE +0.5PL +0
Pu = 1.4(135 kips) + 1.0(274 kips) + 0.5(34 )+0.2(7 kips)
= 481 kips
Using Table 1-2, it can be seen that a W14x48 will satisfy the local buckling
And the maximum tensile force in the column is,
requirements for a SCBF braceo
Since Tu < <l>tPn' the W14x48 is adequate. Check column element slenderness
Per Seismic Provisions Section 13.2d, the stiffened unstiffened elements of
Use a W14x48 for SCBF Brace BR-l.
columns must comply with Provisions Table 1-8-1.
The net section must also be checked at the connection; see Example 3.12 for
The width-to-thickness ratio for the flanges is
illustration of this check.
(Specification B4.1)
---...--------------------------------_._------------_._-_._-----_.---_.__ .. _----------_._-
3-44 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-45
h
KL
when -::;4.71 -
r F
y
J!i
Aw = -t = 17.7 (Specification B4.2)
w
(Specification E3-2)
From Seismic Provisions Table 1-8-1, for web compactness,
=43.2 ksi
Per Seismic Provisions Section 8.3, since Pi~ePn < 0.4, the special seismic load
Assume Pipe 10 X-Strong braces as determined in .L.:.4GUHI-'~1;. 3.6 (~= 35 ksi,
combinations that inc1ude the Amplified Seismic Load effects need not be used. A g = 15.0 in. 2) and that the Seismic Design Category
Since Pu < <PcPn, the W14x132 is adequate.
Use a Wl4xl32 for SCBF Column C-I. Solufion: Determine the assumed force in the tension
(Provisions 13.4a(la))
Example 3.9. SCBF Beam Design - Inverted V
Ry = 1.6 (Provisions Table 1-6-1)
Given: Refer to Beam BM-1 in Figure 3-10. Select a noncomposite ASTM A992 wide
flange section (~ = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) with a maximum depth of 36 in. The ~ =1.6(35 ksi)( 15.0 in. 2 )=840 kips
Applicable Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.
Determine the assumed force in the Cnml)reS>SJ'On brace
FX4 = 81 kips
Determine the unbalanced vertical load on beam, Qb
COLUMN SPLlCE
48 in. ABOVE The vertical components of Pt and Pe are
FINISHED FLOOR
P = ~(840 kips) = 626 kips
(TYPICAL)
ty 18.8 ft
FX3 =63 kips
P =~(129 kips)=96.1 kips
cy 18.8 ft
Therefore,
P = 12.5
-- ft (840 kIps
. ) ="
5"59 k'lpS
Ix 18.8ft
0.11 kips/ft(25 ftf 15 kips(25 ft) Since Aw < Ap ' the web is compact.
ML = + 102 kip-ft
· 8 4
Check unbraced length
530 kips( 25 ft) From Manual Table 3-2,
MQb 4 3,310kip-ft
Lp = 12.2 ft
Mu= 1.2M D +0.5M L +1.0MQb +0.2Ms
Assuming a W14x132 column as determined in 3.8, the distance from
Mu = 1.2 ( 143 kip-ft )+o.s(102 kip-ft)+ 1.0 (3,310 kip-ft) the beam centerline to the column flange is
+02(0 kip-ft)=3,530 kip-ft
Lb =12.5 ft- de =12.5 ft- 14.7 in. 1.9 ft
2 2(12 in.jft)
Try a W27x336
d= 30.0 in. bf =14.6 in. rx = 12.1 in. Ix = 14,600 in. 4 Determine the flexural strength of the W2
tw = 1.26 in. t¡= 2.28 in. ry = 3.45 in. Zx = 1,130 in. 3 From Specification Section F1, with compact flanges web and Lb < Lp ' the
Ag = 98.9 in. 2 Sx = 972 in. 3 applicable limit state is yielding.
(Specification F2-l)
Check element slenderness of the W27x336
The width-to-thickness ratio for the flanges is
M p = 50 kSi( 1,130 in.
3
)(1 o/¡2 inJ
b¡
A¡ =-=3.19 (Specification B4.l) = 4,710 kip-ft
2t¡
The limiting width-to-thickness ratio for compact flanges is <l>bMn = 0.90( 4,710 ft-kips)
= 4,240 kip-ft
(Specification Table B4.1)
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne.
SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-51
3-50 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
Vu = 1.2 (14.7 kips )+0.5( 8.88 kips) + 1.0 ( 265 )+0.2(0 kips)
Therefore, =287 kips
Since h/tw < 2.24~E/ Fy ' W18x50 d = 18.0 in. t¡ = 0.570 in.
kdes = 0.972 in.
Vn = 0.6FyAw Cv (Specification G2-l)
~<<I>~ o.k.
Design brace-to-gusset weld
Use a W27x336 for SCBF Beam BM-l. The maximum fillet weld size that can be de'¡el(~pe:d by the brace can be deter-
mined by setting the weld strength equal to shear rupture strength of the
Per Seismic Provisions Section 13.4a(2), the top and bottom flanges of the
pipe wall. As noted in Manual Part 9, on page 5,
beam must be laterally braced with a maximum spacing of Lb = L pd ' as speci-
fied by Equations A-I-7 and A-I-8 of Appendix 1 of the Specification. Lateral Fupipet
D<--~--
braces must meet the provisions of Equations A-6-7 and A-6-8 of Appendix 6 3.09 kips/in.
of the Specification.
60 ksi(0.340 in.)
< ----'------'-
ha = 27.7 in. (Manual Table 1-1) - 3.09 kips/in.
C Try (4) 3/s-in. fillet welds to connect the brace the gusset plateo
Pb =0.02M - d
r rx h The mínimum length of the four fillet welds is,
o
=0.02( 3,570 kip-ft )(12 in./ft )(1.0/ . ) P
/27.7 ffi. 1 > u
=30.9 kips w 4(1.392 kips/in.)D
Provide top and bottom flange beam bracing with a minimum strength of > 622 kips
30.9 kips at the brace-beam intersection. - 4(1.392 kips/in.)(6 sixteenths)
;:::18.6 in.
Example 3.10. SCBF Brace-to-Beam Connection Design
Use (4) 19-in.-Iong, 3/s-in. filIet welds to connect brace to the gusset plateo
Given: Refer to Joint J-l in Figure 3-9. Design the connection between braces and The minimum gusset plate thickness required to the force delivered by
beam. Use an ASTM A36 (~= 36 ksi, Fu = 58 ksi) welded gusset plate con- the welds is,
centric to the braces and 70-ksi electrodes to connect the braces to the beam.
Assume the braces are ASTM A53 (~ = 35 ksi, ~ = 60 ksi) Pipe 10 Std. steel p.
pipe sections and the beam is an ASTM A992 (~ = 50 ksi, ~ = 65 ksi) W18x50
wide flange section. The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of ASCE
7 for calculation of loads. From AS CE 7, the Seismic Design Category is C.
However, the gusset edge buckling criterion (to checked later) may require
a thicker gusset. Try a gusset plate thickness of 1
Pipe 10 Std. Ag = 11.1 in. 2 tnam = 0.365 tdes = 0.340 in.
r = 3.68 in. D = 10.8 in.
-
xbrace =523·
.. m. [sin(1.45)]
~ = . . m.
358'·
(Table 1-6-1)
that the net section cou1d be reinforced. These mc1ude, but are not hrnlted to,
rods, bars, pIates, roUed shapes, etc.
Region x xA
Use the width of the sIot in the pipe brace to allow a Ih6-in. gap between the
in. in. 3
pipe walI and the gusset on each side of the gusset. The net area of the pipe Pipe 18.3
alone is, Cover PIate 5 13.9
L 32.2
Ae =An U (Specification D3-1)
However, the addition of cover pIates on the brace will reduce U below 1.0 and
a larger reinforcernent area wilI be used to account for this. Try reinforcing the
net section with (2) quarter-sections of a Pipe 10 Std. as shown in Figure 3-11.
D t 10.8 in. - 0.340 in. = 5 23 .
r =--- . m.
1 2 2 2
The distance to the center of gravity of a partial circ1e can be calcuIated as,
_ sin(S)
x=r--
S
Figure 3-11. Brace cross-section at net section Example 3.10.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF ~TEEL !Nc.
SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-57
3-56 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
=[0.658~ Jlp
Use (2) quarter-sections of a Pipe 10 Std. as cover plates on each end of
the braceo
F (Specification E3-2)
cr y
Design welds connecting cover plates to brace
Per Specification Section J2.2b, the maximum fillet weld size is (t - 1/16 in.). F", =[ O.658(.ii)}5 Jci=323 Jci
Therefore,
w = 0.340 in. - Yt6 in. = 0.278 in. = 4.44 sixteenths 1.1Ry times the nominal compressive strength the braces is,
Using 1/4-in. fillet welds, the mínimum weld length required to develop the 1.1Ryn
P =l.lRycrg
F A
fracture strength of the cover plate is,
= 1.1(1.6)(3~.3ksi)(l1.lin.2)
<\>RtF A
1 > u n =631ldps
w 2(1.392 kips/in.)D
Assume an initial connection geometry as
2
0.7S( 1.2)(60 ksi)( 2.77 in. )
>-,--------~~~----~
2( 1.392 kips/in.)( 4 sixteenths)
2::13.4 in.
Use 1S-in.-Iong, 1/4-in. fiUet welds on each side of the net section to connect
the cover plates to the braceo
KL ~134
r
n 2 (29,000 ksi)
Fe 183
(Specification E3-4)
(39.5)2
Figure 3-12. Partial SCBF elevationfor
T = (622 kips - 631 kips) ~ = -6.36 kips = ~ = 886 kip~ = 12.7 kipsliri.
fv 1 69.75 in.
and the moment is, T 6.36kips
fa 0.0912 kipm.
1 69.75 in.
M=V dbJ =886klpS
(2" . (18.0in.J
- 2 - =, 7970k·Ip-m.
.
fb
M 7,970 kips-in.
9.83 kipm.
Sw 811 in. 2
631 kips 2
PIPE 10 STO TYP. f peak = fv +{!a + fb )2
2'..9"
(12.7 kipm. )2+ (0.0912 kipm. + .83 kips'in. )2
= 16.1 kipm.
1,2 ]
~
......
~
~ 5'-93/4"
W18x50
(127ltipslnf 1
12 kipm. + 9.83 kipm. + (12.7 kipm.)2
= 16.1 kipm.
KL 1.2(18.9 in.)
e=tan-1 (!J=tan-1 (6.36 kipSJ=0.411 ° 62.8
V 886 kips r 0.361 in.
t 1y,; in.
r= .J12= .J12 =0.361 in. Check beam web local yíeldíng
The maximum compressive load per unit of the gusset is,
AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, 1Nc. AMERICAN INslTIUTE OF STEEL Cm~STR.uCfI(j)N, INc.
3-62 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-63
The maximum tensile load per unit length of the gusset is, With the compressive force applied > db l2 froin
Ir = fb -
2[1+3 (~ J(:;]'"']
fa =9.83 kip&fu..-0.0912 kipsfm.=9.74 kip&fu..
The length of gusset subjected to tensile stresses is, Rn =0.80tw I---f--"- (Specification 110-4)
L, =( f, ~ ~ )(L g)
=(0.80)(0.355)2 [1+3( :::~ J( ~ 29, OOO( 50)( 0.570)
0.355
=( 9.74
9.74+9.92
J(69.75 in.) =597 kips
=34.6 in.
<l>Rn = 0.75( 597 kips)
The resultant tensile force is, = 448 kips > 174 kips o.k.
Ru = }{ L/t = }{(34.6 in.)(9.74 kipsfm.) = 169 kips Seismic Provisions Section 13.4a also that the combination of the
expected tension strength of tension braces (Tu = and 30 percent of the
With the tensile force applied > db from the beam end, nominal compression strength of compression u = O.3Pn ) be investi-
gated for V-type and iIiverted V-type c01mg;ural1Jiolns at beams intersected by
Rn =(5k+N)Fyww
t (Specification110-2) braces. By similar calculations, it can be shown the selected connection is
also adequate for this load case.
<l>Rn = 1.0 [ 5( 0.972 in.)+34.6 in.J(50 ksi)( 0.355 in.)
= 700 kips > 169 kips o.k. Check free-edge buckling of gusset
To prevent edge buck1ing of the gusset plate the ~mlX1Inulm free-edge length is,
Note that a quick check could have been made by comparing the gusset design
tensile strength per unit length with the peak tensile load per unit length,
Lfg max =0.75t/f (Astaneh, 1998)
F .
y
<l>Fywtw =0.90(50 ksi)( 0.355 in.)
= 16.0 kipslin. > 9.92 kipslin. o.k. Lfgmax =0.75(1 X in.) 29~~0~siksi
A similar check for the compressive force shows that the design strength is =26.6 in.
greater than the required strength.
From Figure 3-13, the free-edge lengtb. between brace and the beam is,
Check beam web crippling
The resultant compressive force is, Lfg 19 in·rs
cos 30°
n
. 24.8 in.
From Figure 3-13, assuming the gusset plate is horizontal between the
braces, the free-edge length between braces is 66 This is much larger than the
maximum length, therefore the gusset IÜate will to be stiffened. Assuming
the gusset is as shown in the figure aiJ.d using a pair of vertical stiffeners at
the center of the gusset plate, the free-edge length
AMERICAN !NSlTIUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSlTIUTE OF STEEL Cm~STB~ucrlO:¡'¡-, !Nc.
._---------_._-----------------
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES ~5
L [
X C66 in.)
] 34.2 in.
Example 3.11. SCBF Brace-to-Bea
fg 0
cos 90 -(45°+30°) Design
Lfg> Lfgmax n.g. Given: Refer to Joint J-2 in Figure 3-9. Design the COIUlecu(m between braces, beam,
and column. Use ASTM A36 CE'.¡ =36 ksi, Fu = ksi) welded gusset plates con-
Try a pair of stiffeners at the end of each yield lineo The gusset free-edge between centric to the braces and 70-ksi electrodes to the braces to the gusset
the brace and the stiffener is, plates and the gusset plates to the beam and Assume the braces are
ASTM A53 CE'.¡ = 35 ksi, ~ =60 ksi) Pipe 10 steel pipe sections, the beam
Lfg =24.8 in. < Lfgmax o.k. is an ASTM A992 CE'.¡ =50 ksi, ~ = 65ksi) Wl wide-flange section and the
column is as designed in Example 3.8, The Building Code specifies
Use two pairs of plate stiffeners placed on each side of the gusset and the use of ASCE 7 for caiculation of 10flds.
beam web.
From ASCE 7, the Seismic Design Category is
The final connection design and geometry is shown in Figure 3-14.
0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2
PIPE 10 STO TYP. Pipe 10 Std. Ag = 11.1 in. 2 tdes = 0.340 in.
BOLTeS} AS REQ'O FOR
ERECTION LOAOS (TYP.) D = 10.8 in.
W18x86 ! d = 18.4 in. t¡= 0.770 in.
k des = 1.17 in.
\~~i-+-+-<' TYP. Determine the maximum compressive ci+ ...."" ... , ... +h of the brace
From Example 3.10, the required strength of
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.ucrlqN, !Nc.
3-66 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-67
gusset plate at this end of the braceo However, in order to allow equal slot
e b = 9.20 in. ec = 7.35 in.
widths at each end of the brace, the same thiclmess will be used for the gusset
plates at each end of the braceo 8=45° a. = 14.0 in. ~ = 12.8 in.
This reaction has an eccentricity equal ,to 39 in. respect to the centerline of
PD=18 kips
the column. The total shear at the face of the is,
PL =11 kips
=
PQe :135 kips Vi =(631 kips+622 kips) ~ +21.3 =907 kips
...;2
The moment arm to resist this moment is the between the centroids of
PD= 12 kips the gusset-to-column interfaces. This distance is,
PL =9 kips
d arm =db +2~=18.4 in.+2(12.8 in.)=
.. •I
PQe= 8 kips
PQe =:18 kips Huc 5,840 kip-in. 133 kips
F===::::II
44.0 in.
The vertical shear will be distributed pro,polrtion~t:ely to the shear areas of the
gussets and the beam. The gusset area is,
and the portion taken by the beam is, The axial force transferred by the beam-w-coJlurnn flange conI1ection is,
For the gusset at the compression brace, The connection interface forces are shown in 3-16. Note that a negligi-
ble imbalance of moment exists on the beam shown in Figure 3-16. The
H
ub
=P
uc
(~J-H
"1/2 uc
=631 kipS( ~J-133 kips=313 kips
"1/2
imbalance results because all of the nitoment
the forces Huc on the top and bottom gussets.
the colurnn face is assigned to
Vub =Puc (~ J- Vue =631 kip{ ~J-395 kips=51.2 kips 631 kips
The moment arm for the vertical component of the brace force is the distance
from the gusset connection centroid to the intersection of the brace centerline
with the gusset-to-beam interface. This distance is, V =
395 kips
uc
a-IX in.=12.lin.
Surnming moments about the center of the gusset-to-beam connection for the
compression brace,
~
\{¡B=
Hub =Tu (~ J-Huc =622 kip{ Jz )-133 kips=307 kips ~= 14.0 in.
M =1
UB
V
ub
=T ( ~J- Vuc =622 kiPS( "1/2~J-395 kips=44.8 kips
u "1/2 Huc =133 kips
Surnming moments about the center of the gusset-to-beam connection for the Vuc =395 kips
tension brace,
Design the weld at the gusset/column interface calculations establish that the ratio of "eélLK-tO-averap"p.
'-" weld stresses is greater
From Figure 3-15, the length of the gusset plate mínus the l-in. comer clip is than or equal to 1.25.
23.7 in. The magnitude of the forces is the same at the gusset-to-column inter-
Rub =1.25~Vu2c
face for both the compression brace and the tension braceo The forces on the
gusset per unit length are,
+H =1'2
, u2 c +(133lOps)2 =521 kips
Vuc 395 kips
fv 16.7 kips/in.
23.7 in.
H uc 133 kips
f= 5.61 kips/in. Use (2) full-Iength, l/Z-in. fillet welds to
a
1 23.7 in. the gusset plates to the
coluDm.
Becausefb = O,
Check strength of gusset plate at
f peak = f avg = ~ The mínimum gilsset plate thicknessrequired
Altematively, the Eccentrically Loaded Weld Group Tables found in the Manual
<l>rn= <l>0.6F/= 1.0 (0.6)(36 ksi)( 1 X in.
can be used. The load angle with respect to the longitudinal axis of the weld
Since <l>rn is greater than both J~a andj,v' the thickness is adeq1iate.
group is,
2
Rn=O.80tw [1+3 ( : )(:; r]rf (Specification JI 0-4)
Therefore, f r = 1.25 f avg = 1.25(20.3 kips/in.) =
The mínimum double-sided fillet weld size is,
.4 kips/in.
l ( J(
25.4 kips/in.
D> 9.12 sixteenths
2 23.7 0.645 1.51 29,000( 50)( 1.03)
2( 1.392 kips/in.)
=(0.80)(0.645) 1+3 -
14.7
-
1.03 J 0.645
=1,720 kips Alternatively, the Eccentrically Loaded Weld Tables found in the Manual
can be used. The load angle with respect to the Ilonlgiuldinlal axis of the weld
<l>Rn =0.75(1,720 kips) group is,
= 2 +~(1.98kipslin.+163kipslin.)2 +(12.lkipslin.)2
Check beam web yielding
= 20.3ldpslin
<l>rn = <l>F/w =1.0(50 ksi)(0.480 k.)=24.0 sfm.
f peak 21.9 kipsfm. 1.08 < 1.25
20.3 kipslin. ru = fa + fb = 18.3 kipslin.
f avg
<l>rn > ru o.k.
AMERICAN !NSTITUIE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.ucrlo~, !Ne.
3-74 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
r SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-75
[1'
(NI{) (NJ
= (11.9 kiPsfmf +(1.73 kipsfm.+ 1 17 .1 kiPsfmf
R M ub - +V =~+V
2M
u= 2 ub N ub = 22.3 kipsfm.
2( 1,830 kip-in.)
. +51.2 kips=193 kips -"2
f avg _1['
V(fa - fb) 2 + fv 2 + (fa + fb) 2 f+ fv 2]
25.9m.
With the compressive force applied < d b l2 from the beam end, _![ (1.73 kips/in.-17.1 kiPS/in.)~ +(11.9 kiPS/inf 1
N/d=25.9 in/18.4 in. = 1.41
- 2 + (1.73 kipslin. + 17.1 kipslin ¡> + (11.9 kiPsflllY ,
=(0.40)(0.480)2 [1 +(4( 25.9) _ 0.2J(0.480J1.5] /29,000(50)(0.770) Therefore,fr = 1.25favg = 1.25(20.9 kips/in.) = 2~.1 kips/in.
18.4 0.770 V 0.480
The mirumum double-sided fillet weld size is,
::;:529 kips
(26.1 kips/ in.)
cpRn =0.75(529 kips) D> 9.38 sixteenths
2( 1.392 kips/ in.)
= 397 kips > 193 kips o.k.
Design the weld at the tension gusset/beam interface Altematively, the Eccentrically Loaded :Weld Gro p Tables found in the Manual
can be used. The load angle with respect to the ongitudinal axis of the weld
From Figure 3-15, the length of the gusset plate minus the l-in. comer clip is
group is,
25.9 in. Treating the welds as lines,
The tabulated angle that is closest to, but less than the calculated load angle is f r =~f2+
v
f a2
O°. Interpolating from Manual Table 8-4 with e = 0° and using k = O,
C= 3.35
= J(7.80 kiPs/in.)2 + (2.40 kipsfm.)2
The average and peak weld stresses are not determined when using this method; =8.16 kipsfm.
therefore, the weld stress distribution factor should be applied unless additional
The minimum double-sided fillet weld size is,
calculations establish that the ratio of peak-to-average weld stresses is greater
than or equal to 1.25.
D> 8.16 kips/in. 293·
. srxteenth s
2(1.392 kips/in.)
RUb=1.25~Vu/+Hub2 =1.25 (44.8kips)2 +(307kiPS)2 =388kips
Since the loading could be the reverse of that shown in Figure 3-16, the e=tan-I[HUb
Vub
J= tan-I ( 117
36 kips J=
kips
requíred gusset-to-beam weld size is the maximum of the sizes determined for
the compressive and tensile brace forces.
The tabulated angle that is closest to, but less the calculated load angle
Use (2) fuIl-Iength, 51 s-in. fiIlet welds to connect the gusset plate to the beam. is 15°. Since the moment at the column face been resolved into a couple
and included in H uc ' a = O. From Manual 8-4 with e = 15° and using
Check beam web yielding k=O,
f
vub 117 kips 7 . 80 k·lpSl·ID.
v 1 15 in.
f -- Hub
--- - -
36-kips - . k·lP si·ID.
. - -240
a 1 15 in.
AMERICAN INsT1TU1E OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.ucTI~N, INc.
3-78 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-79
The final connection design and geometry is shown in Figure 3-17, and a sim-
ilar section of the coverplated brace configuration is shown in Figure 3-11.
CONNECTION - - - - h
PLATE
1/4
1/4 GUSSET - FLANGE
PLATE
GUSSETPL
.
• 1
W.P. •
W14x132
W27x336
BEAM
W14x132
COVER re. EA SIOE CUT COLUMN
FROM PIPE 10 STO WI Ft
WIOTH EQUAL TO 1/4
CIRCUMFERENCE
OF PIPE 10 STO TYP.
- - - . . . - - - - - - -_ _ _ _ _- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _• _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. _ _ ••. .• •• __ __ ._
~
_
.
o
.
~
"
~
~
"
_
,
.
~
.
_
~
.
,
_
,
.
~
~
3-80 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-81
W14x48 d =13.8 in. Ag = 14.1 in. 2 t¡= 0.595 in. the force delivered by one of the connection and each made up of 1h of
the web and 1h of each!flange (see Figure 3-1 ).
h¡= 8.03 in. tw = 0.340 in. kdes = 1.19 in.
W14x132 tw = 0.645 in. d = 14.7 in. t¡= 1.03 in. Flange 2.01 4.78 9.61
Web 3.93 2.27 8.92
b¡= 14.7 in. kdes = 1.63 in. kdet = 25/16 in.
L 7.05 18.5
From Example 3.9 for the design of the beam,
_ L(xA) 18.5 in. 3
x= - - = 2.62 in.
W27x336 tw = 1.26 in. d= 30 in. t¡= 2.28 in. LA 7.05 in.2
b¡= 14.6 in.
It is necessary to keep the connection plate as as possible in order to allow
for bolt instal1ation. It will be assumed that bolt :1nstal1ati<)ll is feasible if the dis-
tance from the end of the connection plate to furthest bolt is less than about
Solutíon: Determine the expected tensile strength of the brace 18 in. Using 18 in. as the connection length,
Per Seismic Provisions Section 13.3a, the brace connection must be designed
to develop the expected yield strength of the brace, in tension. From Seismic U=1- -
x 1 2.62 in.
= - - - = 0.854
Provisions Table 1-6-1, Ry = 1.1. Therefore, the required tensile strength of the 1 18 in.
connection is,
An = Ag = 14.1 in.2
Tu = RyFyAg = 1.1 (50 ksi)( 14.1 in.2 ) = 776 kips
Ae = UAn = 0.854 (14.1 in. 2 ) = 12.0 in. 2
Try 1h-in. fillet welds. The minimum base thickness required to develop
Check shear lag of brace
the weld can be determined by settingthe weld equal to the shear frac-
Seismic Provisions Cornmentary Section 13.2b clarifies that the net section ture strength of the base metal.
check requirement does not apply where there is no reduction in section. This
is the case for the bracing member in this example. Thus, the check does not
apply. Note that the connection length is substantial in this case in comparison
to thex dimension (see weld design that follows). When this is not the case, the
applicability of the Commentary exception is a matter of judgment.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STI<~UCII0~, !Nc.
3-82 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTllJZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-83
( 3.09 kips/in.) D
tmin= <l>Rn =<l>( 0.6Fy )Ag
Fubrace
= (3.09 kips/in.)8 =1.0(0.6)(50 ksi)( 27.0 in?)
65 ksi =810 kips
= 0.380 in.
Use 18..in...long, ]12.. in. fillet welds along each flange tip to connect the
connection plates to the braceo Design bolts between connection pla
gusset flange plates
Determine trial connection plate thickness Try 11/s-in.-diameter ASTMA325X bolts in shear. From Manual Table 7-1,
The minimum width of the connection plate is equal to the brace depth plus two the design shear strength is 44.7 kipslbolt. The of bolts required in each
times the shelf dimension for the fillet welds. From Manual Figure 8-11, the min- plate to transfer the expected yield strength of brace is,
imum recommended shelf dimension for a lh-in. fillet weld is 3/4 in. Therefore,
the minimum connection plate width is,
The required strength of each plate in compression is, Since the bearing strength of the plate at each is greater than the design
shear strength of a 11/s-in.-diameter ASTM A3 bolt, the bearing strength of
1.1Ry Pn 678 kips the plate is adequate.
R
uc
339 kips
2 2
Check shear rupture strength of r-n,nn':II'1'Tlfl"'ln
Check shear yielding strength of cpnnection plates The net shear area of each connection plate is,
The gross shear area of each connection plate is,
2
Ag =2(18 in.)(X in.) = 27.0 in.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:ucTlojN, !Nc.
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES ~85
3-84
2
FuAnt = 65 kSi( 3.56 in. ) = 231
Check block-shea'r rupture strength of connection plates
The block-shear rupture failure paths through the connection plates are shown 0.6FuA nv = 0.6( 65 kSi)( 12.6 in.2 ) = 491 kips
in Figure 3-20. As can be seen in this figure, the only difference between the
failure paths is the edge distance at the end of the connection plateo lt follows 0.6Fy Agv = 0.6(50 kSi)( 21.0 in. 2 ) =
that the controlling case occurs when the brace is in compression, with the bolts
in standard holes and spaced as shown in Figure 3-20,
(Specification J4-5)
4" 4@3" 2" $Rn =0.75[491 kips+(1.0)(231Ikips)]:s; 75[630 kips + (1.0)(231 kips)]
=542 kips:S;646 kips
=542 kips
3"
----"=-r-~ BRACE Since the block shear strength for this case also greater than the required
3" strength of the connection plate in tension, other block shear failure path
need not be investigated.
4%"
== == == == == == == 1==1======1 Use 3/4-in. x 151h-in. A,STM A572 Grade 50 ~olllDe4¡:tioln plates.
(a) BRACE IN TENSION
Determine trial thickness for flange
In order to allow for a field-welded altemative, fit-up problems occur in
the field, the top flange plate should be naITO\IVer than, and the bottom flange
4@3" 2" plate wider than, the connection plates by two the weld shelf dimensiono
Using the dimensions previously determined
flange plate width is,
4%"
btop=15.5in.-2(J{ in.)=14.0in.
3"
_---"=:::,_~ BRACE
and the bottom flange plate width is,
3"
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COl'¡STRUCT~ON, !Nc.
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZlNG R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3--&7
3--86
Since the bearing strength of the plate at each bolt is greater than the design
2
A nt = 6.00 in. -1(1 Ys ip.+ Ys .
shear strength of an 11fs-in.-diameter ASTM A325X bolt, the bearing strength
of the plate is adequate. FuAnt= 58 kSi( 4.75 in. 2 ) ~ 276
Check tension yielding of flange plates Q.6fuAnv = 0.6( 58 kSi)( 16.8 iq,2) = 58
The tension yield strength of the top flange plate is,
O.6Fy Agv = 0.6( 36 kSi)( 28.0 in}) =
2
<jlR = <jlFyAg = 0.90( 36 ksi)( 14.0 in. ) = 454 kips
n
Specification Section J4.1 requires that An cannot be taken larger than 0.85Ag
for bolted splice plates.
2
0.85Ag = 0.85 (14.0 in.2 ) = 11.9 in.
An <0.85Ag o.k.
_-i----~ BRACE
The tension rupture strength of the top flange plate is,
Check shear lag of the flange plates at the welded connection t 1.0 in.
to the gusset plate
r= .J12 = .J12 = 0.289 in.
Assume a trial connection length for the bottom flange plate equal to its width,
x
b. Using as half of the width of the plate on each side of the slot, KL 0.65( 4.50 in.)
10.1
b .
r 0.289 in.
x=¡ (approxlmately)
From Specification Section J4.4, Fer = ~
flange plates is,
i x b/4
U=I--=1--=0.750
1 b
Assume a l l/8-in. slot will be made to fit the flange plates over the gusset (this
allows for al-in. gusset plate plus a 1/16-in. gap each side ofthe gusset). Checking
A g = 1 in.(14 in.+ 17 in.) = 31.0 .
<l>Pn = <l>FyAg =0.90(36 ksi)(31.0 in. )=1,000 kips> 678 kips o.k.
I I
the bottom flange plate,
Use l-in.-thick ASTM A36 flange Use a 14-in. width for the top
:.. i
\! An = (17.0 in.-l Ys in.')(1 in.) = 15.9 in.
2 flange plate and a F -in. width for the flange plate. Use standard
) '.'. . .! holes in the plates. I
'1 2 2
l.t·.1·
',-1 Ae = UAn = 0.750(15.9 in. ) = 11.9 in. Each bolt group connecting the brace to gusset plate will have a 3-in.
bolt spacing, 6-in. gage, and 2-in. edge Q.lsltaD4~e at the brace end of the
<l>tPn=<I>FuAe connection and flange plates.
2
= 0.75(58 ksi)(1l.9 in. )
Design welds connecting flange
=518 kips
Per Specification Table J2.4, the minimum filiet weld size is 5116 in.
Using 5116-in. fillet welds top and bottom of
gusset plate, the design strength of each IlaIlI!e'-Dlale connection is,
The top flange plate will be at least as long as the bottom flange plateo Therefore,
<l>Rn = 1.392Dlw
using 1= 17 in.,
= 1.392 kipsfm.( 4)( 5)( 17.0 in.)
( 14 in.) =473 kips
U=I- =0.794
4(17 in.)
2
An =(14.0 in.-1Ys in.)(l in.) = 12.9 in.
Use double-sided 5h6-iD. fillet welds on each side ofthe gusset plate to con- <PtPn = <P Fy Ag ;
nect the flange plates to the gusset plateo
= 0.90(36 ksi)(31.2 in.)(,% .
I
It should be noted that a portion of the Whitmore width falls within the beam. <PtPn = <P Fy Ag
The beam web thickrtess and yield strength are both larger than those assumed
= 0.90(36 ksi)(32.3 in.)(,% .
for the glisset plateo Conservatively using the gusset yield strength and thick-
ness along the full Whitmore width, = 785 kips
W14X132 3/ .
t 74
r = J12 = J12In. = 0.217 In.
.
W14X48
KL 0.65(7.56 in.)
- 22.6
r 0.217 in.
From Specification Section J4.4; Fcr = ~ and
<PRn =<PFy Ag
AMBRICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~s-rn~ucl1~N, !Nc.
3-92 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-93
Rub =0.7(7 kips)+2.0(0)+1.6(0 kips) The connection interface forces for the ....,,+J........ ~u tensile strength of the brace
are,
= 4.90 kips
1.IRy times the nominal compressive strength of the brace was previously deter- v =~P = 12.0in·(776k· S)=244ki
ue r u 382·
. ID. 1p P
mined as 678 kips. For this condition, the governing load combination for the
factored shear load on the beam is, H = ee P = 7.35in·(776ki S)=149
ue r u 382·. ID. P
RUb = (1.2+ O.2S DS )PD +ºoP +0.5PL +O.2PS
QE v~ = eb Pu = 382·
15.0 in. (776 ki s)· =305
p
Rub =1.4(7 kips)+2.0(0)+0.5(4 kips) + 0.2(0)
r . ID.
In addition, for both conditions, the connection must accornmodate an amplified The connection interface forces for 1.IRy times nominal compression strength
drag force equal to, of the brace are,
V ~P
=- 12.0 in. (678 k·lpS ) c:::
=--~- . 213 k·lP
ue r u 38.2 in.
(6.19 kipslin'.)D
t .
mUl
F
u
I 6.19 kipsfm.( 6.41)
I •
58 ksi
I •
in.
. I • =0.684
~
I
149 kips I • 3/4 in. > 0.684 o.k.
I •
I •
I Check local yielding of beam web for -tL:>r.coír,,, and compression
244kips I •
L_~ ____________________ ~
Using Manual Table 9-4 for a W27x336,
........1 - - - - 400 kips <l>Rl = 483 kips
~
305kips
<l>R2 =63.0 kipslin.
131 kips .. ti •
•
•
<l>Rn =<I>R5 +N(<I>R6)
=708 kips+28.4 in.( 42.3 kipslin.)
213kips I
•
I • =1,910 kips
____________________
t·
L_~ ~
AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITU1E OF STEEL Cm~s'rn~ucrloN, INc.
3-96 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-97
that this moment is balanced by a force couple with a component at the centroid Check single-plate bearing
of each bolt group. The eccentricity of the bolts will be assumed as half of the
Try a 5/s-in.-thick single plateo Using Table 7-5 with a bolt spacing
plate width. It has been determined that the controlling load combination is for
equal to 3 in., the bearing strength of the bolts is,
the brace in tension. This additional horizontal force is,
<l>rn = 94.6 kips/in.(0.625 in.) = 59.1
H um
(Vuc + Vub - RUb )e
eb +~ Conservatively using Manual Table 7-6 with 2-in. edge distance, the strength
of the edge bolt is,
(244 kips+305 kips-4.90 kips)( 2.50 in.)
15.0 in.+12.0 in. <l>rn = 73.4 kips/in.(0.625 in.) = 45.9
=50.4 kips
The bearing strength of the plate is·,
The force components at the connection are,
<l>Rn = 59.1 kips(5) + 45.9 kips = 341
Vu = Vuc = 244 kips
u =~V2+H
than the single plate, its bearing strength is aqe:qUéue.
R
u u2
Check gusset yielding
= (244 kips)2 +(199 kiPs)2
The shear yielding strength is,
=315 kips
<l>Rn =<I>( 0.6Fy )Ag
Design bolts at gusset-to-single-plate connection
Use 11/s-in.-diameter ASTM A490X bolts. From Manual Table 7-1, <l>rn =
= 1.0 ( 0.6)( 36 ksi)( 24 in.)( 0.750·
55.9 kips. The required number of bolts is, =389 kips
Ant=1.56 in.2_~(lYs in.+ Ys in.)(0.625 in.) =1.17 in.2 <l>Rn =0.75[407 kips+ 81.8 kips]
~ 0.75 [356 kips+81.8 kips]
FuAnt = 58 kSi( 1.17 in.2 ) = 67.9 kips =367 kips~329 kips
=329 kips
0.6FuAnv = 0.6(58 kSi)( 7.90 in?) = 275 kips
<l>Rn =0.75[275 kips+(1.0 in.)(67.9 kiPS)] Vu = Vub - RUb = 305 kips - 4.90 kips =
FuAnt = 58 kSi( 1.41 in.2 ) = 81.8 kips Use (8) ¡l/s-in.-diameter ASTM A~90X in standard holes to connect
the beam to the singleplate. Locate bolts 2 in. from the column face.
2
0.6FuAnv :::0.6(58 ksi)( 11.7 in. )=407 kips
Check single-plate bearing
2
0.6FyAgv = 0.6(36 kSi)( 16.5 in. ) = 356 kips Using Manual Table 7-5 with a bolt spacing to 3 in., the bearing strength
of the bolts is,
thR
'f' n
t)
=<1> (O.6FuAnv +UbsFuAn (Specification J4-5)
<l>Rn = 8(94.6 kips/in.)(0.750 in.) = 568
~th(0.6Fygv
'f'
F A t)
A +Ubsun
AMERICAN iNsTintrE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm.¡STRUCT[{)N, INC.
~--------------------------------------------
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-101
3-100
2
el>Rn =el>(0.6Fy )dtw Ant=2.50in. - Yz(IXin.+ X
Use a 3-in. spacing between bolts in tbe web and a 1112-in. edge
2
distance at tbe bottom of tbe single plateo
FuAnt= 58 kSi( 1.41 in. ) = 81.8 kips
2 Check shear yielding of single :plate
0.6FuAnv = 0.6(58 kSi)(9.87 in. ) = 343 kips
The length of the single plate is,
2
0.6Fy Agv= 0.6(36 ksi)( 16.9 in. ) = 365 kips
L=24 in.+ ;;(30.0 in.)+3.5(3 in
el>Rn = el> ( 0.6FuAnv + UbsFuAnt):::; el> ( 0.6Fy Agv + UbsFuAnt) =51.0 in.
(Specification J4-5)
The controlllng load combination is for the in tension. The total shear
load on the joint is,
Ru><pRn n.g.
L AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL 'COlI/STl1lUCJloN, INc.
3-102 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-103
The shear yielding strength is, The load angle with respect to the axis of the weld group is,
An=[S1.0in.-14(1){ in.+){ in.)J(1.00in.) The minimum double-sicted fillet weld size is,
2
=33.5 in. D 15.3 kipWm.
mm ( ) 4.50 sixteenths
The shear rupture strength is, 2 1.70 kipWm.
<l>Rn =<I>(0.6Fu)An Use double-sided, 5116-in. filIet welds to tbe single plate to the col-
umn flange.
2
=0.7S(0.6)(S8 ksi)(33.5 in. )
Check single-plate fracture at sma/~~-nJr::JT(.~-to-column welds
=874 kips
Conservatively checking the mihimuin thickness required to develop
the welds through shear fracture,
6.19D
Use a l-in.-tbick single plateo t. =--
mm F
u
Design single-plate-to-column connection 6.19 kipsfm.(5)
It has been determined that the controlling load combination is at the beaml 58 ksi
column interface for the brace in tension. The force components are, =0.534 in.
vu = Vub - Rub =305kips-4.90 kips=300 kips t> tmin o.k.
H =H +Q PQ =149 kips+64.0 kips=213 kips
u uc o E Use a l-in.-tbick, single-plate connection D~ltWt~en tbe bealil/gusset ada
column.
The resultant load is,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~ _ _ _ o _ _• _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ._" _ _ • _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _. . . . . _ . _ . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._ .. _ •••• ,
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-104 3-105
Check local web crippling of column The couple required in the connection plates resist this moment is,
For this case, the governing equation for web crippling is Specification 1.1R M
Equation 110-4. This equation is not tabulated in the Manual. However, the T =C y p 1,190 kip-in.
cp cp d 8
result of Specification Equation 11 0-4 is simply double that of Equation JI 0-5a, cp .78 in.
which is tabulated. Using Manual Table 9-4 for a WI4x132,
Since the connection plates, flange pIates, gusset pIates were previously
<\>~ =190 kips designed to resist larger tension and cornpI·es~~on forces, they are adequate to
resist the expected flexural strength of the about its buckling axis.
<\>R4 = 19.3 kipslin.
The connection interface forces due to this must also be evaluated.
Additionallimitations on the link web inelude a maximum specified yield stress of 50 ksi
and a requirement that the web be a single thickness of material. Thus, doubler plates and 20
penetrations are not permitted for use in the link zone. P
The available shear strength of the link, <1> Vn , must be greater than the shear demand, V¡¡,
where en 16
en
w
1
<1>=0.90
z
IJ..
IJ..
1
Vn = the nominal strength of the link (equal to the les ser of l.p or 2Mp /e) ¡::
en
l.p = 0.6Fy A w w
~
Mp=FyZ <
o:
e = the length of the link IJ..
W
Aw = (db - 2t¡)tw >
Additional link requirements apply when the required axial strength in the link exceeds w
~
o:
0.15Py ' These requirements limit the design shear strength and the link length in order to
provide for more stable inelastic behavior within the link when axial forces become large
enough to have a significant effect. For specific requirements, the Seismic Provisions should o~--~--~--~ ____ __
~ ~
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL C01N"STRUCTI0l', !Ne.
3-110 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-111
angle. Furthennore, the connection is required to meet the requirements of moment con- EBF SYSTEM DESIGN'EXAMPLES
nections consistent with those as prescribed under the provisions for Special Moment When designing EBF systems, iterations are usually to obtain the best combination
Frames. The exception to this occurs when the connections are adequately reinforced such of compatible frame-member sizes. Qptimized deSigns are difficult to obtain, due tü
that beam yielding is forced to a location away from the face of the column and when the member local buckling requirements, geometric constraints, resistance of the beam outside
length of the link is less than 1.6Mp/~' In this case, the link length is defined as the length of the link to flexure combined with rutial effects, and archiú!qITrral constraints that cornmonly
from the end of the beam reinforcing to the end of the brace member. If the link-to-column occur throughout the design process. Nonetheless, EBF can be used to provide duc-
connection meets these requirements, prequalification of the connection is not required. tile and cost-effective solutions for seismic load resistance.
Full-depth stiffener plates are still required at the end of the link adjacent to the reinforced
beam section, however.
The Seismic Provisions require lateral bracing for both the top and bottom flanges of the
link beam at the ends of the link. These braces must be designed for 6 percent of the ratio Example 3.13. EBF Story' Drift Check
Mr/ho, where M r is as defined in Seismic Provisions Section 15.5, and ho is the depth
between centers of the flanges. It is also required that the braces have a stiffness that meets Gíven: Refer to the EBF elevation shown in Figure . The Applicable Building
Equation A-6-8 in the Specification. It should be noted that for the bottom flange this brac- Code specifies the use of AS CE 7 for drift recluijr·emlenlts. Determine if the third
ing cannot be assumed to be provided by the concrete floor system. Independent bracing is level of the frame satisfies the drift reqluir'emlen1~.
generally required in order to meet these requirements. From ASCE 7, the Occupancy Category is 1, thel Sejlsmic Desi~ Category is D,
Once the design of the link is complete, the remaining requirements are somewhat lim-
Cd = 4, 1 = 1.0.
ited. The remaining provisions address the design of the diagonal brace and beam segments
away from the link, the connections of the beams to the columns, and the strength of the So/utíon: From an elastic analysis pf the structure, the ;'T,tPir"t"",ru drift between the second
columns and the column base attachment to the foundation. and third levels is,
The first of these items considers the strength requirements of the diagonal brace and
beam outside the link zone. Because of the nature of the EBF system, the brace members Oxe = 0.175 in.
may be subject to large axial and flexural forces due to the rotations anticipated in the link
segmento With this in mind, the diagonal brace is required have a combined axial and flex- Per Seismic Provisions Section 3, th~ Design Drift and the story drift
ural strength equal to the forces generated by the expected nominal shear strength of the limits are those stipulated by the Applicable Codeo Frgm ASCE 7, the
link, Ry"n, multiplied by a factor of 1.25 to account for strain hardening. allowable story drift, da' is 0.025hw where hsx
The design of the beam away from the link zone is similar, and the beam is designed for
the expected nominal shear strength of the link multiplied by a factor of 1.1, differing only da = 0.025hsx = 0.025(12.5 ft)~12 in.lft) = 3.75 in.
slightly from the brace design requirements. This reduced strain-hardening factor accounts
for the increased member strength realized by having a concrete slab composite with the AS CE 7 defines the Design Story Drift as Ox' deflection of level x at the
beam outside of the link. If there is not a concrete slab composite with the beam outside of center of mass.
the link, a strain hardening factor of 1.25 should be considered (for additional infonnation
see Seismic Provisions Cornmentary Section C15.6). Additional lateral bracing along the
length of the beam, if required, is designed per Specification Appendix 6.
o= CdOxe (ASeE 7)
x 1
The connection of the brace to the beam is required to meet the same strength require-
ments as the brace member (Section 15.6a), plus it must also be designed for l.lRyPn of the
braceo The Seismic Provisions require this connection to be considered fully restrained (FR)
o = 4(0.175 in.)
x 1.0
if the connection is detailed such that the brace resists any portion of the link end momento
Additionally, the brace connection is not pennitted to extend into the link zone. This is illus- = 0.700 in. < 3.75 in.
trated in Seismic Provisions Cornmentary Figures C-I-15.4, C-I-15.5, and C-I-15.6.
The connection of the beam to the column away from the link may be designed as ox <da o.k.
pinned or fixed, provided the corresponding R-factors specified in the applicable building
code are used.
The columns of the EBF system must meet the requirements provided in Section 8 of the
Seismic Provisions. Additionally, the columns must be designed to resist the forces induced
into the column at either the beam or brace connection location as a result of 1.1 times the
expected nominal shear strength of the link, Ry"n, for alllinks aboye the level of the column.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COI~STlRUCTI4>N, !Ne.
3-112 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-113
= 20.2 kips
Check geometry
Seismic Provisions Section 15.6b prohibits the ~xt.ens:ion of any portion of the
brace-to-beam connection within the link This section also requires
that the intersection of the centerlines of the and brace must occur at the
end of the link or within the link segment. the intersection will
occur at the end of the link for the connection and the geometry shown
BASE in Figure 3-27, the minimum depth of the link necessary to prec1ude the
WlO brace from extending inside the link is approximately 16 in.
Figure 3-27. EBF evelationfor Examples 3.13,3.14,3.15,3.16, and 3.17. d b > 16 in. o.k.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.uCTI~N, !Nc.
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 ,EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-114 3-115
To accornmodate the connection, the link beam flange width must be greater Determine the shear strength ,of the
than or equal to the brace flange width. Assuming that the maximum flange
width of'the WlO brace is 10 in., 0.15Py = 0.15Fy Ag = 0.15(50 ksi)(22.
h
A =-=31.2 (Specification B4.2) Mp = FyZX =(50 ksi)150 in. 3 =7,500
W t
W
Aps =3.14~(1-1.54C)
F a
y
2M
p 2( 7,500 ~.-kiPS)
=3.14 29;~0~siksi [1-1.54(0.0199)J e 48 in.
313 kips
=73.3
2M
Since Aw < Aps, the web meets the local buckling requirements.
$Vn =$V ::;; $--p
p e
=0.90( 205kips )::;;0.90( 313 kips)
=185 kips
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:UCTIbN, !Nc.
3-116 BRACED FR.AME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-117
Check link rotatíon angle The Seismic Provisions Commentarjr Section 15.2 suggests that fue plastic
Seismic Provisions Section 15.2c specifies a maximum link rotation angle story drift conservatively can be assumed to the design story drift. Using
based on the expected behavior of the link. The expected link behavior is deter- the design story drift determined in Example 3 3,
mined by comparing the link length to multiples of MplV¡;.
e = 0.700 in. _
p 12.5 ft(12 in.lft) - 0.00467 rad
30 ft( 12 in.lft)
Altematively, the aboye equation can be rearranged, yielding, 'Y (0.00467 rad)=0.03
p 48 in.
'Y p < 0.08 rad o.k.
The W16x77 is adequate to resist the loads for the link segment of
For the link being investigated,
BeamBM-l.
2 2
=}{ in.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CmlsTRuCTIOr-t, !Ne.
3-118
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTll..IZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-119
Altematively, from Table 3-1 for a W16x77, Altematively, from Table 3-1 for a W16x77,
d .
30t --=10.4 m.
w 5
d .
52t --=20.4 In.
w 5 = 3.01 sixteenths
Checking Specification Table 12.4, with the v.tt·..J..J·-IU. link web thickness, the
Interpolating between these limits using the calculated link rotation angle, the minimum fillet weld size is 3116 in.
maximum spacing between web stiffeners is 17.9 in.
Use double-sided, 1/4-in. fillet welds to tbe link stiffeners to tbe
With a link depth less than 25 in., the intermediate stiffeners are only required link web.
on one side of the web only. The mínimum required thickness of the interme-
diate web stiffeners is, Assuming a 3/4-in. clip along the flange to the stiffeners to clear the
fillets, the double-sided fillet weld size reqluuedlto connect the link stiffeners to
- >Ys.m.
tmm. -tw - 8
the link flanges is,
w . =b¡
--t =10.3
- -in.
- -0455·
. 470 In.
In.=. .
mm 2 w 2
= 1.92 sixteenths
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm-¡STRUCTlPN, !Nc.
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-121
3-120
Checking Specification Table J2.4, with the 112-in. stiffener plate thickness, the The resulting link end i moment bas~d on expected shear strength of the
mínimum fillet weld size is 3116 in. link is,
Use double-sided, 31t6-in. tillet welds to connect tbe link stiffeners to the
link flanges. M; 1.IR V e
n
248 kips
---2~-.j.!..=5,950 kip-in.
Note that it may be beneficial to also use double-sided, 1/4-in. fillet welds to
From Example 3.14, the brace-to-beam will be detailed as a fixed
connect the link stiffeners to the link flange in order to simplify the detailing
connection; therefore, the moment at the of the link will be distributed
and fabrication of the link.
between the brace and the beam outside of link. One way to determine the
portion of this moment resisted by the beam of the link: is based on
Example 3.15. EBF Beam Outside of the Link Design relative member stiffness. Since the modulus elasticity is the same for both
members, it can be neglected in the stiffness . . Using relative mem-
Given: Refer to Beam BM-1 in Figure 3-27. Determine the adequacy of the ASTM ber stiffness to distribute the link end: moment, portion of the moment taken
A992 wide-flange (F'y = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) link segment selected in Example by the beam outside of 'the link (bol) is,
3.14 as the beam outside of the link for the following loading. The Applicable
Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.
Assume the braces are WlOx112, the columns will be W14 wide-flange sections,
and the flanges of Beam BM-1 are braced at the columns.
85.4 = 0.682
Ibol + Ibr 85.4 + 39.8
WlOxl12 Ix = 716 in. 4
Lbol Lbr
I
Usihg this method, the beam outside of the link is assumed to take 68.2 percent
Vu = (1.2+0.2S DS )VD + VE +Q.5VL +0
of the link end momento The moment in the beam outside of the link is then,
Vu = 1.4( 6.8 kips) + 25.7 kips + 0.5( 4.8 s)+0.2(0)
M E=0.682(5,950 kips )=4,060 kip-in.=338 kip-ft
= 37.6 kips
Altematively, a method based oh the calculation of a link shear overstrength M u =(1.2+0.2SDS:)M D +ME +0.5M L
factor can be used. In this rnethod" the strain hardened expected yield strength Mu = 1.4(17 kip-ft) + 333 kip-f~ + 0.5 (11
of tlte link is dlvided by the link shear generated by the code-specified earth-
quake forces. The resulting overstrength factor is used to amplify the remaining = 362 kip-ft
member end forces generated by th~ analysis using the code-specified earthquake
loading. The link shear force obtained from analysis using the code-prescribed Check beam element s/enderness
seismic forces is, From Example 3.14, the' flanges are compacto width-thickness ratio for the
web is,
h
A =-=31.2 (Specification B4.2)
W t
The resulting overstrength factor is, W
The axial force in the beam outside of the link due to the link mechanism is, =90.6
PE = 2.95PQE == 2.95 (105 kips) = 310 kips Since Aw < Ap , the web ineets the local
The shear in the béam outside of the link due to the link mechanism is, Determine unbraced length
From Example 3.14, each end ofthe lilJlk will be A nominal column depth
VE= 2.95VQE = 2.95(8.7 kips) = 25.7 kips
of 14 in. will be assumed. Therefore, the unl)rru;~ length of the beam outside of
the link is,
Note that the forces generated by the two methods are very similar. Since the
beam outside of the link she~ has already been determined, the forces gener-
ated using the overstrength factor method will be used in the calculation of
factored loads.
Considering the load coIhbinations given in ASCE 7, it was determined that the _ 30 ft(12 in./ft).,...48 in;~14 in.
governing load combination for the beam outside of the link is, 2
= 149 in. = 12.4 ft
1.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S
Consider second-order effects
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + PE + 0.5PL + 0.2Ps
e
Pu = 1.4(1 kips) + 310 kips + 0.5(0.7 kips) + 0.2(0) (Specification C2.2)
= 312 kips
Since the ends are not pennitted to translate, B2 = 1.0. pPr +bxrx
M +byry
M =0.374+0.566+0
=0.940<1.0
Assuming K = 1.0,
2 The W16x77 is adequate to resist :the given for the beam outside of
1t EI
P =-- the link segments ofBeam BM-1. Additiolllallltlallge bracing is not,required.
el (KLt
1t
2
(29,000 ksi)( 1,110 in.4 ) Example 3.16. EBF Brace Design
Given: Refer to Brace BR-l in Figure 3-27. Select ASTM A992 wide-flange sec-
[1.0(149 in.)y tion (F'y = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) to resist the tlJUlOW'1llg loads. The Applicable
=14,300 kips Building Code specifies the use of AS CE 7 calculation of loads.
Since there is transverse loading of the beam outside of the link between sup- PD =11.8 kips PL = 8.3 kips PQe = 136 kips .
ports, Cm = 1.0.
VD = 0.2 kips VL = 0.12 kips VQe = 3.02 kips
Pr =Pnt + Bitt "'" B2 Pu
M D = 3.2 kip-ft M L = 2.2 kip-ft M Qe = 54.5 kip-ft
= 1.0(312 kips)
= 312 kips From ASCE 7, Seismic Design Category is D, p = 1.3, and SDS = 1.0.
1.72 xl 0-3 (kiP_ft)-l (362 kip-ft ) The moment in the brace due to the link mech~nis:m is,
0.566
1.1
= 183 kip-ft
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COll/STItUcjl0N, !Nc.
3-126 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-127
The axial force in the brace due to the link mechanism is, From Specification Table B4.1, for flange cOIinp~.ctllless,
Mu= (1.2+0.2SDS )M D +ME +O.SM L +0.2Ms Since Aw < Ap, the web meets fue local bUCklrnlgl requirements.
M u= 1.4( 3.2 kip-ft) + 183 kip-ft + 0.5 (2.2 kip-ft) + 0.2( O)
= 189 kip-ft Alternatively, using Table 1-2, it can be seen the WlOx112 will satisfy
the local buckling reqüirements for an EBF
To be consistent with the assumptions used in Examples 3.14 and 3.15, try a
WlOx112 for the braceo
Determine unbraced length
WlOx112 Ag = 32.9 in.2 d = 11.4 in. tw = 0.755 in.
Ix = 716 in. 4 Lb = ~(12.5 ft)2 + (13 ftf = 18.0 ft = 21
Check brace element slenderness Note that the unbraced length is based on the point-to-work point distance.
Per Seismic Provisions Section lS.6, the stiffened and unstiffened elements of Shorter lengths may be used provided the lateral is adequate at each end
EBF braces shall comply with Ap from Specification Table B4.1. of the assumed brace length.
The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is,
Consider second-order effects
b¡
A¡=-=4.17 (Specification B4.1) e
2t¡ (Specification C2-2)
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI'ION. !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COrilSTFlUCl10ji!. INc.
3-128 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 ' EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-129
2
1t E! pPr +bxrx
M +byry
M =0.516+0.325+0
P =--
el (KL)2 =0.841<1.0 o.k.
2 4
1t (29,000 ksi)( 716 in. ) Check shear strength
[1.0(216in.)y
2.24{ E =2.24 29,000 ksi =54.0
=4,390 kips Fyw 50 ksi
O kip-ft/ )
Cm = 0.6 - 0.4 ( /189 kip-ft Since h/t w <2.24~E/Fyw'
=0.6
Vn = 0.6F~AwCv (Specification G2-1)
Pr =Pnt +B2 l[t ~B2Pu
= 1.0(478 kips) Cv =1.0 , (Specification G2-2)
= 478 kips
CPVn =1.0(0.6)(50 ksi)(Ü.4 in.)(o. in.)(1.0)
Therefore,
=258 kips>1O.4 kips
B 0.6 >1.0
1 1_((1.0)(478 kipS)]
4,390 kips Altematively, using Table 4-2 (CP = 1.00) for
=0.673<1.0
=1.0
tion (F'y = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) to resist the loading between the base
p = 1.08 X 10-3 kips-l bx = 1.72 X 10-3 (kip-ft)-l
and second leve!. The Applicable Building specifies the use of ASCE 7
P for calculation of loads.
....L.= pP =1.08 x 10-3 kips-1 (478 kips) = 0.516
P
e
r PD = 151 kips PL =46 kips PQE = 172 kips
M Dx = 15 kip-ft MLx = 9 kip-ft M QEX =O kip-ft
MDy =10 kip-ft MLy = 6 kip-ft M QEy =O kip-ft
From ASCE 7, Seismic Design Category is D, no = 2.0, P = 1.3, and SDS = 1.0. Try a W14x99.
Assume that ends of the column are pinned and braced against translation for Check Pu/</>Pn
both the X-X and y-y axes and that the beam at the third level and brace From Manual Table 4-,..1 with L = 14 ft,
between the second and third levels are as designed in Examples 3.14, 3.15, and
3.16. The sum of the nominal shear strengths for the links at the fourth level and <l>cPn = 1,130 kips
the roof is 318 kips. P
_u_ 458 kips
OA05
Solution: Determine the factored loads
Using the basic load combinations in AS CE 7, the governing load combination Per Seismic Provisions, Section 8.3, since P. > 0.4, the special seismic load
for the column in compression is, combinations that incltide the Amplífied Load effects must be used to
determine the required axial compression and strengths of the column.
1.2D + 1.0E+ L +0.2S However, the adequacy of the column to these axialloads is permitted to
be evaluated in the absence of any applied
Pu =(1.2+0.2SDS )PD +PPQE +0.5PL +0.2Ps
Pu = 1.4(151 kips) + 1.3(172 kips) + 0.5(46 kips) + 0.2(0) = 458 kips Determine factored loads based on seismic load
The required compressive strength of fue
Mu= (1.2 + 0.2SDS )M D +pM QE +0.5ML +0.2M s Load effects is,
Tu =0.7(151 kips) + 1.3(-172 kips) + 1.6(0) Determine required column strength Seismic Provisions
Section 15.8
= -118 kips
Seismic Provisions Section 15.8 requires that column must resist the forces
M u =(0.9-0.2SDS)M D +pM QE +1.6M H generated by the sum of the strain hardened ....J\.p''P......~u yield strengths of the links
aboye the level of the column top in addition to factored gravity forces. From
Mux = 0.7( 15 kip-ft)+ 1.3(0) + 1.6(0) Example 3.14, the nominal shear strength ofthe at the third level is 205 kips.
By calculations not shown here, it wás that the sum of the nominal
= 10.5 kip-ft shear strengths of the links at the fourth level roof is 318 kips. Therefore, the
sum of the strain hardened expected yield of the links at the third level,
MUY =0.7(10 kip-ft) + 1.3(0)+ 1.6(0) fourth level, and roof is,
= 7.00kip-ft
~'i
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STIluC1t>N, !Nc.
~
....
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-133
3-132
P 3
; = PPr = 0.886 X10- kips (867 kips) = 0.768
e
. = 11,300 kips
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:ucrtoN. lNc.
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3--134 3--135
P u =478 kips Vu = 10.4 kips Mu = 189 kip-ft V =462 kiPs(12.5 ftJ=321 kips
f 18 fti
So/ution: Determine the brace flange force The local yielding strength of the beam web the brace flange connection is,
Assuming the axial force is resisted entirely by the flanges, the force in each
flange due to axial load is, <j>Rn =1.0(5k+N)Fyww
t (Specification 110-2)
Pu 478 kips 239 kips =1.0[5(1.16 in.)+1.25 in.J(50 ksi)( .455 in.)
Pfa=-;¡= 2
=161kips<321 kips
Assuming the entire moment will be taken by the flanges, the force in each flange =161kips
due to the moment is,
M
P = __u_ =
l189 kip-ft(12 in./ft)j = 223 kips With the concentrated force applied at a from the beam end that is greater
ff d -tf 11.4 in.-1.25 in. thaIi dl2, the beam web crippling strength at brace flange connection is,
.AMERICAN INSTITIITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEa Cm-¡STRuCtION, INc .
3-136 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3--137
Use double-sided, 3/S-in. filIet welds to connect stiffener to the beam flanges
Size beam web stiffeners
and a single-sided, SI16-in. filIet weld to the stiffener to the beam web.
Using one stiffener on each side of the beam web, the portion of the vertical
component of the brace flange force to be taken by each stiffener is,
Design the brace web connectíon
Try a 3/s-in. x 4-in. x O-ft 6-in. single:-plate with 5116-in. fillet welds
to connect the plate to the beam and braceo By this connection will
be adequate to transfer the resultant load of 10 kips.
The maximum width of each stiffener adjacent to the beam flange is,
The final connection design and geómetry is in Figure 3-29.
b= X(b¡-t w ) I
Try a 43/4-in.stiffener width with l-in. x l-in. comer clips. The stiffener thick-
ness required to develop the required force through yielding is,
Note that one flange of each brace frames into the beam at the end of the link
segmento In Example 3.14, the Seismic Provisions requirements resulted in a
3/ s-in. minimum thickness for the stiffeners at the end of the link. ~ 3/8"x4"xO'-6" W/
BOLTS AS REQ'D
Use 3/4-in. x 43/4-in. full-depth stiffeners on each side of the beam at the FOR ERECTION
locations where abrace flange intersects the beam flange. LOADS ---+-c?"
D.
80.0 kips . SIXteenth S
511·
mm
2( 1.5)(1.392 kipslin.)( 3 }{ in.) Figure 3-29. Connection as designed in
AMERICAN !NSTITlfI'E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL C01'lSTFmCll1óN, !Nc.
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-139
3-138
The brace force need not exceed that to develop the strain-hardened
Example 3.19. EBF Brace-to-Beam/Column Connection expected yield strength of the link at the level. The shear in the beam
Design outside of the link must be transferred the column.
Considering the load cornbinations given in 7, it was determined that the
Gíven: Refer to Joint J-2 in Figure 3-27. Design the connection between brace, beam,
governing load combination for the design of connection is,
and column. Use ASTM A572 Grade 50 material (F'y = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) for
all plate material and 70-ksi electrodes for all welds. Assume that the beam is as l.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L + O.2S
designed in Ex&mple 3.15, the brace size is the same as that detennined in
Example 3.16, and the column is as designed in Example 3.17. The Applicable and the goveming earthquake load case causes in the braceo Assume
Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads. the connection forces are as shown in Figure
From Example 3.15 for the design of the beam outside of the link,
Determine the required strength of
W16x77 F'y = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi tw = 0.455 in. Seismic Provisions Section 15.6a requires that brace have sufficient strength
to develop 1.25Ry Vn of the link. U sing the ov(~Ijstrength factor method described
bf = 10.3 in. t¡= 0.760 in. d = 16.5 in.
in Example 3.15, the overstrength factor for link shear is 2.95. The factored
k = 1.16 in. T= 13 1/4 in. forces at the connection due to the tJrace are,
·~kiPS~========~
1. The brace force required to develop the strain-hardened expected yield
strength of the link at the fourth level must be transferred through the con- ~RAG
nection and into the column and beam outside of the link. Any additional =27kips
drag force required to develop the strain-hardened expected yield strength of
the link at the third level must be transferred through the beam-to-column
connection. The drag force need not exceed the amplified drag load. The W.P.
shear in the beam outside of the link must be transferred into the colurnn. VL = 3.0 kips
2. The amplified drag force must be transferred into the beam outside of the
=
VQE -8.7 kips
.AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc. .AMERICAN lNS:rrruTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:udION, lNc.
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-141
3-140
F==~=~I
u
=7.12 kips 355kiPS--+
,.
Determine the required strength of the beam outside of the link
In Example 3.15, the beam outside of the link was designed to develop the
strain-hardened expected yield strength of the link at the third level. The strain-
hardening factor used in the design of the beam outside of the link was allowed
to be reduced from 1.25 to 1.1 due to the presence of a concrete slab compo-
site with the beam. However, the forces for which the beam outside of the link
was designed will need to be adjusted to reflect a strain-hardening factor of
1.25 for the connection designo From Example 3.16, the overstrength factor for
the link at the third level is 3.36. The factored forces at the connection due to
t
the beam outside of the link are,
(a) CON ITION 1
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + PQE + 0.5PL + 0.2Ps
P
u
=1.4(1.0 kips) + 3.36(105 kips) + 0.5( 0.7 kips) + 0.2( O)
= 355 kips
Force diagrams for conditions 1 and 2 are shown in Figure 3-31. For the pur-
poses of this example, these forces will be assumed to be equal and opposite for
the condition of the brace in tension·. This is a conservative assumption for the
connection being designed in this example. However, this may not be a conser-
t
vative assumption for all connection geometries and loading conditions.
(b) ION 2
_ -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ' _ . _ _ _ _ _ . " . _ _ _ _o
3-142 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-143
Check bearing strength of gusset plate Try changing the bolt spacing to 3112 in. and edge dislfUlce to 2 1/2 in.
Try an initial gusset pIate thickness equal to 3/4 in. Using Manual Table 7-5 for
1-in.-diameter bolts in standard holes, the design bearing strength of the plate
at each of the interior bolts is,
Xin.+3(3 X~.)J(0.75· .)=19.5 in. 2
Agv =2[ 2
Check block shear strength of gusset plate (for the 418 kips as = 485 kips ::;526 kips
a tensíon force) = 485 kips
Assume the bolt spacing is equal to 3 in., the edge distance is equal to 2 in., and
the gage is equal to 3 1/2 in.
2
See Figure 3-32 for inirial connecrion (yf'CITnP·trl!
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COl'ISTRUcrjON, !Nc.
3-144 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-145
Whitmore section can be used. The length of the Whitmore section is, Because Kl/r:S; 25, Fcr= Fy = 50 ksi. The strength of the gusset is,
Lw = 3}i in. + 2( 3)( 3}i in.)tan( 30°) = 15.6 in. <l>cPn =<l>FcrAg
The average unbraced length of the gusset plate is, =0.90(50 ksi)(15.6 in.)(0.75 in.)
=527 kips
L
8}{ in.+2
8
Ys in.+O 3.58 in.
3
__t__ 0.75 in. -O 217·
r- fU- fU -. ID.
Alternatively, Table 1-8 can be used. The length of the gusset in
compression is,
KL 0.65( 3.58 in.)
10.7 KL=0.65(3.58 in.)=2.33 in.
r 0.217 in.
Interpolating from Table 1-8 for a 3/4-in.-thick with KL = 2.33 in., the
compression buckling strength of the gusset is,
<l>Rn = 0.90Fy Ag
= 0.90(50 kSi)(2)( 8.39 in.2 )
W16x77 W14x99 = 755 kips
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CorI!STIl~Ucrl<1>N, !Nc.
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-147
3-146
Check tension rupture strength of WTs The web width-thickness limit from ~P€!CItlcalJ.f>n Table B4.1 is,
The net area of the WT-sections is,
A =0.75 JI =0.75 29,000 ksi = .1
An =2(Ag - 2dht¡) r VFy 50 ksi
= 2[ 8.39 in.2 -2(1?{6 in.+?{6 ill.)(0.715 in.)] dltw =8.22 in. I 0.430 in. = 19~1
2
= 13.6 in.
Since the WT webs are not connected to the brace, an effective area of the WT-
With dltw > Aro local buckling reduces the cOInll)I·ession strength.
sections needs to be detennined.
X
(Specification Table D3.1)
Check compression; strength of the
U=l--
l The unbraced length of each WT is 5 1/2 in.
= 1_1.94 in.
10.5 in.
KL = 0.65(5 Ji
in.)
2.23·
r 1.60 in.
= 0.815
Because Kl/ r = 25, F'cr = QsF'y. From Manual 1-8, Qs = 0.942.
Ae =UAn ::;;O.85Ag
2 F'cr = 0.942 (50 ksi) = 47.1 ksi
=0.815( 13.6 in} )::;;0.85(2)(8.39 in. )
$cPn =$FcrAg
= 11.1 in. 2 ::;; 14.3 in. 2 i
= 0.90( 47.1 ksi)( 2)( 8.39 in.2 )
=11.1 in. 2
=711 kips
The tension rupture strength of the WT-sections is,
$cPn > Ru o.k.
$Rn = 0.75FuAe
2
= 0.75(65 ksi)(11.1 in. ) b¡ = 7.12 in. = 0.866
d 8.22 in.
= 541 kips
Since b¡ld > 0.5 and t¡ltw > 1.10, flexural buckling need not be checked
per Specification Cornmentary Table C-E4.2.
Check element s/enderness of the WTs Check bearing strength of the WTs
The flange width-thickness limit frOIn Specification Table B4.1 is, Since the tensile strength of the WT-sections is to the tensile strength of
the gusset plate and the sum of the WT flange f:lll(;knessc~s is greater than the
A =0.45~=0.45 29,000 ksi =10.8
gusset plate thickness, the bearing strength of WTs is adequate.
r F ~Oksi
y
Check block shear rupture strength of
b¡12t¡ = 4.98 Since the tensile strength of the WT-s€(ctions is to the tensile strength of
the gusset plate and the shear and tensÜe areas the wr flanges in block shear
are each greater than the corresponding gusset the block shear rupture
strength of the wrs is adequate.
Use (2) WT8x25 to connect the beam web to
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm{STRuCTlqN, !Nc.
3-148 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-149
p =~,
_t¡l~ fi}i( %-t¡ )('~]
Using
a = (eb + P) tan e - ec
125 m.(~](~.in+ 0.75; m. (~-1.25 mt·75: m.] Since a = a, there is no moment at the beam column interface.
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL CmIjSTI<~uCTi>N, !Nc.
3-150 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS U1TI...IZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-151
H =~p = 11.1 in. (418 kipS) = 184 kips From Specification Section J2.4, fue load with respect to the longitudi-
ub r u 2S.2 in. nal axis of the weld group is,
H = ec P = 7.l0in·(418kipS)=118kipS
uc r u 2S.2 in. e=tan- 1 ( Vub J=tan- 1(136kiP SJ
Hub 184 kips
The connection interface forces are shown in Figure 3-33. It should be noted
that the forces are for the brace in compression. For the purposes of this exam- The ffllet weld strength is,
, pIe, equal and opposite forces have been assumed for the brace in tension.
<j)rn = 1.392 kiPslin.( 1.0 + 0.~Osin1.5 e
Design the weld at the gusset/beam interface
Assuming a 3/4-in.-thick end-plate and 1-in. comer clip, the length ofthe weld is, = 1.392 kiPslin.[ 1.0+ 0.SOsin1.5 ( .5°) ]
= 1.71 kipslin.
I =20.S in.-1 in.- 3/ in.=18.8 in.
w /4
, lS.3 kipsfm.
H D. 4.47 Sixteenths
muz
f. = ub 184 kips 9.79 kipsfm. 2(1.71 kipsfm.)
v I 18.8 in.
f peak = f avg = V'(9.79 k,ipslin.)2 + (7 .23 kiPslin.)2 Check yielding of the gusset
The shear yielding strength of the gusset
= 12.2 kipslin.
<j)Rn =<j)0.6Fy ti w
=0.90(0.6)(SOksi)(0.7Sin.)(18.8· )
=382 kips
• I
Since <j)Rn is greater than the resultartt load, gusset str~ngth is adequate.
+184kiPS
136kips
~(O.80)(O.455t[1+3(l.13)( ~:~!~
=405 kips
rl 29,000( 50)( 0.760)
0.455
Use (2) full-Iength, SIt6-in. fillet welds to
end-plate.
Ij>Rn = 1j>0.6Fytl w
Design the weld between the gusset and the end-plate
=0.90(0.6)(50 ksi)(0.75 in.)(16.5· .)
From Figure 3-32, the length of weld is equal to 16.5 in. The forces on the gusset
per unit length are, =335 kips
V 153 kips Since Ij>Rn is greater than the resultant load, gusset strength is adequate.
uc 9.27 kips/in.
fv
16.5 in.
V 153 kips 2. The axial force in the beam outside the corresponding to 1.25Ry Vn -
uc
Hub' H = 355 kips - 184 kips = 171 kips
A 1/4-in. weld size is the minimum for the 3/4-in. end plateo
Use single-sided, 1/4-in. filIet welds to connect the beam flanges to the
end-plate.
= 180 kips
= 382 kips
T -_171
- -kips
-- . k'lp sIb ot
-214 1 .~ d' 1){6 in.
0= 1- - = 1- - - = 0.764
u 8 bolts p 4.50 in.
Tu <40.9 kips o.k.
b ' 1.88 in.
P=--;=-3
a .25'm. =0.578
A similar check for other loading conditions shows that the other bolts in this
connection have adequate strength. Note that prying action must also be addressed
when the end-plate thickness is selected. ~=.!.(<\>r~ -lJ=_1_(39.1 kips 1 =2.84
P rut 0.578 14.~ kips
Select end-plate thickness
When the brace is in tension, a tensile force is transmitted across the gusset/ Since ~ > 1, a' = 1.0. The minimum required en(l-DJate thickness is,
column interface. Assuming the four rows of bolts adjacent to the gusset plate
transfer the tensile load, the tensile force per bolt is, 4.44r b '
tmm. = ut
The two locations that need to be investigated for prying action are at the bolts <\>rn= 117 kipsfm. (X in.) = 87.8 kips
adjacent to the gusset plate and the bolts adjacent to each beam flange. The
controlling condition for prying action in this case is for the bolts adjacent to Conservatively using Manual Table 7-6 with edge distance equal to 11/4 in.,
the gusset plate when the brace is in tension. Using the dimensions shown in the design bearing strength at each edge bolt
Figure 3-34, an 11-in. end-plate width, and standard holes in the end-plate,
<\>rn =42.0 kiPsfm.(X in.)=31.5 kips
b 5.50 in.-0.750 in. 2.38 in.
2 Since the design strength at each bolt is than the required shear strength
per bolt, the bearing strength of the end-plate adequate.
b' = b - d b = 2.38 in.- 1 in. = 1.88 in.
2 2
Check bearing strength of column
a 11 in.~5.5 in. <1.25(2.38 in.) Since the column flange thickness is greater the end-plate thickness and
the end-plate and column have the same strength, the bearing strength
=2.75 in.~2.98 in. of the column flange is adequate.
=2.75 in.
Use (7) rows of (2) l-in.-diameter ASTM bolts at a Sl/Z-in. gage. Use
a' = a+ d b = 2.75 in.+ 1 in. =3.25 in. (4) bolts adjacent to each beam fiange and additional 3 bolts on each
2 2 side of the gusset pIate as shown in Figure
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STI<~Uc1rION, !Ne.
3-158. BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTllJZING R> 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-159
=570 kips
1/4
This force is conservatively compared 'to the of the shear and axial force,
W.P.
Ru = (118 kiPs)2 + (153 kips)2
W14x99
=193 kips
W16x77 <l>Rn > Ru o.k.
I
Use a 3/4-in. x U-in. end-piate.
(14) 1"0 A325N
BOLTS @ 5 1/2" GAGE
Check column web local yielding
!lCOlUMN
Pl 3/4"x11" A572 GR. 50 Adjacent to the gusset plate, the coluirm web yielding strength is,
Figure 3-3~. Connection designed in Example 3.19. <l>Rn =<I>(5k+N)F/w (Specification J10-2)
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CmlsTRuCT~ON, !Nc.
3--160 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLE
3--161
l ( )( )
Pe 50
=(0.80)(0.485)
2 16.5
1+3 -
0.485
--
1.5J 29,000( 50)( 0.780)
14.2 0.780 0.485 From Specification Section 11 0.6 with Pr > O
Pe
=779 kips
<l>Rn = 0.75(779 kips) $Rv =0.90(0.6 ) Fyd/w (1.4 - ~ J (Specification no. lO)
= 584 kips
= 0.90( 0.6)(50 ksi)( 14.2 in.)( 0.485 in (1.4 - 0.596)
<l>Rn > Hue o.k. =150 kips
With the compressive force applied> d e /2 from the column end, the column <l>Rv > 118 kips o.k.
web crippling strength adjacent to each beam flange is,
Rn=0.80(0.485)
=310 kips
2
l ( )( ) 0.760
1+3 - -
14.2
0.485
--
0.780
1.5J 29,000( 50)( 0.780)
0.485
Example 3.20. SCBF Column Splice
Given: Design a fully welded sPlice between the third
column located on grid B in Figure 3-9. The material is ASTM A992
<l>Rn = 0.75(310 kips) = 233 kips (F'y = 50 ksi, F'u= 65 ksi), the upper shaft is a W wide-flange section and
the lower shaft is a W14x132 wide-flange The Applicable Building
<l>Rn> 85.5 kips o.k. Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculatic)n of loads.
The loading on the upper shaft between the third and fourth levels was deter-
Tu=(0.9-0.2SDS)PD+nOPQ +1.6P
mined to be, E
Solution: Using the basic load combinations in ASCE 7, the maximum compressive force
Determine the required flexural-<::tr"Anjr1th
in the column is,
Seismic Provisions Section 13.5 defines the flexural strength of the
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + pPQE + 0.5PL + 0.2Ps splice to be at least half of the nominal strength of the smaller shaft.
Using Manual Table 6-1 with KL = 12.5 ft,
P =1.4(62 kips) + 1.3(57 kips )+0.5(18 kips )+0.2( 6 kips)
u
=171 kips bx =3.55XlO-3 (kip-ft f 1
From Figure 3-8, the unbraced length of the column is 12.5 ft. Using Manual Assuming that the'entire moment is taken the flange splices, the required
Table 4-1 with K = 1.0, strength of each flange splice is,
= 211 kips
AMERICAN !NsirrurE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CmisTR:uCIlpN, !Nc.
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLE
3-164 3-165
Location
The splice location satisfies the requirement that it be located in the middle
third of the column cIear height. *ERECTION AIOS NOT SHOWN FOR
Tbe final connection design is sbown in Figure 3-36.
Figure 3-36. Connection as designed in
PART 3 REFERENCES
TABLES American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC). (2005 . Specificationfor Structural Steel
Buildings, ANSIIAISC 360-05, AISC, Chicago, IL.
Table 3-1. EBF Link Design Values for W-Shapes
Various values useful in the design of eccentrically braced frame~ are tabulat~. v~u~~ ':s: American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC). Steel Construction Manual,
given for W-shapes that meet the local buclding requirements for link beams Wlth Fy - 13th Ed., AISC, Chicago, IL.
(ASTM A992). dd·· al American Institute. of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC).
The value of 0.15Py is tabulated to aid in the determinati~n of whether or not a luon
Structural Steel Buildings, ANSIIAISC 341-05, AISC, ~111'-'a.14v,
link requirements must be met per Seismic Provisions Secuon 15.2. The v~ues of Py ' A w'
TT d M are provided for the case in which these additional link reqUlrements must American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). (2005). Miir-zz)11tum Design Loads for Buildings
Yp' an p
and Other StructUres, SEIIASCE 7, ASCE, Reston, VA.
be satisfied. . . t al
· 1 f 1 6 2 6 and 5M IV, as well as the values of the three spacmg m erv s
M u ltip es o ., ., p p' . f fnk tiff Astaneh-AsI, A. (1998). "Seismic Behavior and Design of Plates." Steel Tips, Structural
o-iven in Seismic Provisions Section 15.3 are listed to aid i~ the e~tabhshment. o I s - Steel Educational Council, Moraga, CA.
0& • • I dditi the minimum requrred wldths and thlcknesses for
ener spacmg requrrements. na on,.. .
both link end stiffeners and link intermediate suffeners are glven. .. Blodgett, O.W. (1966). Design of Welded Structures,
The forces to be resisted by bracing of both the link beam and the beam outslde the lmk Foundation, Cleveland, OH.
are also given. Building Seismic Safety Council. (2000). NEHRP (........u" ..... Earthquake Hazards Reduction
Program) Recommended Provisions for Seismic New Buildings and Other
Structures Part 1: Provisions, FEMA 368, Federal Management Agency,
Washington, D.C.
Building Seismic Safety Council. (2000). NEHRP (1vu...",,.u..Earthquake Hazards Reduction
Program) Recommended Provisions for Seismic for New Buildings and Other
Structures Part 2: Commentary, FEMA 369, Federal Management Agency,
Washington, D.C.
Engelhardt, M.D., and Popov, E.P. (1989). "Behavior of Links in Eccentrically Bniced
Frames." UCBIEERC - 89/01, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of
California, Berkeley, CA.
Galambos, T.V (1998). Guide to Stability Design Cntena Metal Structures, 5th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.
Honeck, W.c., and Westphal, D. (1999). "Practical Design and Detailing of Steel Column
Base Plates." Steel Tips, Structura:l Steel Educational Moraga, CA.
Naeim, F. (2001). The Seismic Design Handbook, 2nd
Boston, MA.
Research Council on Structural Connections. (2~04). :::i]J~~j:;'l)r-zC(AltlOn for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts,~American In~titute of Construction, Chicago, It.
Structural Engineers Association of California (SEAOC). 999). Recommended Lateral
Force Requirements and Commentary, SEAOC; CA.
Tamboli, A.R. (1999). Handbook of Structural Steel COlr-znectu¡lfl Design and Details, McGraw-
Hill, New York.
Tremblay, R. (2001). "Seismic Behavior and Design of Cpnc(!ntJicaLlly Braced Frames."
Engineenng Jouma/, Vol. 38, 3rd Quarter, 148..:..166.
- - - - - - - - - - _ . _ - - - - -- ----------- -
3-168 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
TABLES
3-169
Table 3-1
Table 3-1 (.
<1>=0.90 EBF Link
Ry = 1.1 EBF Link
Design Values Fy = 50 ksi
Oesign 'Valu
WShapes
W Shapes
Bracing Force
O.15Py Py Aw Vp Mp
1.6Mp 2.6Mp ~ O.06M, Nominal
Shape Vp Vp Vp
---¡;;- Wt.
kips kips in? kips kip-in. in. in. in. kips
W44x335 739 4930 41.7 1250 81000 104 168 324 127
x290 641 4270 35.0 1050 70500 107 175 336 111 6.92 11/a 22.1 44.8 23.9
x262 577 3850 31.8 953 63500 107 173 333 100 7.04 7/a 17.2
5/a 36.3 23.7
x230 508 3390 28.7 862 55000 102 166 319 87.1 7.12 7/a 14.9
5/a 32.2 23.7
7.19 3/4 12.7
W40x593 1310 8700 65.4 1960 138000 113 183 352 229 28.3 23.7
593 13.1 13/8 7
x503 1110 7400 56.3 1690 116000 110 178 343 195 6.56 1 /8 45.1
503 13.3 l1J4 84.5 25.1
x431 953 6350 49.0 1470 98000 107 173 333 166 6.66 1% 37.8
431 13.5 11/a 71.7 24.6
x397 878 5850 44.7 1340 90000 107 175 336 153 6.76 13/8 31.9 61.4
397 13.7 1 24.3
x372 818 5450 42.3 1270 84000 106 172 331 144 6.83 11J4 28.4
372 13.8 7/8 55.2 24.2
x362 803 5350 41.0 1230 82000 107 173 334 140 6.89 11J4 26.7
362 13.8 7/8 52.2 24.2
x324 715 4770 36.6 1100 73000 106 173 333 129 6.88 11Ja 25.5 50.1
324 13.9 3J4 24.0
x297 656 4370 33.9 1020 66500 104 170 327 115 6.95 1 22.0
297 13.9 44.0 23.9
x277 611 4070 30.3 910 62500 110 179 343 108 3J4 6.97 1 19.9
277 14.1 5/8 40.4 23.7
x249 550 3670 27.4 823 56000 109 177 340 97.3 7.07 7/a 17.0
249 14.3 35.2 23.7
x215 476 3170 23.8 713 48200 108 176 338 84.2 5Ja 7.15 3J4 14.6
215 14.5 1/2 31.1 23.7
7.25 3/4 11.7
W40x392 863 5750 51.9 1560 85500 87.8 143 274 144 26.0 23.7
392 9.56 11/8
x331 731 4880 44.6 1340 71500 85.5 139 267 122 4.78 11/2 34.3
331 9.76 65.5 18.6
x327 720 4800 43.1 1290 70500 87.2 142 273 120 1 4.88 11/4
327 28.4 55.3 18.3
x294 647 4320 9.74 4.87
38.7 1160 63500 87.4 142 273 109 11/4 27.2 53.2 18.2
294 9.88 7/8
x278 615 4100 37.7 1130 59500 84.2 137 263 102 4.94 11/8 23.7
278 9.94 7/a 47.0 18.0
x264 582 3880 35.1 1050 56500 85.9 140 268 97.4 4.97 11/8 22.9
264 9.98 3/4 45.5 18.0
x235 518 3450 30.3 910 50500 88.8 144 278 87.4 4.99 1 20.8 41.9
235 10.2 5/8 17.9
x211 465 3100 27.4 823 45300 88.1 143 275 78.7 5.12 7/a 17.0
211 10.3 35.2 17.9
x183 400 2670 23.8 714 '38700 86.8 141 271 67.6 5Ja 5.15 3/4 14.6
183 10.5 31.1 17.7
x167 369 2460 23.8 713 34600 77.8 126 243 60.9 1J2 5.25 3/4 11.7
167 10.5 112 26.0 17.7
x149 329 2190 23.0 691 29900 69.3 113 216 52.8 5.25 3/4 11.8 26.1
149 10.5 112 17.7
5.27 3/4 11.3
W36x800 1770 11800 81.0 2430 183000 120 195 376 314 25.1 17.7
800 13.2 17/8 6.62
x652 1440 9600 67.0 2010 146000 116 188 362 256 2112 62.9 115 27.0
652 13.7 1112 6.83
x529 1170 7800 54.7 1640 117000 114 185 355 208 2 50.9 94.2
529 14.0 11J4 26.4
x487 1070 7150 50.9 1530 107000 112 181 349 192 6.99 15/a 40.3
487 14.1 75.8 25.8
x441 975 6500 46.3 1390 95500 110 179 344 173 11/a 7.05 11/2 37.1
441 14.3 11/8 70.1 25.7
x395 870 5800 41.5 1240 85500 110 179 344 156 7.14 13/a 33.0 62.9
395 14.4 1 25.5
x361 795 5300 38.1 1140 77500 109 176 339 142 7.18 1114 28.9
361 14.5 7/a 55.8 25.2
x330 728 4850 34.7 1040 70500 108 176 339 130 7.23 11/8 26.0
330 14.6 7/8 50.6 25.1
x302 666 4440 32.1 962 64000 106 173 333 119 7.28 11J8 23.1 45.5
302 14.8 3/4 24.9
x282 622 4150 30.1 902 59500 .106 172 330 111 7.41 1 20.9 41.7
282 14.8 3/4 25.1
x262 578 3850 28.6 857 55000 103 167 321 102 7.42 1 19.1 38.6
262 14.9 3/4 24.9
x247 544 3630 27.2 816 51500 101 164 316 96.2 7.46 7/8 17.8
247 14.9 5/a 36.3 24.9
x231 511 3410 25.8 775 48200 99.4 162 311 90.2 7.45 7/a 16.7 34.3
231 15.0 5/8 24.8
I¡',.!! 7.49 7/8 15.5 32.2 24.8
-------------------------------------------------
3-172 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES
3-173
Bracing Force
1.6Mp 2.6Mp 5Mp Nominal
O.15Py Py Aw Vp Mp
Shape ----v,;- Vp Vp O.06M,
---¡¡;- Wt.
I
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STFlUCI'~ON, !Ne.
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES 3-175
3-174
Bracing Force
Py Aw Vp Mp
1.6Mp 2.6Mp ~ O.06M,
NQminal
O.15Py Vp Vp Vp Wt.
Shape -¡¡;;-
kips kip-in. in. in. kips
kips kips in.2 in.
539 26500 78.7 128 246 81.8 10.8 3/4 5.39 22.7 42.7 18.9
W21x201 444 2960 18.0
16.4 492 23800 77.5 126 242 74.0 10.8 5fs 5.42 7/8 20.4 38.1il 18.8
x182 402 2680
14.8 445 21600 77.7 126 243 67.4 10.9 5/8 5.45 3/4 18.0 34.5 18.6
x166 366 2440
14.3 428 18700 69.8 113 218 58.8 11.1 5/8 5.53 3/4 17.2 33.0 18.8
x147 324 2160
12.8 385 16700 69.3 113 216 52.9 11.1 112 5.55 3/4 15.1 29.4 18.6
x132 291 1940
11.9 356 15400 69.0 112 216 48.8 11.2 112 5.60 5/8 13.7 26.9 18.6
x122 269 1800
10.9 326 14000 68.5 111 214 44.6 11.2 112 5.60 5/8 12.2 24.3 18.5
x111 245 1640
11.4 343 11100 51.5 83.6 161 35.3 93 7.26 1f2 3.63 5/8 13.1 25.8 12.6
W21x93 205 1370
10.2 305 9800 51.4 83.6 161 31.5 83 7.33 112 3.67 5/8 11.2 22.5 12.5
x83 182 1220
8.97 269 8600 51.1 83.1 160 27.7 73 7.39 3/8 3.70 112 9.41 19.4 12.5
x73 161 1080
8.48 255 8000 50.3 81.7 157 25.9 68 7.41 3fs 3.71 1/2 8.68 18.1 12.4
x68 150 1000
7.91 237 7200 48.6 78.9 152 23.3 62 7.44 3/8 3.72 1/2 7.80 16·fi 12.4
x62 137 915
8.02 241 6450 42.9 69.7 134 20.8 57 5.75 3/a 2.88 1/2 7.93 16.8 9.84
W21x57 125 835
7.50 225 5500 39.1 63.6 122 17.9 50 5.77 3fs 2.89 1/2 7.24 15.6 9.80
x50 110 735
6.93 208 4770 36.7 59.7 115 15.5 44 5.80 3/8 2.90 3/a 6.36 14.1 9.75
x44 97.5 650
687 4580 25.6 767 37700 78.6 128 246 127 311 8.96 11f4 4.48 15/8 41.1 74.6 18.0
W18x311
4170 23.7 710 33800 76.2 124 238 115 283 9.10 11fa 4.55 11f2 37.6 68.4 17.9
x283 625
569 3800 21.6 649 30600 75.3 122 235 105 258 9.24 1 4.62 13/a 34.1 62.3 17.7
x258
587 27500 74.8 121 234 95.4 234 9.38 7/a 4.69 11f4 30.6 56.1 17.6
x234 516 3440 19.6
537 24500 73.0 119 228 86.1 211 9.48 7/8 4.74 11/8 27.7 51.0 17.4
x211 466 3110 17.9
16.2 487 22100 72.6 118 227 78.2 192 9.58 3f4 4.79 1 24.7 45.8 17.3
x192 423 2820
449 19900 70.9 115 222 71.3 175 9.62 3/4 4.81 22.7 42.3 17.1
x175 385 2570 15.0
409 17800 69.7 113 218 64.3 158 9.68 5/8 4.84 7/a 20.4 38.2 17.0
x158 347 2320 13.6
369 16100 69.8 113 218 58.4 143 9.74 5/8 4.87 3/4 18.0 34.1 16.8
x143 316 2110 12.3
340 14500 68.3 111 213 52.9 130 9.86 5/8 4.93 3/4 16.2 31.0 16.8
x130 287 1910 11.3
11.1 332 13100 63.2 103 197 48.2 119 9.99 1f2 5.00 3/4 15.9 30.3 17.0
x119 263 1760
9.92 298 11500 61.8 100 193 42.7 106 10.0 112 5.01 5/8 14.0 26.9 16.8
x106 233 1560
271 10600 62.4 101 195 39.3 97 10.0 1f2 5.02 5/8 12.3 24.1 16.7
x97 214 1430 9.02
8.09 243 9300 61.3 100 192 34.8 86 10.1 3/8 5.07 1/2 10.7 21.3 1Q.7
x86 190 1270
251 7300 46.6 75.7 146 27.2 71 6.65 3/8 3.33 1f2 11.2 22.0 11.5
W18x71 156 1040 8.36
7.61 228 6650 46.6 75.8 146 24.9 65 ~.69 3/8 3.35 1/2 9.82 19.7 11.4
x65 143 955
209 6150 47.0 76.4 147 23.2 60 6.73 3/8 3.37 1f2 8.81 17.9 11.3
x60 132 880 6.98
197 5600 45.5 73.9 142 21.2 55 6.75 3/8 3.38 1/2 8.08 16.7 11.3
x55 122 810 6.57
180 5050 45.0 73.1 141 19.1 50 6.79 3/8 3.40 3/8 7.05 14.9 11.3
x50 110 735 5.99
182 4540 39.8 64.6 124 17.1 46 5.34 3/8 2.67 3/8 7.18 15.1 9.09
W18x46 101 675 6.08
159 3920 39.4 64.0 123 14.9 40 5.39 3fa 2.70 3/8 5.87 12.8 9.03
x40 88.5 590 5.31
5.06 152 3330 35.1 57.0 110 12.7 35 !f40 3/a 2.70 3/8 5.46 12.1 9.00
x35 77.3 515
PART4
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS TILIZING R > 3
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNC. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL COlI/STFtUQJ10N, lNc.
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME (OMF) SYSTEMS
4-2 4-3
required r~lnt()tc:ínE:-fiUet
toIdbe back-gouged and provided with a ..
SCOPE U
+;l' weld. If tJ:¡e connection
The Seismic Provisions requirements and other design considerations surnmarized in this Prulzes. we -access holes, they are required to with the requirements of Seismic
Part apply to the design of the members and connections in moment frames that utilize a S o.vIs.ions P Section 11.2a(2). The required WelQ-aC(~esll;:-h()lp configuration is shown in
els.IDlc. . rovisions Figure 11-1. FinalIy, for FR connections that use double-sided
response modification factor, R, greater than 3. al-Jomt-penetration groove welds or double-sided
paro.
d d welds, such welds must be
In the Seismic Provisions, moment frames are separated into three categories: Ordinary
Moment Frame (OMF) systems, Intermediate Moment Frame (IMF) systems, and Special SeS.lgn.e Pto support a required strength equal to 1. g of the cOImected parto The
elSIDlC rovisions also stipulate that singIe-sided groove welds
Moment Frame (SMF) systems.
and single-sided fillet welds are not to be used to tensile forces.
PR m.oment connections are re,quired to deV,elop strength limits as FR moment
ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME (OMF) SYSTEMS connecuons. In addition, it is noted that PR mo~,ent {'olru)e~cti'ons
~ must have a nominal flex-
Ordinary Moment Frame (OMF) systems resist lateral forces through the flexural and shear ural strength no less than 0.50Mp of the conne~ted beam column. It is also noted that the
strengths of the beams and columns. Lateral displacement is resisted primarily through the strength and flexibility of the connection mu~t' be COl1s141en~d
effects on overall frame stability. in the design, including the
flexural stiffness of the framing members and the restraint of relative rotation between the
beams and columns at the connections, or "frame action." OMF systems must be capable of Both FR and PR ~oment connections ar~ required have an available shear strength
providing an interstory drift angle of at least 0.01 radian. Note that the use of this system is greater than the reqUlreq strength, Vu ' as detetmined the load combination of 1.2D +
permitted within the limits of the applicable building codeo 0.5L + 0.2S plus shear resulting from the application of moment equaling,
OMF systems tend to have larger and heavier beam and column sizes than in braced-
frame systems, as the beams and columns are often sized for drift control rather than 2 l.IRy PMJ
strength. The increase in member sizes and related costs, however, may be acceptable based [ Lh
on the increased flexibility in the architectural and mechanical layout in the structure. The
absence of diagonal bracing members can provide greater freedom in the configuration of where Lh is the distance between plastic hinges.
walls and in the routing of mechanical ductwork and piping. As with other moment frame A.lesser value is permitted if justified by analysis.
systems, OMF systems are usually positioned at the perimeter of the structure, allowing moment connections are further
reqUlre d to develop, in addition to the load combina+;on
maximum flexibility of the interior spaces. The flexible nature of the frames, however, does th u the shear strength to resist'
e m~im~m end moment that can be resisted hy the cOl1lDe:ctilons
warrant sorne additional consideration of the interaction between the steel frame and more
ConunUlty
Id plates are required for
, v
FR moment "olllle:ctjc)ns w~en the connection utilizes
rigid architectural cladding systems. a w~ e.d flange or a welded flange plateo Special ' the attachment of the
The Seismic Provisions provide for two connection types when designing OMF sys- for
conOtinUlty p1ates to the column are outlined in the Provisions. See Section 11.5.
tems - fully restrained (FR) and partially restrained (PR). For the purposes of discussion,
MF. system~ are not required to have any special . of the panel zones, and have
FR is defined as having sufficient rigidity in the connection to maintain the angles
no
. dispeclal
. requrrements for the relationship between an,d column strength. This is
between members upon application of loads, while PR is defined as having insufficient
m. ca.uv: 11
of the overall OMF system, where the detaJ.·ling • are reduced and the
rigidity in the connection to maintain these angles upon load application.
sels~c O:fC~s are larger than moment frame systems 1~+~_"'_...l to provide higher amounts of
FR moment connections are required to be designed to reach a required flexural strength,
ducuhty. This basic design philosophy for OMF systems for their use as an economi-
cal moment frame system when OMF systems are perrnitltedl by the applicable building'code.
where,
Ry = ratio of the expected yield strength, Se' to the minimum specified yield strength, F'.¡
(Seismic Provisions Table 1-6-1)
Mp = nominal plastic flexural strength for either the beam or the girder
Altematively, the connections may be designed for the maximum force that can be delivered
to the frame by the surrounding components in the structural system, if this force is less than
1.1RyMp of the beam or girder; refer to Seismic Provisions Cornmentary Section C1l.2a. FR
moment connections also require the removal of backing bars in complete-joint-penetration
groove welds, except at top flange connections where the backing bar is connected to the
column with a continuous fillet weld. Upon removal of the backing material, the weId is
.AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUC:nOiN. INc.
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-5
4-4
From ASCE 7, the Seismic Use Group is 1, the Seismic Design Category is D,
R = 3.5, C
d
= 3, 1 = 1.0, P = 1.3, and SDS = 0.533.
0. 2S vs = 0.2(0.533) = 0.107
o = 3(1.20 in.)
x 1.0
ox <11 a o.k.
Figure 4-2. OMF elevationfor Examples 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, and 4.4.
.
For roofplan see Figure 4-1
1 AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTRuctlON. !Nc.
4-6 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-7
! Aroo! = 75 ft(120
Ji =PD +0.25PL
ft) = 9,000 ft2
Alternatively, a more detailed analysis can
on each column. Such an analysis would
shear quantity, ~i' and thus a reduction in
completed to reflect the axial load
in an increase in the plastic story
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL COJIISTRUdrlON, INc.
4-8 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-9
Solution: Check column element s/enderness With one lateral-frame beam and one -frame column at the connection
The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is located at the column top,
b¡
I..¡=-=6.31 285 in. 4 /17 ft
2t¡
(Specification B4.1)
Gtop
612in. 4 30ft
I 0.822
Por flexure, the limiting width-thickness ratio for compact flanges is,
Prom the notes for Cornmentary; Figures
pinned-base connection. Using ~pleClJtIc'ltIolQ.
') = . 8Jf, = 0.38 29,000 ksi = 9.15 (Specification Table B4.1) it may be possible to determine a
/\'p 03 F 50 k SI.
y
column behavior through the use of the reduction factor, t , in the
a
calculation of 6).
Since ":r < I..p ' the flanges are compact for flexure.
The width-thickness ratio fQf the web is, The leaning column;amplifier is (Lim and
h
I.. w =-= 36.2
tw
(Specification B4.2) 1+ L P/eaning
LPstability
Por flexure, the limiting width-thickness ratio for a compact web is,
With 3,375 ft2 tributary to the stability and 5,625 ft2 tributary to the
leaning columns, and a uniform load over
(Specification Table B4.1)
2
5,625 ft 6
A =3.76 29,000 ksi. 1+ 1. 3
p 50 ksi 3,375 ft2
=90.6 Therefore,
Since I..w < I..p ' the web is compact for flexure. Kx = 1.63 x 1.9 = 3.10
Therefore, the W12x35 is compact for flexure. Por compression, similar checks Prom Specification Section C1.3a and COI!IlIIjlentary Table C-C2.2, Ky = 1.0.
can be made. Altematively, the listing for a W12x35 in Manual Table 1-1 has
a footnote indicating that the web is slender. Therefore, the column strength
may be reduced by the web slendemess. Determine the compression C''tr.can'''Y.,.H of the column
Lp = 5.44 ft Lr = 16.7 ft
KyLy = 1.0(17.0 ft)(12 iIJfi)
132
ry 1.54 in.
cp P =-=133kips
e n p
(Specification Figure C-C2.4)
i!l
2
C n2 E le L Considering the load combinations given in 7, it was determined that the
F b
cr( L r
b
/)2
ts
1+0.078(---12..
Sh
xo rts J( J (Specification F2-4) governing load combination for the column
1.79
(KL) [1.0(17 ft)(12 in.jft) C2-5)
Therefore,
=59.3 ksi
2 4 P. M M
1t (29,000 ksi)( 285 in. ) _r_ + --L!... + ---2. ::;; 1. O
2~Pc M ex M ey (Specification Hl-Ib)
204 kips
[3.10(17 ft)(12 in./ft)J2 0.130 69.8 kip-ft O O 29
- -+ + = .4
2 192 kip-ft
Since there are two frames, and ignoring the potential reduction in Kx for the
middle column, 0.429 < 1.0 o.k.
Vu =1.31(0.49 kips) + 1.3(2.23 kips )+0.5( O kips )+0.2( 0.65 kipS) Example 4.3. OMF Beam Design
=3.67 kips
Given: Refer to Beam BM-l in Figure 4.--2. Detencrnrte the adequacy of the ASTM
A992 wide-flange section (~= 50 ksi, ~ = ksi) for the following loading.
Check combined loading The Applicable Building Code specifies the of ASCE 7 for calculation of
loads. The governing load combination, inc1udes seismic effects, is,
Pr 17.3kips 0.130
Pe 133 kips 1.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S (ASeE 7)
~~, AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm"STFlUc!:1loN, !Nc.
~----------~~"-~=~===""""""..........._ - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
~14
4-15
The factored beam moments at the quarter points are, Determine the flexural strength
From Specification Section F2, with compact and web and Lb > Lr' the
M1I4= -10.9 kip-ft M 1/2 = 29.9 kip-ft M3/4= -45.1 kip-ft
applicable limit states are yielding and laII~r~lll-t()'rc;:ir\n<>1 buckling.
~=0.000681
Sx ho
rts = 1.56 in.
1+0.078~[Lb
S h r
J2 (Specification F2-4)
x o ts
, ¡
Assume that the beam flanges are btaced at the columns.
A = 3.76 fK == 3.76 29;000 ksi '= 90.6 (Specification TabIe B4.1) 21.1 ksi (68.4 in. 3 ) 50 ksi
p ~~ 50k~ ---""----~ <--~--'-I---.!...
12 in./ft - 12 in.1ft
Since Aw < Ap' the web is compacto =120 kip-ft ~ 327 kip-ft
=120 kip-ft
Check unbraced length
From Manual Table 3~2, <l>b M n=0.90(120 kip-ft) = 108 kip-ft>77.2
AMERICAN iNSTITUTE OF STEEL CbNSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COI'lSnmC1¡j¡oN, !Nc.
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-16 4-17
Note that for shapes with h/tw > 2.24 ~, <1>v = 0.90 rnust be used in the l.1RyM p = l.1Ry FyZ X = 1.1(1.1)( 50 ksi) 51.2 in. 3 )=3,100 kip-in.
shear strength check.
Vgravity =1.2VD + O.5VL + O.2VS
=17.9 kips
Given: Refer to Joint J-1 in Figure 4-2. Design a directly welded flange FR moment
connection for the joint shown in Figure 4-3. The beam and column are ASTM
A992 wide-flange sections (Ey = 50 ksi, ~ = 65 ksi). Use 70-ksi electrodes.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTlTUlE OF SlEEL Cm~sTR:uctION. !Nc.
~18
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4--19
Check column panel zone shear strength thickness is required. )Vith 1. = 0.525 in., a cO~ltlrlUlty pIate thicknesk of 5116 in.
. g the factored moment given in Example
U sm .. 4.3, the required panel zone will work. The mínimum stiffener width to the beam flange width is,
strength fOI this single-sided moment connectlon IS,
6.02· in.- 0.300 in.
Mu 77.2 kip-ft(12 in./ft) _ 53 3 k' 2
R - - . lpS
u= d b -ti - 17.9 in.-0.525 in. Use two pairs oC sh6-in. x 3-in. continuity in the column at the loca-
tioDs oC the top ánd bottom beam tlanges.
From Examp1e 4.1, panel zone deformations we~e included in the analysis of
the structure and from Example 4.2, Pue = 16.8 kips.
Design connection of continuity
2 Assume that plate material with a mínimum
0.75Py = 0.75 (50 ksi) (10.3 in. ) = 386 kips strength of 36 ksi is used for
the continuity pIates. Seismíc Provisions 11.5 specifies that the required
When Pu < 0.75Py ' the panel zone shear strength is, strength of this connectiori must be greater than equal to the design strength of
the contact area of the continuity plate with column flange. To develop the
l J contact area in tension and using the increase strength for transversely Ioaded
3b t 2
R =0.60F d t 1+~ (Specification 110-11) fillet welds allowed by Specification Section the mínimum required double-
n ycw ddt
b e w sided fillet weld size ¡s,
=109 kips>53.3 kips Use double-sided, 3/16 -in. fillet welds to the continuity plates lo the
column flanges, which satisfies th~ minilDUJ!lJ size oC fillet weld permitted
by SpecificatiOli Table J2.3.
Altematively, using Table 4-2 ($ = 1.00) for the W12x35 column,
$R
$Rn =$RvI +~d
Use a 21/4-in. clip dimensioD a10ng the web.
b
Seismíc Provisions Section 11.5 specifies that required strength of the con-
160 kip-in.
= 113 kips + --=--- nection of the cóntinuit)f plates to the coIumn
17.9 in. four forces:
be the Ieast of the following
=122 kips
1. The sum of the design strengths oÍ' the COlllle:~tllons of the continuity pIate to
For $ = 0.9, $Rn = 109 kips. the cohimn flanges. With a comer 'clip the flange of 3/4 in.,
=2$F
Ru y Ag t
Since Ru < $R v' a web doubIer pIate is not required.
= 2( 0.90 )( 36 ksi )( 3 in. - X· in. )(~
Size continuity plates . =45.6 kips
Per Seismíc Provisions Section 11.5, continuity plates are requrred because
te! < b¡l6. A thickness greater than or equal to one-half of the beam flange
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF S1EEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL O·ONS'fRU<:TIQN, !Nc.
OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-21
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
4-20
The column local flange bending strength the load applied at less than
2. The design shear strength of the contact area of the plate with the column
lOt! from the member end is,
web. With a comer clip along the web of 21/4 in.,
It is important to note that Seismic p'ro"'ISl¡onS Sections 11.2a(1) and (2) have
additional requirements for treatment of weld . and surface roughness of
Rn = 0.40( 0.3~0 )2[1 + 3(0.525)(0.300)1.5] 29,000(50)(0.520) weld access holes. :
12.5 0.520 0.300
=60.2 kips
<l>Rn =<l>0.6F
. y dtw P
=1.00(0.6)(50 ksi)(12 in.)(0.315 in.)
= 113 kips> 17.9 kips
5116" CONTINUITY
PLATE
W12x35 COL.
TYP.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRljJ<::nC)N, !Nc.
4-24 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME AND INTERMEDIATE "'~"YJ..l-'"I' • 4-25
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME (SMF) ANO INTERMEOIATE Currently, there are two primary methods used to plastic hinging of the beam away
MOMENT FRAME (IMF) SYSTEMS from the column. These two methods focus on either re~lucl'r19 the cross-sectional properties
Special Moment Frame (SMF) and Intermediate Moment Frame (IMF) systems resist lateral of the beam at a defined location away from the or special detailing of the beam-to-
forces and displacements through the flexural and shear strengths of the beams and columns. column connection in order to provide adequate and toughness in the connection to
Lateral displacement is resisted primarily through the flexural stiffness of the framing mem- force inelasticity into the beam just adjacent to the flange. Reduced beam section
bers and the restraint of relative rotation between the beams and columns at the connections, (RBS) connections are typically fabricated by the flanges of the beams at a short
or "frame action." SMF and IMF systems must be capable of providing an interstory drift distance away from the face of the column in order to the beam section properties at
angle of at least 0.04 radian and 0.02 radian, respectively. a defined location for formation of the plastic hinge 4-6). Research has ineluded a
SMF and IMF systems tend to have larger and heavier beam and column sizes than straight reduced segment, an angularly tapered and a circular reduced segment. A
braced-frame systems, as the beams and columns are often sized for drift control rather than higher level of ductility was noted in the latter, and RBS is typically fabricated using a
circular reduced segment.
strength. The increase in member sizes and related costs, however, may be acceptable based
on the increased flexibility in the architectural and mechanical layout in the structure. The Special connection detailing for added toughness strength has taken many forms,
absence of diagonal bracing members can provide greater freedom in the configuration of using both welded and bolted connections. In many of connections, both proprietary and
walls and in the routing of mechanical ductwork and piping. As with other moment-frame nonproprietary, such factors as welding procedures, we:la-aC(~es:~-holp. detailing, web-plate
systems, SMF and IMF systems are usually positioned at the perimeter of the structure, attachment, and flange-plate usage have been For additional information on
allowing maximum flexibility of the interior spaces. The flexible nature of the frames, how- the specification of these connections, see the Connection Standard in Part 6 of
this Manual.
ever, does warrant sorne additional consideration of the interaction between the steel frame
and more rigid architectural eladding systems. Panel zone behavior is difficult to predict and is cOl(np,licate:d by the presence of conti-
Current requirements for SMF and IMF systems are the result of research and analysis nuity plates and doubler plates, as well as k-area s. Three basic approaches are
completed by various groups, ineluding the Federal Emergency Management Agency most commonly used: "strong panel," "balanced and "weak panel." These three
(FEMA), AISC, the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) , the National terms relate the strength and inelastic behavior of the in relation to the strength and
Science Foundation (NSF), and the Structural Engineers Association of California (SEAOC).
These requirements inelude prequalification of the connections used, per Appendix P of the
Seismic Provisions, or qualification through testing in accordance with Appendix S of the
Seismic Provisions. Design and detailing requirements for moment connections prequalified
in accordance with Seismic Provisions Appendix P may be found in ANSIIAISC 358
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Plastic Hinge Zones. Hinge
Applications, herein referred to as the Prequalified Connection Standard. The Prequalified Locations Vary Depending
Connection Standard is ineluded in Part 6 of this Manual. on Connection Type.
One of the primary focal points of the testing requirements rests in the measurement of
inelastic deformations of the beam-to-column moment connections. Initially, plastic rotation
of the specimen was used as the basis for qualification; however, this quantity is dependent
on the selection of plastic hinge locations and member span. To avoid confusion, it was
decided to use the centerline dimensions of the frame to define the total inelastic drift angle,
which ineludes both elastic and inelastic deformations of the connections.
Most beam-to-column. moment connections for SMF and IMF systems develop inelas-
ticity in the beams and in the column panel zone, as shown in Figure 4-5. Panel zone defor-
mation, while more difficult to predict, can contribute a significant amount of ductility in the
frame. There are various factors that must be considered when accounting for panel zone
deformation, including continuity plates, doubler plates, and toughness of the k-area. In
regard to these two areas of inelastic deformation, beam and panel zone, the Seismic
Provisions require that at least 75 percent of the observed inelastic deformation under test- Column Panel
ing procedures be as intended in the design of a prototype connection. This means that if the Zone
connection is anticipated to achieve inelasticity through plastic rotation in the beam, at least
75 percent of the actual deformation must occur in the beam-hinge locations under testing.
Figure 4-5. Areas where inelastic t1p.fonnn~inn may be expected.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONST~U(:nCIN, !Nc.
4--26 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME AND INTERMEDIATE MOME FRAME SYSTEMS 4--27
inelastic behavior of the framing members in the connection. In a "strong panel," the panel Another consideration in the design of SMF systems is the concept oí "strong column-
zone strength is greater than the surrounding framing components to the point where the weC!k beam." The Seismic Provisions provide for the prope proportioning of the frame elements
vast majority of the inelastic deformation of the frame occurs in the beam. In a "weak in Equation 9-3:
panel," the strength of the panel zone is low enough relative to the framing members such
~ ~ I
LM *pb =the summation of the beam plastic momen s
i? ~
'~L\ r~ . J This provision is not intended to eliminate all yielding i the columns. Rather, as described
·:::",,"~~=~=~===~~==~=~=~=~=~-"r in Seismfc Provisions Cornmentary Section C9.6, it is in ~ded to result in framing sys~ems
~W L~ that have distributed inelasticity in large seismic events d discourages story mechanisms.
~
The primary difference between SMF systems and F systems is the interst9ry' drift
~ ~ I
angle capacities. While this requir~ment differs for SMFand IMF systems, there ~e many
requirements that are s~milar between the two frame typ . This comparison is surnmarized
in Table 4-1. '.
REDUCED BEAM
11. SECTION
v
~
1+
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
<>
I
I
I
I
t
I
1+
k'
11.
V
AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRU ION, lNe.
4-28 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-29
Given: Refer to the roof plan shown in Figure 4-7 and the IMF elevation shown in 8 xe =0.933 in.
Figure 4-8. Determine if the frame satisfies the drift and stability r~quirements
based on the following loading. The Applicable Building Code speclfies the use Per Seismic Provisions Section 3, the Story Drift and the story drift
of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads. limits are those stipulated by the Appli<;ablel Building Codeo FromASCE 7, the
allowable story drift, Óa' is 0.025hsx ' where is the story height below level x.
D = 15 psf S = 20 psf Lr = 20 psf
Óa = 0.025hsx = 0.025(17 ft)(12
W12x35 Zx = 51.2 in. 3 A g = 10.3 in. 2
ASCE 7 defines the Design Story Drift as , the deflection of Level x at the
W18x40 Zx = 78.4 in. 3 center of mass.
From ASCE 7, the Seismic Use Group is 1, the Seismic Design Category is D, 8 = Cd 8xe
R = 4.5, Cd = 4, 1 = 1.0, P = 1.3, and SDS = 0.533. x 1 (ASCE 7)
30'-0"
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-~~~--~~~~~~~~~~~
q,
W18x40
¡. ~ -1- - - 1-
~~~~-L-L-LJ>'~I.~~_~_~_-_~_~_4._~~~_~_~_~
___~_4~~~~'~~~-~
......, - - -1- - - t- - -
~
:[
:1,
,i
1
L FOR
IMF INVESTIGATED IN PART4
ELEVATION SEE FIGURE 4-8
I
!¡
L
i: Figure 4-8. IMF elevation for Examples 4.6, and 4.7.
Figure 4-7. IMF roofplanfor Examples 4.5,4.6, and 4.7.
¡.\ For roof plan see Figure
·1 ;
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
\..!'1.,...... . AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cor'¡STl<~uPI0N, !Nc.
, .. ...
~
4-30 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-31
Altematively, a more detailed analysis can be completed to reflect the axial load
(Seismic Provisions C3-1)
on each col~mn. Such an analysis would in an increase in the plastic story
shear quant:Ity, "ji' and thus a reduction the drift indexo
Since the columns have a lower plastic section modulus than the girders and W12x35 d = 12.5 in. tw = 0.300 in. Ix = 285 in. 4
the frame is continuolls over multiple bays, aH columns do not meet the strong- Ag = 10.3 in. 2 rx = 5.25 in. ry = 1.54 in.
column-weak-beam criterion. Therefore,
Sx =45.6 in. 3 Zx = 51.2 in. 3 rts = 1.79 in.
le
s¡; = 0.00135
x o
V. (Seismic Provisions C3) W18x40
yl
H
Note that half of Equation C3-3 applies because the columns are pinned at the PD =9 kips = 12 kips P =±1.70 kips
QE
base.
VD = 0.49 kips VLr = 0.40 kips VQE = ±1.73 kips
The ca1culation of MpCk requires the consideration of the axialloads present in
each column. Seismic Provisions Section 9.6 aHows this to be calculated as, M D tap= 8 kip-ft M Lr tap= 7
MStap = 11 kip-ft
M
pC k
=Z F-2-
x( y P Ág J
From ASCE 7, Seismic Design Category' D, p = 1.3, and SDS = 0.533.
A conservative approach to this calculation is to assume that aH frame columns
have the same axial load and that this load is equal to the load on the most heav- 0.2SDS = 0.2(0.533) = 0.107
ily loaded frame column. From analysis, the largest value of Pu is 11.3 kips.
Assume. there is no transverse loading the column supports in the plane
p of bending and that the beam framing into the column's weak axis produces a
M =51.2 in.3 (50 ksi 11.3 ki sJ(2!LJ=209 kip-ft negligible moment out of plane of the
pC k 10.3 in. 2 12 in.
Since there are two frames, each with three identical coluIims, Solution: Check column element c/'¡:;:;,n"ro,.,.,oc• .¡,
Per Seismic Provisions Commentary Section C3, since \f < 0.3, the structure
is cOllSidered stable.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COl'lSTE~UC1~ION, !Nc.
4--32 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4--33
Since A¡ < Ap' the flanges are compact for flexure. accounting for inelastic column behavior the use ofthe stiffness reduc-
tion factor, 'ta' in the calculation of G).
The width-thickness ratio for the web is,
The framing column amplifier (Lim and
h
Aw=-= 36.2 (Specification B4.2)
tw
For flexure, the limiting width-thickness ratio for a compact web is,
(Specification Table B4.1) With 3,375 ft 2 tributary to the stability and 5,625 ft 2 tributary to the
leaning columns, and a uniform load the entire area,
29,000 ksi
Ap = 3.76 1-5~0-k-s-i- 1+ 5,625 ft2, =1.63
=90.6
3,375 ft2
Therefore,
Since Aw < Ap' the web is compact for flexure.
Therefore, the W12x35 is compact for flexure. For compression, similar checks Kx = 1.63 x 1.9 = 3.10
can be made. Alternatively, the listing in Manual Table 1-1 has a footnote indi-
cating that the web is slender. Therefore, the column strength may be reduced From Specification Section C1.3a and Specification Commentary Table
C-C2.2, Ky = 1.0.
by the web slenderness.
From the notes for Specification Commentary Figures C-C2.3 and C-C2.4, Mn=FcrSx :::;M p (Specification F2-3)
G = 10 for a pinned base connection. Using Specification Commentary Figure
C-C2.2b, Kx = 1.9 (note that it may be possible to determine a reduced value by
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CQlIlST~.ucrION, !Nc.
4-34 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
f 4-35
j WithM} =0,
(Specification F2-4)
Cm =0.6
Considering the load combinations given· ASCE 7, it was detennined that the
goveming load combination for the is,
Since this column has no intermediate loads, the moment diagram is a straight
line, and the altemative Cb equation from the Cornmentary to the Specification I.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S (ASCE 7)
can be used.
Therefore, for the axial load,
1.75rr,2(29,000 ksi) 1+0.078(0.00135)(17 ft x12 in.J2 Pzt = 1.31 (O kips) + 1.3(1.70 kips) + O
F
cr
17 ft x 12 in. J
2 1.79 =2.21 kips
( 1.79
rr,2 El rr,2 (29,000 ksi) 285
Fcr =59.3 ksi
Pel =- - = - - - - - - - ' - - f - - : , . . . . . ! . . .
(KL)2 [1.0(17 ft)(12
3
M n =(59.3 ksi)(45.6 in ) (1 ft/12 in.) :s; 50 ksi( 51.2 in. 3
)( 1 ';2 inJ Therefore,
= 225 kip-ft :s; 213 kip-ft
B
l
= 0.6 >1.0
<1>bMn = 0.90(213 kip-ft) = 192 kip-ft 1_((1.0)16.4 kiPSJ
1,960 kips
Consider second-order effects
= 0.605 ~ 1.0
C
(Specification C2-2) Therefore,
Bl =1.0
Pr = Pnt + Pzt
Assuming no trans1ation due to gravity and all translation is due to the
a=1.0
seismic load,
(Specification C2-4) 2
LPnt = 1.31( 15 psf )(9,000 ft )+ 0.5(0 +0.2(20 psf )(9,000 ft2 )
=213 kips
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm.sT*.uCTION, !Ne.
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-37
4-36
Since there are two frames, and ignoring the potential reduction in Kx for the 0.127 + 59.0 kip-ft +0=0.371
middle column, 2 192 kip-ft
=59.0 kip-ft Note that for shapes with h/tw > 2.24 , <1>v = 0.90 must be used in the
shear strength check.
Vu = (1.2 + 0.2S DS )VD + pVQE + 0.5VL + 0.2Vs (AS CE 7)
, : =1.31( 0.49 kipS) + 1.3 ( 1.73 kips )+0.5( O kips )+0.2( 0.65 kips)
The Wl2x35 is adequate to resist the given for Column C-I.
=3.02 kips
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~snj~UCT'lON, !Ne.
4-38 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTll...IZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-39
Given: Refer to Beam BM-l in Figure 4-8. Detenmne the adequacy of the ASTM Check unbrace~ length
A992 wide-~ange section (~ = 50 ksi, ~ = 65 ksi) for the following loading. From Manual Table 3-2,
The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of
loads. The governing load combination that ineludes seismic effects is, Lp = 4.49 ft Lr = 13.1 ft
The required strengths are, Note that the infill beams are not aes:cnloeq in this example. If the actual fram-
ing were suitable to brace the flanges of beam being designed, Lb could be
Mu= -69.9 kip-ft Vu = 8.90 kips reduced to 6 ft.
The factored beam moments at quaiter points are,
Determine the flexural strength
M 1I4 =-8.10 kip-ft M 1/2 = 28.2 kip-ft M 3/4 = -38.9 kip-ft From Specification Section F2, with flanges and web and Lb> Lr' the
applicable limit states are yielding and torsional buckling.
W18x40 d=17.9iíi. tw = 0.315 in. ry = 1.27 in.
Sx = 68.4 in. 3 Zx = 78.4 in. 3 (Specification F2-3)
~=0.000681
r
rts = 1.56 in.
Sx ho
C7tE le
Assume that the beam flanges are braced at the columns. F,,= (~: 2 1+0.078 Sxho
(J( J2 (Specification F2-4)
A. = 0.38
P
JI = 0.38
VFy
29,000 ksi = 9.15
50 ksi
(Specification Table B4.I)
C =--~----~~~----~~~--~--~--~----~
b 2.5(69.9 kip-ft
Since Iy < Ap' the flanges are compacto
=2.04
The width-thickness ratio for the web is,
2
(2.04)7t 2 (29,000 ksi) in./ft
~~
h 30 ft 12
A. w = -- = 50.9 (Specification B4.2) Fcr 8(0.000681) ( 1 in. )
tw
[
(30 ft.)( 12 in.)]2 ]
The limiting width-tliickness ratio tor a compact web is,
[ 1.56 in.
Ap = 3.76 tI = 3.76 29,.000 ksi = 90.6 (Specification Table B4.1) =21.4 ksi
VFy 50 ksi
(Specification F2-3)
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE oi: STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm'¡ST~lUC1~ON, !Nc.
4-40 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-41
3 Note that load combinations that do not . seismic effects must also be
(50 ksi)( 78.4 in. )
(21.4 ksi)(68.4 inh :s; investigated. For example, considering the combination 1.2D + 1.6S,
Mn
12 in./ft 12 in.1ft
Mu= 94.0 kip-ft
= 122 kip-ft :s; 327 kip-ft
=122 kip-ft <l>Mn =11
Mu <<I>Mn o.k..
<l>bMn = 0.90( 122 kip-ft)= 110 kip-ft
Vu <<I>Vn o.k.
Mu =69.9 kip-ft
Although the beam design strength is adequate to resist M u' the Seismic
Provisions require IMF beams to be laterally braced in accordance witb
Section 10.8.
i:¡
Alternatively, using Table 4-2 (<1> = 1.00) for the W18x40 beam,
¡li
!i! <1> vvn =(<1> vRv1)=169 kips
~
Note that for shapes with h/tw > 2.24 ~, <l>v = 0.90 must be used in the
shear strength check.
;j
'1
i
1 The W18x40 is adequate to resist the loads given for Beam BM-l.
·,1\il
!
AMERICAN lNSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL Cmls~ucrIoN, !Nc.
4-42 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-43
SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES Reduced-beam-section connections are at the trame beam-to-column con-
nections. Assume that this increases the drift 7 percent over that determined
using unreduced beam cross sections.
EXAMPLE 4.8. SMF Story Drift and Stability Check
So/ution: Check drift
Given: Refer to the floor plan shown in Figure 4-9 and the SMF elevation shown in
From an elastic analysis of the structure, mt~~rst:ory drift between the second and
Figure 4-10. Determine if the third level of the frame satisfies the drift and sta-
third levels is,
bility requirements based on the following loading. The Applicable Building
Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads. Oxe = 0.600 in.
1 2 3 4 5
ROOF W21
~--------~~----~ ~-----~~--------I
Q)
10
~FOUR;TH
LEVEL
x
-.r
W21x62
~
~THIRD W24x76
LEVEL
W24x76
~BASE
SMF INVESTIGATED IN PART 4
FOR ELEVATION SEE FIG. 4·10
ASCE 7 defines the Design Story Drift as ()x' the deflection of level x at the cen- Seismic Provisions Section 9.6 requires that all columnsmeet the strong-
ter ofmass. column-weak-beam criterion. Therefore,
m
() = Cd()xe (AS CE 7)
x 1 2L,Mp G .
j=l J
V.
yl (Seismic Provisions C3-2)
5.5(0.642 in.) H
()x= O
l.
For a W24x76 girder,
= 3.53 in. < 3.75 in.
() x <~ a o.k. kip-in.=833 kip-ft
Lfloor = 9,000 ft2 (80 psf) = 720 kips Exarnple 4.9. SMF Colurnn Design
Lroo! = 9,000 ft2 ( 20 psf) = 180 kips Given: Refer to' Column C-I in Figure 4-10. the adequacy of the ASTM
A992 wide-flange section (~ = 50 ksi, = 65 ksi) to resist the following
The total dead load supported by the second-level columns is, loading between the second and third The Applicable Building Code
specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.
PD =612 kips+2(765 kips) +2(70 kips) = 2,280 kips
PD =125 kips PL =37 kips = 7 kips
and 25 percent of the transient live load supported by the second-level
columns is, VD =1 kip VL = 6 kips = ±46 kips
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCI10N, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cor~STRpCTI0N, !Nc.
4-46 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-47
W24x76 Ix = 2,100 in. 4 Mltx top = 1.4 ( O kip-ft) + 1.3 ( ±231 ) + 0.5( O kip-ft) + 0.2( Okip-ft)
=±300 kip-ft
W14x193 Ix = 2,400 in. 4
M ltx bot = 1.4( O kip-ft)+ 1.3( ±243
W14x159 Ix = 1,900 in. 4 )+0.5( O kip-ft)+O.2( Okip-ft)
= ±316kip-ft
From ASCE 7; Seismic Design Category is D, p = 1.3, and 8DS = 1.0.
Check column element .c::I¡:¡,nrJfQ,.,.,,,,,,,.d
0.2Svs = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2
Per Seismic Provisións Section 9.4a, the - . and unstiffened elements of
'"',-\.L.L'-'U\;;U
b
Solution: Determine the factored loads on the column A¡ = -L = 4.23 (Specification B4.1)
2t¡
Considering the load combinations given in ASCE 7, the governing load com-
bination for the column is, From Seismic Provisions Table 1-8-1, for
Determine the lateral-translation forces and nontranslation forces for sub se- Since A¡ < Aps' the flanges are seismically \.o~U.IIJé1I;l.
qtient calculation of secondary forces. It will be assumed that nontranslation
forces are due to dead and live loads and translation forces are due to the seis- The width-thickness ratio for the web is,
mie load. h
Aw= - = 9.71 (Specification B4.1)
(ASeE 7) , tw
Assuming B 2 = 1.2,
P = 1.4 ( 125 kips) + 1.3 ( O kips )+0.5(37 kips )+0.2( O kips)
nt
Pu =Pnt + B 2 P/t
=194 kips
= 194 kips + 1.2( 2.60 kips)
P/t = 1.4( O kipS) + 1.3( 2 kips )+0.5( O kips )+0.2( O kips) =197 kips
=2.60 kips
ea - cJ> PPu P
u
0.90F A ---t---:,.!-----,-=0.0579
Mu=(1.2+0.2Svs)Mv +pMQE +0.5M L +0. 2M s (ASeE 7) b y Y g 0.90(50
M ntx top = 1.4( 2 kip-ft) + 1.3( O kip-ft) + 0.5( 40 kip-ft) + 0.2( O kip-ft)
= 22.8 kip-ft
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONS1RUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~sn~Ub'ION, !Ne.
4-48 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTll..IZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-49
Therefore,
Lp = 14.6 ft
Kx = 1.85(1.95) = 3.61
Lb = 12.5 ft < Lp
From Specification Section C1.3a and COITllIlenltary Table C-C2.2, Ky = 1.0.
Determine K
For the X-X axis, Determine the compression t::!:t"cn¡"Jth of the column
(Figure C-C2.3)
KxLx 3.61{12.5 ft)(12 %)
rx 6.71 in.
With two lateral-frame beams and two lateral-frame columns at the connection
located at the column top, KyLy = 1.0(12.5 ft)(12 i%) _
4 ry 4.13 in. -
3.400 in.4 J+(2.400 in. J
( 12.5 ft 12.5 ft Using Manual Table 4-22 with K~!rx =
3.31
4
2(2,100in.
30 ft
J (j> F =28.0 ksi
e cr
4 =2,120 kips
3,400 in. J+.( 3,400 m.' J
( 12.5 ft 14.0 ft
3.68 Determine the flexural strength
bot . 4
G - 2 ( 2,100 m. J From Specification Section F2, with
applicable limit state is yielding.
flanges and web and Lb < Lp' the
30 ft
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR..(JCTION, !Nc,
-._--------------+----~~'"~~.~'''~~."~ _~.~ . --
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-50 4-51
M cx = <PbMnx = 0.90(2,030 kip-ft) = 1,830 kip-ft LPnt =1.4( 2;280 kips) + 1.3( O kips)+ .5(0.52)[2(720 kips)J+O.2( O kips)
=3,570 kips
Consider second-order effects
Pe2 for the W14x257 columns is,
e (Specification C2-2) 2
1t (29,000 ksi)
-----~+--~=3,320 kips
[3.61( 12.5 ft)( 12
For the calcu1ation of B l'
To determine ~2 for the entire frame, deter1jrrine the contribution ofthe W14x193
columns on column lines 1 and 4,
2
2 (29,000 ksi)(3,400 in.4 )
1t . 1t
2
EI
p _ 1t E1 x = . = 43,300 klpS P =-·-=-----~--t-~=1,680kips
elx- (KxLxf [1.0(12.5 ft)(12 in./ft)J2 e2 (KL)2
B2 = 1- (:I:.Pnt)
--
~1 (Specification C2-3)
The previously assumed value of B 2 = 1.2 is fiPI>roJrnnateily the same (see calcu-
latíon of Ca).
I:.Pe2
Pr =Pnt + B2Plt
Using the floor loads calculated in Example 4.8 and a 0.521ive-load reduction
factor on columns, = 194 kips + 1.22( 2.60 kips)
=197 kips
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN lNSTITUlE OF SlEEL Cor~STI<~VCII0N, lNc.
4-52 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTll..JZINO R > 3 SMF DES ION EXAMPLES
4-53
(Specification C2-1 a)
Mr =B1Mnt +B2MIJ desired, the columns would become and the beam sections would
become deeper and heavier. The deeper stiffer bearns would also bring a
M r.x =1.0(22.8 kip-ft) + 1.22(316 kip-ft) =408 kip-ft larger plastic moment demand on the column that would most likely
require the use of thick colurnn web plates and large heavily welded
Check combined loading column stiffeners. In addition, the lighter may not be strong enough to
force the forrnationof hinges in the
Pr 197 kips _ 0.0929
P 2,120 kips Example 4.10. SMF Beam Design
e
(~~}(::H::}I.O (Specification H1-1b) A992 wide-flange section (~ = 50 ksi, ~ 65 ksi) to resist the following load-
ing. The bearn end connections utilize
Figure 4-11. The Applicable Building
reduced bearn section shown in
specifies the use of ASCE 7 for
calculation of loads. Assume that a RBS connection that is prequalified in
(
J
0.0929 + ( 408 kip-ft + J (O k~p-ft J=0.269 accordance with AISC 358 will be used.
2 1,830 kip-ft Oklp-ft MD =-63 kip-ft M QE = ±235 kip-ft
0.269 < 1.0 o.k. VD = 13 kips VQE = ±16 kips
Check the shear strength of the column W24x76 d= 23.9 in. tw = ry = 1.92 in. Sx = 176 in. 3
2 .24 -F
R: -
yw
- 2.24
29,000 ksi = 54.0
50 k SI.
Zx = 200 in. 3
Altematively, using Table 4-2 (<1> = 1.00) for the W14x257 colurnn,
Mu= (1.2 + 0.2SDS )MD + pM QE +0.5ML +0.2Ms (ASCE 7) 00086r,( ~ )=0 086(1.92 ino)(_29-'-~-t--_
0
Mu = 1.4( -{i3 kip-ft)+ 1.3( -235 kip-ft)+ 0.5(-45 kip-ft )+0.2( okip-ft)
=-416 kip-ft
Altematively, using Table 4-2 for a it can be seen that Lb max is
equal to 7.98 ft.
Vu=(1.2+0.2~DS)VD +pVQE +0.5VL +0. 2Vs (ASCE 7)
Vu =1.4( 13 kipS) + 1.3( 16 kips )+0.5(9 kips )+0.2( okips) The diaphragm provides continuous lateral to the top flange of the beam.
However, the only lateral supports for the flange occur at the end con-
=43.5 kips
nections. Therefore, a bottom flange brace be provided every 8 ft.
Check beam element slendemess
Check unbraced length
Per Seismic Provisions Section 9.4, the stiffened and unstiffened elements of
From Manual Table 3-2,
SMF beams shall comply with Seismic Provisions Table 1-8-1.
The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is, Lp = 6.78 ft
~
29,000ksi Since the maximum moments along the span occur at the beam ends, this
A =0.30 - =0.30 =7.22
ps Fy 50ksi assumption does not need to be verified for where Lb $.Lp. In these cases,
the flexural strength of the unreduced is limited by M ' and Ze will
p
Since A! < Aps ' the flanges are seismically compacto always be les s than Zx. However, in cases the lateral-torsional buckling
strength may reduce the flexural strength the unreduced section below M '
The width-thickness ratio for the web is, p
such as is the case in this example, the . will have to be verified. The
il h reader should also note that, as a practical matter, when the value of eb for
li Aw =-=49.0 (Specification B4.2)
t moment frame beams and the limits . by the Seismic Provisions on
11 w
I unbraced length are considered, the lateral buckling strength typically
1
From Seismic Provisions Table 1-8-1, for web compactness, will not reduce the flexural strength of the section below Mp.
:1 For the unreduced section, from Spleciltic~ltiol~ Section F2, with compact flanges
~
29,000ksi and web and Lp < Lb < Lr , the applicable states are yielding and lateral-
A =2.45 -=2.45 . =59.0
ps Fy 50ksi torsional buckling.
~ eh [ M J( Z=~; )],; M
Comparing the reduced and unreduced flexural strengths,
Mn p - (M p - 0.7 FySx p (Specification Fl-2)
Mmax=IMul
Check shear strength
M A = 1180 kip-ftl M B = 1-260 kip-ft! Me= !-321 kip-ft!
M
n
=1.45[833-(833-513)(7.98-6.78J]~833
19.6-6.78
Altematively, using Table 4-2 (<P = 1.00) the W24x76 beam,
Therefore,
M n = 833 kip-ft
The W24x76 isadequate to resist the given for Beam BM-l.
At the centerline of the reduced-beam-section,
Design lateral bracing
Ze =Zx -2ct¡(d-t¡) (AISC 358 5.8-4) Per Seismic Provisions Section 9.8, the strength of nodallateral brac-
ing away from an expected plastic hinge is,
3
Ze =200 in. -2(2 in.)(0.680 in.)(23.9 in.-0.680 in.)
0.02M C
p r d
=137in. 3 br h
o
3 Ry =1.1
M pr =Fy Ze =50ksi(137 in. )=6,850 kip-in.=571 kip-ft
M r =Ry FZ
y
3
=1.1(50 ksi)( 200 in. )= 11,000 . = 917 kip-ft
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COJ'IISTRqCTION, !Nc.
4-58 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-59
Note that because this connection will a prequalified RBS moment con-
L= [12.5ft(12in./ft)y +(23.9iny =152in.=12.7ft nection supporting a concrete structural according tp AISC 358 Section
5.3.1 (7) the slab plus the typicallateral bracing proyides stability suf-
From Manual Table 4-12 for eccentrically loaded single angles with the eccen- ficient that additional bracing adjacent to plastic hinges is not required,
tricity equal to or less than 0.75 times the angle thickness, try a L5x5x51I6 with provided that shear connectors are ofC)vicIed every 12 in. (but omitted in the
Kz = 1.0.- RBS protected zone).
Comments: The bearn and colurnn sizes shown in 4-10 are not the optimum sizes
that would be selected in order to meet goals and a least-weight solution.
Pu < <l>Pn o.k. If drift reduction and a least-weight solution desired, the coIumns will become
Iighter, and the beam sections will become and heavier. The deeper and
Seismic Provisions Section 9.8 also specifies a minirnum stiffness for lateral
stiffer beams will also bring a larger mastI(;-momlem demand on the lighter col-
bracing. The kicker brace selected in this example is considered a nodal braceo
umn that will most likely require the use of column-web doubler pIates and
Assuming a rigid brace support, the required brace stiffness is, large heavily welded column stiffeners. In the lighter coIumns may not
be stron.g enough to comply with strQng beam requirements.
(Specification A-6-8)
<1>=0.75 The SMF beam-column connection design pre:senlted in this exampIe has been
chosen to demonstrate. the application of design provisions for prequalified
3 RBS connections in accordance with 358. Altemative configura-
Mu =Ry Fy Z=l.1(50 ksi)( 200 in. )=11,000 kip-in.
tions of RBS connections may be possible sufficiently justified by testing
(Seismic Provisions 9.8)
and qualified in accordance with AISC Provisions Appendix S. Such
Cd =1.0
connections may inelude bolted web of RBS connections or
weak-axis RBS connections, both of have been successfully tested as
Lb =7.98 ft(12 in.lft) = 95.8 in. part of the SAC Joint Venture. The results the SAC testing are sUrnmarized
and reported on in FEMA 350, Seismic Design Criteriafor New
ho =23.2 in. Steel Moment-Frame Buildings (FEMA,
1O(11,000 kip-in.)( 1.0) Given: Refer to Joint J-l in Figure 4-10. Design
~ ) 66.0 kipsfm. connection between Beam BM-l
br 0.75(95.8 in.)(23.2 in. and CoIumn C-l using·the reduced beam (RBS) shown in Figure 4-11.
AlI beams and coIumns are ASTM A992 flange sections (t;, = 50 bi,
The stiffness of the L5x5x51I6 brace is, ~ = 65 bi). The gravity loads on the beam given below.
AE WD = 0.84 kips/ft WL = 0.60 kips/ft
k = _8-cos2 (e)
L
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CO:NSTRU~TIO!N, !Ne.
4-60 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTll..JZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-61
F +F
C u ::;1.2
=_y _ _
pr 2F
y
=1.15
3
M pr = 1.15(1.1)( 50 ksi)( 137 in. )
=8,670 kip-in.
The distance from the column face to the assumed plastic hinge location
(Figure 4-12) is,
OTE: FOR WELD BACKING
QUIREMENTS SEE
Sh = a + ("2bJ = 5.5· + (18in.J
ID. -2- = 145·
. ID. (AISC 358 5.8-6) 358 CHAPTER 3
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTRuj::TION, !Nc.
4-62 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTIUZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-63
V
gRBS
= X wuL' = X (1.31 kipslft) ( 26.3 ft )=17.2 kips
Check column-beam moment ratio
The expected shear at the plastic hinge is then, Seismic Provisions Section 9.6 requires that SMF connections satisfy the
following strong-column-weak-beam .
V
RBS
= L:
2M r
+ VgRBS
2(8,670 kip-in.)
315 in.
+ 17.2 kips=72.2 kips LM~c > 1.0 (Seismic Provisions 9.6)
LMpb
2M 2( -8,670 kip-in.)
,
vRBS pr V ---I-+ 17.2 kips=-37.8 kips The axial load on the column must be corl~lclere:d when determining the flex-
= ----¡;- + gRBS
----.!.._ _ _ _
315in. ural strength of the column at the beam Using Puc = 197 kips as
determined in Example 4.9,
Compute the probable maximum moment at the column face
The factored moment due to gravity load between the column fl~nge and the
plastic hinge is, LM;c ~ L[Zcl Fyc - ::JJ
=2( 487 in. 3 )(50 ksi __ 19_7~_
75.6
The probable maximum moment at the face of the column is defined as, =46,200 kip-in.
M ¡ =Mpr + VRBSS h +Mg (AISC 358 5.8-6) The expected flexural demand of the beam the column centerline is defined
in AISC 358 Section 5.4 as,
M ¡ =8,670 kip-in.+ 72.2 kipS(14.5 in.)+ 11.5 kip-in.=9, 730 kip-in.
LM¡ 9,730 kip-in.+9,210 kip-in. =816 kips Altematively, using Table 4-2,
R
u 23.9 in.-0.680 in.
db -ti Wz
90 = 0.140 in. for a W14x257
l
2
R =0.6F d t 3b t J
1+~ (Specification JlO-ll)
n ycw ddt t wc =1.18 in.>0.390 in. o.k.
b e w
A lh-in. doubler plate or a larger column be investigated to increase the
panel zone strength. Further information design considerations and proce-
3( 16.0 )( 1.89)2 J dures for these options can be found in Design Guide 13, Stiffening of
<PRn =(1.0)(0.60)(50)(16.4)(1.18) 1+ ( )( )
[ 23.9 16.4 1.18 Wide-Flange Columns at Moment Conm~ctiqns: Wind and Seismic Applications.
Also note that Seismic Provisions Section contains additional requirements
=796 kips
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL COlI[SnluClJ:oN, !Nc.
4--66 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4--67
for situations when doubler plates are used in an SMF. Alternatively, a slightly The required strenglh of the panel zone on the new RBS dimensions is,
larger cut could be considered for the RBS in order to decrease the demand on
the panel zone. Try an increase in the RBS c-dimension from 2 in. to 21/8 in. as
shown in Figure 4-12. ......:....._--!;-.......:....--I~:....::...=791 kips
The expected shear at the plastic hinge is, ;::: 1.33 in. o.k.
V RBS =
2M
pr V
--¡;- + gRBS
2(8,410 kip-in.)
--'------'- + 17.2 kips = 70.6 kips tef >- bbf6
= 8.99 in. =150'
6 . ill.
315 in.
tef ;: : 1.50 in. o.k.
2M 2( -8,410 kip-in.)
,
v. RBS pr V
= --¡;- + gRBS
--'-------'- + 17.2 kips = -36.2 kips
315 in. The minimum thickness requirements Section 2.4.4 are met; therefore,
continuity plates are not required.
The expected moment at the face of the column is,
=VRBS + wuSh
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, lNc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COI'ISTR):.¡CTION. !Ne.
4-68 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-69
So/ution: Seismic Provisions Section 8.4b has rec[u¡iI:errtents for the location of and the
=70.6 kips+ 1.31 kiPs/fr(14;{2 ft )=72.2 kips
shear forces on gravity column splices. that these gravity column splice
provisions are equ~y applicable to column splices in braced-fame
Select a single-plate connection with a plate at least 3/s-in. thick to support buildings.
erection loads.
With the single plate as backing, use a CJP groove weld to connect the Check splice location
beam web to the column flange. From Figure 4-10, the height between
and the column splices are shown to be 48 in. aboye the finished floor
Check beam web strength elevation. Based on conventional steel the clear height between beam-
The minimum remaining web depth between weld access holes for the 72.2 to-column connections will be over 8 ft. T,t..,:r,~f:.~L-C, Seismic Provisions Section
kips shear force is, 8.4b(1) requires that the splice be a minimum of 4 ft from the beam-
to-column connections.
d . = 72 kips The column splice location shown in 4-10 satisfies Seismic Provisions
m/n <j>0.6F t Section 8.4b(I).
yw
72.2 kips
Determine the required shear ~Tr,Cr1/"YTh
1.0( 0.6)( 50 ksi)( 0.440 in.) Seismic Provisions Section 8.4b(2) that, with respect to bOth orthogonal
=5.47 in. axes, the column splice be able to develop required shear strength equal to,
By inspection, a greater web depth remains. o.k.
v:u =Mpc
--
H
The final connection design and geometry is shown in Figure 4-12.
In the weak axis of the column, the shear strength of the splice is,
COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLES 3
v: = FyZy = 50 kSi( 16.8 in. )
u H 12.5 ft(12 in./ft)
Example 4.12. Gravity Column Splice Design in
Moment Frame Building Conservatively ignoring frictional resístanc~ between the upper and lower shafts
due to column dead load, this force will be by the splice material.
Given: Refer to the floor plan shown in Figure 4-9 and the SMF elevation shown in
Figure 4-10. Design a splice between the third and fourth levels for the gravit~ Determine the required "'r\,rnnlr.cc~C'íll.c
colurnn located at the intersection of grids 2 and B. Use ASTM A36 (~= 36 kSl, With the upper shaft centered on the shaft, the dimensions of the upper
Fu = 58 ksi) for all splice material. The column sizes aboye and below the splice shaft are such that it will achieve fuIl bearing on the lower shaft.
are as follows. Therefore, the splice will not be required transfer any compressive loads if
the upper shaft is finished to bear on the shaft.
Lower shaft
W12x58 d = 12.2 in., 121/4 in. ~f= 0.640 in. ~f= 10.0 in.
Select splice geometry
Zy = 32.5 in. 3 Try a column splice from Manual Part 14.
Upper shaft
du = 12 in.
W12x40 d = 11.9 in., 12 in. t¡= 0.515 in. b¡= 8.01 in.
Zy = 16.8 in. 3
d + 11 ::;; d ::;; d + 51
u /4 l u /8
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COlN'STl~UCTIOlN', !Nc.
4-70 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-71
From Manual Table 7-1 for a ASTMA325N bolt, <1>rn = 15.9 kips.
= LO( 0.6)( 36 ksi)( 2 )(Ys in.)( 8 in.)
= 130 kips > 5.60 kips
Try using 3/4-in.-diameter ASTM A325N in standard holes.
<1>Vn > Vu o.k.
Check bearing strength of splice
Check shear yielding of the column flanges Using Manual Table 7-6 with Le = 11/4 in.,
Since the column flanges are thicker and wider than the splice plates and their
yield strengih is greater than the splice material, the shear yielding strength of <1>rn = 44.0 kips/in.(Ys in.) = 1
the column flanges is adequate.
Mu =Vue=5.60 kips[X(3 in.)+l}{ in.J=18.2 kip-in. Check block shear rupture of each plate
The geometry of each bolt group is such that the bolts are all equidistant from
the centroid of their bolt group. Therefore, the moment will be shared equally
between the bolts. The eccentricity of each bolt with respect to the centroid of Ant =L69in. 2 -1 12
1/(3/ in +
/4 . in.)(Ys in.)=L20 in.
2
2
Anv = 2.53 in. - (1.5 )(){ in. +
Mue J 18.2kiP-in·[X(3in.)] .
r = --y 0.348 klpS epO.6FuAnv =0.75(0.6)(58 ksi)( 2.04
x ( 2 2
8e b 8(3.13 in.)
epO.6Fy AgV = 0.75( 0.6)(36 ksi)( 2.53
AMERICAN IlIiSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, lNc. AMERICAN lNSTITUI'E OF STEEL Cm~sTRIuCTION, lNc.
4-72 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-73
Ubs = 0.5 because the connection has multiple rows of bolts The shear rupture strength of each splice is,
<l>Rn =<l>0.6Fu Anv +<l>Ub s Fu An t::; <l>0.6Fy Agv +<l>Ub s Fu Ant <l>Vn =0.75(0.6FJ An
=53.2kips + 0.5(52.2kips) ::; 41.0kips + 0.5(52.2kips) 2
= 0.75( 0.6 )(58 ksi)( 2.34 in. )
=79.3 kips ::; 67.1 kips
=61.1 kips > Vu 5.60 kips
V 5.60kips 2 2
=67.1 kips;;:: u 2.80 kips o.k.
2 2
Use 3/4_in. ASTM A325N bolts in standard holes to connect the splice plates
to the column flanges.
Check shear rupture
The net area of each splice plate is, The design of the splice for shear in the
be considered, but is left as an exercise
t
UPPER&
LOWERSHAFT
Given: Design a splice for the SMF column located grid 4 in Figure 4-10. The col-
umn material is ASTM A992 (~ = 50 ksi, Fu 65 ksi). The Applicable Building
Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for of loads.
tw = 0.745 in.
le, 3/S"xS"x1'-O 1/2"
W/STDHOLES
CENTERED ON COL. W14x193 Zx = 355 in. 3
FLANGE (lYP.)
The loading on the upper shaft between the and fourth levels is,
(2) 3/4"0 A325N
BOLTS @ 5 1/2"
PD = 76 kips PL = 22 kips = 6 kips
GAGE(lYP.)
VD =4 kips VL = 2 kips = O kips VQE = ±19 kips
W12x5S COL.WI From the ASCE 7, the Seismic Design is D, no = 3.0, P = 1.3, and
STDHOLES SDS= 1.0.
0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2
Figure 4-13. Connection as designed in Example 4.12 (web connection not shown).
Assume that there is no transverse loading the column supports in the
plane of bending and that the connections the column weak-axis produce
negligible moments on the column.
AMERICAN !NSTIfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR~ljJCTlON, !Nc.
r
I 4-74 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-75
Solution: Determine the required axial strength of the splice Determine the required shear c:::tncnt'rth of the web sPlice
Using the basic load combinations in ASCE 7, the maximum compressive force From Manual Table 3-2,
in the column is,
Lp = 14.1 ft
Pu =(1.2+0.2SDS)PD +PPQE +0.5PL +0.2PS {j>Mp = 1,080 kip-ft
Pu = 1.4(76 kips) + 1.3(16 kips) + 0.5 (22 kips) + 0.2(0 kips) Per Seismic Provisions Section 9.9, the shear strength of the web
= 138 kips splice is,
Tu = 0.7 (76 kips) + 1.3(-16 kips) + 1.6( O kips) By inspection' it can be seen that using the combinations in AS CE 7, the
required shear strength will be les s than calculated aboye. Therefore,
= 32.4 kips
Vu =214 kips
According to ASCE 7, since Tu is greater than zero, there is no net up1ift on the
column; therefore, the requirements of Seismic Provisions Section 8.4 do not Th develop this force through shear of the web, the required web
apply. From Figure 4-10, the unbraced length of the column is 12.5 ft. Using depth is,
Manual Table 4-1 with K = 1.0,
Vu
dw ----;-::-;-----=;-t-----;- = 9.54 in.
Since P/$cPn and T)$¡>n are both less than 0.4, Seismic Provisions Section 8.4
does not require consideration of amplified seismic loads in the design of the Therefore, the maximum length of each access hole in the direction of the
column. Therefore, the axial load for which the column was required to be web ¡s,
designed is,
u
P = 138 kips
Tbe access boles for the flange splice may not extend more tban
Determine the required flexural strength of the splice 1112 in. measured perptmdicular to tbe flange surface.
Per Seismic Provisions Section 9.9, the required flexural strength of the splice
is equal to R y Fy Zx of the smaller shaft or can be made with CJP gro ove .welds.
. Check location of splice
Since this value will be greater than the required moment strength for WhICh the
Seismic Provisions Section 9.9 requires splices be located as reqliired by
column was designed, there is no need to calculate the required flexura!
Section 8.4a. From Figute 4-10, the height the third and fourth levels
strength based on the load combinations in ASCE 7.
is 12 ft 6 in., and thecdlumn splices are
This essentially requires the splice to develop the fully yielded cross section of finished floor elevatiún. The clear distance the beam-to-column con-
the smaller column. Complete-joint-penetration groove welds on the column nections is approximately 10.8 ft. With clear distance greater than 8 ft,
web and flanges will develop this force and are also capable of developing the Seismic Ptovisions Section 8.4a requires the splice be located a iilinimum
required axial strength of the column. of 4 ft from the beam-to-column cOIme,CU(m~.
Use complete-joint-penetration groove welds to splice tbe column webs Tbe colUinn splice ÍocaÍion sbown in 4-10 is acceptable.
and flanges.
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCfrON, INC. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sn;lljJC110N, !Nc.
~---~--.--------------------------_ ..
4-76 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES
4-77
Several values are tabulated to enable quick deternrll:q;atic)fi of column panel zone shear
strength. To deternrúne if Specification Equations 110-1 or 110-12 are applicable, 0.75~ is
given for comparison with Pu' If Pu is less than 0.75~, the values of <l>RvI and <l>Rv2 can
be used to calculate the design panel zone shear <l>Rn' Considering strength of a
column without doubler plates (tp = tej),
R =0.60F d t [1+_3_b..::¡........:;_
n y e cw d
b
With <1> =1.00, expanding the Specification Equation 11 1 for design strength yields,
WELD ACCESS HOLE
PER SPECIFICATION
SECTION J1.6 (lYP.)
<l>Rn =<I>O.60Fyccw
d t + <l>0.60Fyc
d t
W14x193
/"
~ 3b
~,'. Figure 4-14. Connection as designed in Example 4.13.
<l>R 2 = <l>0.60F d t
v yccw
[ de
J
Substituting into the expanded version of Specification uation JI 0-11 for design strength,
R
<l>R =<I>R + <l> v2
n vI d
b
w/90 is tabulated to aid in the deterrnination of the mi,úmlum panel zone element thick-
nesses. It should be noted that for connections with plates at the same elevations
as the beam flanges, the table can be entered with the and the value selected in the
w/90 column will be equal to d/90. Therefore, the sum
for the SMF beam ami column will determine the rninimum panel zone element thicknesses PART 4 REFERENCES
per Seisrnic Provisions Equation 9-2, American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC). Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings, ANSIIAISC 360-05, AISC, '-'l1J."a.¡:;:.v~
American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC). . Steel Construction Manual,
Values are also tabulated to aid in the deterrnination of lateral bracing re~uire~ents: ~e 13th Ed., AISC, Chicago, IL.
. f:" L l'S th"e maxnn"'"tlm distance between lateral braces
value glven 10r b max " . spec1fied
. "m Se1sffilc American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. . (2005). Seismic Provisions for
Provisions Section 9.8. The required bracing strengthaway from plasuc hinge reglOns, equal
Structural Steel Buildings, ANSIIAISC 341-05, Chicago, IL.
to O.02Ey b'11'
t is also gt·ven. Alllateral bracing is also required to have a rninimum stiffness
".'
based on a moment equal to RyZ~. The value of this moment lS tabulated. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). (2005). Mi;ni"'tum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures, SEIIASCE 7, ASCE, Reston,
Blodgett, O.W. (1966). Design of Welded Structures,
Foundation, Cleveland, OH.
Building Seisrnic Safety CouncíL (2000). NEHRP (IVHl.I.m,ruu Earthquake Hazards Reduction
Program) Recommended Provisions for Seismic for New Buildings and Other
Structures Part 2: Commentary, FEMA 369, Emergency Management Agency,
Washington, D.e.
Galambos, T.y. (1998). Guide to Stability Design for Metal Structures, 5th Ed., John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., NewYork.
Honeck, W.e., and Westphal, D. (1999). "Practical and Detailing of Steel Column
Base Plates." Steel Tips, Structural Steel Educational Moraga, CA.
i.,
Lim, L.C. and McNamara, R.J. (1972). "Stability of Building Systems," Structural
Design of Tall Steel Buildings, VoL 11-16, Prclcel3düuls, ASCE-IABSE Intemational
Conference on the Planning and,Design ofTall DU.uUlij.g1S, Bethlehem, PA, pp. 499-524.
Moore, K.S., Malley, lO., and Engelhardt, M.D. (1999) "Design of Reduced Beam Section
(RBS) Moment Frame Connections." Steel Tips, Steel Educational Council,
Moraga, CA.
Naeím, F. (2001). The Seismic Design Handbook, 2nd ., Kluwer Academic Publishers,
Boston, MA.
SAC Joint Venture. (2000). Recommended Seismic Criteria for New Steel Moment-
Frame Buildings, FEMA 350, Federal Emergency Jt.1~mageIne]lt Agency, Washington,
D.e.
Structural Engineers Association of California .. ~Lj""'" " L '. (1999). Recommended Lateral
Force Requirements and Commentary, SEAOC, CA.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITU1E OF STEEL CONST~U(:TIOIN, !Ne.
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES 4-81
4-80
Rn = Per Specification
Eqn. J1 0-12, with $v = 1.00
No additional requirements
Panel Zone Thickness t~ (dz+wz)/90 beyond AISC Specification
a Pu greater tIlan Pu mBX results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Proviisionsl Selction 8.2 for members in combined flexure and
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~STl1~UC110N, !Nc.
4-82 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES
4-83
a Pu greater tIlan Pu max results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Sectíon 8.2 for ~embers in combined flexure and
apu greater tIlan Pu max results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisionl~ Se'cüon 8.2 for members in combined f1exure and
axial compression with Puf$J'y> 0.125. A dash indicates tIlat Pu max exceeds $bPy and the web IS compacto axial compression with Pu/$J'y> 0.125. A dash indicates that Pumaxexceeds yand the web is compatt.
a Pu greater than Pumax results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Sectíon 8.2 for ~embers in combined flexure and a Pu greater than Pumax results in 3'noncompact web per AlSC Seismic
axial compression with Pufc'ptfy> 0.125. A dash indicates that Pumax exceeds c'pbPy and the web IS compact axial compression with Pu/c'p?y > 0.125. A dash indicates that P max exceeds
u
v Shape does not meet the hltw limit for shear in Specification Section G2.1 a with Fy =50 ksi. c'p = 0.90 when applying the value of
c'pRv1 in shear calculations.
PART5
OTHER SYSTEMS UTI IZING R > 3
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !NC. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF 8TEEL CONISTR):JCfI()N, me.
5-2 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD
5-3
SCOPE
The requirements and other design considerations surnrnarized in this Part apply to seismic
load resisting systems that utilize a response modification factor, R, greater than 3 (but are
not covered in Parts 3 or 4) and members and connections that are part of the seismic load
resisting system (SLRS) but are not elements of frames.
LWi
I-!....---I-I~- -----+-:~:
Wi Fi
Level kips kips kips
Roof 765 765 200 306
4th 756 1,521 150 302
3rd 756 2,277 102
~r
302
2nd 756 3,033 54 302
BRACEDFRAMES
v.u- -F-p -_ 151 kips -_ .755 k'IpS
2 2
Figure 5-2. Floor plan for Example 5.1.
The maximum moment in the diaphragm
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s~:uCT'ION, lNe.
5-6 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORO DESIGN '-'L,,"n.L"~ ..".:,-.> 5-7
Assuming the diaphragm depth, d, is equal to 75 ft (the distance between grids ASCE 7 requires that collector elements structures assigned to Seismic Design
A and D) and the moment is resisted by chord members at each end of the Category C must be designed to resist amplified seismic loads (00 level
diaphragm, the maximum tension and compression fo~ce in the chords is, loads). Therefore,
T=C M 2270 kip-ft 30.3 kips M u =(1.2+0.2SDS )MD +OOMQE O.5ML +0.2M (ASeE 7)
d 75 ft
s
A chord member with adequate tensile strength to resist this force can be pro- Mu = 1.4 (123 kip-ft) + 2.0( o kip-ft) 0.5(96.2 kip-ft) + 0.2( o kip-ft)
vided by the addition of supplemental slab reinforcement such as ASTM A615 =220 kip-ft
Gr. 60 deformed reinforcing bars. The required area of slab reinforcement is,
The maximum shear in the diaphragm at each end; therefore the total
T
u 30.3 kips 0.561 in.2 shear force along grid 1 is 75.5 kips. L"""I~U'UUll~ an even distribution of shear
As req along the depth of the diaphragm, the demand on the diaphragm is,
<l>Fy 0.90( 60 ksi) .
u V 75.5 kips
Two #5 bars (As = 0.61 in.2 ) can be used to provide this supplemental slab re- v=-= =1.01
d 75 ft
inforcement at the chord locations. Per ACI 318 Section 21.9.5.3, additional
transverse reinforcement is not required if the extreme fiber stress in the con- A diaphragm should be selected that has a strength greater than 1.01 kips/ft.
crete is equal to or less than 0.2f;. Since the deck span is perpendicular to the The diaphragm should be attached to the (1nlilpr·tnr in order to transfer this shear.
chord span, assume that on1y tbe concrete aboye the top of the metal deck is This may be accomplished by using welds between the collector and
effective in resisting the chord force. The elastic section modulus of the metal deck or headed shear studs welded the collector.
diaphragm is,
bd 2 2 ~ in.(75 ft)2 3
S=-= =195 ft
6 6(12 in./ft)
i I
!.
The extreme fiber stress at the chord is,
diaphragm chord.
D =15.9kips II't COLLECTOR
FORCE,E
Design the wide-flange beam between grids and o e L =14.2kips
as a col/ector
The beam gravity loads and the collector axial force diagram are shown in
Figure 5-3. The moments in the beam are,
25ft
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL Co.NS~RU(:TIOIN, !Nc.
5-8 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD DESIGN -'-".L>..n.J..... 1'-'•.:....,
5-9
Using the shear demand along grid 1, the axial force in the collector at the inter-
M r.x; = 1.02( 220 kip-ft)
section of grids C and 1 is,
=224 kip-ft
QE = 25 ft(1.01 kips/ft) = 25.3 kips (tension or compression)
Using Manual Table 6-1 for cOlmbme~q loading with KLy = 12.5 ft and
Therefore, the axial load in the bearn is, Lbx = 12.5 ft,
(ASCE 7)
p = 4.43 X 10-3 kips-l = 3.97 X 10-3 (kip_ft)-l
Pu =(1.2+0.2SDS )PD +ºoP +O.5PL +0.2Ps
QE
PPr =4.43xl0-3 kips-l(50.6
Pu =1.4(0 kips )+2.0( 25.3 kips) + 0.5( O kips )+0.5( O kips)
= 50.6 kips (tension or compression) bxMr.x; =3.97XlO- (kip-ft
3
r 1
(224 ft)=0:889
1-(~:r
(Specification C2-2)
Try a W18X50.
Using Manual Table 6-1 for combined loading with KLy = 12.5 ft and
(Specification C2-l b)
Lbx = 12.5 ft,
a=1.0
p = 2.77 X 10-3 kips-l bx 3.05 X 10-3 (kip_ft)-l
Pr "" B2 Pu = 50.6 kips
PPr =2.77xlO-3 kips-l(50.6 kips =0.140
n 2 EI
P=--
el (KL)2 3
bxMr.x; =3.05 x 10- (kip-ft r 1
(224 -ft)=0.683
2,260 kips
A = !L = 50.6 kips = O 937 in 2
s req <l>Fy 0.90( 60 ksi)· .
(Specification C2-la)
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STJ>EL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.tICTION, lNe.
5-10 OTHER SYSTEMS UTll..IZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD DESIGN J..jL>c~V'''-' ••" ..'" 5-11
Ru = ~(20.7 kips)2 + (50.6 kips)2 = 54.7 kips Figure 5~. Collector connection ínv/~stiJilatt~d in Example 5.2.
AMERICAN !NSTITUIE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s",I<lUCIlON, !Nc.
5-12
OTHER SYSTEMS UTll.JZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORO DESIGN J..jA..M..lVJ.r¡LJ::'~ 5-13
6( 407 kip-in.)
t 0.471 in. >0.375 in. o.k. 7/ in . + 78
Anv =Ant =Lnet tp =[12 in.-4( /8 1/ in .)Jtp
=8tpin. 2
max
36(12 iny For shear rupture,
Check yielding of the plate under combined shear and tension (Specification J4-1)
In evaluating this limit state, the mínimum pIate thickness is ca1culated inde-
pendentIy for each force, and the resulting thicknesses are combined for the
interaction of forces using an elliptical approximation.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s'$:ucrloN, INc.
5-14 OTHER SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD DESIGN .LJH.ru. . . +,.~U 5-15
(Specification J4-2)
tP . = (t .)2 + (t . .)2
m1J'! pvm1J'! pam1J'!
2"
=~( 0.0991 iny +(0.145 in.)2
r--..,f
= 0.176 in.
04~--
I
Check block shear rupture of the plate I
•
I
In eváluating this lirnit sta~, the rninimum plate thickness is calculated independ- I
entIy for each force, and the resulting thicknesses are combined for the interaction e I
•
I
of forces using an ellipticai approximation.
I
I
Investigate the failure path 1-2-3-4 on Figure 5-5b.
0.--
For the shear force
A =2.5t in. 2
gt P
Agt = (12 in.-1.5 in.)tp = 1O.5tp in. 2 Agt =(12 in.-3 in.)tp =9tpin. 2
Anv = 2.5t p - ~(Ys in.+ Ys in}p = 2.5tp - 0.5t p = 2t p in.2 Anv -- 5 t P - (7/ . + 78
/8 m. ' ) t p -- 5t P - t P -- 4 tP m.
1 /m. . 2
<l>Rn = <1>[ 0.6FuAnv + UbsFuAnt] (Specification J4-5b) <l>Rn = <1>[ 0.6FuAnv + UbsFuAnt] (Specification J4-5b)
;¡:
~ <1>[ 0.6Fy Agv + UbsFuAnt ] ~ <1>[ 0.6Fy Agv + UbsFuAnt
Ubs = 1.0
L
~~!".\ !!
~ 0.75[ 54.0 kipslin. + 1.0(406 kipsfm.) ]
= 356 kipsfm. ~ 345 kipslin.
= 345 kipslin.
~0.75[ 108 kipsfm. + 1
= 365 kipsfm. ~ 342 kipsfm.
= 342 kipsfm.
t . =
p mm
(t pv mm.)2 + (ta mm.)2 t.
P mm (tpv mm. )2+ (ta mm. )2
=~( 0.081 in.)2 +(0.146 iny (0,081 iny +(0.148
= 0.167 in. < 0.375 o.k. = 0.169 in. < 0.375
Investigate the failure path 1-2-3-5 on Figure 5-5b.
Check block shear rupture of the web
For the shear force, conservatively using the minimum thickness determined for
path 1-2-3-4, In evaluating this limit state, the minimum thickness is calculated independ-
ently for each force,and the resulting thi,:;knejssles are combined for the interaction
. =0.081 in. 2
t pvmm of forces using an elliptical approximation.
Investigate the failure path 1-2-3-4 on
For the shear force, block shear rupture is not a limit state because the beam 50.6 kips
twamlJ7..
is not coped. However, net shear rupture can occur on the beam web. For this 366 kipsfm.
limit state,
__ R uv_
t wvmlJ7..
<!>Rn / tw
R (0.0505 inf +(0.138 inf
uv
<!>(0.6)Fu d net = 0.147 in. < t w =0.355 in.
20.7 kips
For the block shear calcuIations, a beam underrun of 1/4 in. will be assumed. The von Mises criterion will be used to the bending strength for the
For the tension force, shear stress present. The tension stress can be deducted directly from
the bending stress.
Agv =2(2 in.-0.25 in.)tw =3.5tw in. 2
-9t
Ant- . 2 3( 7/ . 1/') -6 . 2
w m. - /8 m.+ /8 m. t w - t w m.
F -. Rut
( y dt
J2 _3( Ruv J2
dt
Ysin.(12)2 3
<!>Rn = <!>[0.6FuAnv +Ubs FuAntJ Z= . = 13.5 in.
4
~<!>[0.6Fy Agv +Ubs FA]
u nt <!>Mn = <!>~rZ
= 0.90(23.4 ksi)(13.5 in.) == kip-in. > 51.8 kip-in. o.k.
<!>Rn = 0.75[97.5 kipslin.+ 1.0 ( 390 kipsfm.)] Check local buckling of the plate
tw The pIate buckling check conservatively . the presence of the tension
~0.75[ 105 kipsfm.+ 1.0(390 kipsfm.)] component on the connection, which may be present at all times.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s~.ucrION. 1Nc.
5-20 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 MAXIMUM FORCE DELIVERED BY SYSTEM DESIGN 5-21
~. J2
brace based on the foundation uplift of the system. Assume a con-
1O(0.375 in.) 475+280( 12
2.5 ffi.
crete density equal to 150 Ibs/ft3 and a density equal to 100 lbs/ft3.
%(% in.) = 0.234 in. Vsoil over mat = C~ ft}4 ft)(26 = 69.3 ft
3
Use a 1/4-in. double-sided fillet weld to connect the single plate to the
4'-0" 18'-0" 4'-0"
column flange.
PD =10 kips Po =10 kips
The single-plate connection shown in Figure 5-4 is adequate to resist the Fl =12 kips ~ =12 kips
collector forces determined in Example 5.1.
W12x26
COlB
COLA
9
ÑT------~ __~~________~~~_____+~~~--~~
2'-0" X 4'-0"
CONC. MAT.
VI . t =
sab overma (~
12 ft)(4 ft)(26 ft) = 34.7 ft3
BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED RAMES (BRBF)
Buckling-restrained braced frames are a special class concentrically braced frames. As in
Using the densities given arid sumrrúng moments at the extreme lower right the case of Special Concentrically Braced Frames the centerlines of BRBF members
comer of the mat, meet at a connection intersect or nearly intersect at a to forrn a complete vertical-truss
system that resists lateral forces. BRBF systerns more ductility and energy absorption
Dead Moment Resisting capacity than SCBF systerns because overall brace and its associated strength
Weight Arm Moment degradation, is precluded at forces and deforrnations to the design story drift.
l' EleÍnent kips ft kip-ft Buckling-restrained braced frames are composed of bearns, and bracing elements,
i
"
all of which are subjected prirnarily to axial forces. of buckling-restrained braced
Conc. Mat 31.2 13.0 406 frames are composed of a steel core and restraining encasing the steel core that pre-
Soil over Mat 6.93 13.0 90.1 vents buckling. Figure 5-7 shows a schematic of a bracing element (adapted from
Slab over Mat 5.21 13.0 67.7 Tremblay et al., 1999). The steel core within the element is intended to be the prirnary
ColumnA 10 4.00 40.0 source of energy dissipation. During a moderate to severe earthquake, the steel core is
Column B 10 22.0 220 expected to undergo significant ihelastic deforrnations.
824 BRBF systems can provide elastic stiffness that comparable to that oí an EBF or a
SCBE The ductility and energy dissipation capability BRBF is expected to be compara-
The maximum shear in the frame before it tips over is, ble to that of an EBF or SMF and greater than that . This high ductility is attained
by lirniting buckling of the steel coreo Further inforrmj.tion on the design of BRBF systems
v: = 824 kip-ft = 43.4 ki s may be found in Seisrnic Provisions Section 16, and associated cornmentary, and in the
maJe 17ft+2ft p references (Sabelli, 2004).
The length of the brace is,
Note that thls force' is substantially smaller than fue altemative design value,
R F. A = 180 kips. Therefore, this lower force can be used when the "maxi-
rriu~ torce that can be delivered by the system" is perrnitted as a design
PLAN
SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS ' A number of laboratory tests have been cOl!1dllctt~<l on special plate shear walls, and are
Special plate shear walls, sometimes referred to as Steel PIat~ Shear Walls, consist of surnmarized in AISC Design Guide 20, Steel PIate Walls. Specification requirements
columns, beams and a steel pIate element that infills the boundanes created by the columns for this system can be found in Seismic Provisions 17. Tests indicate that special
and beams. The behavior of special steel plate shear walls is somewhat analogous to a ver- plate shear walls provide a very stiff and ductile load-resisting system, capable of
dissipating significant amounts of energy.
tically cantilevered steel plate girder with the columns acting as ~e plate girder flanges, the
beams acting as the intermediate stiffeners, and the steel plate actmg as the web of the pl.ate
girder. See AISC Design Guide 20, SteeI PIate Shear Walls. Figure 5-8 .shows an elevatlOn SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAM
of a special plate shear wall. Special plate shear walls can be used as .mdependent pl~ar
Special Truss Moment Frames incorporate horizontal elements rigidly attached to ver-
walls, coupled walls linking two planar walls with a coupling beam .(which allow.s ope~mgs
tical column elements and resist lateral displacement traditional frame action. The limits
to be pIaced through the shear wall), or interconnected walls, creatmg a three-dlmenslOnal
on the horizontal truss span and depth are set by the
tube system, which is beneficial for taller structures. Speci~ plate shear walls c~ also be
The special segment is the yield mechanism of the
used as part of a dual system, utilizing moment frames deslgned to c~ a portlOn of the
of the special segment are designed and detailed to nominally elastic in order to sup-
prescribed seismic forces. The steel pIate acts as the primary shear reslstanc.e of ~e shear
port this yield Iilechanism (see 'Provisions Figure 12.2). The horizontal truss elements
wall and may be stiffened or unstiffened. When the plate of the shear. w~l IS deslgned ~s
are designed and constructed with a special segment is usually placed near mid-span of
stiffened, it is designed to prevent buckling of the plate prior to ~~ear Yle~dmg, and ~hen lt
the truss element in order to mitigate the gravity effects on the special segment. The
is designed as unstiffened, it is expected to buckle in order to utlhze tenslOn-field actlOn.
special segment can be designed and detailed either X-braced panel segments or
vierendeel panel segments, as shown in Figure 5-9. properly designed and detailed spe-
cial segment withstands large inelastic and dissipates energy through a
combination of flexural yielding of the chord and or axial yielding of the web mem-
í -, bers, depending on which type :of special segment is Specification requirements for
I I this system can be found in Seismic Provisions
I I
I I
I
~
V-NOMINALLY
ELASTIC
L ELEMENTS
í -,
I I
I I
I I
~
I
I t--- STEEL PLATE
L .J NOMINALLY
í -, ELASTIC
ELEMENTS
I I
I I
I I
I I
1I
Figure 5-8. SteeI pIate shear wall. Figure 5-9. STMF frame eL~VULj:UfL.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL COINstRuc:noN, !Nc.
OTHER SYSTEMS UTll...IZING R > 3 PART 5 REFERENCES
5-26 5-27
Galambos, T.y. (1998). Guide to Stability Design for Metal Structures, 5th Ed., John
Wiley & Sons, inc., New York
Naeim, F. (2001). The Seismic l)esign Handbook, Ed., Kluwer Academic Publishers,
Boston, MA. -l-.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COlNslIRuc:noN, !Nc.
5-28 OTHER SYSTEMS UTnJZING R > 3
Tamboli, A.R. (1999). Handbook of Structural Steel Connection Design and Details, McGraw- ANSI!AISC 341-05
HiU, New York. ANSI!AISC 341 s 1-05
An American National Standard
Tremblay, R. (1999). "Seismic Behavior and Design of Concentrically Braced Steel Frames,"
Engineering Journal, Vol. 36, No. 3, pp. 148-166, American Institute of Steel Construction,
Chicago, ll.,.
Approved by the
Committee on Specifications and
by the AISC Board of Directors
This Preface is not a part of ANSIIAISC 341-05, Provisions for Structural Steel
Buildings, but is included for informational pUlrpose$
These Provisions are presented in two parts: Part I is 'f"''''''~''"'U for the design and construction
of structural steel buildings, and is written in a format that addresses both LRFD
The AISC logo is a registe red trademark 01 AISC and is used under license.
and ASD; Part 11 is intended for the design and of composite structural steeV
reinforced concrete buildings, and is written to LRFD only. In addition, seven
The informationpresented in this publication has been prepared in accordance with
mandatory appendices, a list of Symbols, and are part of this document. Terms
recognized engineering principIes and is for general information onIy. While it is
that appear in the Glossary are generally italicized they first appear in a sub-section,
believed to be accurate, tbis information should not be used or relied upon for any
throughout these Provisions. A nonmandatory with background information is
specific application without competent professional examination and verification also provided.
of its accuracy, suitability, and applicability by a licensed engineer, architect or
other professional. The publication ofthe material contained herein is not intended The previous edition of the AISC Seismic for Structural Steel Buildings,
as a representation or warranty on the part of the American Institute of Steel approved on May 21, 2002, incorporated many of advances achieved as part of the
Construction, Inc., or of any other person named herein, that this information FEMNSAC program and other investigations and developments related to the seismic
is suitable for any general or particular use or of freedom from infringement of design of steel buildings. Recognizing that rapid significant changes in the knowledge
any patent or patents. Anyone making use of tbis ipformation assumes allliability base were occurring for the seismic design of steel especially moment frames, the
arising from such use. AISC Committee on Specifications committed to frequent supplements to the
Provisions. This commitment was intended to keep provisions as current as possible.
Caution must be exercised when relying upon other specifications and codes
developed by other bodies and incorporated by reference herein since such material These Provisions were modified to be consistent SEllAS CE 7-05, Minimum Design
may be modified or ~ended from time to time subsequent to the printing of this Loadf for Buildings and Other Structures. Although . standard adopts SEllAS CE 7-02,
edition. The American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. bears no responsibility it was)being developed in parallel with SEIIASCE . It is anticipated that ASCE will
for such material other than to refer to it and incorporate it by reference at the publish a supplement to SEIIASCE 7-05 in 2006 will adopt ANSI!AISC 341 and 360
timeof the initial publication of tbis edition. by reference. We encourage anyone who is using AISC standards to use them in
conjunction with SEIIASCE 7-05 including :sul~pllemt:tnt No. 1, when it becomes available.
Second Printing October 2006
This allows these Provisions to be incorporated by r~tlerelnce into both the 2006 mc and
2006 NFPA 5000 building codes, each of which uses ASCE 7-05 as its basis for design
loadings. Because the extent of changes that have made to these Provisions, as a result
of incorporating both technical changes and the format is so large, they are being
republished in their entirety. The most significant . is that two systems initially
developed and incorporated into the 2003 NEHRP the buckling-restrained braced
frame (BRBF) and the special plate shear wall have been added to the Provisions. A
major update to the commentary is also provided.
Seismic Provisionsfor Stnlctural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COI'lSplUCII0N, INc.
6.1-iv PREFACE
PREFACE
• Clarifying that the scope of structures covered ineludes "building-like nonbuilding TheAISC Committee on Specifications, Task COIIIllrut~ee 9-Seismic Provisions is responsible
structures." for the ongoing development of these Provisions. AISC Cornmittee on Specifications
• Clarifying that all steel buildings designed with an R factor greater than 3 must comply gives final approval of the document through an balloting process, and
with the Provisions. has enhanced these Provisions through careful discussion, and suggestions for
improvement. AISC further acknowledges the contributions of .several groups
• Adding new requirements to delineate the expectations for structural design drawings
to the completion of this document: the Building Safety Council (BSSC), the SAC
and specifications, shop drawings and erection drawings.
Joint Venture, the Federal Emergency Management (FEMA), the National Science
• Adding new ASTM material specifications that are cornmonly used in the metal building Foundation (NSF), and the Structural Engineers of California (SEAOC).
industry.
The reader is cautioned that professional must be exercised when data or
• Adding Rt values for all materials to be used in determining susceptibility of connections recommendations in these provisions are applied, as more ful1y in the diselaimer
to fracture limit states. notice preceding the Preface.
• Relaxing the limitations on use of oversized holes in bolted joints. This specification was approved by the AISC cOlmrmttee on Specifications:
• Defining a new term, "demand critical welds," which have additional quality and James M. Fisher, Chairman
toughness requirements. For each system, welds considered to be demand critical are Roger E. Ferch, Vice Chairman
defined. Hansraj G. Ashar
• Defining a new term, "protected zone," to ensure that areas subject to significant William F. Baker . Leon
inelastic deformations are not disturbed by other building construction operations. For John M. Barsom . Lindsey
each system, what areas are considered to be protected zones are defined. William D. Bast Malley
Reidar Bjorhovde . Marshall (deceased)
• Expanding the applicability of requirements on splices in columns that are part of the Roger L. Brockenbrough
seismic load resisting system in moment frames to all systems. Gregory G. Deierlein
• Improving the provisions related to the design of column bases. Duane S. Ellifritt
Broce R. Ellingwood
• Making the stability bracing requirements more consistent throughout the document.
Michael Engelhardt
• Added references to the new AISC Prequalified Connections for Special and Shu-Jin Fang
Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications (ANSI/AISC 358-05) as "Steven J. Fenves
one means for SMF, IMF and EBF (link-to-column) connection acceptance. John W. Fisher
• Decreasing the column splice shear capacity requirements for SMF systems. Timothy P. Fraser
Theodore V. Galambos
• Increasing the stability bracing requirements for IMF systems. Louis F. Geschwindner
• Clarifying that connections meeting the requirements for SMF or IMF systems are al so Lawrence G. Griffis
acceptable for OMF applications. John L. Gross Duncan, Secretary
• Increasing the requirements on SCBF systems that employ braces with high KlJr ratios. The Committee grateful1y acknowledges the ~VJ.~V'fV'~JI¡'; task committee (TC 9-Seismic
• Reducing the connection force demand on OCBF bracing to allow the use of the Design) for their development of this document.
amplified seismic load. James O. Malley, Chairman
• Eliminating the requirement to design all members in OCBF systems for the amplified Mark C. Saunders, Vice Chairman
Roy Becker
seismíc load, done for consistency with a corresponding reduction in the R factor for
this system in SEI/ASCE 7-05 inc1uding Supplement 1. Gregory G. Deierlein
Richard M. Drake
• Adding specific requirements for OCBF aboye seismic isolation systems. Michael D. Engelhardt
• Significantly improving the provisions related to quality assurance and quality control Roger E. Ferch
to address many ofthe issues identified in FEMA 353. Timothy P. Fraser
Subhash C. Goel
• Making changes to Part 11 to be consistent with the modifications to Part I and changes
James R. Harris Secretary
toAC1318.
Patrick M. Hassett
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions lor Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNS1TIUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc.
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OFSTEEL C01N"STI~uc:noN, INC.
6.1-vi
6.1-vii
TABLEOFCO NTS
1. SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6. MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 18
8. l\1EMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 24
8.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 24
8.2. Classific&tion of Sections for Local ..................... 24
8.2a~ Compact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 24
8.2b. Seismically Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 24
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc.
AMERICAN msTlTUTE OF STEEL mc.
6.1-vüi TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLEOF
6.1-ix
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, indo Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNS1TfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc. AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF S1EEL , lNe.
6.1-x TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF r'f"\l\,:rT'lD\l..rrrC'
6.1-xi
13.5. Coluron Spliees ............................................. :~ 17. SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS ·········· ................ 58
13.6. Proteeted Zone ............................................ .
17.1. Scope ..................... " ............................ 58
14. ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (OCBF) ......... 48 17.2. Webs .................................................... 59
17.2a. Shear Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 59
14.1. Seope .................................................... 48
17.2b. Panel Aspeet Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 59
14.2. Braeing Members ........................................... 48
17.2c. Openings in Webs. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 59
14.3. Special Braeing Configuration Requirements ..................... 48
. ConneetlOns
. 17.3. Connections ofWebs to Boundary .I:11~~m~mts ...................... 59
14.4. Braemg ................................ ········ 49
17.4. Horizontal and Vertical Boundary ...................... 59
14.5. OCBF aboye Seismic Isolation Systems ......................... 49
17.4a. Required Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 59
14.5a. Braeing Members ........................................... 49
17.4b. HBE-to-VBE Connections . . . . . .. . ........................... 60
14.5b. K-Type Bracing ............................................ 49
14.5e. V-Type and Inverted-V-Type Bracing ............................ 50 17.4c. Width-Thiekness Limitations. . . .. . ........................... 60
17.4d. Lateral Bracing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 60
15. ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (EBF) ....................... 50 17.4e. VBE Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 60
17.4f. Panel Zones ..... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 60
~~::. ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: :::::::~~
15.1.
15.2. 17.4g. Stiffness of Vertical Boundary blem~:nts ......................... 60
15.2a. Limitations ................................................ 50
18. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN .................................... 60
15.2b. Shear Strength ............................................. 50
15.2e. Link Rotation Angle ......................................... 51 18.1. Scope .................................................... 60
15.3. Link Stiffeners ............................................. 51
15.4. Link-to-Column Conneetions .................................. 52 APPENDIX P. PREQUALIFICATION OF "'~.n.~"Jl-'-"'VLJU.1YJU '"
15.5. Lateral Braeing ofLink ...................................... 53 AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS
15.6. Diagonal Braee and Beam Outside of Link ....................... 53
15.6a. Diagonal Braee ............................................. 53 PI. SCOPE .......... " ............................................. 62
15.6b. Beam Outside Link .......................................... 53
15.6e. Bracing Connections ........................................ 54
P2. GENERAL REQUlREMENTS " . . . . . .. . .......................... 62
15.7. Beam-to-Column Connections ................................. 54
15.8. Required Strength of Columns ................................. 54 P2.1. Basis for Prequalification. . . . . . . .. . .......................... 62
15.9. Protected Zone ............................................. 54 P2.2. Authority for Prequalification . . . .. . .......................... 62
15.10. Demand Critical Welds ....................................... 55
P3. TESTING REQUlREl\1ENTS . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 62
16. BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF) ............... 55
P4. PREQUALIFICATION VARIABLES. . .. . .......................... 63
16.1. Scope .................................................... 55
16.2. Bracing Members ........................................... 55
P5. DESIGN PROCEDURE ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 65
16.2a. Steel Core ................................................. 55
16.2b. Buck1ing-Restraining System .................................. 55
Testing ................................................... 56 P6. PREQUALIFICATION RECORD. . . . . .. . .......................... 65
16.2c.
16.2d. Adjusted Brace Strength ...................................... 56
16.3. . ConnectlOns
Bracmg . ............................ ············ 57 APPENDIX Q. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
16.3a. Required Strength ........................................... 57
16.3b. Gusset Plates ............................................... 57
QI. SCOPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 66
16.4. Special Requirements Related to Bracing Configuration ............. 57
16.5. Beams and Columns ......................................... 58
Q2. INSPECTION ANDNONDESTRUCTIVE PERSONNEL ..... 66
16.5a. Width-Thickness Limitations .................................. 58
16.5b. Required Strength ........................... : ............... 58
16.5c.
16.6. ~~~~::ed .~~~~ :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~: Q3. CONTRACTOR DOC;uMENTS .................................... 66
Seisrnic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seisrnic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERIcAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~stR:UCTloN,INC.
6.1-xii TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.1-xiii
Q5. INSPECTION POINTS AND FREQUENCIES ........................ 68 S8. MATERlALS TESTING RE~QU1RE1\1El~tS .......................... 81
Q5.1. Visual Welding Inspection .................................... 68 S8.1. Tension Testing Requirements for Steel ................. 81
Q5.2. Nondestructive Testing (NDT) of Welds ......................... 70 S8.2. Methods ofTeI;lsion Testingfor Steel ................... 81
Q5.3. Inspection of Bolting ........................................ 72 S8.3. Weld Metal Testing Requirements .............................. 82
Q5.4. Other Inspections ......... _.................................. 73
S9. TEST REPORTING REQUIREl\1ENTS.. . .......................... 82
APPENDIX R. SEISMIC DESIGN COEFFICIENTS AND APPROXIMATE
PERIOD PARAMETERS S10. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 83
APPENDIX S. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BEAM-TO-COLUMN T4. SUBASSEMBLAGE TEST SPECIl\1EN .............................. 85
AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS
T5. BRACE TEST SPECIMEN . ........................................ 86
SI. SCOPE ......................................................... 76
T5.1. Design of Brace Test Specimen ................................ 86
T5.2. Manufacture of Brace Test Specimen ............................ 86
S2. SYMBOLS ...................................................... 76 T5.3. Similarity of Brace Test Specimen Prototype .................. 86
T5.4. Connection Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 86
S3. DEFINITIONS ................................................... 76 T5.5. Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 86
T5.6. Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 87
S4. TEST SUBASSEMBLAGE REQUIREMENTS ........................ 77
T6. LOADING HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 87
S5. ESSENTIAL TEST VARIABLES . ................................... 77 T6.1. General Requirements .......... " .......................... 87
S5.1. Sources ofInelastic Rotation .................................. 77 T6.2. Test Control .. ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 87
S5.2. Size of Members ............................................ 78 T6.3. Loading Sequen~e . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 87
S5.3. Connection Details .......................................... 78 T7. INSTRUMENTATION ............ . . . .. . ......................... 88
S5.4. Continuity Plates ........................................... 78
S5.5. Material Strength ........................................... 78 T8. MATERlALS TESTING REQUIRI~Ml83N1rS .......................... 88
S5.6. Welds .................................................... 79
S5.7. Bolts ..................................................... 79 T8.1. Tension Testing Requirements . . . . .. . ......................... 88
T8.2. Methods of Tension Testing . . . . . . .. . ......................... 88
S6. LOADING HISTORY ............................................. 80
T9. TEST REPORTING REQUIREl\1ENTS . ............................. 88
S6.1. General Requirements ....................................... 80
S6.2. Loading Sequence for Beam-to-Column Moment Connections ....... 80 TI0.
S6.3. Loading Sequence for Link-to-Column Connections ............... 81 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ........................................ 89
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, mc. AMERICAN mSTITUTE OF STEEL INc.
- - - - - - _ . __._----------------------
6.1-xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF r"'r..."T'T'1~"¡"'~"
6.1-xv
W3. PERSONNEL .................................................... 91 4. LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND ""'-J'H'.. Ui ,,"",., STRENGTHS ..... 102
W3.1. QC Welding Inspectors ....................................... 91 4.1. Loads and Load Combinations. . . .. . ......................... 102
W3.2. QA Welding Inspectors ...................................... 91 4.2. Nominal Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 102
W3.3. Nondestructive Testing Technicians ............................. 91
5. MATERIALS ....................... . '" ......... ···· .......... 102
W4. NONDESTRUCTlVE TESTING PROCEDURES ...................... 92
5.1. Structural Steel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 102
W4.1. Ultrasonic Testing ........................................... 92 5.2. Concrete and Steel Reinforcement.. . ........................ , 102
W4.2. Magnetic Particle Testing ..................................... 92
6. COMPOSITE MEMBERS ........... " .......................... 103
W5. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVISIONS ............................ 92
6.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ ~ 103
W5.1. Intermixed Filler Metals ...................................... 92 6.2. Composite Floor and Roof Slabs .............................. 103
W5.2. Filler Metal Diffusible Hydrogen ............................... 92 6.2a. Load Transfer .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W5.3. Gas-Shielded Welding Processes ............................... 92 6.2b. Nominal ShearStrength ..................................... 103
W5.4. Maximum Interpass Temperatures .............................. 92 6.3. Composite Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W5.5. Weld Tabs ................................................. 93 6.4. Encased Composite Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W5.6. Bottom Flange Welding Sequence .............................. 93 6.4a. Ordinary Seismic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.4b. Intermediate System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
W6. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVISIONS FOR DEMAND
6.4c. Special Seismic System ......................... 105
CRITICAL WELDS ONLY ........................................ 93
6.5. Filled Composite Columns. . . . . . . .. ......................... 107
W6.1. Welding Processes .......................................... 93
7. COMPOSlTE CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 108
W6.2. Filler Metal Packaging ....................................... 94
W6.3. Exposure Limitations on FCAW Electrodes ................ , ...... 94 7.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 108
W6.4. Tack Welds ................................................ 94 7.2. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .. ......................... 108
7.3. Nominal Strength of Connections . .. . ........................ 108
APPENDIX X. WELD METAL/WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION 8. COMPOSITE PARTIALLY RESTRAINED (PR) MOMENT FRAMES
NOTCH TOUGHNESS VERIFICATION TEST
(C-PRMF') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 110
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incI. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, ¡nc1. Supplement No. 1
.AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL COt~S'rnIUcrlON, mc.
6.1-xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLEOF 6.1-xvii
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTl11ITE OF STEEL CONISTlh¡cTIClN, !Nc.
6.1-xviii TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF rV',,'''T'T'1C''''.T~rlC' 6.1-xix
C7.3. Welded Joints ............................................. 138 Cll. ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (OMF). . ........................ 170
C7.4. Ptotected Zone .......... : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cl1.1. Scope .................................................. 170
C7.5. Continuity PI ates and Stiffeners ...... ~ ........................ 141
C 11.2. Beam-to-CoIumn Connections. . . . .. ......................... 171
cs. MEMBERS ..................................................... 142 C11.2a. Requirements: FR Moment ........................ 171
C11.2b. Requirements: PR Moment ........................ 173
C8.1. Scope ................................................... 142 C11.5. Continuity PIates ......................................... 173
C8.2. Classification of Sections for Local Buckling .................... 143
C8.3. Column Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 C12. SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES .. : .................. 174
C8.4. Column Splices ............................................ 144 C12.1. Scope......................... . ........................ 174
C8.4a. General. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 C12.2. Special Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 176
C8.4b. Columns Not Part ofthe Seismic Load Resisting System ........... 146 C12.3. Strength of Special Segment Me,mbler~ ......................... 176
C8.5. Column Bases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 C12.4. Strength of Non-Special Segment ..................... 176
C8.5a. Required Axial Strength ..................................... 147 C 12.5. Width-Thickness Limitations. . . . . .. ......................... 177
C8.5b. Required Shear Sfrength ..................................... 147 C12.6. Lateral Bracing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 177
C8.5c. Required Flexural Strength .................................. 149
H-Piles .... " ............................................. 153 C13. SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED "'~J.Y""':''''' (SCBF) .......... 177
C8.6.
C8.6a. Design of H-Piles .......................................... 153 C13.1. Scope......................... . ........................ 177
C8.6b. Battered H-Piles ........................................... 153 C13.2. Members....................... . ........................ 181
C8.6c. Tension in H-Piles ......................................... 155 C13.2a. Slendemess. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 181
C13.2b. Required Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 181
C9. SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF) .............................. 155
C13.2c. Lateral Force Distribution .. . . . . . .. . ........................ 182
C9.1. Scope ................................................... 157 C13.2d. Width-Thickness Limitations. . . . . .. . ........................ 182
C9.2. Beam-to-Column Connections ................................ 157 C13.2e. Built-Up Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 183
C9.2a. Requirements ............................................. 157 C13.3. Required Strength ofBracing Co:nne~cti,ons ...................... 184
C9.2b. Conformance Demonstration ................................. 158 C13.3a. Required Tensile Strength . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 184
C9.3. Panel Zone ofBeam-to-Column Connections C13.3b. Required Flexural Strength ........ . ........................ 185
(beam web parallel to column web) ............................ 159 C13.4. Special Bracing Configuration .................... 186
C9.4. Beam and Column Limitations ................................ 162 C13.4a. V-Type and Inyerted V-Type Bracing. . ........................ 186
C9.5. ContiIiuity Plates .......................................... 162 C13.4b. K-Type Bracing ............... " ......................... 186
C9.6. Column-Beam Moment Ratio ................................ 164 C13.5. Column Splices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 187
C9.7. Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 C13.6. Protected Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 187
C9.7a. Braced Connections ........................................ 165 C14. ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY VO.l.",,.,,,...,.,p FRAMES (OCBF) ........ 188
C9.7b. Unbraced Connections ..................................... 166
C9.8. Lateral Bracing ofBeams .................................... 166 C14.1. Scope......................... . ........................ 188
C9.9. ColUinn Splices............................................ 167 C14.2. Bracing Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 189
C14.3. Special Bracing Configuration .................... 190
cio. INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (IMF) ....................... 168 C14.4. Bracing Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 190
CID.1. Scope ................................................... 168 C14.5. OCBF aboye Seismic Isolation ........................ 190
ClO.2. Beain-to-Column Connections ................................ 169 C14.5a. Bracing Members . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . ........................ 190
ClO.2b. Conformance Demonstration ................................. 169 C14.5b. K-Type Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 191
ClO.2d. Protected Zone ............................................ 169 C14.5c. V-Type and Inyerted-V-Type Bracing. . ........................ 191
ClO.4. Beám and Column Limitations ................................ 169
ClO.4a. Width-Thickness Limitations ................................. 169
CiO.4b. Beam Flanges ............................................. 170
ClO.5. Continuity Plates .......................................... 170
ClO.8. Lateral Bracing ofBeams .................................... 170
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, me. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CO''IS11lUClI10N, lNe.
6.1-xx TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLEOF 6.1-xxi
C15. ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (EBF) ...................... 191 CP3. TESTING REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 223
CI5.1. Scope ................................................... 191
CI5.2. Links .................................................... 193 CP4. PREQUALIFICATIOlN VARIABLES. . .. . ......................... 224
CI5.3. Link Stiffeners ............................................ 196
CI5.4. Link-to-Column Connections ................................. 196 CP5. DESIGN PROCEDURE ............. " .......................... 224
C15.5. Lateral Bracing ofLink ..................................... 197
C15.6. Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Links ..................... 198 CP6. PREQUALIFICATION RECORD. . . . . .. . ......................... 225
C15.7. Beam-to-Column Connection................................. 202
C15.8. Required Strength of Columns ................................ 203
APPENDIX Q. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
C16. BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF) .............. 204
CI6.1. Scope ................................................... 204 CQI. SCOPE ....................................................... 226
C16.2. Bracing Members .......................................... 207
C 16.2a. Steel Core ................................................ 207 CQ2. INSPECTION AND NONDESTRUCTlVE tE:STING PERSONNEL. .... 227
C16.2b. Buckling-Restraining System ................................. 208
C16.2c. Testing .................................................. 208 CQ3. CONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS ................................... 227
C16.2d. Adjusted Brace Strength ..................................... 209
C16.3. Bracing Connections ....................................... 210 CQ4. QUALITY ASSURANCE AGENCY ................... 227
CI6.4. Special Requirements Related to Bracing Configuration ............ 211
C16.5. Beams and Columns ....................................... 211 CQ4.1. Visual Welding Inspection ................................... 228
CQ4.2. Nondestructive Testing (NDT) of ........................ 228
C17. SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (SPSW) ......................... 212
C17.1. Scope ................................................... 212 APPENDIX R. SEISMIC DESIGN r<f\.VPl",Tf'ITP"h",c- AND APPROXIMATE
CI7.2. Webs .................................................... 214 PERIOD PARAMETERS
C17.2a. Shear Strength ............................................ 214
C17.2b. Panel Aspect Ratio ......................................... 215 CRI. SCOPE ........................................................ 231
CI7.2c. Openings in Webs .......................................... 215
C17.3. Connections ofWebs to Boundary Elements ..................... 216
C17.4. Horizontal and Vertical Boundary Elements ..................... 216 APPENDIX S. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS BEAM-TO-COLUMN
C17.4a. Required Strength .......................................... 216 AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS
C17.4c. Width-Thickness Lirnitations ................................. 219
C 17.4d. Lateral Bracing ............................................ 219 CSI. SCOPE.............................. . ........................ 232
CI7.4f. Panel Zones .............................................. 219
C17.4g. Stiffness ofVertical Boundary Elements ........................ 219 CS3. DEFINITIONS ................................................. 233
C18. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN ................................... 219
CS4. TEST SUBASSEMBLAGE REIQUIID~Ml~N~[,S ....................... 234
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, Ínel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, Ínel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUfE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONs"Ii.LICITe'N, !Ne.
6.1-xx.ii TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLEOF 6.1-xxiii
CS8. MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREMENTS ......................... 239 CWS. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVISIONS ........................... 253
CSlO. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ....................................... 240 CW5.1. Intennixed Filler Metals. . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 253
CW5.2. Filler Metal Diffusible HydTogen. .. . ......................... 254
CW5.3. Gas-Shielded Welding Prdcesses . .. . ......................... 254
APPENDIX T. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS CW5.4. Maximuin Interpass Temperatures.. . ......................... 254
OF BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACES CW5.5. Weld Tabs ... : ............... " .......................... 255
CW5.6. Bottom Flange WeIct1ng Sequence.. . ......................... 255
CTl. SCOPE ........................................................ 242 CW6. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVISIONS
DEMAND CRITICAL WELDS ONLY . .. . ......................... 255
CT2. SYMBOLS ..................................................... 243
CW6.1. Welding Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 255
CT3. DEFINITIONS .................................................. 243 CW6.2. Filler Metal Packaging. . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 256
CW6.3. Exposure Limitations on FCAW ..................... 256
CT4. SUBASSEMBLAGE TEST SPECIMEN ............................. 243 CW6.4. Tack Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 256
CT5. BRACE TEST SPECIMEN ........................................ 246 APPENDIX x. WELD METALrWELDING nn,nr<r.o-n.TTT1oT.'O SPECIFICATION
NOTCH TOUGHNESS VERIFICATION TEST
CT5.4. Connection DetaiIs ......................................... 247
CT5.5. Materials ................................................. 247
CXI. SCOPE.............................. . ......................... 257
CT5.6. Connections .............................................. 247
CT6. LOADING mSTORY ............................................ 247 CX2. TEST CONDITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 258
CT6.3. Loading Sequence ......................................... 247
CX3. TEST SPECIMENS .............................................. 259
CT8. MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREMENTS ......................... 249
CX4. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ....................................... 260
CTlO. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ....................................... 249
CW2. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, C2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, '-''\Jf~.Q,o.AND STANDARDS ....... 262
SHOP DRAWINGS,AND ERECTION DRAWINGS .................. 251
C3. GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN RE'QUIRlC$18:N1fS ................... 263
CW3. PERSONNEL ................................................... 252
CW3.1. QC WeIding Inspectors ...................................... 252 C4. STRENGTHS ..... 263
CW3.2. QA WeIding Inspectors ..................................... 252
CW3.3. Nondestructuve Testing Technicians ........................... 252 CS. MATERIALS ..... '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 263
CW4. NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING PROCEDURES ..................... 253 C6. COMPOSITE MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 264
C6.1. Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 264
C6.2. Composite Floor and Roof Slabs . . .. . ........................ 264
C6.3. Composite Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 265
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITIlTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONs~lrCfIc.N, !Nc.
6.1-xxiv TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.1-1
C9.1. Scope ................................................... 276 As Cross-sectional area of the structural steel in. 2 (mm2) •••.•••• (TI-6)
C9.2. Columns ................................................. 276 2
Area of the yielding segment of steel core, 2 (mm ) • • • • • • • • • • • • (1-16)
C9.3. Beams ................................................... 276
2
C9.4. Moment Connections ....................................... 277 Minimum area of tie reinforcement, in. ................. (TI-6)
ClO. COMPOSíTE INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (C-IMF) ........ 279 Horizontal area of the steel plate in shear wall,
2 2
in. (mm ) • • • • • • • . • • • • . • • • . • . • • • • • . • • •...••••.••.•••••• (TI-17)
Cll. COMPOSITE ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (C-OMF) ............ 279 Area of link stiffener, in. (mm
2 2
) . • . • • . • •• • ••..•••••••••••••• (1-15)
2 2
C12. COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES Link web area, in. (mm ) • • • • . • • . . • . • . • . • • • . . • • • • . • • • . . • • • (1-15)
(C-CBF) ........................................................ 279 Ratio of required stre~gth to available ................. (Table 1-8-1)
Coefficient relating relative brace stiffness curvature ......... (1-9)
C13. COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAMES (C-OBF) .............. 282
C d Deflection amplification factor. . . . . . . . .. . .................. (I-R2)
C14. COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (C-EBF) ....... 282
Parameter used for determining the apJJro;tinjlate fundamental
period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. (1-R2)
C15. ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE
WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS (C-ORCW) .............. 283 D Dead load due to the weight of the structural and
permanent features on the building, kips (N) ................... (1-9)
C16. SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE D Outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm) ...................... (Table 1-8-1)
WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS (C-SRCW) ............... 284
E Earthquake load .......................................... (1-4)
C17. COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (C-SPW) .............. 287 E Effect of horizontal and vertical earthQluak:e-i~~duced loads ........ (1-9)
E Modulus of elasticity of steel, E = 29,000 ksi MPa) ...... (1-8)
ClS. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWlNGS AND SPECIFICATIONS,
SHOP DRAWlNGS AND ERECTION DRAWlNGS ................... 289 El Flexural elastic stiffness of the chord of the special
2 2
segment, kip-in. (N-mm ). • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • ••••••••••••••••• (1-12)
C19. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN ................................... 289
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~~.ucrloN, !Nc.
6.1-2 SYMBOLS S YMBOLS 6.1-3
Specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel to be used, Additional moment due to shear from the location
ksi (MPa). As used in the Specification, "yield stress" denotes of the plastic hinge to the column based on ASD load
either the minimum specified yield point (for those steels that combinations, kip-in. (N-mm). . . . . . . . .. . ................... (1-9)
have a yield point) or the specified yield strength (for those steels
that do not have a yield point) ............................... (1-6) Nominal flexural strength, kip-in. (N-mm) .................... (1-11)
Mnc Nominal flexural strength of the chord of the special
Fy of a beam, ksi (MPa) .................................... (1-9)
segment, kip-in. (N-mm) ................................. (1-12)
F y of a column, ksi (MPa) .................................. (1-9)
Nominal plastic flexural strength, kip-in.
Specified minimum yield stress of the ties, ksi (MPa) ............ (11-6)
Nominal plastic flexural strength modified axial load, kip-in.
Specified minimum yield stress of the steel core, or actual yield (N-mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................... (1-15)
stress of fue steel core as determined from a coupon test, ksi (MPa) . (1-16)
Nominal plastic flexural strength of the kip-in. (N-mm) ..... (1-9)
Specified minimum tensile strength, ksi (MPa) ................. (1-6)
Expected plastic moment, kip-in. (N-mm) ..................... (1-9)
H Height of story, which may be taken as the distance between the
centerline of floor framing at each of the levels aboye and below, Nominal plastic flexural strength of the kip-in. (N-mm) .... (1-8)
or the distance between the top of floor slabs at each of the levels Mr Expected flexural strength, kip-in. (N-mm) ..................... (1-9)
aboye and below, in. (mm) .................................. (1-8)
Additional moment due to shear from the location
1 Moment of inertia, in. 4 (mm4 ) ••••.••••••••.••.••••.••.•.••.• (1-12) of the plastic hinge to the column based on LRFD load
Moment of inertia of a vertical boundary element (VBE) taken combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................... (1-9)
perpendicular to the direction of the web pI ate line, in. 4 (mm4) ••••• (1-17) Required flexural strength, using LRFD combinations, kip-in.
K Effedive length factor for prismatic member ................... (1-13) (N-mm) .......... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......... : ....... (1-9)
L Live load due to occupanGy and moveable equipment, kips (kN) .... (11-6)
Mu,exp Expected required flexural strength, kip-in.
L Span length of the truss, in. (mm) ............................ (1-12) Required axial strength of a column using load combinations,
kips (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. (1-8)
L Distaiice between VBE centerlines, in. (Iilm) ...............•... (1-17)
Required compressive strength using ASD combinations,
LeIigth between points which are either braced against lateral kips (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. (1-9)
displacement of compression flange or braced against twist of the
cross section, in. (mm) ..................................... (1-13) Required strength oflateral brace at ends of link, kips (N) ...... (1-15)
Link length, in. (mm) ...................................... (1-15) Available axial strength of a column, kips .................. (1-9)
Clear distance between VBE flanges, in. (mm) .................. (1-17) Nominal axial strength of a column, kips ................... (1-8)
Distance between plastic hinge 10cations, in. (mm) .............. (1-9) Nominal compressive strength of the column
calculated in accordance with the kips (N) .......... (11-6)
Limiting laterally unbraced length for full plastic flexural strength,
uniform moment case, in. (mm) ............................. (1-12) Nominal axial compressive strength of members of
the special segment, kips (N). . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. (1-12)
Limiting laterally unbraced length for plastic analysis, in. (mm) .... (1-13)
Nominal axial tensile strength of diagonal of the
Length ofthe special segment, in. (mm) ....................... (1-12) special segment, kips (N) ................................... (1-12)
Required flexural strength, using ASD load combinations, kip-in. Nominal axial strength of a composite at zero eccentricity,
(N-mm) ................................................ (1-9) kips (N) ............................................... '. (ll-6)
Pr Required compressive strength, kips (N) ....................... (1-15)
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
- AMERICAN !NSTITlITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~stR:ucrlON, !Ne.
6.1-4 SYMBOLS SYMBOLS
6.1-5
P rc Required compressive strength using ASD or LRFD load Maximum distance from the maximum co crete compression
combinations, kips (N) ..................................... (1-9) fiber to the plastic neutral axis, in. (mm) ....................... (lI-9)
Pu Required axial strength of a column or a link using LRFD load Z Plastic section modulus of a member, in. 3 mm3) •..••••.••••..•• (1-9)
combínations, kips (N) ..................................... (1-8) 3
Plastic section modulus of the beam, in. ( 3) . . . . . • . • . • . • • • . • • (1-9)
Pu Required axial strength of a composite column, kips (N) .......... (lI-9) 3
Plastic section modulus of the column, in. (mm3) .•••••.•••••••• (1-9)
P ue Required compressive strength using LRFD load combinations, 3
kips (N) ................................................ (1-9) Plastic section modulus x-axis, in. (mm\ ..................... (1-8)
ZRBS Mínimum plastic section modulus at the re uced beam section,
Py Nominal axial yield strength of a member, equal to FyAg, kips (N) .. (~able 1-8-1) 3 3
in. (mm ) . . . . • . • . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • (1-9)
Pyse Axial yield strength of steel core, kips (N) ..................... (1-16)
a Angle that diagonal members make with horizontal ........... (1-12)
Qb Maximum unbalanced vertical load effect applied to a beam by b Width of compression element as defined i Specification
the braces, kips (N) ....................................... (1-13)
Section B4.1, in. (mm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................... (Table 1-8-1)
QI Axial forces and moments generated by at least 1.25 times the
expected nominal shear strength of the link .................... (1-15) Width of column flange, in. (mm). . . . . .. . ................... (1-9)
b¡ Flange width, in. (mm) .................................... (1-9)
R Seismic response modification coefficient ..................... (1-1)
Width of the concrete cross-section minus e width of the
Rn Nominal strength, kips (N) ................................. (1-6)
structural shape measured perpendicular to e direction
R¡ Ratio of the expected tensile strength to the specified minimum of shear, in. (mm) ......................................... (n-6)
tensile strength Fu, as related to overstrength in material yield d
stress Ry ................................................ (1-6) Nominal fastener diameter, in. (mm) .......................... (1-7)
d Overall beam depth, in. (mm) ............................... (1-15)
Ru Required strength ......................................... (1-9)
Panel zone nominal shear strength ............................ (1-9) Overall column depth, in. (mm) .............................. (1-9)
Rv
Ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified minimum yield Overall panel zone depth between continuit plates, in. (mm) ...... (1-9)
Ry
stress, Fy • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • (1-6) e EBF link length, in. (mm) ........................... " ..... (1-15)
S Snow load, kips (N) ....................................... (1-9) f~ Specified compressive strength of concrete, si (MPa) ............ (n-6)
Required shear strength using ASD load combinations, kips (N) .... (1-9) h Clear distance between flanges less the filIe or comer radius
Va
for rolled shapes; and for built-up sections, e distance between
Vn Nominal shear strength of a member, kips (N) .................. (1-15)
adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distan e between flanges
Vne Expected vertical shear strength of the special segment, kips (N) ... (1-12) when welds are used; for tees, the overall de th; and for rectangular
HSS, the clear distance between the flanges ess the inside comer
Vns Nominal shear strength of the steel plate in a composite plate
shear wall, kips (N) ....................................... (lI -17) radius on each side, in. (mm). . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. (Table 1-8-1)
h Distance between horizontal boundary elem nt centerlines,
Vp Nominal shear strength of an active link, kips (N) ............... (Table 1-8-1)
in. (mm) ................................................ (1-17)
I Vpa Nominal shear strength of an active link modified by the axial load
·1 Cross-sectional dimension of the confined c re region in
¡ magnitude, kips (N) ....................................... (1-15)
composite columns measured center-to-cent of the transverse
• 1
Vu . Required shear strength usíng LRFD load combinations, kips (N) ... (1-10) reinforcement, in. (mm) .................................... (n-6)
! [
Ycon Distance from top of steel beam to top of concrete slab or Distance between flange centroids, in. (mm) ................... (1-9)
encasement, in. (mm) ...................................... (H-6)
Unbraced length between stitches of built-up bracing members,
in. (mm) ................................................ (1-13)
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ine!. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mare 9, 2005, ind. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN 1NSTI11lTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INS1TI'UTE OF STEEL CONS UcnON, INc.
6.1-6 SYMBOLS SYMBOLS
6.1-7
tcl Thiclrness of column flange, in. (mm) ......................... (I-9) Deformation quantit)' used to controlloadi g of test specimen ..... (I-S6)
ti Thiclrness offlange, in. (mm) ............................... (1-17) Value of deformation quantity () at first si ificant yield oí
test specimen ............................................. (I-S6)
tmin Minimum wall thiclrness of concrete-filled rectangular HSS,
in. (mm) ................................................ (11-6) p' Ratio of required axial force Puto required hear strength Vu
of a lirik ................................................ (1-15)
tp Thiclrness of panel zone including doubler plates, in. (mm) ........ (I-9)
Limiting slendemess parameter for compac element. ............ (1-8)
tw Thiclrness of web, in. (mm) ................................. (Table 1-8-1)
Resistance factor ......................................... (1-6)
Wz Width of panel zone between column flanges, in. (mm) ........... (I-9)
Resistance factor for flexure ................................ (1-8)
x Parameter used for determining the approximate fundamental period (I-R2)
Resistance factor for compression ............................ (1-8)
Zb Minimum plastic section modulus at the reduced beam section,
in. 3 (mm3) • . • • . • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . • • • . . • • • . • . • • • • • • • (I-9) Resistance factor for shear strength of panel zone
of beam-to-column connections ......... . .................. (1-9)
LM* pc Moment at beam and column centerline determined by projecting
the sum of the nominal column plastic moment strength, reduced Resistance factor for shear ............ " ................... (1-15)
by the axial stress PuJAg , from the top and bottom of the beam
Resistance factor for the shear strength of a omposite column ..... (11-6)
moment connection ....................................... (I-9)
Intetstory drift angle, radians .......... " ................... (I-S3)
LM*pb Moment at the intersection of the beam and column centerlines
determined by projecting the beam maximum developed moments YtotaI Link rotation angle ................... . ................... (1-82)
from the column face. Maximum developed moments shall be
Strain hardening adju~tment factor . . . . . .. . .................. (1-16)
determined from test results ................................. (1-9)
13 Compression strength adjustment factor ....................... (1-16)
Ll Design story drift. ........................................ (I-15)
Llb Deformation quantity used to controlloading of test specimen
(total brace end rotation for the subassemblage test specimen;
total brace axial deformation for the brace test specimen) ......... (I-T2)
Llbm Value of deformation quantity, Llb, corresponding to the design
story drift ............................................... (I-T6)
Llby Value of deformation quantity, Llb, at first significant yield of
test specimen ............................................ (I-T6)
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Struciural Steel Buildings, Marc 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRuenoN, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTiTUTE OF STEEL CON uenON, !Ne.
6.1-8
6.1-9
Terms that appear in this glossary are general1y u·all(:-l4é~a throughout these Provisions and
Commentary, where they first appear within a sulbse~ctiqn.
Notes:
(1) Terms designated with t are common AISI-AISC that are coordinated between
the two standards developers.
(2) Terms designated with * are usual1y qualified by type of load effect, for example,
nominal tensile strength, available compressive ,"fI"'TL~'LTL designflexural strength.
(3) Terms designated with ** are usually qualified by
web local buckling, flange local bending.
ASD (Allowable Strength Design). Method ofprc.po:rt101ntlilg structural components such that
the allowable strength equals or exceeds the required of the component under the
action of the ASD load combinations.
ASD load combinationt. Load combination in the alJ¡o~l(~able building code intended for
allowable strength design (allowable stress design).
Buckling-restrained braced frame (BRBF). braced frame safisfying the
requirements of Section 16 in which all members the bracing system are subjected
primarily to axial forces and in which the limit state compression buckling of braces is
precluded at forces and deformations corresponding 2.0 times the design story drift.
Buckling-restraining system. System of restraints that buckling of the steel core in
BRBF. This system includes the' casing on the steel and structural elements adjoining
its connections. The buckling-restraining system is ~llLI"'U\.l"'U to permit the transverse
expansion and longitudinal contraction of the steel for deformations corresponding
to 2.0 times the design story drift.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March
AMERICAN mS1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STIl~t:lcIl0N
....
-~ ~ .. _~._--_._.~._-_._-_. __ . _ - - --- - - - - -
6.1-10 PART 1 - GLOSSARY PART 1 - GLOSS
6.1-11
Casing. Element that resists forcestransverse to the axis of the brace thereby restraining Intermediate moment frame (IMF). Moment frame s stem that meets the requirements of
buckling of the coreo The casing requires a means of delivering this force to the remainder Section 10.
of the buckling-restraining system. The casing resists little or no force in the axis of
Interstory drift angle. Interstory displacement divided by story height, radians.
the braceo
Inverted- V-braced frame. See V-braced frame.
Column base. Assemblage of plates, connectors, bolts, and rods at the base of a column used
to transmit forces between the steel superstructure and the foundation. k-area. The k-area is the region of the web that exte s from the tangent point of the web
Continuity plates. Column stiffeners at the top and bottom of the panel zone; also known as and the flange-web fillet (AISC "k" dimension) a di ance of 1 Y2 in. (38 mm) into the web
beyond the "lC' dimensiono
transverse stiffeners.
Contractor. Fabricator or erector, as applicable. K-braced frame. A bracing configuration in which bra es connect to a column at a location
with no diaphragm or other out-of-plane support.
Demand critical weld. Weld so designated by these Provisions.
Lateral bracing member. Member that is designed t inhibit lateral buckling or lateral-
Design earthquake. The earthquake represented 'by the design response spectrum as specified torsional buckIing of primary framing members.
in the ClPplicable building code.
Link. In EBF, the segment of a beam that is located bet een the ends of two diagonal braces
Design story drift. Amplified story drift (drift under the design earthquake, including the or between the end of a diagonal brace and a colum . The length of the link is defined as
effects of inelastic action), determined as specified in the applicable building codeo the elear distance between the ends of two diagonal races or between the diagonal brace
and the column face.
Design strength *t. Resistance factor multiplied by the nominal strength, <l>RII'
Diagonal bracing. Inelined structural members carrying primarily axial load that are Link intermediate web stiffeners.· Vertical web stiffener placed within the link in EBE
employed to enable a structural frame to act as a truss to resist lateralloads. Link rotation angle. Inelastic angle between the link the beam outside of the link when
the total story drift is equal to the design story drift.
Dual system. Structural system with the following features: (1) an essentially complete space
frame that provides support for gravi~y 10ad,s; (2) resistance to lateral load provided by Link shear design strength. Lesser of the available she strength of the link developed from
moment frames (SMF, IMF or OMF)thatare capab1e of resisting at least 25 percent of the moment or shear strength of the link.
the base shear, and concrete or ste~l' shear wal1s, or steel braced frames (EBF, SCBF or
OCBF); and (3) each system designed to resist the total lateral load in proportion to its Low~st Anticipated Service Temperature (LAST). The lowest l-hour average temperature
Wlth a 100-year mean recurrence interval.
relative rigidity.
Ductile limit state. Ductile limit states ínelude member and connection yielding, bearing LRFD (Load and Resistance Factor DesignJt. M thod of proportioning structural
deformation at bolt holes, as well as buckling of members that conform to the width- components such that the design strength equals or xceeds the required strength of the
thickness limitations ofTable 1-8-1. Fracture of a member or of a connection, or buckling component under the action of the LRFD load combi ations.
of a connection element, is not a ductile limit state. LRFD Load Combinationt. Load combination in the a licable building code intended for
strength design (load and resistance factor design).
Eccentrically braced frame (EBF). Diagonally braced frame meeting the requirements of
Section 15 that has at least one end of each bracing member connected to a beam a short Measuredflexural resistance. Bending moment measure in a beam at the face ofthe column,
distance from another beam-to-brace connection oro a beam-to-column connection. for a beam-to-column test specimen tested in accord ce with Appendix S.
Exempted column. Column not meeting the requirements of Equation 9-3 for SME Nominalloadt. Magnitude of the load specified by the
Expected yield strength. Yield strength in tension of ,a member, equal to the expected yield Nominal strength*t. Strength of a structure or compo ent (without the resistance factor
stress multiplied by Ag. or safety factor applied) to resist the load effects, as etermined in accordance with this
Specification.
Expected tensile strength *. Tensile strength of a member, equal to the specified minimum
tensile strength, Fu, multiplied by Rt. Ordina? concentrically braced frame (OCBF). Diag nally braced frame meeting the
Expected yield stress. Yield stress of the material, equal to the specified mínimum yield reqUlrements of Section 14 in which aH members o the bracing system are subjected
primarily to axial forces.
stress, Fy, multiplied by Ry.
Ordinary moment frame (OMF). that meets the requirements of
Section 11.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March ,2005, ¡ncl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMEruCAN INSTl11JTE OF STEEL CONSTR ON, mc.
Overstrengthfactor, Oo' Factor specified by the applicable building code in order to determine Special truss moment frame frame system that meets the
the amplified seisrnic load, where required by these Provisions. requirements of Section 12.
Prequalified connection. Connection that complies with the requirements of Appendix P or Speeification. Refers to the for Structural Steel Buildings
ANSI!AISC 358. (ANSI!AISC 360).
Protected zone. Area of members in which limitations apply to fabrication and attachments. Sta tic yield strength. Strength of a structural member r connection deterrnined on the basis
See Section 7.4. of testing conducted under slow monotonic loading until failure.
Prototype. The connection or brace design that is to be used in the building (SMF, IMF, EBF, Steel eore. Axial- force-r~sisting element of braces in B F. The steel core contains a yielding
andBRBF). segm~nt an~ c~nnectlOns to transfer its axial forc to adjoining elements; it may also
Provisions. Refers to this document, the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel contam prOjectlOns beyond the casing and transiti n segments between the projections
and yielding segment.
Buildings (ANSI!AISC 341).
Quality assurance plan. Written description of qualifications, procedures, quality inspections, Tested connection. Connection that complies with the equirements of Appendix S.
resources, and records to be used to provide assurance that the structure complies with the V-b~aeed frame. Concentrically braced frame (SCBF, OCBF or BRBF) in which a pair of
engineer's quality requirements, specifications and contract documents. diagonal braces located either aboye or below a be is connected to a single point within
Reduced beam section. Reduction in cross section over a discrete length that promotes a zone the clear beam span. Where the diagonal braces ar below the beam, fue system is also
of inelasticity in the member. referred to as an inverted-V-braced frame.
Required strength*t. Forces, stresses, and deformations produced in a structural component, X-braeed frame. Concentrically braced frame (OCBF r SCBF) in which a pair of diagonal
deterrnined by either structural analysis, for the LRFD or ASD load eombinations, as braces crosses near the rnid-Iength of the braces.
appropriate, or as specified by the Specification and these Provisions. Y-braeed frame. Eecentrieally braced frame (EBF) in hich the stem of the Y is the link of
Resistance factor, <l>t. Factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the nominal strength the EBF system.
from the actual strength and for the manner and consequences of failure.
Safety factor, Ot. Factor that accounts for deviations of the actual strength from the nominal
strength, deviations of the actual load from the nominal load, uncertainties in the analysis
that transforms the load into a load effect, and for the manner and consequences of failure.
Seismic design eategory. Classification assigned to a building by the applicable building
code based upon its seismic use group and the design spectral response acceleration
coefficients.
Seismic load resisting system (SLRS). Assembly of structural elements in the building that
resists seisrnic loads, inc1uding struts, collectors, chords, diaphragms and trusses.
Seismic response modification eoeffieient, R. Factor that reduces seismic load effects to
strength level as specified by the applicable building codeo
Seismic use group. Classification assigned to a structure based on its use as specified by the
applicable building codeo
Special concentrically braced frame (SCBF). Diagonally braced frame meeting the
requirements of Section 13 in which all members of the bracing system are subjected
primarily to axial forces.
~pecial moment frame (SMF). Moment frame system that meets the requirements of
Section 9.
Special plate shear wall (SPSW). Plate shear wall system that meets the requirements of
Section 17.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INS1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INS1ITUTE OF STEEL CON enON, INc.
6.1-14 Sect. 2.] PART 1 - REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS,
6.1-15
1. SCOPE
The Seismic Provisions for Structural
these Provisions, shall govem the
steel members and connections in the . load resisting systems (SLRS)
and splices in colunms that are not part of the SLRS, in buildings and other
structures, where other structures are as those structures designed, fab-
ricated and erected in a manner similar buildings, with building-like vertical
and lateralload-resisting-elements. These Provisions shall apply when the seis-
mic response modification coefficient, R, specified in the a'pplicable building
code) is taken greater than 3, regardless of seismic design category. When the
seismic response modification R, is taken as 3 or less, the structure
is not required to satisfy these , unless specifically required by the
applicable building codeo
These Provisions shall be applied in COI]juJ~ction with the AISC Specification for
Structural Steel Buildings, hereinafter to as the Specification. Members
and connections of the SLRS shall the requirements of the applicable
Wherever these provisions refer to the aPJ)~ic:ab]te building code and there is no
local building code, the loads, load system limitations and general
design requirements shall be those in CE 7.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN mS1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCIlON, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL mc.
PART 1 - REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS [Seet.2. Seet. 5.] PART 1 - STRUC1'URAL DESIGN . . . . ''-nyyUJnJ.~
6.1-16 6.1-17
GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (7) Locations and dirnensions of vrc1tected zones
3.
The required strength and other seisrnic provisions for seismic design categories (8) Locations where gusset plates are be detailed to accornmodate inelastic
(SDC) and seismic use groups and the lirnitations on height and irregularity shall rotation
be as specified in the applicable building codeo
The design story drift shall be deterrnined as required in the applicable
building codeo
ERECTION DRAWINGS (5) Gusset pIates drawn to scale when they are detailed to accornmodate
inelastic rotation
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUcnON, !Ne. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s'tR.ucrloN, !Nc.
[Sect. 5. Sect. 6.]
6.1-18 PART 1 - STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPEClf1CATIONS PARTI-MATE s 6.1-19
The struetural steel used in the SLRS d seribed in Seetions 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16 and 17 .shall meet one of the following ASTM Specifieations: A36/
A36M, A53/A53M, A500 (Grade B or ), A50l, A529/A529M, A572/A572M
[Grade 42 (290), 50 (345) or 55 (380)], 588/A588M, A913/A913M [Grade 50
(345),60 (415) or 65 (450)], A992/A99 M, or AlOll HSLAS Grade 55 (380).
The struetural steel used for eolumn bas plates shall meet one of the preeeding
ASTM specifieations or ASTM A283/A 83M Grade D.
Other steels and non-steel material s in uckling-restrained braced frames are
perrnitted to be used subjeet to the requir ments of Seetion 16 and Appendix T.
5.3. Erection Drawings . .
Ereetion drawings shall inc1ude items required by the Specificatwn and the fol-
lowing, as applieable:
(1) Designation of the members and eonneetions that are part of the SLRS
(2) Field eonneetion material specifieations and sizes
(3) Loeations of demand critical field welds
6.2. Material Properties for Dete ination of Required
Strength of Members and nections
(4) Loeations and dimensions of protected zones
When required in these Provisions, the strength of an element (a mem-
(5) Loeations of pretensioned bolts ber or a eonneetion) shall be deterrnined from the expected yield stress, RyFy ,
of an adjoining member, where F y is the minimum yield stress of the
(6) Field welding requirements as speeified in Appendix W, Seetion W2.3
grade of steel to be used in the adjoining and Ry is the ratio of the ex-
peeted yield stress to the specified " yield stress, F y , of that material.
The available strength of the element,
be equal to or greater than the required where Rn is the nominal strength
of the eonnection. The expected tensile R,Fu , and the expected yield stress,
RyFy, are perrnitted to be used in lieu of and Fy, respeetively, in deterrnining
the nominal strength, Rm of rupture and limit states within the same
member for whieh the required strength is deterrnined.
6. MATERIALS
6.1. Material Specifications
Struetural steel used in the seismic load resisting system (SL~~..s) s~all meet the
requirements of Specification Seetion A3.1 a, exeept as modified m these ~ro-
. . ns The specified minimum yield stress of steel to be used for mem ers
vzsw
. h' . h inelastie behavior is expeeted shall not exeeed 50 k SI. (345 MPa) for
m w
S stemsle defined in Seetions
: 9, 10, 12, 13, 15 , 16
. ,and 17 nor 55 ksi (380 MPa)
.
/ t s defined in Seetions 11 and 14, unless the suitability of the matenal
lor sys em . l' . . d s not ap
is deterrnined by testing or other rational eriteria. ThlS 1~ltat~on. o~ - The values of Ry and Rt for various steels given in Table 1-6-1. Other values of
ply to eolumns for which the only expeeted inelastie behavlOr IS yleldmg at the Ry and R, shall be perrnitted if the values deterrnined by testing of specimens
column base. similar in size and sOUree eondueted in aec:<j)rclan,::e with the requirements for the
specified grade of steel.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEJiL CONSTRUCTlON, lNc. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL COI~S1\FlUC1'10N, INc.
6.1-20 PART 1 - MATERIALS [Sect. 6. Sect. 7.]
PART 1 - ~ONNECTIONS, JOINT , AND FASTENERS
6.1-21
· ASTM A572/572M Grade 42 (290) 1.3 1.1 The design of connections for a membe that is a part of the SLRS shall be con-
· ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
A572/572M Grade 50 (345) or 55 (380),
A913/A913M Grade 50 (345), 60 (415), or 65 (450),
A588/A588M,
1.1 1.1 figured such that a ductile limit state i either the connection or the member
controls the designo
· ASTM A53/A53M
Plates:
1.6 1.2
AH bolts shall be pretensioned high bolts and shalI meet the require-
ments for slip-critical faying surfaces in lac(~ordaIICe with Specification Section
13.8 with a Class A surface. Bolts shall installed in standard holes or in short-
· ASTM A36/A36M 1.3 1.2 slotted holes perpendicular to the load. For brace diagonals, oversized
· ASTM A572/A572M Grade 50 (345),
ASTM A588/A588M
1.1 1.2 holes shall be permitted when the
and the oversized hole is in one ply
is designed as a slip-critical joint,
Alternative hole types are permitted
if designated in the'Prequalified for Special and Intermediate Mo-
6.3. Heavy Section CVN Requirements . .
SI/AISC 358), or if otherwise de-
· the SLRS , in addition to the requirements of SpeclficatIon
For structura1 steel ID th. k termined in a connection pn:~qual1j]caltionl in accordance with Appendix P, or if
S ti A3 1c hot roUed shapes with flanges 11h in. thick (38 mm) and lC er
:~l ~:ve ~ nrlnimum Charpy V-Notch toughness of 20 ft-Ib (27 J) at 70°F (21
determined in a program of qualification in accordance with Appendix S
~C) tested in the alternate core Iocation as described in :--STM A6 SuppIem.e~- or T. The available shear strength of joints using standard holes shall be
ca1culated as that for bearing-type joints accordance with Specification Sec-
, R· t S30 PI ates 2 in. (50 mm) thick and thlcker shall have a mlm- . tions 13.7 and 13.10, except that the bearing strength at bolt holes shall
tary eqUlremen . ° OC) a ured at
Charpy V-Notch toughness of 20 ft-Ib (27 J) at 70 F (21 , me s . not be taken greaterthan 2.4dtE;..
mum.
any IocatlOn pemn.tte d by ASTM A673 , where the plate is used in the followmg:
Exception: The faying surfaces for end
moment connections are permitted
1. Members built-up from plate to be coated with coatings not tested for
resistance, or with coatings with a
2. Connection plates where inelastic strain under seismic loading is expected slip coefficient less than that of a Class A surface.
3. As the steel core of buckling-restrained braces Bolts and welds shall not be designed to
component in a connection.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NS'lTIUfE OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, lNc.
AMERICAlIl!NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s~:ucrlON, !Nc.
[Sect. 7. Sect. 7.] PART 1 ~ CONNECTIONS,
6.1-22 PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS 6.1-23
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NslTIUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CO¡)I~mClrrON, !Nc.
PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS [Seet.7.
6.1-24 Seet. 8.] PART 1 - MEMBiERf) 6.1-25
At the end of the weld adjacent to the column web/flange juncture, weld. tabs
for continuity plates shall not be used, except when permitted by the engmeer
of record. Unless specified by the engineer of record that they be removed, weld
tabs shall not be removed when used in this location.
Limiting Width-
8. MEMBERS Thickness Ratios
Description of Element
8.1. Scope .
Members in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall comply W1th the
Specification and Section 8. For columns that are not part of the SLRS, see Sec-
tion 8.4b.
Flexure in flanges of rolled or built-up
I-shaped seetions [a], [e], [e], [g], [h]
bit 0.30~E/Ff,
Uniform eompression in flanges of
8.2. Classification of Sections for Local Buckling rolled or built-up I-shaped sections bit 0.30~E/Ff,
8.2a. Compact rn
When required by these Provisions, members of the SLRS shall hav~ flang~s e Uniform compression in flanges of
rolled or built-up I-shaped sections [d]
bit 0.38 ~E/Fy
Q)
continuously connected to the web or webs and the width-thic.kness ratlO.s of 1tS E Uniform eompression in flanges of
Q)
compression elements shall not exceed the limiting width-th1ckness ratlos, A.p , ¡¡¡ ehannels, outstanding legs of pairs
bit 0.30 ~EIFy
of angles in eontinuous eontaet, and
from Specification Table B4.1.
braees
where
~c 0.90 (LRFD) 1.67 (ASD)
Pa required q,xial strength of a using ASD load combinations,
kips (N)
nominal axial strength of a
required axial strength of a using LRFD load combinations,
kips (N)
(1) The required axial compressive and strength, considered in the ab-
sence of any applied moment, shall determined using the load combi-
nations stipulateid by the applicable code including the amplified
seismÍc load.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structitral Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s"I1,ucrlON, mc.
6.1-26 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Sect. 8. Sect. 8.] PART 1 _ l\1f"C'l\Ift:)..,TI,<,
6.1-27
TABLE 1-8-1 (cont.) (2) The required. axial compressive tensile strength shall not exceed
either of the following:
Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios tor
Compression Elements (a) The maximum load transferred the column considering 1.lRy (LRFD)
or (1.1/1.5)Ry (ASO), as apl)wPIllite, times the nominal strengths of the
Limiting Width-
Width- Thickness Ratios
connecting beam or brace of the building.
Description of Element Thickness
Aps
(b) The limit as determined from resistance of the foundation to over-
Ratio
(seismically compact) turning uplift.
Webs in flexural eompression in
beams in SMF, Seetion 9, unless 2.45 ~E/Fy 8.4. Column Splices
noted otherwise
8.4a. General
for Ca::; 0.125 [k] The required strength of column in the seismic load resisting system
(SLRS) shall equal.the required strength of the columns, including that deter-
J!3 3.14 (L(1-1.54Ca ) mined from Sections 8.3, 9.9, 10.9, 11.9, 3.5 and 16.5b.
c:::
Q) Webs in flexural eompression ~ Fy
E
el)
or eombined flexure ánd axial hftw In addition, welded column splices that subject to a calculated net tensile
¡¡:¡ eompression [a], [e], [g], [h], [i], [j] tor Ca> 0.125 [k]
load effect determined using the load c01llb:matIol!lS stipulated by the applicable
~(2.33-Ca) ~ 1.491I
"CI
Q)
c::: 1.12 building code including the amplified load, shall satisfy both of the fol-
~ VFy VFy lowing requirements:
~ r----------------------------+----------r---------------------~
v, Round HSS in axial andlor flexural (1) The available strength of partial-J·omt-Pc~netratlon (PJP) groove welded joints,
Dft 0.044 E/Fy
eompression [e], [g] if used, shall be at least equal to 200 of the required strength.
Rectangular HSS in rucial andlor
flexural eompressi9n [~]j [g]
bftor
hftw
0.64 ~E/Fy (2) The available strength for each splice shall be at least equal to
0.5 RyFyAf(LRFD) or (0.5/1 (ASD), as appropriate, where RyFy is
Webs of H-Pile sections h/tw 0.94 ~E/Fy the expected yield stress of the material and Af is the flange area of
[a] Required tor beams in SMF; Seetion 9 and SPSW, Seetion 17.
the smaller col1:lmn connected.
[b] Required for eolumns in SMF, Seetion 9, unless the ratios from Equation 9·3 are greater than 2.0 where it
is permitted to use A.p in Speeifibatibn Table 84.1. Beveled transitions are not required changes in thickness and width of
[e] Required for braees andeolumns in SCBF, SeeUon 13 and braees in OCBF, Seetion 14.
[d] I~ is permitted to use A.p in Speeifieation Table B4.1 for eolumns in STMF, Seetion 12 and eolumns in EBF, flanges and webs occur in column where PJP groove welded joints
Seetion 15. . are used.
[e] RequirEid for link in EBF, Seetion 15, exeept it iSí permitted to use ')..p in Table B4.1 of the Specífícatíon
for flanges of links of length 1.6Mp/Vp or less, where Mp and Vp are defined in Seetion 15.
[f] Diagonal web members within the speeial segment of STMF, Seetion 12. Column web splices shall be either or welded, or welded to one column
[g] Chord members of STMF, SeeUon 12.
[h] Required for beams and eolumns in BRBF, Seetion 16. and bolted to the other. In moment frames bolted splices, plates or channels
[i] Required tor eolumns in SPSW, Seetion 17. shall be used on both sides of the column
m For eolumns in STMF, SecUon 12; eolumps in SMF, ifJtie ratios from Equation 9-3 are greater than 2.0;
eolumns in EBF, Seetion 15; or EBF webs of links of length 1.6 Mp/Vp or less, it is permitted to use the
following for A.p : The centerline of column splices made . fillet welds or partial-joint-penetra-
~
. tion groove welds shall be located 4 ft (1 m) or more away from the beam-to-
for Ca::; 0.125, A.p = 3.76 - (1-2.75Ca)
Fy column connections. When the column height between beam-to-column
connections is less than 8 ft (2.4 m), shall be at half the clear height.
for Ca> 0.125, f..p = 1.12 ~ (2.33-Ca) ~1.49 ~
~ Fy ~ Fy 8.4b. Columns Not Part of the
[k] ForLFRO, Ca =..!L Seismic Load Resisting Sy
I/Jb~
Splices of columns that are not a part of
For ASO e = nb~
'a ~
(1) Splices shall be located 4 ft (1.2 or more away from the beam-to-
where column connections. When the
Pa =required eompressive strength (ASO), kips (N) clear height between beam-to-
Pu = requíred compressíve strength (LRFD), kips (N) column connections is less than 8 (2.4 m), splices shall be at half the
Py =axial yield strength, kips (N)
«Pb =0.90 clear height.
ilb =1.67
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplerrient No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, INc. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CO:N~TRUCTIO:N, INc.
6.1-28 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Seet.8. Seet. 9.] PART 1 - SPECIAL l\/fnll\/fl:'''I'lf' FRAMES 6.1-29
(2) The required shear strength of column splices with respect to both (b) The shear calculated using the load combinations of the applicable
orthogonal axes of the column shall be MpJH (LRFD) or Mpc ll.5H (ASD), building code, including the seismic load.
as appropriate, where Mpc is the lesser nominal plastic ~exural streng~ of
the column sections for the direction in question, and H lS the story he1ght. 8.5c. Required Flexural Strength
The required flexural strength of bases, including their attachment
8.5. Column Bases to the foundation, shall be the sunmn:at1c.~ of the required strengths of the steel
The required strength of column bases shall be calculated in accordance with elements that are connected to the base as follows:
Sections 8.5a, 8.5b, and 8.5c. The available strength of anchor rods shall be
detennined in accordance with Specification Section 13. (1) For diagonal bracing, the required strength shall be at least equal to
the required strength of bracing cOlrm~~ctions for the SLRS.
The availab1e strength of concrete elements at the column base, including anchor
rod embedment and reinforcing steel, shall be in accordance with ACI 318, (2) For columns, t:J¡e required flexural shall be at least equal to the
Appendix D. lesser of the following:
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NSTlTIJTE OF STEEL Cm~sTj<~uCI10N, !Nc.
6.1-30 PART I - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Seet. 9. Seet. 9.] 6.1-31
(1) The connection shall be capable of sustaining an interstory drift angle of at 9.2c. Welds
least 0.04 radians.
Unless otherWise designated by ANSI! C 358, or otherwise determined in a
(2) The measured flexural resistance of the connection, determined at the col- connection prequal1fication in acc:orclan(:;~ with Appendix P, or as determined
umn face, shall equal at least 0.80Mp of the connected beam at an interstory in a program of qualification testing in with Appendix S, complete-
drift ang1e of 0.04 radians. joint-penetration gróove welds of beam shear plates, and beam webs to
columns shall be de'mand critical welds described in Section 7.3b.
(3) The required shear strength ofthe connection shall be detennined using the
following quantity for the earthquake load effect E:
(9-1)
where
Ry ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified minimum yield
stress, Fy
nominal plastic flexural strength, kip-in. (N-mm)
distance between plastic hinge locations, in. (mm)
When E as defined in Equation 9-1 is used in ASD load combinations that are
additive with other transient loads and that are based on SEI!ASCE 7, the 0.75 Protected Zones
combination factor for transient loads shall not be applied to E.
The region at each end of the beam subj to inelastic straining shall be desig-
Conriections that accornmodate the required interstory drift angle within the nated as. a protected zone, and shall meet requirements of Section 7.4. The
connection elements and provide the measured flexural resistance and shear extent of the protected zone shall be as 4e~;i,grlatt~d in ANSI!AISC 358, or as
strengths specified aboye are permitted. In addition to satisfying the require- otherwise determined in a connection in accordance with Ap-
ments noted aboye, the design shall demonstrate that any additional drift due to pendix P, or as determined in a program qualification testing in accordance
connection defonnation can be accornmodated by the structure. The design shall with Appendix S.
inelude analysis for stability effects of the overall frame, ineluding second-order
effects.
(9-2)
where 1.0 (9-3)
thickness of column web or doubler plate, in. (mm)
dz panel zone depth between continuity plates, in. (mm)
Wz panel zone width between column flanges, in. (mm) = the sum of the moments in column aboye and below the joint at
the intersection of the bearn colurnn centerlines. W;c is deter-
Altematively, when local buckling of the column web and doubler plate is pre- mined-by surnrning the pro1le4:tíOIls of the nominal flexural strengths
vented by using plug welds joining them, the total panel zone thickness shall of the lcolumns (including where used) aboye and below
satisfy Equation 9-2. the joint to the bearn with a reduction for the axial force in
9.3c. Panel Zone Doubler Plates the colurnn. It is permitted to W;c ='IZc(Fyc - PuJAg ) (LRFD)
Doubler plates shall be welded to the colurnn flanges using either a complete- or LZc[(Fyc /1.5) - Pac/Ag)] ), as appropriate. When the cen-
joint-penetration groove-welded or fillet-weldedjoint that develops the available terlines of opposing beams the same joint do not coincide, the
mid-line between centerlines be used.
shear strength of the foIl doubler plate thickness. When doubler plates are placed
against the colurnn web, they shall be welded across the top and bottom edges to beams at the intersection of the beam
develop the proportion of the total force that is transmitted to the doubler plateo and colurnn centerlines. determined by sumrning the projec-
When doubler plates are placed away from the column web, they shall be placed tions of the expected strengths of the bearns at the plas-
tic hinge locations to the centerline. It is permitted to take
symmetrically in pairs and welded to continuity plates to develop the proportion
of the total force that is transmitted to the doubler plateo W;b = L(1.1RyFyb Zb + Muv) or L[(1.1/1.5)RyFyb Zb + Mav]
(ASD); as appropriate. Alltertlati:veliv. it is permitted to determine
9.4. Beam and Column Limitations W;b consistent with a design as designat-
The requirements of Section 8.1 shall be satisfied, in addition to theJollowing. ed in ANSI/AISC 358, or as deterrnined in a connection
prequalification in with Appendix P, or in a program of
9.4a. Width-Thickness Limitations qualification testing in with Appendix S. When connec-
Bearn and colurnn members shall meet the requirements of Section 8.2b, unless
tions with reduced beam are used, it is permitted to take
otherwise qualified by tests.
W;b =1:(1.1RyFYbZRBS + Muv) or L[(1.111.5)RyFybZRBS + Mav]
9.4b. Beam Flanges (ASD),:as appropriate.
Abrupt changes in bearn flange area are not permitted in plastic hinge regions. = gross area of column, in. 2
The drilling of flange holes or trirnrning of bearn flange width is permitted if = specified minimum yield
testing or qualification demonstrates that the resulting configuration can develop = the additional moment due to amplification from the location
stable plastic hinges. The configuration shall be consistent with a prequalified of the plastic hinge to the centerline, based on ASD load
connection designated in ANSIIAISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a combinations, kip-in. (N
connection prequalification in accordance with Appendix P, or in a program of = the additional moment due to arnplification from the location
qualification testing in accordance with Appendix S. of the plastic hinge to the centerline, based on LRFD load
combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
9.5. Continuity Plates = required compressive using ASD load combinations, kips
Continuity plates shall be consistent with the prequalified connection designated (a positive number) (N)
in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification = required compressive strength LRFD load combinations, kips
in accordance with Appendix P, or as determined in a program of qualification (a positive number) (N)
testing in accordance with Appendix S. = plastic section modulus of the in. 3 (mm 3 )
= plastic section modulus of the in. 3 (mm 3 )
= rninimum plastic section at the reduced beam section,
in. 3 (mm 3)
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMEruCAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COII/S"IJ<lUCI10N, !Nc.
Exception: This requirement does not apply if either of the following two condi-
tions is satisfied:
(a) Colurnns with Prc < O.3Pc for all load combinations other than those de-
tennined using the amplified seismic load that satisfy either of the
following:
(i) Colurnns used in a one-story building or the top story of a multistory
building.
(2) Each colurnn-flange lateral brace be designed for a required strength
(ii) Colurnns where: (1) the sum of the available shear strengths of all that is equal to 2 percent of the beam fl ange strength Fyb¡t
bJ
exempted columns in the story is less than 20 percent of the sum of (LRFD) or Fyb¡tb¡Il.5 (ASD), as apt,ro¡:,rialte.
the available shear strengths of all moment frame columns in the story
acting in the same direction; and (2) the sum of the available shear
9.7b. Unbraced Connections
strengths of aH exempted colurnns on each moment frame column line tiOll1ll(~ctilon with no lateral bracing trans-
A colurnn containing a beam-to-colurnn "l'
within that story is less than 33 percent of the available shear strength verse to the seismic frarne at the shall be designed using the distance
of aH moment frame colurnns on that colurnn lineo For the purpose of between adjacent lateral braces as the height for buckling transverse to
this exception, a colurnn line is defined as a single line of colurnns or the seismic frarne and shall conform to "\7j~C~fiCf-ltic'n
~J Chapter H, except that:
parallellines of colurnns located within 10 percent of the plan dimen- (1) The required colurnn strength shall determined from the appropriate load
sion perpendicular to the line of colurnns. combinations in the applicable code, except that E shall be taken as
the lesser of:
where
For design according to Specification Section B3.3 (LRFD), (a) The amplified seismic load.
Pc FycAg, kips (Í'~') (b) 125 percent of the frame aVf-lllal1te strength based upon either the beam
Prc = P uo required compressive strength, using LRFD load combina- available flexural strength or zone available shear strength.
tions, kips (N)
(2) not exceed 60.
For design according to Specification Section B3.4 (ASD),
(3) !he colurnn required flexural transverse to the seisrnic frarne shall
Pe FyeAg11.5, kips (N)
Prc = Pao required compressive strength, using ASD load combinations, rnclude that moment caused by the application of the beam flange '"
'fi d' S . 1 orce
kips (N) Specl e .rn ectlOn 9.7a.(2) in to the second-order moment due to
the resultrng colurnn flange c1ISplaceilneIllt.
(b) Colurnns in any story that has a ratio of available shear strength to required
shear strength that is 50 percent gr~ater than the story aboye. Lateral Bracing of Beams
Bo~ flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a maximurn spacing of
Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column Connections Lb - 0.086~yE/Fy. Braces shall meet the .. of Equations A-6-7 and A-6-8
9.7.
~f AppendIX 6 of the Speci.ficat~on, Mr = Mu = RyZFy (LRFD) or Mr = Ma
9.7a. Braced Connections - RyZFyf1.5 (ASD), as appropnate, of beam and Cd = 1.0.
Colurnn flanges at beam-to-colurnn connections require lateral bracing only at
the level of the top flanges of the beams, when the webs of the beams and col- In addition, lateral braces shall be near concentrated forces, changes in
urnn are co",p1anar, and a colurnn is shown to remain elastic outside of the panel cross-section, and other locations where . di cates that a plastic hinge
m
zone. It shall be pennitted to as sume that the colurnn remains elastic when the will form during in~lastic deformations the SMF. The placement of lateral
ratio calculated using Equation 9-3 is greater than 2.0. bracing shall be consistent with that doQ;l11ID.enlted for a prequalified connec-
tion designated in ANSIIAISC 358, or as htllpr,xT;'"'' determined in a connection
When a colurnn cannot be shown to remain elastic outside of the panel zone, the prequalification in accordance with P, or in a program of qualification
foHowing reqtrirements shall apply: testing in accordance with Appendix S.
(1) The colurnn flanges shall be laterally braced at the levels ofboth the top and
bottom beam flanges. Lateral bracing shall be either direct or indirect.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNe. AMERICAN INsTITUlE OF STEEL CmlstRuCTloN, lNe.
6.1-36 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Sect. 9. Seet. 10.] PART 1 - INTERMEDIATE ~MlIAKD'lI.T'"
6.1-37
The required strength of lateral bracing provided adjacent to plastic hinges shall 10.2c. Welds
be Pu =0.06 MJho (LRFD) or Pa =0.06Ma/h o (ASD), as appropriate, where ho is Unless otherwise designated by ANSI! 358, or otherwise determined in a
the distance between flange centroids; and the required stiffness shall meet the connection prequalification in ac(~ord31~ce with Appendix P, or as determined
provisions of Equation A-6-8 of Appendix 6 of the Specification.
in a program of qualification testing in with Appendix S, complete-
9.9. Column Splices joint-penetration groove welds ofbeam shear plates, and beam webs to
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of Section 8.4a. Where columns shall be demand critical welds described in Section 7.3b.
groove welds are used to make the splice, they shall be complete-joint-penetra-
tion groove welds that meet the requirements of Section 7.3b. Weld tabs shall
be removed. When column splices are not made with groove welds, they shall
have a requiredflexural strength that is at least equal to RyFyZALRFD) or RyFyZxl
l.5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the smaller column. The required shear strength
of column web splices shall be at least equal to LMpc/H (LRFD) or LMpc ll.5H
(ASD), as appropriate, where LMpc is the sum of the nominal plastic flexural
strengths of the columns aboye and below the splice.
Exception: The required strength of the column splice considering appropriate
stress concentration factors or fracture mechanics stress intensity factors need 10.2d. Protected Zone
not exceed that determined by inelastic analyses.
The region at each ~nd of the beam to inelastic straining shall be treated
as a protected zone, and shall meet of Section 7.4. The extent
10. INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (IMF) of the protected zone shall be as aes:¡gr~ate:a in ANSI!AISC 358, or as other-
10.1. Scope wise determined in a connection in accordance with Appen-
Intermediate moment frames (IMF) are expected to withstand limited inelastic dix P, or as determined in a program of testing in accordance with
Appendix S.
deformations in their members and connections when subjected to the forces
resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. IMF shall meet the require-
ments in this Section.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCITON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~stRucrl0N, !Nc.
6.1-38 PART 1 - INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES [Sect. 10. Sect. 11.] PART 1 - ORDINARY MOIMENT FRAMES 6.1-39
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcrrON, lNc.
AMERIcAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL C01~snl~UCT10N,
Seet. 11.] 6.1-41
PART 1 - ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES [Sect. 11.
6.1-40
or when:
Where continuity pIates are required, the thi<::kness of the pIates shalI be deter-
mined as follows:
(a) Por one-sided connections, cOllltirlUÍ1:V pIate thickness shall be at least one
haIf of the thickness of the beam
Notes: l. Bevel as required for selected groove weld. (b) Por two-sided connections the cOIltirluit:v
2. Larger of tblor Yí in. (13 mm) (plus \tí tbl' or minus lA tbl) thickness to the thicker of the beam
3. % tblto t bft % in. (19 mm) minimum (± 1)¡ in.) (± 6 mm)
4. 3fs in. (lO mm) minimum radius (plus not limited, minus O)
5. 3 tbl (± V2 in.) (±13 mm)
Tolerances shall not accumulate to the extent that the angle of the aceess hole cut to the flange
surface exeeeds 25°.
The welded joints of the continuity plates to the column flanges shall be made
Panels within a spécial segment shall ei er be all Vierendeel panels or all X-
with either complete-joint-penetratjon groove welds, two-sided partial-joint-
braced panels; neither a combination ther of nor the use of other truss diagonal
penetration groove welds combined with reinforcing fillet welds, or two-sided
configurations is permitted. Where diag nal members are used in the special
fillet welds. The required.· strength of these joints shall not be less than the
segment, they shall. be arranged in an X attem separated by vertical members.
available strength of the contact area of the plate with the column flange. Tbe
Such diagonal members shall be intercon ected at points where they cross. The
required strength of the welded joints of the continuity plates to the column web
interconnection shall have a required str, gth equal to 0.25 times the nominal
shall be the least of the following: tensile strength of ~he diagonal member. olted connections shall not be used
(a) The sum of the availabIe strengths at the connections of the continuity plate for web members within the special segm nt. Diagonal web members within the
to the column flanges .. special segment sha11 be made of flat bars of identical sections.
(b) The available shear strength of the contact area of the plate with the column Splicing of chord members is not permitte within the special segment, nor with-
web. in one-half the panellength from the end of the special segment. The required
axial strength of the diagonal web memb rs in the special segment due to dead
(c) The weld available strength that develops the available shear strength of the
and live loads within the special segment hall not exceed 0.03Fy Ag (LRFD) or
column panel zone. (0.03/1.5)FyA g (ASID), as appropriate.
(d) The actual force transmitted.by the stiffener. The special segment sha11 be a protecte zone meeting the requirements of
Section 7.4.
11.6. Column-Beam Moment Ratio
No requirements. 12.3. Strength of Special Segmen Members
11.7. Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column Connections The available shear strength of the speci 1 segment sha11 be calculated as the
No additional requirements beyond the Specification. sum of the available shear strength of the chord members through flexure, and
the shear strength corresponding to the av ilable tensile strength and 0.3 times
11.8. Lateral Bracing of Beams the available comprlfssive strength of the agonal members, when they are used.
No additional requirements beyond the Specification. The top and bottom chord members in the ecial segment shall be made of iden-
tical sections and shaII provide at least 25 ercent of the required vertical shear
11.9. Column Splices strength. The requirf!d axial strength in th chord members, determined accord-
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of Section 8.4a. ing to the limit state.of tensile yielding, sh 11 not exceed 0.45 times <l>Pn (LRFD)
or Pn / Q (ASD), as appropriate,
12. SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES (STMF)
<l> = 0.90 (LRFD) Q = 1.67 (ASD)
12.1. Scope where
Special truss moment frames (STMF) are expected to withstand significant in-
Pn FyAg
elastic deformation within a specially designed segment of the truss when sub-
jected to the forces from the motions of the design earthquake. STMF shall be The end connection of diagonal web mem ers in the special segment sha11 have
limited to span lengths between columns not to exceed 65 ft (20 m) and overall a required strength that is at least equal to t e expected yield strength, in tension,
depth not to exceed 6 ft (1.8 m). The columns and truss segments outside of the of the web member, RyFyAg (LRFD) or Ry yAg / 1.5 (ASD), as appropriate.
special segments shall be designed to remain elastic under the forces that can be 12.4. Strength of Non-Special Seg ent Members
generated by the fully yielded and strain-hardened special segment. STMF shall
Members and connections of STMF, exce t those in the special segment speci-
meet the requirements in this Section.
fied in Section 12.2~ sha11 have a require strength based on the appropriate
12.2. Special Segment load combinations in the applicable buildin code, replacing the earthquake load
Each horizontal truss that is part of the sf!ismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall term E with the lateral loads necessary to develop the expected vertical shear
have a special segment that is located between the quarter points of the span of strength of the special segment Vne (LRFD) or Vne 11.5 (ASD), as appropriate, at
the truss. The length of the special segment shall be between 0.1 and 0.5 times mid-Iength, given as!
the truss span length. The length-to-depth ratio of any panel in the special seg-
ment shall neither exceed 1.5 nor be less than 0.67.
(12-1)
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Marc 9, 2005, incL Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSlRVenON, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONS venON, !Nc.
6.1-44 PART 1 - SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES [Seet. 12. Seet. l3.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALL BRACED FRAMES 6.1-45
where
Mne nominal flexural strength of a chord member of the special segment,
kip-in. (N-mm)
El flexural elastic stiffness of a chord member of the special segment,
kip-in? (N-mm2) 13.2. Members
span length of the truss, in. (mm)
length of the special segment, in. (mm)
13.2a. Slenderness
nominal tensile strength of a diagonal member of the special
segment, kips (N) Bracing members sl;J.all have KUr:S 4
nominal compressive strength of a diagonal member of the special
segment,kips (N) Exception: Braces with 4..JE/E'y < KlIr :S are permitted in frames in which
a angle of diagonal members with the horizontal the available strength of the column is at equal to the maximum load trans-
ferred to the column considering Ry or (l/1.5)R y (ASD), as appropriate,
12.5. Width-Thickness Limitations times the nominal strengths of the cOImectiIl,g brace elements of the building.
Chord members and diagonal web members within the special segment shall Column forces need not exceed those by inelastic analysis, nor the
meet the requirements of Section 8.2b. maximum load effects that can be by the system.
12.6. Lateral Bracing 13.2b. Required Strength
The top and bottom chords of the trusses shall be laterally braced at the ends of Where the effective net area of bracing m~mblers is less than the gross area, the
the special segment, and at intervals not to exceed Lp according to Specification required tensile strength of the brace upon the limit state of fracture in the
Chapter F, along the entire length of the truss. The required strength of each net section shall be greater than the lesser the following:
lateral brace at the ends of and within the special segment shall be
(a) The expected yield strength, in
Pu = 0.06 RyPne (LRFD) or as RyFyAg (LRFD) or RyFyAg/1.5
Pa = (0.06/1.5) RyPne (ASD), as appropriate,
(b) analysis that can be transferred to
where Pne is the nominal compressive strength of the special segment chord
member.
Lateral braces outside of the special segment shall have a required strength of
Pu = 0.02 RyPne (LRFD) or
Pa = (0.02/1.5) RyPne (ASD), as appropriate.
13.2c. Lateral ForceOistribution
The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of Equation A-6-4 of Along any line of bracing, braces shall be k1etJlo'iTed in alternate directions such
Appendix 6 of the Specification, where that, for either direction of force parallel bracing, at least 30 percent but
P, =Pu =RyPne (LRFD) or no more than 70 percent of the total force along that line is resisted by
P, =Pa =RyPncl1.5 (ASD), as appropriate. braces in tension, u11less the available of each brace in compression is
larger than the required strength resulting the application of the appropri-
SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAMES ate load combinatioris stipulated by the icable building code including the
13.
amplified seismic load. For the purposes this provision, a line of bracing is
(SCBF) defined as a single line or parallellines . a plan offset of 10 percent or less of
13.1. Scope . .. the building dimension perpendicular to line of bracing.
Special concentrically braced frames (SCBF) are expected to wlthstand slgmfi-
13.2d. Width-Thickness Limitati
cant inelastic deformations when subjected to the forces resulting from the
~eq[uiflem¡~nts of Section 8.2b.
motions of the design earthquake. SCBF shall meet the requirements in this
Section.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s-q.~uC1lON, !Nc.
6.1-46 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Sect. 13. Sect. 13.]
6.1-47
The sum of the available shear strengths of the stitches shall equal or exceed the (1) The required Strength of beams ir'lteI'$ec:íed by braces, their connections, and
available tensile strength of each elemento The spacing of stitches shall be uni- supporting members shall be based on the load combinations of
formo Not les s than two stitches shall be used in a built-up member. Bolted stitch- the applicable building code that the braces provide no support
es shall not be located within the middle one-fourth of the c1ear brace length. f~r deact and live loads. For load that include earthquake ef-
fects, the earthquake effect,' E, on beam shall be detennined as follows:
Exception: Where the buckling of braces about their critical bucking axis does
(a) The forces in all braces in shall be assumed to be equal to
not cause shear in the stitches, the spacing of the stitches shall be such that the
RyFyAg.
slendemess ratio l/r of the individual elements between the stitches does not
exceed 0.75 times the goveming slendemess ratio of the built-up member. (b) The forces in all adjoining in compression shall be assumed to
be equal to 0.3Pn •
13.3. Required Strength of Bracing Connections (2) Beams shall be continuous between I"'VJlUll.1H~. Both flanges of beams shall
13.3a. Required Tensile. Strength ... be laterally braced, with a spacing of Lb = Lpd , as specified by
The required tensile strength of bracing connectlOns (mcludmg beam-to-c?lumn Equation A-1-7 and A-1-8 of 1 of the Specification. Lateral brac-
connections if part of the bracing system) shall be the les ser of the followmg: es shall meet the provisions of Eq A-6-7 and A-6-8 of Appendix 6 of
the Specification, where M r = Mu = Z Fy (LRFD) or M r = Ma = RyZ Fyfl.5
(a) The expected yield strength, in tension, of the bracing member, determined
(ASD), as appropriate, of the beam Cd = 1.0.
as RyFyAg (LRFD) or RyFyAgI1.5 (ASD), as appropriate.
As a minimum, one set of lateral braces required at the point of intersection
(b) The maximum load effect, indicated by analysis that can be transferred to
of the V-type (or inverted V-type) bracing unless the beam has sufficient out-of-
the brace by the system.
plane strength and stiffness to ensure between adjacent brace points.
13.3b. Required Flexural Strength
The required flexural strength of bracing connections shall be equal to 1.1~~Mp
(LRFD) or (1.1I1.5)RyMp (ASD), as appropriate, of the brace about the cnucal
buckling axis.
Exception: Brace connections that meet the requirements of Section 13.3a ~nd
can accornmodate the inelastic rotations associated with brace post-buck1mg
deformations need not meet this requirement.
13.4b. K-Type Bracing
K-type braced frames are not pennitted
13.5. Column Splices
In addition to meeting the requirements Section 8.4, column splices in SCBF
shall be designed to develop 50 percent of les ser available flexural strength of
13.3c. Required Compressive Strength . the connected members. The required strength shall be 'LMpclH (LRFD) or
Bracing connections shall be designed for a required compreSSlve strength based 'LMpJ1.5H (ASD), as appropriate', where is the sum of the nominal plastic
on buck1ing limit states that is at least equal to 1.1RyPn (LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)RyPn flexuralstrengths oÍ' the columns aboye below the splice.
(ASD), as appropriate, where Pn is the nominal compressive strength of the 13.6. Protected Zone
braceo The protected zone ?f br~cing m€fmbers .
quarter of the brace length, and a zone aUII~""~HL to each connection equál to the
brace depth in the plane of buckling. The zone of SCBF shall i:n~lude
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONS1RucnON, lNe. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cor.$:UCTlON,lNe.
6.1-48 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Sect. 13.
Sect. 14.] PART 1 - ORDINARY CONClEN:rIUCAlLlJi 6.1-49
elements that connect braces to beams and columns and shall satisfy the require- (1) The required strength shall be det:enniIjledbased on the load combinations of
ments of Section 7.4. the applicable building code that the braces provide no support of
dead and live loads. For load that indude earthquake effects,
14. OROINARV CONCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAMES the earthquake effect, E, on the shall be detennined as follows:
(OCBF) (a) The forces in braces in tension be assumed to be equal to RyFyAg.
14.1. Seo pe For V-type and inverted V-type , the forces in braces in tension need
Ordinary concentrically braced frames (OCBF) are expected to withstand lim- not exceed the maximum force can be developed by the system.
ited inelastic deformations in their members and connections when subjected to
(b) The forces ,jn braces in co:mpres:~ioln shall be assumed to be equal to
the fbrces resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. OCBF shall meet
0.3Pn.
the requirements in this Section. OCBF aboye the isolation system in seismically
isolated structures shall meet the requirements of Sections 14.4 and 14.5 and (2) Both flanges ~hall be laterally with a maximum spacing of
need not meet the requirements of Sections 14.2 and 14.3. Lb = Lpd , as specified by Equations 1-7 and A-1-8 of Appendix 1 of the
Specification. Lateral braces shall the provisions of Equations A-6-7
and A-6-8 of Appendix 6 of the Spc~¡::Ú'icc.~tion, where M r = Mu = RyZ Fy
(LRFD) or M r = Ma = RyZ Fyf 1. 5 as appropriate, of the beam and
Cd = 1.0. As a minimum, one set of braces is required at the point of
intersection of the bracing, unless member has sufficient out-of-plane
strength and stiffness to ensure between adjacent brace points.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNS1TfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, mc. AMERICAN lNs1TfUTE OF STEEL Cm~s'$lUCl]ON, mc.
[Seet. 14. Sect. 15.] PARTI-ECCENTRICALLY FRAMES
6.1-50 PART 1 - ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES 6.1-51
ECCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAMES (EBF) (1) The available shear strength of the shall be the lesser of
15.
15.1. Scope <PvVpa and 2<P01pa/e (LRFD)
Eccentrically braced frames (EBFs) are expected to withstand significant in- or
elastic defonnations in the links when subjected to the forces resulting from Vpa / nv and 2 (Mpa/e)/n v (ASD), as IaO[)ro[)rial:e.
the motions of the design earthquake. The diagonal braces, columns, and beam where
segments outside of the links shall be designed to remain essentially elastic <Pv = 0.90 (LRFD) (ASD)
under the maximum forces that can Q~ generated by the fully yielded and strain-
hardened links, except where pennitted in this Section. In building s exceeding Vpa = Y¡,~1- (E'r/l:y
(15-1)
five stories in height, the upper story of an EBF system is pennitted to be de-
Mpa = 1. 18Mp [l-(p,/~)J
signed as an OCBF oi" a SCBF and still be considered to be part of an EBF (15-2)
system for the purposes of detennining system factors in the applicable building Pr = Pu (LRFD) or Pa (ASD), as laplJroJmate
codeo El3F shall meet the requirement's in this Section. Pe = Py (LRFD) or Pyf1.5
(2) The length of the link shall not
15.2. Links
15.2a. Limitations (15-3)
nor
Línks shall meet the requirements of Section 8.2b.
(b) 1.6 Mp/Vp when p'(Aw/A g) < (15-4)
The web of a link shall be single thickness. Doubler-plate reinforcement and
web penetrations are not pennitted. . where
Aw = (d - 2t¡)tw
15.2b. Shear Strength p' = Pr/Vr
Except as limited below, the link design shear strength, <PvVm and the allowable
and where
shear strength, Vn/n v , according to the limit state of shear yielding shall be de-
Vr = v" (LRFD) or Va (ASD), as a~proPIiate
tennined as follows:
=
v" required shear strength based LRFD load combinations, kips
nominal shear strength of the link, equal to the lesser of Vp or 2Mp /e, Va = required shear strength based ASD load combinations, kips
kips (N)
0.90 (LRFD) nv = 1.67 (ASD) 15.2c. Link Rotation Angle
The link rotatíon angle is the inelastic between the link and the beam out-
FyZ, kip-in. (N-mm) side of the link when the total story drift equal to the design story drijt, ~. The
link rotation angle shall not exceed the IOl.lO'W'lnQ values:
0.6Fy Aw , kips (N)
link length, in. (mm) (a) 0.08 radians for links oflength 1.
(d-2t¡)tw
(b) 0.02 radians for links of length
The effect ofaxial force on the link available shear strength need not be con-
sidered if (e) The value detennined by linear mtl~rbc)lat:ion between the aboye values for
Pu ~ 0.15Py (LRFD) links oflengthbetween 1.6Mp/Vp 2.6Mp/Vp.
or 15.3. Link Stiffeners
Pa ~ (O. 15/1.5)Py (ASD), as appropriate.
Full-depth web stiffeners shall be of()Vicirld on both sides of the link web at the
where diagonal brace ends of the link. These shall have a combined width
Pu required axial strength using LRFD load combinations, kips (N) not less than (b! - 2tw ) and a thickness less than 0.75tw or Ys in. (lO mm),
Pa required axial strength using ASD load combinatíons, kips (N)
Py nominal axial yield strength =FyAg, kips (N)
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Stru~tural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMEruCAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONS1RUcnON, mc. AMERIcAN msTITUTE OF STEEL COIIj$nlucllON, mc.
6.1-52 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Seet. 15. Seet. 15.] PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY B CED FRAMES 6.1-53
whichever is larger, where b¡ and tw are the link flange width and link web (ii) Tests that are conducted specifically for the project and are representa-
thickness, respectively. tive of project memb6r sizes, aterial strengths, connection configura-
Links shall be provided with intennediate web stiffeners as follows: tions, and matching connection processes, within the limits specified in
Appendix S.
(a) Links of lengths 1.6Mp /Vp or less shall be provided with intennediate web
stiffeners spaced at intervals not exceeding (30tw-d/5) for a link rotation Exception: Where reinforcement at the eam-to-column connection at the link
angle of 0.08 radian or (52tw-d/5) for link rotatioIÍ angles of 0.02 radian or end precludes yielding of the beam ove the reinforced length, the link is per-
less. Linear interpolation shall be used for values between 0.08 and 0.02 mitted to be the beam segment from th end of the reinforcement to the brace
connection. Where such links are use and the link length does not exceed
radian.
1.6Mp /Vp , cyc1ic testing of the reinforce connection is not required if the avail-
(b) Links of length greater than 2.6Mp /Vp and les s than 5Mp /Vp shall be able strength of the reinforced section d the connection equals or exceeds the
provided with intennediate web stiffeners placed at a distance of 1.5 times b¡ required strength calculated based upon he strain-hardened link as described in
from each end of the link. Section 15.6. Full depth stiffeners as req ired in Section 15.3 shall be placed at
the link-to-reinforcement interface.
(c) Links of length between 1.6Mp /Vp and 2.6Mp /Vp shall be provided with
intennediate web stiffeners meeting the requirements of (a) and (b) aboye. 15.5. Lateral Bracing of Link
(d) Intennediate web stiffeners are not required in links of lengths greater than Lateral bracing shall be provided at bo the top and bottom link flanges at the
5Mp /Vp • ends of the link. The required strength f each lateral brace at the ends of the
link shall be Pb = 0.06 Mr/h a, where ha i the distance between flange centroids
(e) Intennediate web stiffeners shall be full depth. For links that are les s than in in. (mm).
25 in. (635 mm) in depth, stiffeners are required on only one side of the link
web. The thickness of one-sided stiffeners shall not be les s than tw or % in. For desigIi according to Specification Se tion B3.3 (LRFD)
(10 mm), whichever is larger, and the width shall be not less than (b¡/2) - tw •
For links that are 25 in. (635 mm) in depth or greater, similar intennediate
stiffeners are required on both sides of the web. For design according to Specification Se tion B3.4 (ASD)
The required strength of fillet welds connecting a link stiffener to the link web
is AstFy (LRFD) or AstFy / 1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, where Ast is the area of the The required brace stiffness shall meet e provisions of Equation A-6-8 of the
stiffener. The required strength of fillet welds connecting the stiffener to the link Specification, where M r is defined aboye, Cd = 1, and Lb is the link length.
flanges is AstF)4 (LRFD) or AstFy /4(1.5) (ASD).
15.4. Link-to-Column Connections 15.6. Diagonal Brace and Beam utside of Link
Link-to-column connections must be capable of sustaining the maximum link 15.6a. Diagonal Brace
rotation angle based on the length ofthe link, as specified in Section 15.2c. The The required combined axial and flexur, 1 strength of the diagonal brace shall
strength of the connection measured at the co1umn face shall equal at least the be determined based on load combinatio s stipulated by the applicable building
nominal shear strength of the link, V", as specified in Section 15.2b at the maxi- codeo For load combinations inc1uding se smic effects, a load Q¡ shall be substi-
mum link rotation angle. tuted for the tenn E, where Q¡ is defined s the axial force s and moments gener-
Link-to-column connections shall satisfy the aboye requirements by one of the ated by at least 1.25 times the expected n minal shear strength of the link Ry Vm
following: where Vn is as defined in Section l5.2b. e available strength of the diagonal
brace shall comply with Specification eh pter H.
(a) Use a connection prequalified for EBF in accordance with Appendix P.
Brace members shall meet the requireme ts of Section 8.2a.
(b) Provide qualifying cyclic test results in accordance with Appendix S. Re-
15.6b. Beam Outside Link
sults of at least two cyc1ic connection tests shall be provided and are permit-
The required combinyd axial and flexur 1 strength of the beam outside of the
ted to be based on one of the following:
link shall be determined based on load co binations stipulated by the applicable
(i) Tests reported in research literature or documented tests perfonned for building codeo Fór load combinations inc uding seismic effects, a load Q¡ shall
other projects that are representative of project conditions, within the be substituted for the term E where QI is defined as the torces generated by at
limits specified in Appendix S. least 1.1 times ~e expected nominal she strength of the link, RyVm where Vn
Seismic Provisionsjor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions jor Structural Steel Buildings, M h 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERIcAN !NSTITIJTE OF STEEL CONsTRuenoN, !Nc. AMERrCAN !NSTITIJTE OF STEEL CON TRuenON, !Nc.
6.1-54 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Sect. 15. Sect.16.] PART 1 - BUCKLlNG-RESTRA D BRACED FRAMES 6.1-55
is as defined in Section 15.2b. The available strength of the beam outside of the
link shall be determined by the Specification, multiplied by Rr 15.10. Oemand Critical Welds
Complete-joint-penetration groove we ds attaching the link flanges and the link
web to the column are de1Jland critica welds, and shall satisfy the requirements
of Section 7.3b.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 I
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cot~sn~uCTI0N, !Nc.
6.1-56 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES [Sect. 16. Sect. 16.] PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED FRAMES 6.1-57
Seismic Prl101J¡.':l1nl.jotStructural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsjor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONs1RUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~siR:uCTION, INc.
6.1-58 PART 1- BUCKLING-RESTRAlNED BRACED FRAMES [Sect. 16. Sect. 17.] PARTI-SPEC~PLATE 6.1-59
For purposes of brace design and testing, the calculated maximum deformation 17.2. Webs
of braces shall be increased by inc1uding the effect of the vertical deflection of
the beam under the loading defined in Section 16.4(1). 17.2a. Shear Stren.gth
The panel design shear strength, <1> Vn ), and the allowable shear strength,
K-type braced frames are not pennitted for BRBF.
Vn/Q (ASD), according to the limit of shear yielding, shall be detennined
16.5. Beams and Coluinns as follows:
Beams and columns in BRBF shall meet the following requirements.
(17-1)
16.5a. Width-Thickness Limitations <1> ~ 0.90 (LRFD) Q = 1.67 (ASD)
Beam and column members shall meet the requirements of Section 8.2b.
where ;
16.5b. Required Strength thickness of the web, in.
The required strength of beams and columns in BRBF shall be determined from c1ear dlstance between VBE
load combinations as stipulated in the applicable building codeo For load combi-
nations that inc1ude earthquake effects, the earthquake effect, E, shall be deter- a is the angle of web yielding in
mined from the adjusted brace strengths in tension and compression. and it is given by:
The required strength of beams and columns need not exceed the maximum
force that can be developed by the system.
tan 4 a =- - + - - ; - - - - - - , : - (17-2)
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITIITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CQi'lSTImC:rION, INc.
6.1-60 PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS [Seet. 17. Seet. 18.] PART 1 - QUALITY n.~ •.)u¡rV"U"""'.c 6.1-61
The required strength of HBE shall be the greater of the forces corresponding
to the expected yield strength, in tension, of the web calculated at an angle a. or
that determined from the load combinations in the applicable building code as-
suming the web provides no support for gravity loads.
The beam-column moment ratio provisions in Section 9.6 shall be met for all
HBENBE intersections without consideration of the effects of the webs.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Úructural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STBEL CONSTRUCI'ION, !Nc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STBEL Cq~~STRUcrION, !Nc.
6.1-62
App.P.] PARTI- 'RBQlli~IflCATIONIOFCONNECTIONS 6.1-63
APPENDIX P the eonneetion has the ability and reli:*-bility to undergothe required interstory
drift angle for SMF and iMF and the link rotation angle for ESF, where
the link is adjaeent lo eolumns. The on member sizes for prequalifieation
PREQUALIFICATION OF BEAM-COLUMN shall not exeeed the limits speeified in S, 5eetion S5.2.
AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS
P4.
In order to be prequalified, the effeet the following variables on eonneetion
performance shall be eonsidered. on the permissible values for eaeh vari-
able shall be established by the CPRP the prequalified connection.
P1. SCOPE
This appendix eontains minimum requirements for prequalifieation of beam- (1) Beam or link parameters:
to-eolumn moment eonnections in special moment frames (SMF), intermediate (a) Cross-sedion shape: wide
moment frames (IMF), and link-to-eolumn eonneetions in eccentrically braced
frames (EBF). Prequalified connections are permitted to be used, within the ap- (b) Cross-seetion fabrieation rolled shape, welded shape, or other
plieable limits of prequalifieation, without the need for further qualifying eyclie (e) Depth
tests. When the limits of prequalifieation or design requirements for prequali-
fied eonneetions eonfliet with the requirements of these Provisions, the limits (d) Weight per foot
of prequalifieation and design requirements for prequalified eonneetions shall (e) Flange thiekness
govern.
(f) Material speeifieation
P2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (g) Span-to':'depth ratio (for SMF IMF), or link length (for EBF)
P2.1. Basis for Prequalification (h) Width thiekness ratio of erc,sS!-·se(:tton elements
Conneetions shall be prequalified based on test data satisfying Seetion P3, sup-
(i) Lateral braeing
ported by analytieal studies and design models. The,eombined body of evidenee
for prequalifieation must be sufficient to assure that the eonneetion can supply (j) Other :parameters to the speeifie conneetion under
the required interstory drift angle for SMF and IMF systems, or the required eonsideration
link rotation angle for EBF, on a eonsistent and reliable basis within the speei-
(2) Column parameters:
fied limits of prequalifieation. All applieable limit states for the eonneetion that
affeet the stiffness, strength and deformation eapacity of the eonneetion and the (a) Cross-seetion shape: wide box, or other
seismic load resisting system (SLRS) must be identified. These include fracture
(b) Cross-seetion fabrieation . rolled shape, welded shape, or other
related limit states, stability related limit states, and all other limit states perti-
nent for the eonneetion under eonsideration. The effeet of design variables listed (e) Colurnrt orientation with to beam or link: beam oí link is eon-
in Seetion P4 shall be addressed for eonneetion prequalifieation. nected to eolumn flange, or link is eonneeted to eolumn web,
Authority for Prequalification beams or links are to both the eolurnh flange and web,
P2.2.
Prequalifieation of a eonneetion and the assoeiated limits of prequalifieation or other
shall be established by a eonneetion prequalifieation review panel (CPRP) ap- (d) Depth
proved by the authority having jurisdiction.
(e) Weight per foot
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CoNSTRUcrrON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE oÍ' STEEL <rolNSTlmC:l1oN, !Nc.
6.1-64 PART 1 - PREQUALIFICATION OF CONNECTIONS [App.P. App.P.] PARTI- ~'-'-''Yvru.,'Ü '~''--n..~ H.,'lN OF CONNECTIONS 6.1-6:
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, mcl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, lNe. AMEruCAN INSTITUTE OF S1EEL Cot~STR:UcrION, lNc.
App.Q.]
6.1-66 PART 1 - QUALITY .M.~''>I-'''V1o.1''\..-.c, PLAN 6.1-6~
APPENDIX Q (6) Manufacturer's product data or catalog data for SMAW, FCAWane
GMAW cdmposite (cored) metals to be used. The data sheets shall
describe the product, limitations use, recommended or typical welding
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN parameters, and storage and requirements, including baking, ii
applicable. '
The following documents shall be av¿U!able for review by the engineer of record
or designee prior to fabrication or as applicable, unless specified to be
(a) power source (constant current or constant voltage) (b) The agency's inspection pf()tedUl~es. including general inspection,
material controls, and visual inspection
(b) for demand critical welds, electrode manufacturer and trade name
(2) Qualifications of management and personnel designated for the project
Co ies of the manufacturer's typical certificate of conformaIice for all elec-
(4) tr ~es fluxes and shielding gasses to be used. Certificates of conformance (3) Qualificationrecords for Inspectors NDT technicians designated for the
o , . t project
shall satisfy the applicable AWS A5 reqmremen s.
(5) For demand critical welds, applicable manufacturer's certi~cations that the (4) NDT procedures and equipment cWibr;atic)ll records for NDT to be per-
filler metal meets the supplemental notch toughness reqmrements, as ap- fonued and equipment to be used the project
licable. Should the filler metal manufacturer not supply ~uch supplemental (5) Daily or wee.kly inspection reports
~ertifications, the contractor shall have the necessary testmg performed and
(6) Nonconformance reports
provide the applicable test reports.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucrroN, lNe. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL COI~STImcnoN, mc.
(App.Q. App.Q.] PART 1 - QUALITY n~,;)I1JrV\.l'n :t<. 6.1-69
PART 1 - QUAUTY ASSURANCE PLAN
6.1-68
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CO!l\I"sTRUCTION.lNe.
AMERICAN lNSTlTUTE OF STE.E.L CONSTRUCI10N, lNe.
~~~.. ~.~-------~---_.--------~"--~--~-_._.-~_.-.
6.1-70 PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN [App.Q. App.Q.]
6.1-71
QC QA
Inspection Tasks Prior to Bolting
Task Doc. Task Doc.
Proper bolts selected for the joint detail O O
Proper bolting procedure selected for joint detail O O
Connecting elements are fabricated properly, including
the appropriate faying surface condition and hole O O
preparation, if specified, meets applicable requirements
Pre-installation verification testing conducted for fastener
P D O D
assemblies and methods used
Proper storage provided for bolts, nuts, washers, and
O O
other fastener components
QC QA
Inspection Tasks During Bolting
Task Doc. Task Doc.
Fastener assemblies placed in all holes and washers (if
O O
required) are properly positioned
Joint brought to the snug tight condition prior to the
O O
pretensioning operation
Fastener component not turned by the wrench prevented
O O
from rotating
Bolts are pretensioned progressing systematically from
most rigid point toward free edges
O O
QC
Inspection Tasks After Bolting
Task Doc. Task
Document accepted and rejected connections P D P
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsnruTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings,
9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMEruCAN !NSTlTlFIE OF STEEL Cm~STBluClI0N, !Ne.
R2. SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this appendix. PERIOD PARAMETERS
Cd Deflection amplification factor
C x Parameters used for determining the approximate fundamental period 1
n
Parameters C, and X
no System overstrengthfactor
R Response modification coefficient
---.----------------------"-"~-----_._-~-_. __ ._--_._._--------~_.-
App.S.] PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC
6.1-76 OF CONNECTIONS 6.1-77
The test specimen shall consist of 1east a single column with beams or
S2. SYMBOLS links attached to one or both sides the column. .
The numbers in parentheses after the definition of a symbol refers to the Section
number in which the symbol is first used. (2) Points of inflection in the test ass,err~bljige
the anticipated points of inflection shall coincide approximately with
e Interstory drift angle (S6) the Prototype under earthquake loading.
(3) Lateral bracing of the test sut)as:)~nlblia1!e
"ftotal Total link rotation angle (S6) cation or reaction points as .IS permitted near load. appli-
to provlde lateral stability of the test
subassemblage.
. Additional bracing of the test subassemblage
S3. DEFINITIONS IS not permitted, unless it 1ateral bracing to be used in the
Complete loading cycle. A cyele of rotation taken from zero force to zero force, prototype.
ineluding one positive and one negative peak.
Interstory drift angle. Interstory displacement divided by story height, radians.
ss. ESSENTIAL TEST VARIAB
The test specimen shall replicate as as is practical the pertinent design,
Inelastic rotation. The permanent or plastic portion of the rotation angle between detailing, construction features, and properties of the prototype. The
a beam and the column or between a link and the column of the test specimen; following variables shall be replicated in test specimen.
measured in radians. The inelastic rotation shall be computed based on aIi
analysis of test specimen deforrnations. Sources of inelastic rotation inelude Sources of Inelastic Rotat
yielding of members, yielding of connection elements and connectors, and Inelastic rotation shall be d 1 d'
the same members and eve ?pe m test specimen by inelastic action in
slip between members and connection elements. For beam-to-column mo- connectlon f' d .
other words, in the beam or link in th as an lclpate 1~ the prototype (in
ment connections in special and intermediate moment frames, inelastic ro- side of the 1 .' e panel zone, m the cohirnn out-
tation is computed based upon the assumption that inelastic action is con- b 1 Th pane ~one, or m connection elements) within the limits described
centrated at a single point located at the intersection of the centerline of the e ow. e percentage of the total . . .
developed in each b rotation m the test specimen that is
beam with the centerline of the column. For link-to-column connections in of the ti" d mem er or element shall be within 25· percent
eccentrically bracedframes, inelastic rotation shall be computed based upon an clpate . percentage . l' '.
. d' me astic rotation In the ·pro.to-
the assumption that inelastic action is concentrated at a single point located at;: type th at IS eveloped m the {'ol:Te~;poifidl:im! .
~. member or connection elemento
the intersection of the centerline of the link with the face of the colurnn.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, lNc. AMERICAN lNS'ITIUIE OF STEEL COl~$TIl~UC1lON. INc.
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLlC TESTS OF CONNECTlONS [App.S. App.S.]
6.1-78 PART I - QUALlFYING CYCLIC OF CONNECTIONS 6.1-7~
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005~nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, c.
AMERICAN lNSTlTIJTE OF STEEL CmvsTR:uCTION, INe.
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLlC TESTS OF CONNECTIONS [App.S. App. S.] PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLlC
6.1-80 OF CONNECTIONS 6.1-81
(2) The type and orientation of bolt holes (standard, oversize, short slot, long S6.3. Loading Sequence for Lin.v-ILIUO-L.<... ·Iumn Connections
slot, or other) used in the test specimen shall be the same as those to be used Qualifying cyclic ,tests of link moment connections in eccentrically
for the corresponding bolt holes in the prototype. braced frames shall be conducted by the total link rotation angle,
"(10101, imposed on the test specimen, as
(3) When inelastic rotation is to be developed either by yielding or by slip
within a bolted portion of the connection, the method ~sed to make th~ bolt (1) 6 cycles at "(10101 = 0.00375 rad
holes (drilling, sub-punching and reaming, or other) m the test spe~lmen
(2) 6 cycles at "(tolal = 0.005 rad
shall be the same as that to be used in the corresponding bolt holes m the
prototype. (3) 6 cycles at "(tolal = 0.0075 rad
(4) Bolts in the test specimen shall have the same installation (pretensioned or (4) 6 cycles at "(Iotal = 0.01 rad
other) and faying surface preparation (no specified slip resistance, Class A
(5) 4 cycles at "(iolal = 0.015 rad
or B slip resistance, or other) as that to be used for the corresponding bolts
in the prototype. (6) 4 cycles at "(Iotal = 0.02 rad
(7) 2 cycles at "(10101 = 0.03 rad
S6. LOADING HISTORV (8) 1 cycle at "(tolal = 0.04 rad
S6.1. General Requirements . ' (9)
The test specimen shall be subjected to cyclic loads according to the req~lfe 1 cycle at "(tolal = 0.05 rad
ments prescribed in Section S6.2 for beam-to-column moment con~ectlOns (10) 1 cycle at 'Ylolal = 0.07 rad
in special and intermediate moment frames, and accordin~ to ~e reqU1re~ents
(11) 1 cycle at 'Ylolal = 0.09 rad
prescribed in Section S6.3 for link-to-column connecnons m eccentrzcally
braced frames. Continue loading at increments of 'Ytotal = 02 radian, with one cycle of loading
at each step.
Loading sequences other than those specified in Sections S6.2 and S?3 may be
used when they are demonstrated to be of equivalent or greater seventy.
S7. INSTRUMENTATION
S6.2. Loading Sequence for Beam-to-Co_lumn Sufficient instrumentation shall be UL\'/v",n:.u on the test specimen to permit
Moment Connections measurement or calculation of the listed in Section S9.
Qualifying cyclic tests of beam-to-column moment connections in special and
intermediate moment frames shall be conducted by controlling the interstory S8.
drift angle, S, imposed on the test specimen, as specified below: S8.1. Tension Testing Requir.::unA'....... C! for Structural Steel
(1) 6 cycles at S = 0.00375 rad Tension testing shall be conducted on of steel taken from the mate-
rial adjacent to each test specimen. results from certified mill test
(2) 6 cycles at S = 0.005 rad
reports shall be reported but are not to be used in place of specimen
(3) 6 cycles at S =0.0075 rad testing for the purposes of this Section. -test results shall be based upon
testing that is conducted in accordance Section S8.2. Tension testing shall
(4) 4 cycles at S = 0.01 rad
be conducted and reported for the portions of the test specimen:
(5) 2 cycles at S = 0.015 rad
(1) Flange(s) and web(s) of beams and at standard locations
(6) 2 cycles at S = 0.02 rad (2) Any element of the connectionthat inelastic rotation by yielding
(7) 2 cycles at S = 0.03 rad
S8.2. Methods of Tension Testing
(8) 2 cycles at S = 0.04 rad Tension testlng shall be conducted in acc:qr(lan1ce with ASTM A6/A6M, ASTM
Continue loading at increments of S = 0.01 radian, with two cycles of loading A370, and ASTM E8, with the following ejXoeptl.ons
at each step. (1) The yield stres$, F y , that is reported the test shaIl be based upon the
yield strength definition in ASTM using the offset method at 0.002
strain.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTmJTE OF STEEL Cor~$:Ucrl0N, !Nc.
[App. S. App.S.] PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF CONNECTIONS OF CONNECTIONS 6.1-83
(2) The loading rate for the tension test shall replicate, as elosely as practical, (9) The inte~story drift angle and total inelastic rotation developed by the
the loading rate to be used for the test specimen. test s~eclm~n. Th~ components of the test specimen contributing to the
t?tal melastIc ro~tIon ~ue to' or slip shall be identified. The por-
Weld Metal Testing Requirements tIon of ~e total melastIc contributed by each component of the
The tensile strength of the welds ~sed in the tested assembly and the CVN tough- test ~peclmen shall be The method used to compute inelastic
ness used in the tested assembly shall be determined by material tests as specified in rotatIons shall be elearly shown.
Appendix X. The use of tensile strength and CVN toughness values that are re-
(10) A chronologicallisting of slgnifi~ant test observations, ineluding observa-
ported on the manufacturer's typical certificate of conformance is not permitted
to be used for purposes of this section, unless that report ineludes results specific tions of yielding, slip, and fracture of any portion of the test
specimen as applicable.
to Appendix X requirements.
(11) The controlling failure mode for test specimen. If the test is terminated
A single test plate may be used if the WPS for the test specimen welds is within
plus/minus 20 kJ/in. (0.8 kJ/mm) of the WPS for the test plateo prior to failure, the reason for the test shall be elearly indicated.
Tensile specimens and CVN specimens shall be prepared in accordance with (12) The results of the material tests sPt:~cified in Section S8.
ANSIIAWS B4.0 Standard Methodsfor Mechanical Testing ofWelds. (13) The Welding Procedure (WPS) and welding inspection
reports.
TEST REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
Additional drawings, data, and als,cm;sltm of the test specimen or test results are
For each test specimen, a written test report meeting the requirements of the
permitted to be ineluded in the reporto
authority having jurisdiction and the requirements of this Section shall be pre-
pared. The report shall thoroughly document all key features and results of the
S10. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
test. The report shall inelude the following information:
The test specimen must satisfy the and interstory drift angle or link
(1) A drawing or elear description of the test subassemblage, ineluding key rotation angle requirements of these P1I'ov'isÍl1ns ¡:lor thespecial moment frame,
dimensions, boundary conditions at loading and reaction points, and location intermediate moment frame, or braced frame connection, as appli-
of lateral braces. cable. The test specimen must sustain required interstory drift angle or link
(2) A drawing of the connection detail showing member sizes, grades of steel, rotation angle for at least one complete cyele.
the sizes of all connection elements, welding d~tails ineluding filler metal,
the size and location of bolt holes, the size and grade of bolts, and all other
pertinent details of the connection.
(3) A listing of all other essential variables for the test specimen, as listed in
Section S5.
(4) A listing or plot showing the applied load or displacement history ofthe test
specimen.
(5) A listing of all demand critical welds.
(6) Definition of the region of the connection that comprises the protected
zones.
(7) A plot of the applied load versus the displacement of the test specimen. The
displacement reported in this plot shall be measured at or near the point of
load application. The locations on the test §pecimen where the loads and
displacements were measured shall be elearly indicated.
(8) A plot of beam moment versus interstory drift angle for beam-to-column
moment connections; or a plot of link shear force versus link rotation angle
for link-to-column connections. For beam-to-column connections, the beam
moment and the interstory drift angle shall be computed with respect to the
centerline of the column.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, INc. AMERICAN INSlTIUrE OF S'mEL Co~~sn~ucrl0N, lNe.
App. T.]
6.1-84 6.1-8~
APPENDIXT Inelastic deformation. The pelmamellt or plastic portion of the axial displace.
ment in a buckling-restrained
QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS Prototype. The brace, connections, m~mb'ers, steel properties, and other design
OF BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACES detailing, and construction to be used in the actual building frame.
Subassemblage test specimen. The of the brace, the connectiom
and testing apparatus that as elosely as practical the axial and flexo
ural deformations of the brace in prototype.
T1. SCOPE Test specimen. Brace test specimen subassemblage test specimen.
This appendix ineludes requirements for qualifying cyelic tests of individual
buckling-restrained braces and buckling-restrained brace subassemblages, when T4.
required in these provisions. The purpose of the testing of individual braces is The subassemblage test specimen satisfy the following requirements:
to provide evidence that a buckling-restrained brace satisfies the requirements
(1) The mechanism for inelastic rotation in the subassemblage
for strength and inelastic deformation by these provisions; it also permits the
test specimen brace shall be the as that of the prototype. The rotational
determination of maximum brace forces for design of adjoining elements. The
deformation demands on the test specimen brace shall be
purpose of testing of the brace subassemblage is to provide evidence that the
equal to or greater than those of prototype.
brace-design can satisfactorily accornmodate the deformation and rotational de-
mands associated with the designo Further, the subassemblage test is intended (2) The axial yield strength of the core, Pyse , of the brace in the subassem-
to demonstrate that the hysteretic behavior of the brace in the subassemblage is blage test specimen shall not be than that of the prototype where both
consistent with that of the individual brace elements tested uniaxially. strengths are based on the core Ase, multiplied by the yield strength as
determined' from a coupon test.
Alternative testing requirements are permitted when approved by the engineer of
record and the authority having jurisdiction. (3) The cross-sectional shape and of the steel core projection of the
subassemblage test specimen shall be the same as that of the brace in
This appendix provides only minimum recommendations for simplified test
the prototype.
conditions.
(4) The same documented design shall be used for design of the
T2. SYMBOLS subassemblage as used for the to allow comparison of the rota-
The numbers in parentheses afier the definition of a symbol refers to the Section tional deformation demands on subassemblage brace to the prototype.
number in which the symbol is first used. In stability calculations, beams, , and gussets connecting the core
shall be considered parts of this
~ Deformation quantity used to control loading of the test ,specimen (total
b .al (5) The calculated margins of safety
brace end rotation for the subassemblage test specimen; total brace aXI the prototype connection design, steel
deformation for the brace test specimen) (T6). core projection stability, overall and other relevant subassemblage
test specimen brace construction exeluding the gusset plate, for the
~bm Value of deformation quantity, ~b, corresponding to the design story drift prototype, shall equal or exceed of the subassemblage test specimen
(T6). construction.
~by Value of deformation quantity, ~b, at first significant yield of test specimen (6) Lateral bracing of the su test specimen shall replicate the lat-
(T6). eral bracing in the prototype.
(7) The brace test specimen and the shall be manufactured in accordance
T3. DEFINITIONS
with the same quality control and processes and procedures.
Brace test specimen. A single buckling-restrained brace element used for labora-
tory testing intended to model the brace in the Prototype. Extrapolation beyond the limitations in this section shall be permitted sub-
ject to qualified peer review and by the authority having jurisdiction.
Design methodology. A set of step-by-step procedures, based on ca1culation or
experiment, used to determine sizes, lengths, anddetails in the design ofbuckling-
restrained braces and their connections.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for S,ructural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERIcAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL C1or~STll'UCIloN,INC.
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [App. T. App. T.]
6.1-86 PART 1 - QUALIFYING
6.1-8~
T5. BRACE TEST SPECIMEN . (b) The measured yield stress the material of the steel core in the brac{
The brace test specimen shall replicate as elosely as is practical the pertment de- test specimen shall be at 90 percent of that of the prototype a~
sign, detailing, construction features, and material properties of the prototype. determined from coupon
T5.1. Design of Brace Test Specim.en . . (c) The specified minimum stress and strain of the brace tes1
The same documented design methodology shall be used for the brace test sp~c~ specimen steel core shaIl
men and the prototype. The design calculations shall demonstrate, at a mlID- (2)
mum, the following requirements:
(1) The calculated margin of safety for stability against overall buckling for the
Materials used in the bU(~ktmg-testriammg mechanism of the brace test
prototype shall equal or exceed that of the brace test specimen. used in the prototype.
T5.6. Connections
(2) The calculated margins of safety for the brace test specimen and the proto-
type shall account for differences in material properties, inc1uding yield and The welded, bolted, and pinned joints the test specimen shaIl replicate those
ultimate stress, ultimate elongation, and toughness. on the prototype as elose as practica!.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNs1lTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc.
AMEipCAN lNsnTIJTE OF STEEL c,.qNS'I"RU<::TION, lNc.
App. T.] TESTSOFBRB
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [App. T. 6.1-89
6.1-88
(5) A plot of the applied load versus deformation, tob. The method used to
The design story drift shall not be taken as less than 0.01 times the story height
determine the defonnations shall c1e~ly shown. The locations on the test
for the purposes of calculating tobm' Other loading sequences are permitted to be specimen where the loads and were measured shall be c1early
used to qualify the test specimen when they are demonstrated to be of equal or identified.
greater severity in terms of maximum and cumulative inelastic deformation.
(6) A chronologicallisting of Slgrut:JIQaJlt
tions of yi~lding, slip, . test observations, including observa-
INSTRUMENTATION transverse displacement along the test
T7. specimen and fracture of any
Sufficient instrumentation shall be provided on the test specimen to permit mea- of th e test specimen and connections,
surement or calculation of the quantities listed in Section T9. as applicable.
(7) spt~ci1jed in Section T8.
T8. MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREMENTS
(8) The manufacturing quality and quality assurance plans used for the
T8.1. Tension Testing Requirements fabrication of the test specimen.
Tension testing shall be conducted on samples of steel taken from the same ma- 'fi' . shall.be inc1uded with the welding
procedure specl catlOns and mspectlOn reports.
terial as that used to manufacture the steel coreo Tension test results from certi-
fied mill test reports shall be reported but are not permitted to be used in place Additional drawings, data, and OlS:cUissítm of the test specimen or test results are
of specimen testing for the purposes of this Section. Tension-test results shall be permitted to be inc1uded in the reporto
based upon testing that is conducted in accordance with Section T8.2.
T10. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
T8.2. Methods of Tension Testing At least one subassemblage test that the requirements of Section T4
Tension testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM A6, ASTM A370, shall be perfonned. At least one brace that satisfies the requirements of Sec-
and ASTM E8, with the following exceptions: tion T5, shall be perfonned. Within required protocol range all tests shall
(1) The yield stress that is reported from the test shall be based upon the yield satisfy the following requirements:
strength definition in ASTM A370, using the offset method of 0.002 strain.
(1) The plot showing the applied vs. displacement history shall exhibit
(2) The loading rate for the tension test shall replicate, as closely as is practical, stable, repeatable behavior with . incremental stiffness.
the loading rate used for the test specimen. (2) There shall be no fracture, brace lIl$tabilitv or brace end connection failure.
(3) The coupon shall be machined so that its longitudinal axis is parallel to the
(3) For brace tests, each cyc1e to a ...
rle1:prrnation
' greater than Llby the maximum
longitudinal axis of the steel coreo tension and compression forces b
of the coreo . not e les s than the nominal strength
(l) A drawing or clear description of the test specimen, including key dimen- Other acceptance criteria may be ~ the brace test specimen or subas-
lor
sions, boundary conditions at loading and reaction points, and location of semblage test specimen subject to quawled
authority having jurisdiction. peer review and approval by the
lateral bracing, if any.
(2) A drawing of the connection details showing member sizes, grades of steel,
the sizes of all connection elements, welding details including filler metal,
the size and location of bolt or pin holes, the size and grade of connectors,
and all other pertinent details of the connections.
(3) A listing of all other essential variables as listed in Section T4 or T5, as
appropriate.
(4) A listing or plot showing the applied load or displacement history.
Seismic Provisions Jor St~uctural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic ProvisionsJor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL C01~STItuC110N. lNe.
AMERICAN INs1'I1UfE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc.
6.1-90
App. w.] PART 1 - WELDING nn'¡-"UTC'Tr"'TC'
6.1-91
W1. SCOPE (2) Locations where supplemental are required when backing is permit-
This appendix provides additional details regarding welding and welding inspee- ted to remain
tion, and is included on an interim basis pending adoption of sueh eriteria by (3) Locations where weld tabs are to
AWS or other aeeredited organization.
(4) Those joints or groups of joints in a specific assembly order, welding
W2. STRUCTURAl.OESIGN ORAWINGS ANO sequence, welding technique or special precautions are required
SPECIFICATIONS, SHOPORAWINGS, ANO
ERECTION ORAWINGS W3. PERSONNEL
W2.1. Structurai Oesign Orawlngs and Specifications W3.1. QC Welding Inspectors
Struct~al design drawings arid specifications shall inelude, as a minimum, the QC welding inspection personnel shall associate welding inspectors (AWI)
following information: or higher, as definect in AWS B5.1 .)ra'YlaJ~raJo¡ the Qualification ofWelding In-
spectors, or otherwise qualified under of AWS D1.1 Section 6.1.4
(1) Locations where backup bars ate required to be removed
and to the satisfaction of the contractor's
(2) Loeations where supplemenhll fillet welds are required when baeking is W3.2.
permitted to remain
QA Welding Inspectors
QA welding inspectors shall be welding inslpecitors (WI), or senior welding in-
(3) Loeations where fillet welds are used to reinforce groove welds or to im- spectors (SWI), as defined in AWS B5.1 AWIs may be used under the
prove connection geometry direct supervision of WIs, on site and when weld inspection is being
(4) Loeations where weld tabs are requited to be removed conducted.
(5) Splice locations where tapered transitions are required W3.3. Nondestructive Testing
NDT technicians shall be qualified as
(1) In accordance with their employer's practice which shall meet or
exceed the criteria of the American for Nondestructive Testing, Inc.
SNT TC-1A Ri!commended the Training and Testing ofNonde-
structive Personnel, or of . . . ",."" .......,,,.. CP-189, Standardfor the Qualifica-
tion and Certification ofNondt~str"Uct'l1ve Testing Personnel.
(2) Ultrasonic testing for QA may be on1y by UT technicians certi-
fied as ASNT Level In through by the ASNT, or certified as
(6) The shape of weld aecess holes, if a speeial shape is required
Level n by their employer for flaw . If the engineer of record ap-
(7) Joints or groups of joints in which a specific assembly order, welding proves the use of flaw sizing UT technicians shall also be quali-
sequence,welding technique or other special precautions are required fied and certified by their employer flaw sizing.
W2.2. Shop Drawings (3) Magnetic partiele testing (MT) and penetrant testing (PT) for QA may
Shop drawings shall inelude, as a minimum, the fóllowing information: be performed on1y by technicians as Level n by their employer, or
certified as ASNT Level nI through by the ASNT and certified
(1) Access hole dimensions, surface profile and finish requirements by their emploYer.
(2) Locations where backing bars are to be removed
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL COII/STj;lUC110N, mc.
6.1-92 PART 1 - WELDING PROVISIONS [App. W. App. w.] PART 1 - WELDING 6.1-93
W4. NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING PROCEDURES The maximum h~at input to be used in prc,ductl(m shall be used in the qualifica-
tion testing. The ,qualified maximum temperature shall be the lowest
W4.1. Ultrasonic Testing interpass temperature used for any during qualification testing. Both weld
Ultrasonic testing shall be performed according to the procedures prescribed in metal and HAZ shall be tested. The metal shall meet all the mechanical
AWS D1.1 Section 6, Part F following a written procedure containing the ele- properties required by Section 7.3a, or for demand critical welds of Sec-
ments prescribed in paragraph K3 of Annex K. Section 6, Part F procedures shall tion 7.3b, as applicable. The heat zone CVN toughness shall meet a
be qualified using weld mock-ups having lII6-in. (1.5 mm)-diameter side drilled minimum requirement of 20 ft-Ibf (27 at 70°F (21°C) with specimens taken
holes similar to Annex K, Figure K-3. at both 1 and 5 nim from the fusion
W4.2. Magnetic Particle Testing W5.5. WeldTabs
Magnetic partiele testing shall be performed according to procedures prescribed Where practicable, weld tabs shall beyond the edge of the joint a mini-
inAWS D1.1, following a written procedure utilizing the Yoke Method that con- mum of one inch or the thickness of part, whichever is greater. Extensions
forms to ASTM E709. need not exceed 2 in. (50 mm).
Where used, weld tabs shall be within lis in. (3 mm) of the base metal
W5. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVISIONS surface, except at eontinuity pIates removal to within lj.¡ in. (6 mm) of
W5.1. Intermixed Filler Metals the plate edge is acceptable, and the of the weld finished. Removal shall be
When FCAW-S filler metals are used in combination with filler metals of other by air carbon are cutting (CAC-A), chipping, or thermal cutting. The
processes, ineluding FCAW-G, a test specimen shall be prepared and mechani- process shall be controlled to gouging. The edges where weld
cal testing shall be conducted to verify that the notch toughness of the combined tabs have been removed shall be to a surface roughness of 500 J.l,in.
material s in the intermixed region of the weld meets the notch toughness require- (13 /lm) or better. Grinding to a flush is not required. The contour of
ments of Section 7.3a and, if required, the notch toughness requirements for the weld end shall provide a smooth free of notches and sharp comers.
demand eritieal weIds of Section 7.3b. At T-joints, a minimum radius in the need not be provided. The weld end
shall be free of gouges and notches. defects not greater than Yl6 in. (2 mm)
W5.2. Filler Metal Diffusible Hydrogen deep shall be faired to a slope not than 1:5. Other weld defects shall be
Welding electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall meet the require- excavated and repaired by welding in with an applicable WPS.
ments for H16 (16 mL maximum diffusible hydrogen per 100 grams depos-
ited weld metal) as tested in accordance with AWS A4.3 Standard Methodsfor Bottom Flange Welding
Determination of the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitie, Bainitie, and When using weld access holes to CJP groove welds of beam bottom
Ferritie Steel Weld Metal Produeed by Are Welding. (Exception: GMAW solid flanges to column flanges or plates, the groove weld shall be se-
electrodes.) The manufacturer's typical certificate of conformance shall be con- quenced as follows:
sidered adequate proof that the supplied electrode or electrode-flux combination
(1) As far as is practicable, starts and shall not be placed directly under
meets this requirement. No testing of filler metal samples or of production welds
the beam web.
shall be required.
(2) Each layer shall be completed the full width of the flange before
W5.3. Gas-Shielded Welding Processes beginning the next layer.
GMAW and FCAW-G shall not be performed in winds exceeding 3 mph (5 kmIhr).
Windscreens or other shelters may be used to shield the welding operation from (3) For each layer, the weld starts and shall be on the opposite side of the
excessive wind. beam web, as compared to the layer.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTIfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, lNe. AMERICAN INSTIfUTE ÚF STEEL CO*¡STRUcrION, lNe.
6.1-94 PART 1 - WELDING PROVISIONS [App. W.
6.1-9~
Under this exemption from ptoduction testing, the filler metal manufacturer
shall repeat the teSting prescribed in appendix at least every three years on a
random production lot.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cqll'iSTltUClLION, !Ne.
6.1-96 PART 1 - WELD METAL/WELDING PROCEDURE [App. X. App.X.] PART 1 - WELD METAL/WEL ING PROCEDURE
6.1-97
X2. TEST CONDITIONS No ~ermal tr~atment of weldment or test specimens is permitted, except that
Tests shall be conducted at the range of heat inputs for which the weld filler machined tensile test specimens may be aged at 200°F (93 oC) to 220°F (104 oC)
metal will be qualified under the welding procedure specification (WPS). It is for up to 48 hours, then cooled to room temperature before testing.
recommended that tests be conducted atthe low heat input level and high heat
input level indicated in Table I-X-l. X4. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The lowest and highest Charpy V-Notc (CVN) toughness values obtained fr
thfi . fr ~
Table I-X-1 WPS e. .ve speclmens om a single test p ate shall be disregarded. Two of the re-
mammg three values shall equal, or ex ed, the specified toughness of 40 ft-Ibf
Toughness Verification Test (54 J) energy level at the testing temper ture. One ofthe three may be lower, but
Welding and Preheat Conditions not lower than 30 ft-lbf (41 J), and the a erage of the three shall not be less than
Cooling Rate Heat Input Preheat °F (OC) Interpass °F ceC) the required 40 ft-lbf (54 J) energy ley 1. Al1 test samples shall meet the notch
Low heat input test 30 kJ/in. (1.2 kJ/mm) 70±25 (21 ±14) 200 ± 50 (93 ± 28) toughness requirements for the electrod s as provided in Section 7.3b.
High heat input test 80 kJ/in. (3.1 kJ/mm) 300 ± 25 (149 ± 14) 500 ± 50 (260 ± 28)
For fille~ me~s ~lassified as E70, mate' s shall provide a minimum yield stress
Altematively, the filler metal manufacturer or contractor may elect to test a wid- of 58 ksl, a ffilrumum tensile strength 70 ksi, and a minimum elongation of
er or narrower range of heat inputs and interpass temperatures. The range of heat 2~ percent. For filler metals classified as 80, materials shall provide a minimum
inputs and interpass temperatures tested shall be clearly stated on the test reports yleld s~ess of 68 ksi, a minimum tens le strength of 80 ksi, and a minimum
and user data sheets. Regardless of the method of selecting test heat input, the elongatlOn of 19 percent.
WPS, as used by the contractor, shall fall within the range of heat inputs and
interpass temperatures tested.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mare 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
_--------------------------_..
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONS UCTION, mc.
~-_....-..~~._-_.•
6.1-99
These terms are in addition to those listed in Part 1. Glossary terms are generally italicized
where they first appear within a section throughout Part and in the Commentary.
Boundary member. Portion along wall and edge strengthened with structural steel
sections and/or longitudinal steel reinforcement
Collector elemento Member that serves to transfer between floor diaphragms and the
members of the seismic load resisting system.
Composite beam. Structural steel beam in contact
and acting compositely with reinforced
concrete via bond or shear connectors.
Composite slab. Concrete slab supported on and to a formed steel deck that acts as a
diaphragm to transfer load to and between elements the seismic load resisting system.
Composite special concentrically braced frame (C- ). Composite braced frame meeting
the requirements of Section 12.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 200S:el. Supplernent No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, c.
AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~s~:ucrlON, INc.
PART n - GLOSSARY Seet. 2.] PART n - REFERENCED SPECIFICATIO S, CODES, AND STANDARDS
6.1-100 6.1-101
Composite steeI pIate shear wall (C-SPW). Wall consisting of steel plate with reinforced 1. SCOPE
concrete encasement on one or both sides that provides out-of-plane stiffening to prevent These Provisions shall govem the desi fabricati d' .
stru tu al t 1 d ' on, an erectIOn of composIte
buckling of the steel plate and meeting the requirements of Section 17. c r s ee an reinforced concret members and connections in ..
Coupling beam. Structural steel or composite beam connecting adjacent reinforced concrete load resisting systems (SLRS) in bui dings and other structures ~e sezsthmzc
structures are defi d th ' w ere o er
wall elements so that they act together to resist lateralloads. .. ne as ose designed fabricated, and erected in a man .._
lar to bmldings with bu 'ldi lik . ner SInll
Encased composite beam. Composite beam completely enelosed in reinforced concrete. Th ..' 1 ng- e ve cal and lateral load-resisting systems
ese prov~slOn~ shall apply when the eismic response modification coefjicient'
Encased composite coIumn. Structural steel column (roUed or built-up) completely encased R, (as. sp~cified m the applicable buil ing code) is taken greater than 3 Whe~
in reinforced concrete. the se1SIDlC response modification coe cient, R is taken as 3 or 1 th'
ture is t . d . ' ess, e struc-
Face bearing pIates. Stiffeners attached to structural steel beams that are embedded in reinforced 'ld' no reqmre to satisfy these pro isions unless required by the applicable
bU1 mg codeo
concrete walls or columns. The plates are located at the face of the reinforced concrete to
provide confinement and to transfer loads to the concrete through direct bearing. Thde :equiremen~s of Part n modify an supplement the requirements of Part 1
an 10rrn
' .these Provisions . They shall e applied' .m conJunction
. with the AISC
Filled composite coIumn. Round or rectangular structural steel section fiUed with concrete.
Specificatzon for Structural Steel Buil ings, ANSI/AISC 360 h . af
Fully composite beam. Composite beam that has a sufficient number of shear connectors to ferred to as th S ;¡:; ' . ' erem ter re-
. e pecl,¡.catzon. The apph able requirements of the Building Code
develop the nominal plastic flexural strength of the composite section. Requzrements for Structural Concrete a Commentary ACI318 as d'fi d'
these PrOVlszons
.. shall be used for the d sign of reinf, " d mo 1 e In
Intermediate seismic systems. Seismic systems designed assuming moderate inelastic action in composite SLRS. orce concrete components
occurs in sorne members under the design earthquake.
Load-carrying reinforcement. Reinforcement in composite members designed and detailed For' seismic
d r.esisting systems inco orating reinforced concrete components
d loaddin
to resist the required loads. es~gne acco~ • g. to ACI 318, the req irements for load and resistance factor
des1gn as specified m Section B3.3 of Specification shall be used.
Ordinary reinforced concrete shear wall with structural steel elements (C-ORCW).
Composite shear walls meeting the requirements of Section 15. When the design is based upon elastic alysis, the stiffness properties of the
Ordinary seismic systems. Seismic systems designed assuming limited inelastic action occurs compone~t ~embers of composite syst ms shall reflect their condition at the
onset of slgruficant yielding of the struc e.
in sorne members under the design earthquake.
Partially composite beam. Unencased composite beam with a nominal flexural strength ~erever these Provisions refer to the a plicable building code (ABC) d th
IS no local building
. . code, the 1oad
s, oa I ' .
combmations, an and
system limitations ere
controUed by the strength of the shear stud connectors.
general des1gn requrrements shall be tho e in SEI/ASCE 7.
Partially restrained composite connection. Partially restrained (PR) connections as defined
in the Specification that connect partially or fully composite beams to steel columns with Part n inel~des a Glossary which is spec fically applicable to this Part The Part
flexural resistance provided by a force couple achieved with steel reinforcement in the 1 Glossary lS also applicable to Part n. .
slab and a steel seat angle or similar connection at the bottom flange.
2. REFERENCED SPECIFICA IONS CODES
Reinforced-concrete-encased shapes. Structural steel sections encased in reinforced concrete.
ANO STANDARDS "
Restraining bars. Steel reinforcement in composite members that is not designed to carry required The ~ocum~nts reference? in the~e provi ions shall inelude those listed in Part 1
loads, but is provided to facilitate the erection of other steel reinforcement and to provide Section 2 Wlth the followmg addltions:
anchorage for stirrups or tieso Genera1ly, such reinforcement is not spliced to be continuous.
American Society of Civil Engineers
SpeciaI reinforced concrete shear walls composite with structuraI steeI eIements (C-SRCW). Standard for the Structural Design of Co posite Slabs, ASCE 3-91
Composite shear walls meeting the requirements of Section 16.
American Welding Society
SpeciaI seismic systems. Seismic systems designed assuming significant inelastic action Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Ste 1, AWS D1.4-98
occurs in sorne members under the design earthquake.
Unencased composite beam. Composite beam wherein the steel section is not completely
enelosed in reinforced concrete and relies on mechanicaI connectors for composite action
with a reinforced slab or slab on metal deck.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings' M h 9" 2005'me. 1 Supp1ement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTlTUI'B OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CON TRUCTION, !Nc.
[Sect. 3. Sect. 6.] PARTII-
6.1-102 PART ll- GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6.1-10:
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Bu¡'ldings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:ucrlON. INc.
6.1-104 PART TI - COMPOSITE MEMBERS [Seet. 6.
Seet. 6.]
PART TI - COMPOS MEMBERS
6.1-105
specified minimum yield stress of the structural steel core, (ii) The stron,g-columnlweak-beam design requirements in Section 9.5
ksi (MPa) shall be satisfied. Column base shall be detailed to sustain inelastic
2 2
cross-sectional afea of the structural core, in. (mm ) flexural hinging.
As
Pn nominal compressive strength of the composite column (iii) The required shear strength of e column shall meet the requirements
calculated in accordance with the Specification, kips (N) of ACI 31~ Section 21.4.5.1.
f'e specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa)
Fyh specified mínimum yield stress of the ties, ksi (MPa) (7) ~en the column terminates on a fo ting or mat foundation, the transverse
remforcementas specified ~n this s tion shall extend into the footing or
Equation 6-1 need not be satisfied if the nominal strength of the rein- mat at least ~2 in. (300 mm). When the column terminates on a wall, the
forced-concrete-encased structural steel section alone is greater than tran~verse remforcement ~hal~ ex~en into the wall for at least the length
the load effect from a load combination of 1.OD + 0.5L. reqUlred to develop full ylelding In e reinforced-concrete-encased shape
(ii) The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement along the length and longitudinal reinforcement.
of the column shall be the lesser of six longitudinal load-carrying bar (8) Welded wire fabric is not p~rmitted transverse reinforcement for special
diameters or 6 in. (150 mm) .. seismic systems.
(iii) When specified in Sections 6.4c(4), 6.4c(5) or 6.4c(6), the maximum 6.5. Filled Composite Columns
spacing of transverse reinforcement shall be the lesser of one-fourth
This. Section is applicable to columns tha meet the limitations of Specification
the least member dimension or 4 in. (100 mm). For this reinforcement,
Sec~on 12.2. Such columns shall be desig ed to meet the requirements of Speci-
cross ties, legs of overlapping hoops, and other confining reinforce- ficatLOn Chapter 1, except as modified in t is Section.
ment shall be spaced not more than 14 in. (350 mm) on center in the
transverse direction. (1) The nominal shear strength of the c mposite column shall be the nominal
shear strength of the structural steel section alone, based on its effective
(4) Encased composite columns in braced frames with nominal compressive
shear area. The concrete shear capa ity may be used in conjunction with
loads that are larger than 0.2 times P n shall have transverse reinforcement as
the s~ear strength from. the steel shap provided the design ineludes an ap-
specified in Section 6.4c(3)(iii) oyer the total element length. This require-
propnate load transfemng mechanis
ment need not be satisfied if the nominal strength of the reinforced-con-
crete-encased steel section alone is greater than the load effect from a load (2) In addition to the requirements of ection 6.5(1), in the special seismic
combination of 1.0D + 0.5L. sys~ems described in Sections 9, 12 d 14, the design loads and column
sphce~ for filled composite columns s all also meet the requirements of Part
(5) Composite columns supporting reactions from discontinued stiff members,
I SectlOn 8.
such as walls or braced frames, shall have transverse reinforcement as spec-
ified in Section 6.4c(3)(üi) over the fulllength beneath the level at which (3) Filled ~omp~s~te columns used in C- MF shall meet the following require-
the discontinuity occurs if the nominal compressive load exceeds 0.1 times ments m addltion to those of Sections 6.5(1) and 6.5(2):
Pn • Transverse reinforcement shall extend into the discontinued member
(i) The minimum required shear s ength of the column shall meet the
for at least the length required to develop full yielding in the reinforced-
requirements inACI 318 Section 21.4.5.1.
concrete-encased shape and longitudinal reinforcement. This requirement
need not be satisfied if tbe nominal strength of the reinforced-concrete- (ii) The strong-column/weak-beam esign requirements in Section 9.5
encased structural steel section alone is greater than the load effect from a shall be met. Column bases shall be designed to sustain inelastic flex-
load combination of 1.0D + 0.5L. ural hinging.
(6) Encased composite columns used in a C-SMF shall meet the following (iii) The minimum wall thickness of oncrete-filled rectangular HSS shall
requirements: be
(i) Transverse r~inforcement shall meet the requirements in Section tmin, = b E'y/ (6-2)
6.4c(3)(c) at fue top and bottom of the column over the region specified
in Section 6.4b. for the flat width b of each face, here b is as defined in Specification
Table B4.1.
7. COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS (2) The available strength of structural steel components in composite connec-
7.1. tions shall be determined in accor ance with Part 1 and the Specification.
Scope .. .
This Section is applicable to connections in buildings that utIhze composIte or Structural steel elements that are e cased in confined reinforced concrete
dual steel and concrete systems wherein seismic load is transferred between are permitted to be considered to b braced against out-of-plane buckling.
structural steel and reinforced concrete components. Face bearing- plates consisting of tiffeners between the flanges of steel
beams are required when beams ar embedded in reinforced concrete col-
Composite connections shall be demonstrated to have strength, ducti?ity and umns or walls.
toughness comparable to that exhibited by similar structural steel or remforced
concrete connections that meet the requirements of Part 1 and ACI 318, respec- (3) The nominal shear strength of re·nforced-concrete-encased steel panel-
tively. Methods for calculating the connection strength shall meet the require- zones in beam-to-column connectio s shall be calculated as the sum of the
ments in this Section. nominal strengths of the structural teel and confined reinforced concrete
shear elements as determined in P 1 Section 9.3 and ACI 318 Section
7.2. General Requirements .. 21.5, respectively.
Connections shall have adequate deformation capacity to resIst the requzred
(4) Reinforcement shall be provided t resist all tensile forces in reinforced
strength at the design story drift. Additionally, connections that are required.for
concrete components of the conne ions. Additionally, the concrete shall
the lateral stability of the building under seismic loads shall meet the reqmre-
be confined with transverse reinforc ment. AH reinforcement shall be fully
ments in Sections 8 through 17 based upon the specific system in which the con-
developed in tension or compressio , as appropriate, beyond the point at
nection is used. When the available strength of the connected members is based
which it is no longer required to resis the forces. Development lengths shall
upon nominal material strengths and nominal dimensions, the determination of
be determined in accordancr with A 1 318 Chapter 12. Additionally, devel-
the available strength of the connection shall account for any effects that result
opment lengths for the systems desc ·bed in Sections 9, 12, 14, 16, and 17
from the increase in the actual nominal strength of the connected member.
shall meet therequirements of ACI 3 8 Section 21.5.4.
7.3. Nominal Strength of Connections (5) Connections shall meet the followin additional requirements:
The nominal strength of connections in composite structural systems shall be
determined on the basis of rational models that satisfy both equilibrium of in- (i) When the slab transfers horizon diaphragm forces, the slab reinforce-
ternal forces and the strength limitation of component material s and elements ment shall be designed and anch red to carry the in-plane tensile forces
based upon potentiallimit states. Unless the connection strength is determined at all critical sections in the sla , including connections to collector
by analysis and testing, the models used for analysis of connections shall meet beams, columns, braces, and wal s.
the requirements of Sections 7.3(1) through 7.3(5). (ii) For connections between structu al steel or composite beams and rein-
(1) When required, force shall be transferred between structural steel ando rein- forced concrete or encased com osite columns,. transverse hoop rein-
forced concrete through (a) direct bearing of headed shear studs or smtable forcement shall be provided in t e connection regíon of the column to
alternative devices; (b) by other mechanical means; (c) by shear friction meet the requirements of ACI 31 Section 21.5, except for the foHow-
with the necessary clamping force provided by reinforcement normal to the ing modifications:
plane of shear transfer; or (d) by a combination of these means. Any poten- (a) Structural steel sections fr ·ng into the connections are consid-
tial bond strength between structural steel and reinforced concrete shall be ered to provide confinemen over a width equal to that of face
ignored for the purpose of the connection force transfer m~chanis~. The bearing piates welded to the beams between the flanges.
contribution of different mechanisms can be combined only If the stlffness
and deformation capacity of the mechanisms are compatible. (b) Lap splices are permitted fo perimeter ties when confinement of
the splice is provided by fac bearing plates or other means that
The nominal bearing and shear-friction strengths shall meet the require- prevents spalling of the conc ete cover in the systems described in
ments of ACI 318 Chapters 10 and 11. Unless a higher strength is substanti- Sections 10, 11, 13 and 15.
ated by cyclic testing, the nominal bearing and shear-friction streng~s sh~l
(c) The longitudinal bar sizes d layout in reinforced concrete and
be reduced by 25 percent for the composite seismic systems descnbed In
composite columns shall be etailed to minimize slippage of the
Sections 9, 12, 14, 16, and 17.
bars through the beam-to-c umn connection due to high force
transfer associated with the hange in column moments over the
height'of the connection.
Seismic Provisionsjor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions jor Structural Steel Buildings, Marc 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMEru:CAN !NSTlTIJTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, !Ne.
AMEru:CAN !NS'ITIUI'E OF STEEL CON UCTION, !Ne.
6.1-110 PART TI - COMPOSITE PARTIALLY RESTRAlNED MOMENT FRAMES [Sect. 8.
Sect. 9.] PART TI - COMPOSlTE MOMENT fRAMES 6.1-1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions lor Structural Steel Buildings,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNe. 9, 2005, indo Supplement No. 1
AMEIuCAN INsTITUTE OF S1EEL CQ1IJSTFtuCl10N. INc.
[Seet. 9. Seet. 12.] PART II - COMPOSITE SPECIAL
6.1-112 PART II - COMPOSlTE SPEClAL MOMENT FRAMES ~''U.~1"'\I.I.l BRACED FRAMES 6.1-1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions lor Structural Steel B~ildings,
9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Ccjl'lSntUCllIoN, INc.
6.1-114 PART TI - COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Seet. 12.
Seet. 15.] PART TI - ORDINARY REINFORCED CO CRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE
6.1-1
12.4. Braces Di~gonal braces,. columns, and be segments outside of the link shall
Structural steel braces shall meet the requirements for SCBF of Part 1 Section deslgned to remam essentially elas .c under the maxun'um'" th
d lorces at can
13. Composite braces shall meet the requirements fQr composite columns of generat~ by th~ fully yielded and s ain-hardened link. Columns shall be eith
Section 12.2. composlte or remforce~ con~rete. B aces shall be structural steel. Links shall ;
Connections structural steel as descnbed m this ection . The aVal'Zable strength of membe
12.5. h .
Bracing connections shall meet the requirements of Section 7 and Part 1 s. all meet the reqUlrements in the S ecification, except as modified in this Se
Section 13. uon. C-EBF shall meet the requirem nts of Part 1 Section 15 .
in this Section. ' except as modifi(
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings M eh 9 2005' 1 S 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTB OF STElll- CONSlRUcnON, !Nc. ' " m e . upp ementNo. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL C SlRUCTION, !Nc.
6.1-116 PART TI - ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE [Seet. 15. Seet. 16.] PART TI - SPECIAL REINFORCED rv... >.T""~~_~_
SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE 6.1-1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMEIuCAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL qOJI/SntUClrION, INc.
6.1-118 PART II - SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSlTE [Sect. 16. Sect. 18.] PART II - STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRA
AND SPEClFICATIONS 6.1-1g
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel B.uil.dinas,
AMERICAN INs1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, INc. <> 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~strnuCTloN, lNe.
PART TI - STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS [Seet. 18.
6.1-120
6.1-121
COMMENTARY
on the Seisinic Pro · ·ons
for Structural Steel Buildings
Including Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Struciural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
.AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN INsTlTUTE OF STEEL Cor~S~:UCTION, lNe.
Cornm. Intro.] 6.1-
Experience from the 1994 Northridge and 1 Kobe earthquakes significantly expanl
knowledge regarding the seismic response of ~tnlctllral steel building systems, particuh
welded steel momentframes. (Note: Glossary are italicized throughout the Provisi.
and the cornmentary.) Shortly after the earthquake, the SAC Joint Ventl
initiated a comprehensive study of the seismic of steel moment frames. Fun<
by the Federal Emergency Management (FEMA) , SAC developed guidelines
structural engineers, building offiéials, and interested parties for the evaluation, rep
modification, and design of welded steel frame structures in seismic regions. Al
actively participated in the SAC activities.
Many recornmendations in the Recommended Design Criteriajor New Steel Mome
Frame Buildings-FEMA 350 (FEMA, formed the basis for Supplement No. 2
the 1997 AISC Seismic Provisions jor :itruclunzl Steel Buildings (AISC, 1997b, 2000
Supplement No. 2 to the 1997 Provisions was simultaneously and cooperativo
with the revisions to the Building- Seismic Council (BSSC) National Earthqm
Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP) Accordingly, Supplement No. 2 forrr
the basis for steel seismic design provisions in 2000 NEHRP Provisions (FEMA, 200(
as well as those in the 2000 Intemational Code (!BC) 2002 Supplement, which 1
been published by the Intemational Code C (ICC, 2002).
These 2005 AISC Seismic Provisions jor :itru':ct:unzl Steel Buildings, hereinafter refen
to as the Provisions or ANSIJAISC 341, incorporating the recornmendations
FEMA 350 and other research. While is ongoing, the Committee has prepru
this revision of the Provisions using the best knowledge to date. These Provisic
were being developed in the same time frame a major rewrite of SEllAS CE 7 was bei
accomplished, which has subsequently been and published as the 2005 editi<
Due to this timing, these Provisions adopt the edition of SEIIASCE 7 (ASCE, 2002) 1
are intended to be compatible and used in with the 2005 edition of SEIIASCE
This Cornmentary will thus reference the in the latter (ASCE, 2005).
It is also anticipated that these Provisions be adopted by the Intemational Buildi
Code, 2006 edition, and the National Fire Pr()t~(:tlon Association (NFPA) Building CO(
dated 2005. It is expected that both of these codes will reference SEIJASCE
(ASCE, 2005) for seismic loading and neither
Unlike the previous edition of these Provisions 2002), where LRFD and ASD we
contained separately in Parts I and ID, these Provisions are presented in the sar
unified format as is the AISC 2005 jor Structural Steel Buildings, hereinaft
referred to as the Specification or ANSIIAISC 360 (AISC, 2005). Thus both LRFD al
ASD design methods are incorporated into Part The separate Part ID in the 2002 Seism
Provisions jor Structural Steel Buildings to ASD has been eliminated in this editi<
of the Provisions.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN!NSTITUtE OF SfEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne.
PART 1 - SCOPE [Comm.CI. Cornrn.C3.] PART 1 - GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN RB::>ujRE1V1EtIJTS 6.1-125
6.1-124
Where there is a desire to use these Provisions with a model code that has not yet adopted Previous editions of these Provisions have been to defining requirements
these Provisions, it is essential that ANSI!AISC 360 (AISC, 2005) be used in conjunction for members and connections in the seismic load system (SLRS). This
with these Provisions, as they are companion documents. In addition, users should also edition of the Provisions now includes reqluü:errlerlts for columns not part of the
concurrently use SEI!ASCE 7 (ASCE, 2005) for a fully coordinated package. SLRS in Section 8.4b.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic ProvisionsforStructural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005,
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE ÓF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
_~~. ___________
. _,.-.-.L-.. --------~----------
6.1-126 PART 1 - GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS [Cornm.C3. Cornm. C3.] PART 1 - GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REI~UIJllil\1E1~TS 6.1-127
Nevertheless, drift control is important to both the serviceability and the stability
R design factor used to determine the seismic loads applicable to
of the structure. As a minimum, the designer should use the drift limits specified
the structural system as defined in the building code
in the applicable building codeo
di calculated lateral drift at the center rigidity of story i, when the
The analytical model used to estimate building drift should accurately account design seismic loads are applied in the under consideration,
for the stiffness of the frame elements and connections and other structural and in. (mm)
nonstructural elements that materially affect the drift. Recent research on steel Vyi = total plastic lateral shear restoring in the direction under
moment frame connections indicates that in most cases panel zone deformations consideni.tion at story i, kips (N)
have little effect on analytical estimates of drift and need not be explicitly mod- The plastic story shear quantity, Vyi , should be det,etnlÍllf!d by methods of plastic
eled (FEMA, 2000f). In cases where nonlinear element deformation demands analysis. However, Vyi may be approximately from the equation:
are of interest, panel zone shear behavior should be represented in the analytical
2I,M G
model whenever it significantly affects the state of deformation at a beam-to- j=l P j
column connection. Mathematical models for the behavior of the panel zone in H
(C3-2)
terms of shear force-shear distortion relationships have been proposed by many
when the following conditions apply:
researchers. FEMA 355C presents a good discussion of how to incorporate panel
zone deformations in to the analytical model (FEMA, 2000f). (1) AH beam-column connections meet the strong OOJIUrrm-WeaK··beam criterion
in the story,
Adjustment of connection stiffness is usually not required for connections tra-
ditionally considered as fixed, although FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a) contains (2) The same number of moment-resisting bays is at the top and bottom
recommendations for adjusting calculated drift for frames with reduced bearn of the frame, and
sections. Nonlinear models should contain nonlinear elements where plastic (3) The strength of girders, rnoment-connected at ends, at the top and bot-
hinging is expected to properly capture the inelastic deformation of the frame. torn of the frame is similar,
The story drift limits in SEIJASCE 7 (ASCE, 2002) and the 2000 NEHRP Provi- where
sions (FEMA, 2000g) are to be compared to an amplified story drift that approxi- the plastic moment capacity of ''j'' participating in the
mates the difference in deflection between the top and bottorn of the story under moment-resisting framing at the floor on top of the story, and
consideration during a large earthquake. The amplified story drift is determined n the number of moment-tesisting girders the framing at the floor
by multiplying the elastic drift caused by the horizontal component of the earth- level on top of the story .
quake load E by a deflection amplification factor Cd , which is dependent upon
the type of building system used. In any story in which all colurrms do not meet the SIT'Onl[-COlllmn-weak-beam cri-
terion, the plastic story shear quantity, Vyi may be from the equation:
The following discussion pertains primarily to moment frames (FEMA, 2000a);
although other systems where high lateral drifts may occur require a similar
analysis. Each story of the structure should be investigated to ascertain that lat- (C3-3)
eral drifts induced by earthquake response do not result in a condition of instabil- where
ity under gravity loads. The analysis of the structure should explicitly consider m the number of colurrms in the m()mt~nt··re~;llstmQ framing in the story
the geometric nonlinearity introduced by P-d effects. The quantity \jIi should be imder consideration
calculated for each story for each direction of response, as follows: ~Ck = the plastic moment capacity of each "k", participating in the
moment-resisting framing, considering axial load present on the
'1'. PRd. colurnn
= _ 1_ _1
(C3-1)
1 V.H
yl
where For other conditions, the quahtity VYi should be ca]:cullate:d by plastic mechanism
H height of story, which may be taken as the distance between the center- analysis, considering the vertical distributioIi of loads on the structure.
line of floor framing at each of the levels aboye and below, or the Thequantity \jIi is the ratio of the effective story produced by first order
distance between the top of floor slabs at each of the levels aboye and P-d effects at the calculated story drift to the restoring force in the
below, in. (mm) structure. When this ratio has a value greater than 1 ,the structure does not
portion of the total weight of the structure inc1uding dead, permanent have enough strength to resist the P-A induced shear torces and may collapse
live, and 25 percent of transient live loads acting on all of the columns in a sidesway mechanism. It the ratio is less than 1 the restoring force in
within story level i, kips (N) the structure exceeds the storyshear due to P-d and, unless additional
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005,
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucrrON, !Ne.
AMERICAN lNsTrruTE OF STEEL CONSlRUcrrON, !Nc.
6.1-128 PART 1 - GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS [Comm.C3. Comm. C4.] PART 1 - LOADS, LOADS COMBINATIONS, AND NO AL STRENGlliS 6.1-129
displacement is induced or lateral loads applied, the structure should not col- (for example, the "first hing'e" limit point), not to nsure stability under seismic
lapse. Given the uncertainty associated with predicting significance of P-fl ef- loads where large inelastic deformations are exp cted. Thus, the provisions of
fects, it is recornmended that when 'I'¡ in a story exceeds 0.3, the structure be Appendix 7 do not alone ensure stability under eismic loads. Stability under
considered unstable, unless a detailed global stability capacity evaluation for the seismic loads is synonymous with collapse prev ntion, which is provided for
structure, considering P-fl effects, is conducted. in the prescriptive design n!~quirements given for each system, including such
P-fl effects can have a significant impact on the ability of structures to resist elements as:
collapse when subjected to strong ground shaking. When the nondimensional (1) The basic determinatÚm of the seismic d sign force (R factors, site
quantity, 'I'¡, calculated in accordance with Equation C3-1 significantly exceeds effects, p-factors, etc.) ,
a value of about 0.1, the instantaneous stiffness of the structure can be signifi-
cantly decreased, and can effectively become negative. If earthquake induced (2) The drift limits under the seismic lateral load (a factor of both the limiting
displacements are sufficiently large to create negative instantaneous stiffness, drift and the specified Cd factor)
collapse is likely to occur. (3) The "theta" limits (sidesway stability collapse prevention)
Analyses reported in FEMA 355F (FEMA, 2000f) included direct consideration (4) Other design requirements, such as strong- olumn weak-beam require-
of P-fl effects in determining the ability of regular, well configured frames de- ments, limitations on bracing configurations, te.
signed to modero code provisions to resist P-fl - induced instability and P-fl-
induced collapse. For regular, well-configured structures, if the value of'l' is C4. LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, A D NOMINAL
maintained within the limits indicated in this section (in other words, 0.3 or STRENGTHS
less), P-fl- induced instability is unlikely to occur. Values of'l' greater than this
The Provisions give member and element load r quirements that supplement
limit suggest that instability due to P-fl effects is possible. In such cases, the
those in the applicable building code. In the 2002 Se mic Provisions for Structur-
frame should be redesigned to provide greater resistance to P-fl- induced insta-
al Steel Buildings, where element forces were defin d by the strength of another
bility unless explicit evaluation of these effects using the detailed performance
element, the additional requfrements of the Provisi ns were typically expressed
evaluation methods outlined in Appendix A of FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a) are
as required strengths. In order to accornmodate bo LRFD and ASD, these Pro-
performed.
visions instead give two required "available streng s," one for LRFD and one
The evaluation approach for P-fl effects presented in this section appears similar for ASD. ["Available strength" is the term used in SI!AISC 360 (AISC, 2005)
to but actually differs substantially from that contained in FEMA 302 (FEMA, to cover both design strength (LRFD) and allowabl strength (ASD).]
1997a) and in use in building codes for many years. The approach contained
In sorne instances, the loads defined in the Provisi ns must be combined with
in FEMA 302 and the building codes was an interim formulation. Research in-
other loads. In such cases, the Provisions simply define the seismic load E,
dicates that this interim approach was not meaningful. Sorne of this research
which is combined with other loads using the app priate load factor from the
included the explicit evaluation of P-fl effects for buildings of varying heights,
seismic load combinations in the applicable buildin code, and thus both LRFD
subjected to many different types of ground motion and designed using differ-
and ASD are supported. Theearthquake load, E, is e combination of the hori-
ent building code provisions. Using these and other parameters, several tens of
zontal seismic load effect and an approxirrtation of e effect due to the vertical
thousands of nonlinear analyses were run to investigate P-fl effects. Extensive accelerations that accompany the horizontal earthq e effects.
additional discussion on the issue of P-d effects and their importance in the
response of structures at large interstory drifts is contained in FEMA 355C The Provisions are intended for use with load combi ations given in the applica-
(FEMA, 2000d). ble building codeo However, since they are written ~ r consistency with the load
combinations given in SEI!ASCE 7 (ASCE, 2005) d IBC 2003 (ICC, 2003),
Any of the methods in the Specification Chapter C or Appendix 7 can be used consistency with the applicable building code sho Id be confirmed if another
to assess the stability of frames in high seismic regions. When using the equiva- building code is applicable.
lent lateral load procedure for seismic design and the direct analysis provisions
in Specification Appendix 7, the reduced stiffness and notional load provisions The engineer is expected to u~e these Provisions in c njunction with ANSI!AISC
should not be included in the calculation of the fundamental period of vibration 360. Typically, the Provisions do not define available s engths. In certain locations,
or the evaluation of seismic drift limits. the designer is directed to specific limit states or prov· ions in ANSJ/AISC 360.
Like most of the provisions in the main specification, the stability requirements An amplification or overstrength factor, no, applied to the horizontal portion of
of the Specification are intended for cases where the strength limit state is based the earthquake load, E, is prescribed in S1;':I!ASCE 7 (ASCE, 2002), the 2003
on the nominal elastic-plastic limit in the most critical members and connections IBC, the 2003 NEHRP Provisions and the NFPA 000 provisions. However,
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON,
6.1-130 PART 1 - LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS [Cornm. C4. Comm. C6.]
PART 1 - MATERIALS
6.1-131
these codes do not all express the load combinations that incorporate this factor
(7) The proteeted zone is immediately around
in exactly the same format. In the future, when all codes adopt SEIIAS CE 7 by plastic hinging region. Dn-
anticipated connections, attachments, or
reference, it will be possible to directly reference the appropriate combinations may interfere with the
formation of the hinge or initiate a Because the location of the
within these Provisions. When used in these Provisions, the tem1 amplified seis-
protected Zone depends upon the hiqge
mie load is intended to refer to the appropriate load combinations in the appli- which may vary, the extent
of the protected ZOne must be identified.
cable building code that accoilllt for overstrength of members of the seismie load
resisting system. The load combinations containing the overstrength factor, no, (8) Where brace connections are designed using
should be used where these Provisions require use of the amplified seismic load. they require special detailing as illustrated .
In the mc (ICC, 2003) these are Equations 16-9 and 16-10 and in SEIIASCE 7 nections must be identified in the structural drawings.
(ASCE, 2005) they are found in Section 12.4.3.2. SEIIASCE 7 provides different
requirements for addressing such effects for different seismie design eategories; (9) Appendix W, Section W2.1 provides an aqlClItllonaJ listing of items re-
orthogonal effects are required to be considered for aH but the lowest seismic garding welded details that must be nrr,ui,1",rI These items have been
design categories. separately listed, as it is anticipated that items will be included in
a new standard under development that aqClres:ses welding in seismic
applications.
cs. STRUCTURAL OESIGN ORAWINGS ANO
SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP ORAW-INGS, ANO C6. MATERIALS
ERECTION ORAWINGS C6.1. Material Specifications
CS.1 Structural Oesign Orawings and Specifications ~e Structural steels that are explicitly permitted for use in seismic applica-
(1) To ensure proper understanding of the contract requirements and the ap- hons have been selected based upon their inelastic . and weldability. In
plication of the design, it is necessary to identify the specific types of general, they meet the following characteristics: ( a pronounced stress-strain
seismie load resisting system (SLRS) or systems used on the project. In plateau at the yield' stress; (2) a large inelastic capability (for example,
this ínanner, those involved know the applicable requirements of the tensile elongation of 20 percent or greater in a (50 mm) gage length); and
Provisions. (3) good weldability. Other steels should not be without evidence that
(2) The special design, construction and quality requirements of the Provisions, the aboye criteria are met. For structural wide shapes, ASTM A992 and
compared to the general requirements of the Speeifieation, are applicable to ASTM A913 Supplement S75 provide a further on the ratio of yield
the SLRS. The quality assurance plan is prepared to address the require- stress to tensile stress to be not greater than 0.85.
ments of the SLRS, not the structure as a whole. Therefore, it is necessary A1011 HSLAS Grade 55 (380) was added as an aptjro1{ed steel for seismic load
to clearly designate which members and connections comprise the SLRS. resisting systems, since it meets the inelastic and weldability require-
ments noted aboye.
(3) It is necessary to designate working points and connection type(s), and any
other detailing requitements for the connections in the SLRS. While ASTM A709/A709M steel is primarily used the design and COnstruc-
(4) Provide information as to the steel specification and grade of the steel ele- tion of bridges, it could also be used in building <fOl1St:J:uctioln. Written as an
ments that comprise the connection, the size and tbickness of those ele- umbrella specification, its grades are essentially the of other approved
ments, weld material size, strength classification and required CVN tough- ASTM specifications. For example, ASTM A709/ Grade 50 (345) is es-
ness, and bolt material diameter and grade, as weH as bolted joint type. sentially ASTM A572/A572M Grade 50 (345) and A709/A709M Grade
50W (345W) is essentially ASTM A588/A588M
(5) Demand critieal welds are identified in the Provisions for each type of ASTM A709/A709M material should be treated as
SLRS. Demand critical welds have special Charpy V-Notch (CVN) tough- proved ASTM material grade.,
ness and testing requirements to ensure that this notch toughness will be
provided. The limitation on the specified minimum yield stress for members expecting in-
elastic action refers to inelastic action under the of the design earthquake.
(6) The majority of welded connection applications in buildings are in tem- The 50 ksi (345 MPa) limitation on the specified yield stress for mem-
perature-controHed settings. Where connections are subjected to tempera- bers was restricted to Sections 9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 1 and 17 for those systems
tures of less than 50°F (10 oC) during service, additional requirements for expected to undergo moderate to significant action, while a 55 ksi
welding filler metals are necessary for demand critical welds to ensure ad- (380 MPa) limitation was assigned to Sections 11 and 4, since those systems are
equate resistance to fracture at the lower setvice temperatures. expected to undergo limited inelastic action. steels of higher strength,
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, INC. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, . Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N,
6.1-132 PART 1 - MATERlALS [Cornm.C6. Comm. C6.]
PART 1 - MATERlALS
6.1-l33
C6.2. Material Properties for Determination of Required The specified values of Ry for rolled shapes are s mewhat lower than those that
Strength of Members and Connections can be calculated using the mean values reported' the Structural Shape Produc-
The Provisions employ a methodology for many seismic systems (for example, ers Council survey. Those values were skewed s mewhat by the inclusion of a
speeial moment frames, special eoneentrieally braeed frames, and eeeen~rieal large number of smaller members, which typicall have a higher measured yield
ly braeed frames) that can be characterized as "capacity design." That IS, the stress than the larger members cornmon in seismi designo The given values are
considered to be reasonable averages, although it .s recognized that they are not
required strength of most elements is defined by forces corresponding to the
expected capacity (available strength) of certain designated yielding members maxima. The expected yield strength, RyFy, can e determined by testing con-
(for example, the link in eccentrically braced frames). This methodology serves ducted in accordance with the requirements for th specified grade of steel. Such
to confine ductility demands to members that have specific requirements to en- an approach should only be followed in unusual ases where there is extensive
sure their ductile behavior; furthermore, the methodology serves to ensure that evidence that the values of Ry are significantIy un onservative. It is not expected
within that member the desired, ductile mode of yielding govems and other, that this would be the approach followed for typi al building projects. Refer to
nonductile modes are preeluded. ASTM A370 for testing requirements. The highe values of Ry for ASTM A36/
A36M (Ry = 1.5) and ASTM A572/A572M Grade 2 (290) (Ry = 1.3) shapes are
Such a capacity-design methodology requires a realistic estimate of the expect- indicative of the most recentIy reported propertie of these grades of steel. The
ed strength of the designated yielding members. To this end, the expeeted yield values of Ry will be periodically monitored to e sure that current production
strengths of various steel materials have been established by a survey of mill cer- practice is properly reflected.
tificates, and the ratio of expected to nominal yield strength has been ineluded in
An AISC study prepared byLiu (Liu, 2003) was u ed in determining the R¡ val-
the Provisions as "Ry-" The expected capacity of the designated yielding member
ues shown in Table 1-6-1. These values are based n the mean value of R¡/Ry for
is defined as R times the nominal strength of the member based on the desired
individual samples. Mean values are considered t be sufficiently conservative
yield mode; thls expected strength is amplified to account for strain-hardening
for these calculations considering that they are ap lied along with a <l> factor of
in sorne cases. For determination of the required strength of adjoining elements
0.75. An additional analysi~ of tensile data was c 'ed out (Harrold, 2004) to
and their connection to the designated yielding members, neither the resistance
determine appropriate Ry and R¡ factors for ASTM A529 Grade 50 (345), A529
factor (LRFD), nor the safety factor (ASD), are applied to the strength of the
designated yielding members. Grade 55 (380), A1011 HSLAS Grade 55 (380), an A572 Grade 55 (380) steels,
that were added to Table 1-6.,.1.
Where the capacity-design methodology is employed to preelude nonductile
C6.3. Heavy Section CVN Requirements
modes of failure within the designated yielding member, it is reasonable to use
the expected material strength in the determination of the member capacity. For The Speeifieation requirements for notch toughnes cover hot-rolled shapes with
limit states based on yield, the factor Ry applies equally to the designated yield- a flange thickness exceeding 2 in. (50 mm) and p ate elements with thickness
ing member capacity used to compute the required strength and ~o the s~~ng~ that is greater than or equal to 2 in. (50 mm) in tensi n applications. In the Provi-
with respect to the limit states to be preeluded. An example of thlS condltlon IS sions, this requirement is extended to cover: (1) sha es that are part ofthe SLRS
yielding of the beam outside the link in an eccentrically braced frame; the re- with flange thickness greater than or equal to 1lh in. (38 mm); and, (2) plate
quired strength is based on yield of the link beam, and yield limit states, such as elements with thickness greater than or equal to 2 i (50 mm) that are part of the
combined flexure and compression, can be expected to be similarly affected by SLRS, such as the flanges of buiIt-up girders and c nnection material subject to
increased material strength. The factor Ry is not applied to members other than ineIastic strain under seismicloading. Because sm er shapes and thinner pIates
the designated yielding member. are generally subjected to sufficient cross-sectional reduction during the rolling
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural SteelBuildings, Mareh 9, 2005, .nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, C.
PART 1 - MATERIALS [Cornm.C6. Cornm.C7.]
PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND F STENERS
6.1-135
process such that the resulting notch toughness will.exceed that r~uired aboye
(Cattan, 1995), specific requirements have not been meluded herem. yielding did not initiate in the column flanges. is limit state often controlled
the overall design of thes~ connections; Howev r, the actual cause for the frac-
The requirements of this section may not be nece.ss~ for members that .resist tures that were initially thought to be through- ickness faHures of the column
only incidental loads. For example, a des.igner mlght mclud~ a me~ber m the flange are now considered to be unrelated to .s material property. Detailed
SLRS to develop a more robust load path, but the member wIlI expenence ~nly fracture mechanics investigations conducted as art of the FEMNSAC project
. . nificant level of seismic demando An example of such a member IDlght confirm that damage initially identified as throu· h thickness faHures is likely to
an mSlg .. . d b .t
inelude a transfer girder with thick plates where its deslgn IS d~IDlnat~ .y 1 S have occurred as a result of certain combination of filler metal and base mate-
gravl.ty 1oad demand. It would be inconsistent witb the intent of thIS sectIOn
. . 1If the
d rial strength and notch toughness, conditions of s ess in the cOnllection, and the
designer were to arbitrarily exclude a member with ~sig~1ificant seIsmlC oa s presence of critical flaws in the welded joint. In ddition to the analytical stud-
from the SLRS that would otherwise improve the se~sIDl~ perf~rmance of th~ ies, extensive through-thickness testing conducte specifically to determine the
building in order to avoid the toughness requirements m ~IS sectIOn. The Specz- susceptibility to through thickness failures of mo em column materials meeting
fication requirements noted aboye would still apply in thIS case. ASTM A572, Grade 50 and ASTM A913, Grade 5 specifications did riot result
in significant through-thickness fractures (FEMA 2000h).
For rotary-straightened W-shapes, an area of redu.ced notc~ toughness has been
documented in a limited region of the web immedtately adJacent to the flange as In addition, none ofthe more than 100 full scale t sts on "Post-Northridge" con-
illustrated in Figure C-I-6.1. Recommendations issued by AIS~ (AISC, 1997a) nection details have demonstrated any through-thi kness column fractures. This
were followed up by a series of industry sponsored research proJects ~Kaufmann: combined analytical and laboratory research ele ly shows that due to the high
Metrovich and Pense, 2001; Uang and Chi, 2001; Kaufm~n and FIsh~r, 2001, restraint inherent in welded beam flange to colu flange joints, the through
Lee, Cotton, Dexter, Hajjar, Ye and Ojard, 2002; Bartlett, Jelmek, SChIDldt, De~- thickness yield and tensile strengths of the colu material are significantIy
ter, Graeser an d Galambos, . This research generally corroborates AISC s
2001) elevated in the region of the connection. For the odem materials tested, these
initial findings and recommendations. strengths significantIy exceed those loads that c be delivered to the column
Early investigations of connection fractures in the 1994 Northridge earth~uake by the beam flange. For this reason, no limits ar suggested for the throtigh-
identified a number of fractures that sorne speculated were ~e result of ma~ thickness strength of the base material by the FE SAC program or in these
Provisions.
equate through-thickness strength of the column flange matenal. As a result, m
the period immediately following the Northridge ~~quake, a number of rec- The preceding discussion assumes that no signific t laminations, inelusions or
ommendations were promulgated that suggested hIDltmg the value of ~ough other discontinuities Occur in regions adjacent to w lded beam flange-to-column
thickness stress demand on column flanges to ensure that through-thlckness flange joints and other tee and comer joints. App ndix Q, Section Q5.2(2)(c),
checks the integrity of this material after welding. A more conservative approach
would be to ultrasonically test the material for la .nations prior to welding. A
J similar requirement has been ineluded in, the Los ngeles City building code
~~
since 1973; however, in practice the base. material prior to welding passes the
/
ultrasonic eXamination, and interior defects, if an are found only after heat-
ing and cooling during the weld process. Should a oncem exist, the ultrasonic
1- to 11ft-
Ama o, potenlially low8r inspection prior to welding should be conducted to STM A435 for plates and
ASTM A898, level1, for shapes.
(25 mm to 38 mm)
notch toughness in rotary-
C7.
v~~-- CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, ANO FAS ENERS
~L-r---I-
C7.1. Scope
The requirement that design of a connection of a m mber in a seismic load re-
sisting system (SLRS) ensures a ductile limit state ha been moved from the sec-
J
tion on bolted joints to the Scope section, since this quirement applies to both
bolted and welded joints. Tension or shear fracture, olt shear, and block shear
Fig. C-I-6.1. "k-area."
rupture are exainples of limit states that generally re ult in nonductile failure of
connections. As such, these lilnit states are undesira le as the controlling limit
state for connections that are part of the SURS. Acc rdingly, it is required that
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, mc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel B~ildings, Mareh '9, 2005, in l. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN mSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucrrON, IN
6.1-136 PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS [Cornm. C7. Comm.C7.]
6.1-137
connections be configured such that a ductile lirnit state in the member or connec-
To preve~t excessive deformations ofboltedjoints to bearing on the connect-
tion, such as yielding or bearing deformation, controls the available strength. ~d m.atenal, the bearing strength is limited by the
t S -considered" op-
C7.2. Bolted Joints ~o~ m. pecification Section 13.10 (Rn =2.4dtFu). philosophical intent ofthis
The potential for fuIl reversal of design load and the likelihood of inelastic defor- hIDltatlOn in the Specification is to limit the
deformation to an approxi-
mations of members andlor connected parts necessitates that pretensioned bolts mate maximum of lA in. (6 mm). It should be rec:ogl!üz;ed. however, that the actual
be used in boltedjoints in the SLRS. However, earthquake motions are such that bearing load in a seismic event may be much larger th
d at anticipated in design
slip cannot and need not be prevented in aH cases, even with slip-critical con- an the actual deformation of holes may exceed theoreticallimit. Nonethe-
nections. Accordingly, the Provisions call for bolted joints to be proportioned as less, this limit should effectiveIy minim1'ze .
m moderate seismic events.
pretensioned bearing joints but with faying surfaces prepared as for Class A or These pr~v~sions have expanded the prohibition boIts in combination with
better slip-critical connections. That is, bolted connections can be proportioned welds res1stmg a common force The 2002 h'b' d b 1
with available strengths for bearing connections as long as the faying surfaces f h' .'. pro lIte o ts and welds
rom s anng Ioads on a common faying surface. Due to the potential of fuIl
are stiIl prepared to provide a minimum slip coefficient, 11 = 0.35. The resulting load reversal and the likeIihood of ineIastic . .
nominal amount of slip resistance will minimize damage in more moderate seis- l b 1 . m connectmg pIate
e ements, o ts may exceed their slip resistances significant" l d
mic events. This requirement is intended for joints where the faying surface is WeId th t . se1sm1C oa s.
~ a are m a common shear plane to these will IikeIy not deform
primarily subjected to shear. Where the faying surface is primarily subjected to suffic1entIy to allow the boIts to slip into bearing 'f b' 1
, 1 su ~ect to oad
tension or compression, for example, in a bolted end plate moment connection, reversa.1 Consequently the weIds will tend to t' + d .
'f . en 1re J.orce an may falI
the requirement on preparation of the faying surfaces may be relaxed. 1 they were not designed as such. These have b d'fi d
h1'b'1t boIts from sharing a common force with . alI"
een mo 1 e to pro-
'.
To prevent excessive deformations of bolted joints due to slip between the con- . . . • m SltuatlOns. WhIle th1S
nected plies under earthquake motions, the use of holes in bolted joints in the v.:0~Id St1~I prOh1blt sharing Ioads on a common surface it wouId aIso ro-
h1b1t shanng of a common force between . th "P
SLRS is limited to standard holes and short-slotted holes with the direction of For examp1e, bracmg . m o er cond1uons
connections at beam . . t f .
the slot perpendicular to the line of force. Exceptions are provided for altemative h th Jom s are o ten configured
hole types that are justified as a part of a tested assembly and for oversized holes suc at the vertical component of the brace is by a combination of both
in brace diagonals. the gusset ~d beam web connections to the (see Figures C-I-7.1a and
C-I-7.1b). Smce these two elements are in a shear plan 'th l' . d
A change from the 2002 Provisions is the acceptance of the use of oversized defo f bT . e W1 1IDlte
rm~ l?n capa 1 1ty, if one element were and the other boIted the
holes in braced connections of diagonal members subject to certain limitations. weIded Jomt wouId likeIy resist all the force By the co t' f 'h
As reported in FEMA 355D, bolted joints with oversized holes in tested moment el t th . nnec IOn o tese
emen s to e column either both bolted or both b th l
connections were found to behave as fuIl stiffness connections for most practical rk 1 . . . o e ements would
1. e y hpartlc1pate m resisting .the force. SimiIarly, e flang bracmg . connec-
applications. Bracing connections with oversized holes in bolted connections tlOns s ouId not be designed such that boIted web . h . "
should behave similarly. The design of the brace connections with oversized th . 11 d . . s are m res1sung
e aX1a oa s Wlth welded flanges (or vice versa).
holes as slip-critical will provide additional tolerance for field connections, yet
Bolts in one element of a member may be designed
should remain as slip-resistant for most seismic events. If the bolts did slip in
the oversized holes in an extreme situation, the connections should still behave ti?n v.:hile other elements may be connected by welds
d1rectlOn or shear planeo For exampIe, a beam
similar to fuIl stiffness connections. Interstory drifts may also increase slightly connected to a column
if bolts slip, and the effect of bolt slip should be considered in drift calcula- may use weIded flanges to traIisfer flexure andlor loads, whiIe a boIted web
tions. In order to minimize the amount of slip, oversized holes for bolts should connection transfers the beam shear. Similarly, splices may transfer axial
Ioads andlor flexure through flange weIds WI'th hOri:Z0I1W shear in the column web
be limited to one ply of the connection. For large diameter bolts, the amount of
slippage could also be minimized by limiting the bolt hole size to a maximum of transferred through a boIted web connection. In both these cases there shouId be
YI6 in. greater than the bolt diameter, rather than the fuH range permitted by the adequate deformation capability between the flange web connections to allow
the bolts to resist Ioads in bearing independent of the
Specification. When using oversized holes with slip-critical bolts, the effect of
the reduced slip capacities of bolts in oversized holes should be considered. The The provisions do not prohibit the use of erecu'on
on a fieId weIded connec-
reduction of pretension results in a lower static slip load, but the overall behavior tion such as a web shear tab in a wide flange moment rlQl!1ne:ctIon.
'1 In this instance
of connections with oversized holes has been shown to be similar to those with the bolts wouId resist the temporary erect¡'on loads , the weIds wouId need to
standard holes (Kulak, Fisher and Struik, 1987). be designed to resist the entire anticipated force in eIement.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005,
AMERICAN INslITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, lNc. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON,
6.1-138 PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS [Cornm. C7. Cornm. C7.] PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, ANO FA TENERS 6.1-139
·C7.3. Welded Joints designate certain welds as demand criti~al welds and require that these welds
The general requirements for welded joints are given in AWS D 1.1 (AWS, 2004), be made with filler metals that meet minimum ley Is of Charpy V-Notch (CVN)
wherein a welding procedure specification (WPS) is required for all welds. Ap- toughness using two different test temperatures and specified test protocols.
proval by the engineer of record of the WPS to be used is required in these Welds designated as demand critical welds are sp cified elsewhere in the provi-
provisions. These provisions invoke additional requirements for welding in the sions in the section applicable to the specific SL S. Demand critical welds are
seismic load resisting system (SLRS) per Appendix W. generally complete-joint-penetration groove (C ) welds so designated based
As in previous provisions, weld metal notch toughness is required in all welds on expected yield level or higher stress demand, r are those weIds the faiIure
in merp.bers and connections in the load path of the SLRS. These provisions of which would result in significant degradation i the strength and stiffness of
the SLRS.
furtherdesignate certain welds as demand critica) welds, and require that these
welds be made with filler metals that meet minimum levels of Charpy V-Notch For demand critical welds, FEMA 350 (FEMA, 20 Oa) and 353 (FEMA, 2000d)
(CVN) toughness using two different test temperatures and specified test pro- recommended filler metal that compIied with mini um Charpy V-Notch (CVN)
tocols. Welds designated as demandcritical welds are specified elsewhere in requirements using two test temperatures and spe .fied test protocols. The Pro-
visions include the dual CVN requirement sugges ed in the FEMA documents
but require a Iower temperature than the FEMA re ommendations for the AWS
A5 classification method [in other words, minus 2 °F (minus 29 oC) rather than
O °F (minus 18 0C)]. Although successful testing at either temperature wouId
ensure that sorne ductile tearir·g would occur before nal fracture, use of this Iower
temperature is consistent with the filler metal u ed in the SACIFEMA tests
e.J.p.
@
FlANGES
Fig. C-I-7.1a. Desirable details that avoid sharedforces between welds and bolts.
Fig. C-I-7.1 b. Problematic boltedlwelded member onnections.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITUI'E OF S'IEEL CONSTRUCIlON, INc.
AMERICAN INSTITUI'EioF S'IEEL CONSTRUCIlON,
6.1-140 PART I - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS [Cornm. C7. Comm. C7.] PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND
6.1-141
and matches the filler metals commercially available and frequently used for C7.4. Protected Zone
such welds. The more critical CVN weld metal property is the minimum of 40
The FEMNSAC testing h~ demonstrated the ""n,cih"ihl of regions undergoing
ft-Ibs (54 J) at 70°F (21°C) following the procedure in Appendix X. Based on
large inelastic strains to dis~ontinuities caused by rapid change of section,
the FEMA recommendations, the engineer of record may consider applying the
penetrations, or constructiorÍ caused flaws. For this operations that cause dis-
40 ft-lbs (54 J) at 70°F (21°C) requirements to other critical welds.
continuities are prohibited in regions subject to inelastic strains. These provi-
In a structure with exposed structural steel, an unheated building, or a build- sions designate these regions as protected tones. protected zones are designated
ing used for cold storage, the demand critical welds may be subject to service in the Provisions in the sections applicable to the type of system and in
temperatures less than 50°F (10 oC). In these cases the provisions require that ANSIIAISC 358 (AISC, 2005a). The protected inelude moment frame hing-
the minimum qualification temperature for Appendix X be adjusted such that ing zones, links of EBFs, the ends and the ~enter of braces, etc.
the test temperature for the Charpy V-Notch toughness qualification tests shall
Not all regions experiencing inelastic 'aelorrna~lOn are designated protected
be no more than 20°F (11°C) aboye the lowest anticipated service temperature zones; for example, the beam-column panel It should be noted that yield
(LAST). The LAST should be determined from appropriate resources for the level strains are not strictIylimited to the plastic zones and caution should
area or application. For example, weld metal in a structure with a lowest antici- also be exercised in creating discontinuities in
pated service temperature of O °F (minus 18 oC) would need to be qualified at a
temperature less than or equal to 20°F (minus 7 oC). Many operations during fabrication, erection, and the subsequent work of other
trades have the potential to create discontinuities in seismic load resisting system.
AH other welds in members and connections in the load path of the SLRS re-
When located in the designated protected zone, discontinuities are required
quire filler metal with a minimum specified CVN toughness of 20 ft-lb (27 J) to be repaired by the responsible subcontractor as by the engineer of re-
at O °F (minus 18 oC). This is a relaxation from the previous provisions, which
cord. Discontinuities should also be repaired in regions of the seismic load
required 20 ft-lb (27 J) at minus 20°F (minus 29 OC) for all welds. The require- resisting system when the presence of the would be detrimental to its
ment in the previous provisions considered that FCAW and SMAW electrodes performance. The responsible subcontractor should propose a repair procedure for
that met the lower test values were readily available, and therefore one common the approval of the engineer of record. Repair may unnecessary for sorne discon-
test temperature could be used for both the moment frame critical welds and tinuities, subject to the approval of the engineer· of The engineer of record
the balance of welding in the SLRS. The nominal increase in test temperature should refer to AWS D 1.1 and ASTM A6, Section 9 guidance in establishing the
still provides adequate notch toughness for filler welds in nondemand critical acceptance criteria for repair of discontinuities. the plastic hinge regions,
welds, while permitting other common notch-tough electrodes used for SAW AWS D 1.1 requirements for repair of . should be applied.
and GMAW processes to be used. Welds carrying only gravity loads such as
filler beam connections and welds for collateral members of the SLRS such as C7.5. Continuity Plates and Stiffeners
The provisions are intended to avoid welding into k-area of hot-rolled shapes
deck welds, minor collectors, and lateral bracing do not require filler metal with
in highly restrained joints such as continuity and stiffeners. This would in-
notch toughness requirements. Following the manufacturer's essential variables,
elude continuity plates in columns at moment cOlo.be~ct1ons and stiffeners in link
either the AWS classification method in the AWS A5 specification or manufac-
beams. See Section C6.3 for discussion on k-area The increased elip
turer certification may be used to meet this CVN requirement.
dimensions preelude the possibility of welding these regions. (See Figures
It is not the intent of the Provisions to require project-specific CVN testing of C-I-7.2aand b.) Inaddition, when groove welds are care should beused when
either the welding procedure or any production welds. Further, these weld tough- preparing the joint terrnination near the member to enable quality welding
ness requirements are not intended to apply to electric resistance welding (ERW) for the fulllength of the joint. Weld tabs should used in the k-area.
and submerged arc welding (SAW) when these welding processes are used in the
Where practical, connections with groove or .....'...... r..., ....'"'' fillet welds in members
production ofhollow structural sections and pipe (ASTMA500 andA53/A53M).
of the SLRS should also be avoided in the k-area. example is welding
In addition, the control of heat input is not monitored unless specified.
of doublers in panel zones. Alternative details for that avoid welding in
These provisions delete the Appendix X production lot testing requirements for the k-area can be found in Figure C-I-9.3. Where in the k-area cannot be
SMAW electrodes elassified by AWS A5 specifications as E7018 and E8018, avoided, or has been done in error, the k-area be inspected per Appendix Q,
and also for GMAW solid electrodes when the CVN toughness determined per Section Q5.2. The section is not intended to welding of minor connec-
AWS elassification test methods meets or exceeds 20 ft-lb (27 J) at temperatures tion elements such as shear tabs near the k-area. elements generally have
les s than or equal to minus 20°F (minus 29 OC). The deposited filler metal of small weld sizes and minimal restraint since they
these electrodes routinely meets the CVN toughness requirements for demand with the flange of the wide flange.
critical welds and therefore the requirements for these electrodes are relaxed.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mateh 9,
AMERICAN INsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONS1RUCTION, INC. AMERICAN INSTlTIJ'l'E OF STEEL CON'S1RUcnON,
PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornm.C8. Cornm.C8.] PART 1 - MEMBERS 6.1-143
6.1-142
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, i l. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTlTU'TE OF SmEL CONSTRucnON, lNe. AMEruCAN INsTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRucnON, IN .
6.1-144 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornm. C8. Cornm. C8.] PART 1 - MEMBERS 6.1-145
essentially identical to those included in Section 8.3. The required forces for de- general, it is recornmended that the splice be the middle third of the story
sign of the columns are intended to represent reasonable limits on the axial forc- height. For les s typical buildings, where the TlOOr-I[O-lC10()T height is insufficient
es that can be imposed, and design for these forces is expected to prevent global to accornmodate this requirement, the splice be placed as dose as prac-
column failure. These axial forces are permitted to be applied without consider- ticable to the midpoint of the clear distance the finished floor and the
ation of concurrent bending moments that may occur. Additionally, the column bottom flange of the beam aboye. It is not
design using these forces is typically checked using K = 1.0. This approach is requirements be in conflictwith applicable satet)r¡re:gulationls,
based on the recognition that in the SLRS, column bending moments would be Safety Standards for Steel Erection developed
largest at the column ends and would normally result in reverse curvature in the Rulemaking Advisory Committee (SENRAC).
column. This being the case, the bending moments would not be contributory to
column buckling, and the assumption of K = 1 would be conservative. Partial-joint-penetration gro ove welded splices thick column flanges exhibit
virtually no ductility under tensile loading and Stephen, 1977; Bruneau,
Clearly, the above-described approach provides no assurance that columns will Mahin and Popov, 1987). Consequently, column made with partial-joint-
not yield and, certainly, the combination ofaxialload and bending is often capa- penetration groove welds require a 100 percent . in required strength and
ble of causing yielding at the ends of columns. Column yielding may be caused must be made using weld metal with minimum V-Notch (CVN) tough-
by a combination of high bending moments and modest axialloads, as is normal ness properties.
in moment frames or by a combination of high axial load and bending due to the
end rotations that occur in braced frame structures. While yielding of columns The ca1culation of the minimum available
may result in damage that is significant and difficult to repair, it is judged that, in the ratio Ry. This results in a minimum aV~ljla.ble strength that is not les s than
general, it will not result in column fractures or global buckling, either of which 50 percent of the expected yield strength of the flanges. A complete-
would threaten life safety. joint-penetration (ClP) gro ove weld may be as satisfying this
requirement.
Although the provisions in Section 8.3 are believed to provide reasonable assur-
ance of adequate performance, it should be recognized that these are minimum The possible occurrence of tensile loads in splices utilizing partial-
standards and where higher levels of performance, or greater levels of reliability joint-penetration (PlP) groove welds during a mal:jcirnmTI considered earthquake
are merited, several additional concems should be considered: should be evaluated. When tensile loads are it is suggested that sorne
restraint be provided against relative lateral between the spliced
(1) Nonlinear analyses often indicate conditions wherein column end moments column shafts. For example, this can be. with the use of flange splice
are not reversed and may be contributory to buckling. plates. Altematively, web splice plates that are enough to maintain the gen-
(2) There is liule available research on column performance under the com- eral alignment of the spliced columns can be used. experiments have
bination of very high axial load (in the range of 0.6 - 0.7P y and higher) in shown that when columns that are unattached at base reseat themselves after
conjunction with significant end rotations. Research on this condition is lifting, the performance oí' a steel frame tolerable (Huckelbridge and
recornmended for the future. Clough,1977).
Realistic soil capacities must be used when determining the limiting resistance These provisions are applicable to cornmon configurations. Additional
of the foundation to overtuming uplift. considerations may be necessary when flexure dqlnirlat~~s over axial compres-
sion in columns in momeni frames, and in end of tall narrow frames
C8.4. Column Splices where overtuming forces can be very The designer should review
the conditions found in columns in buildings with story heights, when large
C8.4a. General changes in column sizes occur at the splice, or the possibility of column
Except for moment frames, the available strength of a column splice is required buckling in single curvature over multiple exists. In these and similar
to equal or exceed both the required strength determined in Section 8.3 and the cases, special column splice requirements may be for minimum avail-
required strength for axial, flexural and shear effects at the splice location deter- able strength and/or detailing.
mined from load combinations stipulated by the applicable building code.
Where CJP groove welds are not used, the coruiel:::tic1n is likely to be a PJP
Column splices should be located away from the beam-to-column connec- groove weld. The unwelded portion of the PlP weld forms a crack-like
tion to reduce the effects offlexure. For typical buildings, the 4 ft (1.2 m) mini- notch that induces stress concentrations. A weld made from one
mum distance requirement will control. When splices are located 4 to 5 ft (1.2 to si de would produce an edge crack-like notch and Rolfe, 1999). A PJP
1.5 m) aboye the floor level, field erection and construction of the column splice groove weld made from both sides would a buried crack-like notch.
will generally be simplified due to improved accessibility and convenience. In The strength of such crack-like notches' may be by using fracture
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INSTI'IUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INsTITlirn OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
--------------------~-~-~'-'-~-_._---_ ~_ .. .. __ .. _-_.-'_._--'. __ .-
6.1-146 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornm. CS. Cornm. CS.] PART 1 - MEMBERS 6.1-147
mechanics methodology. Depending on the specific characteristics of the partic- Column bases are required to be designed for e same axial forces as those
ular design configuration, geometry and deformation, the analysis may require required for the members ánd connections frami g into them. If the connections
elastic-plastic or plastic finite element analysis of the joint. The accuracy of the of the system are required to be designed for the mplified seismic loads or loads
computed strength will depend on the finite element model and mesh size used, the based on member strengths, the connection to e column base must also be
assumed strength and fracture toughness of the base metal, heat affected zone and designed for those loads.
weld metal, and on the residual stress magnitude and d4stribution in the joint.
I~ ís necessary to decompose the required tens on strength of connections of
Column web splices should be concentric with the column loads. Bolted column diagonal brace members to determine the axial d shear forces imparted on the
web splices are required to have connection plates on both sides of the web to column base.
minimize eccentricities.
The provisions of ACI 318, Appendix D, inclu special requirements for an-
·C8.4b. Columns Not Part of the Seismic Load ch~rage for ."regions .of mo~er~te to high seismic risk, or for structures assigned
Resisting System to .mtermediate or hlgh selsmIC performance or design categories." These re-
Inelastic analyses (FEMA, 2000f; FEMA, 20QOg) of moment frame buildings qmrements apply for calculation of available strengths to match required
have shown the importance of the columns that are not part of the SLRS in strengths that are calculated at load combinatio s including 1.0E. In Sections
helping to distribute the seismic shears between the floors. Even columns that 8.5b and 8.5c, required strengths are calculated at igher force levels. Therefore
have beam connections considered to be pinned connections may develop large it is judged that the additional reductions of avai able strength applied by Aci
are not necessary.
bending moments and shears due to nonuniform drifts of adjacent levels. For this
reason, it is recommended that splices of such columns be adequate to develop C8.5a. Required Axial Strength
the shear forces corresponding to these large column moments in both orthogo- The required axial (vertical) strength of the colu base is computed from the
nal directions. column required strength in Section 8.3 (or the co umn strength required for the
FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a) recommends that, "Splices of columns that are not type of system), in combination with the vertical omponent of the connection
part of the Seismic Load Resisting System should be made in the center one- required strength of any braces present.
third of the column height, and should have sufficient shear capacity in both C8.5b. Required Shear Strength
OrthOgOIlal directions to maintain the alignment of the column at the maximum
The required shear (horizontal) strength of the co umn base is computed from
shear force that the column is capable of producing." The corresponding com-
a mechanism in which the column forms plastic inges at the top and bottom
mentary suggests that this shear should be calculated assuming plastic hinges at
~f the fir~t story, in combinatíon with the horizon 1 component of the connec-
the ends of the colUIIlIls in both orthogonal directions.
tlon reqmred strength of any braces presento The ormer (column) component
Further review (Krawinkler, 2001) of nonlinear analyses cited in FEMA 355C of the shear need not exceed that corresponding t the amplified seismic load;
(FEMA, 2000d) showed that, in general, shears in such columns will be less thus for braced-frame systems, the ability to achiev this story mechanism is not
than one-half of the shear calculated from 2MpclH. For this reason, Section 8.4b required.
requires that the calculated shear in the splices ~e not less than MpclH.
There are several possible mechanisms for shear for es to be transferred from the
Bolted web connections are preferred by many engineers and contractors be- column base into the supporting concrete foundati n. Surface friction between
cause they have advantages for erection, and, when plates are placed on both the b~se pl~te and supporting grout and concrete is robably the initialload path,
sides of the web, they are expected to maintain alignment of the column in the especIally If the anchor rods have been pretension d. Unless the shear force is
event of a flange splice fracture. PJP groove welded webs are not recommended, accompanied by enough tension to completely ove come the dead loads on the
because fracture of a flange splice would likely lead to fracture of the web splice, base plate, this mechanism will probably resist so e or all of the shear force.
considering the stress concentration~ inherent in such welded joints. However, many building codes prescribe that frictio cannot be considered when
resisting code earthquake loads, and anoth~r design calculation method must be
C8.5. Column Bases utilized. The other potential mechanisms ar:e: anchor rod bearing against the base
Column bases must have adequate strength to permit the expected ductile behav- plates, shear keys bearing ongrout in the grout poc t, or bearing of the colurnn
ior for which the system is designed in order for the anticÍpated performance to embedded in a slab or grade beam. See Figure C-I- .5.1. .
be achieved.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel ~uildings, Marep 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INs1ITUTE OF STEEf- CONsTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, C.
6.1-148 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornm.C8. Comm. C8.] PART 1 - MEMBERS
6.1-149
When the colurnn base is ernbedded in the foundation, it can serve as a shear
key to transfer shear forces. It is sornetirnes convenient to transfer shear f?rces
to concrete grade bearns through reinforcing steel welded to the colurnn. FIgure
C-I-8.5.2 shows two exampIes of shear transfer to a concrete grade bearn. The
reinforcing steeI must be long enough to allow a splice with the grade bearn rein-
forcing steel, allowing transfer of force s to additional foundations.
Hg. C-I-8.5.I. Shear transfer mechanisms-column supported by foundation. Fig. C-I-8.5.2. Examples of shear transfer to a concr, te grade beam.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for. Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, ncl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTl11lTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc.
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, 1 c.
6.1-150 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornm.C8.
Cornm.C8.] PART 1 - MEMBERS 6.1-151
empIoy thick base pIates, haunches, cover plates, or other strength~ning as (4) The column may continue below the assu ed seismic base (for example,
required to develop the column hinge. Where haunched type connectIons are
used, hinging occurs aboye the haunch, and appropriate consideration should into a basement, craw1space, or grade beam) .n such a way that the column' s
be given to the stability of the eolumn section at the hinge. See Figure C-I- fixity is assured without the need for a rigid base pIate eonnection. The de-
signer should recognize that hinging will o cur in the column, just aboye
8.5.3 for examples ofrigid base assemblies that can be designed to be capable
of forcing column hinging. In sorne cases, yielding can occur in the concrete the seismic base or in the grade beam. If hi ging is considered to occur in
grade beams rather than in the eolumn. In this case the concrete grade beams the grade beam, then the grade beam shoul be designed in conformance
should be designed in conformance with ACI 318, Chapter 21. with ACI 318, Chapter 21. The horizontal s ear to be resisted at the ends
of the column below the seismic base shoul be calculated eonsidering the
(2) Large columns may be provided at the bottom level to limit the drift, a~d a expected strength, RyFy, of the framing. See igure C-I-8.5.4 for examples
"pinned base" may be utilized. The designer should ensure that the ~eq~lred of a column base fixed within a grade beam.
shear capacity of the eolumn, base plate, and anchor rods can be mamtamed
up to the maximum rotation that may occur. It should be recogniz~d, ho,:-
Column
ever, that without taking special measures, column base connectIon wlll
generally provide partial rotational fixity.
(3) A connection which provides "partial fixity" may be provided, so that the
column base is fixed up to sorne column moment, but the base yields be-
fore the eolumn hinges. In designing a base with partíal fixity, the designer
should consider the principIes used in the design of partially restrained con-
nections. This type of base may rely on bending of the base plate (similar
to an end plate connection), bending of angles or tees, or yielding of anchor
rods. In the latter case, it is necessary to provide anchor rods with adequate Base Plate
elongation capacity to permit the required rotation and sufficient unre- Anchor Rod
strained length for the yieIding to occur. Shear capacity of the base pIate to
Concrete
foundation connection must be assured at the maximum rotation. Foundation
(a)
Column
Column
Base
Plate
~.
(b)
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. Seismic Provisions lor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, in 1. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnSTlTIJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc
6.1-152 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornrn. C8. Cornrn. C8.] PART 1 - MEMBERS 6.1-153
For both braced frame and moment frame column bases, the designer should performance of the base connection also depends on the cyclic performance of
consider the base connection as similar to a beam-to-column connection and ap- the anchors and the surrounding concrete (Klingn r and Graces, 2001).
ply similar principIes of design and detailing. However, there are also significant
differences that must be considered: Many different types of column base connection are used in current practice.
Much research work is needed in order tobetter u derstand their behavior under
(1) Long anchor rods embedded in concrete will strain much more than seismic loading and to formulate improved design rocedures. Designers should
the steel bolts or welds of the beam-to-column connections. The elonga- use caution and good judgment in design and detai ng in order to achieve desired
tion of these anchor rods may contribute to frame drift and this should be strength, stiffness, and ductility of this very impo t class of connections.
considered.
CS.6. H-Piles
(2) Column base plates are bearing on grout or concrete that is more compress- The provisions on seismic design of H-piles are b sed on the data collected on
ible than the column flanges of beam-to-column connections. the actual behavior of H-piles during recent e quakes, including the 1994
(3) Column base connections have significantly more longitudinal load in the Northridge earthquake (Astaneh-AsI, Bolt, McM llin, Donikaian, Modjtahedi
plane of the flanges and less transverse load in the plane of the web, when and Cho, 1994) and the results of cyclic tests offull scale pile tests (Astaneh-AsI
compared to beam-to-column connections. and Ravat, 1997). In the testprogram, five full size H-piles with reinforced con-
crete pile caps were subjected to realistic cyclic ve .cal and horizontal displace-
(4) The shear mechanism between the column base and grout or concrete is ments expected in a major earthquake. Three spec' ens were vertical piles and
different from the shear mechanism between beam end plate and column two specimens were batter pUes. The tests' establis ed that during cyclic loading
flange. for all three vertical pile specimens a very ductile d stable plastic hinge formed
(5) The AISC standard column base anchor rod hole diameter is different from in the steel pile just below the reinforced concret pile cap. When very large
AISC standard steel-to-steel bolt holes. inelastic cycles were applied, local buckling of fl ges within the plastic hinge
area occurred. Eventually, low cycle fatigue fractu of flanges or overall buck-
(6) Foundation rocking and rotation may be an issue, especially for isolated ling of the pile occurred. However, before the piles xperienced fracture through
column footings. locally buckled areas, vertical piles tolerated from O to 65 large inelastic cyclic
The column base connection is one of the most important elements in steel struc- vertical and horizontal displacements with rotation of the plastic hinge exceed-
tures. Damage at column bases during past earthquakes has been reported by ing 0.06 radian for more than 20 cycles.
many observers (Northridge Reconnaissance Team, 1996; Midorikawa, Hasega- CS.6a. Design of H-Piles
wa, Mukai, Nishiyama, Fukuta and Yamanouchi, 1997). Seismic design practice
Prior to an earthquake, piles, particularly vertical p'les, are primarily subjected
for this class of connections has not been well developed (DeWolf and Ricker,
to gravity axial load. During an earthquake, piles ar subjected to horizontal and
1990; Drake and Elkin, 1999) mainly because of the rather limited number of
vertical displacements as shown in Figure C-I-8.6.1 The horizontal and vertical
analytical and experimental studies that have been carried out to-date (DeWolf
displacements ofpiles generate axial load (compres ion and possibly uplift ten-
and Sarisley, 1980; Picard and Beaulieu, 1985; Thambiratnam and Paramasivam, sion), bending moment, and shear in the pile.
1986; Sato and Kamagata, 1988; Astaneh-AsI, Bergsma and Shen, 1992; Tar-
gowski, Lamblin and Guerlement, 1993; Ermopoulos and Stamatopoulos, 1996; During tests of H-piles, realistic cyclic horizontal and vertical displacements
Jaspart and Vandegans, 1998; Stojadinovic, Spacone, Goel and Kwon, 1998; were applied to the pile specimens. Figure C-I-8.6. shows test results in terms
Burda and ltani, 1999; Adany, Calado and Dunai, 2000). ofaxial load and bending moment for one of the s ecimens. Based on perfor-
mance of test specimens, it was concluded that H-p les should be designed fol-
Most of the experimental studies have been performed on reduced-scale speci-
lowing the provisions of the Specification regarding embers subjected to com-
mens representing basic types of connections simulating a column welded to an bined loads.
exposed base plate, which in tum is connected to a concrete foundation through
anchor rods. Test specimens have been subjected to axial loading combined CS.6b. Battered H-Piles
with cyclic bending to simulate the column base behavior in moment frames. The vertical pile specimens demonstrated very larg cyclic ductility as wel1 as
Two recent studies (Fahmy, Stojadinovic and Goel, 2000; Lee and Goel, 2001) considerable energydissipation capacity. A case stud of performance of H-piles
have noted the importance of weld metal toughness and axis of bending of wide during the 1994 Northridge earthquake (Astaneh-AsI and others, 1994) indicated
flange column sections on ductility and energy dissipation capacity of the test excellent performance for pile groups with vertic piles only. However, the
specimens. AIso, relative strength and stiffness of the base plate and anchor
rods can significantly influence the stress distribution and failure modes. The
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIoN,INC. AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-154 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Comm.C8.
Cornm.C9.]
PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRA
6.1-155
battered pile specimens did not show asmuch du tility as the vertical piles. The
battered piles tolerated frO.JD 7 to 17 large inelas .c cycles before failure. Based
on relatively limited information on actual seis c behavior of battered piles, it
is possible that during a major earthquake, batter d piles in apile group fail and
are no longer able to support the gravity load r the earthquake. Because of
this possibility, the use of battered piles to c gravity loads is discouraged.
Unless, through realistic cyclic tests, it is shown that battered piles will be ca-
pable of carrying their share of the gravity loads afier a major earthquake, the
vertical piles in seismic design categories D, E, an F should be designed to sup-
port the gravity load alone, ,without participation f the battered piles.
CS.6e. Tension in H-Piles'
Due to overtuming moment, piles can be subject d to tension. Piles subjected
to tension should have sufficient mechanical attac ments within their embedded
area to transfer the tension force in the pile to the ile cap or foundation. Since
it is expected that a plastic hinge will form in the ile just under the pile cap or
foundation, the use of mechanical attachment an welds over a length of pile
below the pile cap equal to the depth of cross secti n of the pile is prohibited.
(a) Vertical Piles Only (h) Vertical and Battered Piles Cg. SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SM )
Fig. C-I-8.6.1. Deformations ofpiles andforces acting on an individual pile. These Provisions address three types of steel mo ent frames: special moment
frames (SMF) in Section 9, intermediate moment rames (IMF) in Section 10,
and ordinary moment frames (OMF) in Section 1. The provisions for these
Bending Moment, kN-m three moment-frame types reflect lessons leamed m the Northridge and Kobe
Earthquakes, and benefit froÍn subsequent research performed by the SAC Joint
-400 -200 o 200 400 Venture for FEMA. The reader is referred to FE A 350 (FEMA, 2000a) for
an extensive discussion of these lessons and reco endations to mitigate the
4000
800 conditions observed. Commentary on specific prov' sions in Section C9 is based
primarily on FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a).
2000 The prescriptive moment-frame connection includ in the 1992 Seismic Pro-
400
Axial Axial visions was based primarilyon testing that was c nducted in the early 1970s
Load, Load, (Popov and Stephen, 1972) indicating that for the izesand material strengths
kips o o kN tested, a moment connection with complete-joint enetration groove welded
flanges and a welded or bolted web connection c uld accommodate inelastic
rotations in the range of 0.01 to 0.015 radian. It wa judged by engineers at the
-400 time that such rotations, which corresponded to bu lding drifts in the range of
-2000
2 to 2.5 percent were sufficient for adequate frame erformance. Investigations
conducted subsequent to the Northridge earthquake emphasized that the many
-800 changes that took place in materials, welding, frame onfigurations and member
-4000
sizes since the 1970s,make the original results uns table as a basis for current
-4000 -2000 o designo Additionally, recent analyses using time hist ries from certain near-fault
2000 4000
earthquakes, including P-!1 effects, demonstrate that ·ft demands may be larger
than previously assumed (Krawinkler and Gupta, 19 8).
Bending Moment, kips-in
The three frame types inc1uded in these Provisions o er three different levels of
Fig. C-I-8.6.2. Axialload-moment interactionfor H-pile test. expected seismic inelastic rotation capability. SMF d IMF are designed to ac-
commodate approximately 0.03 and 0.01 radian inel stic rotation, respectively.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildin~s; March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERIcAN INsTITUTE OF S1-EEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, i 1. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITI1TE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, IN .
6.1-156 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Comm.C9. Comm. C9.] PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT 6.1-157
OMF are designed to remain essentially elastic and are assumed to have only C9.1. Scope
very small inelastic demands. It is assumed that the elastic drift of typical mo- Special mament frames (SMF) are generally eX1Je~reQ to experience significant
ment frames is usually in the range of 0.01 radian and that the inelastic rotation inelastic deformation during large seismic events. is expected that most of the
of the beams is approximately equal to the inelastic drift. These frames are as- inelastic deformation will take place as rotation
sumed to accornmodate total interstory drifts in the range of 0.04, 0.02, and 0.01 inelastic deformation in the panel zone Of the
radian, respectively. C9 abo ve. The amount of inelastic deformation
Although it is cornmon to visualize inelastic rotations in moment frames oc- types used, the configuration, and a number of
curring at beam or column "hinges," analyses and testing demonstrate that the for these frames are to be qualified based upon
inelastic rotations actualiy combine flexural deformations at the hinges, shear connection can sustain an interstary drift angle of
deformations of the panel zones, and deformations from other sources depend- a specified loading protocoL Other provisions are ~~.."'..,~"'u to limit or prevent ex-
ing on the configuration unless the column webs are unusual1y thick. The con- cessive panel zone distortion, column hinging, local buckling that may lead
tribution of panel zone deformation to inelastic rotation is considered benefi- to inadequate frame performance in spite of good performance.
cial, provided that it neither leads to significant local column flange bending
at the beam-flange-to-column-flange welds nor to significant column damage. C9.2. Beam-to-Column Connections
Currently, the amount of panel zone deformationthat a given connection will C9.2a. Requirements
have and how much it will accornmodate appears to be most reliably determined Sections 9.2a and 9.2b have been rewritten to and coordinate the require-
by testing. ments with Appendices P and S. Section 9.2a the performance and design
Based upon the recornmendations in FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a), the Provisions requirements for the connec#ons and Section the requirements for
require that connections in SMF and IMF be qualified for use by testing. (Note verifying that the selected cónnections wil1 meet performance requirements.
that the IMF as defined in these Provisions is equivalent to the OMF as defined FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a) recornmends two for the qualifying drift
in FEMA 350.) The AISC Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermedi- angle (QDA) for special mament frames. The "",f-rpn,n-th degradation" drift angle,
ate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications (AISC, 2005a) provides a as defined in FEMA 350, means the angle where failure of the conneetion
limited number of prequalified connections to employ in SMF and !ME It is oecurs, or the strength of the connection degrades less than the nominal plastic
not the intent of the Provisions to require specific tests for each design, except eapacity, whichever is less." The "ultimate" drift capacity is defined as the
where the design is sufficiently unique that there are no published or otherwise angle "at which connection damage is so Severe continued ability to remain
available tests adequately representing the proposed configuration. For many stable under gravity loadingis uncertain." Testing this level can be hazardous
cornmonly employed combinations of beam and column sizes, there are read- to laboratory equipment and staff, which 'Ís part
ily available test reports in publications of AISC, FEMA and others, including done. The strength degradation QDA is set at 0.04
FEMA 355D (FEMA, 2000e) and (Gross, Engelhardt, Dang, Kasai and Iwan- is set at 0.06 radian. These values formed the for extensive probabilistic
kiw, 1999). Qualification testing is not required for OMF connections, which evaluations of the performance capability of structural systems (FEMA,
may be proportioned following a set of prescriptive design rules that have been 2000f) demonstrating with high statistical cOIrtid~n(::e that frames with these
demonstrated by testing to provide adequate performance for the limited inelas- types of connections can meet the intended goals. For the sake of
tic rotation expected for such frames. simplicity, and because many connections have been tested to the ultimate
Since SMF and IMF connection configuration and design procedures are based QDA, the Pravisians adopt the single criterion of strength degradation QDA.
on the results of qualifying tests conducted and evaluated per Appendix S and, if In addition, the ultimate QDA is more used for the design of high
prequalified, per Appendix P, the configuration of connections in the prototype performance structures.
structure must be consistent with the tested configurations. Similarly, the design Although connection qualification primarily on the level of plastic rota-
procedures used in the prototype connections must be consistent with the test tion achieved, the tendency for connections to ex~~rienc;e strength degradation
specimens. For example, the aspect ratio and relative strength of the panel zone with increased deformation is also of concern. degradation can increase
to the beam in the prototype must be reasonably consistent with that used in the rotation demands from P-/1' effects and the of frame instability. In
quhlifying tests to help achievethe anticipated contribution of the panel zone the absence of additional information, it is that this degradation
to connection rotation and beam flange to column connection behavior. AIso, should not reduce flexural strength, measured at drift angle of 0.04 radian,
material properties of the test specimen must fairly represent the prototype to less than the nominal flexural strength, Mp , using the specified
connections. Refer to the cornmentary for Appendix S for more discussion on
this topic.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Stee4Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON,
6.1-158 PART 1- SPEClAL MOMENT FRAMES [Cornm. C9. Cornm. C9.] PART 1 - SPEClAL MOMENT 6.1-159
minimum yield strength, Fy- Figure C-I-9.1 illustrates this behavior. Note that Prequalified Conn~ctions for Special and lnt'enrk,iia.tf' Steel Moment Frames
0.03 radian plastic rotation is equivalent to 0.04 radian drift angle for frames for Seismic Applications (AISC, 2005a) to and standardize connection
with an elastic drift of 0.01 radian. designo Other prequalification panels may be but are subject to the
approval of the authority having jurisdiction. of connections qualified by
The required shear strength, Vu or Ya, as appropriate, of the beam-to-column
prior tests or project specific tests may also be although the engineer of
joint is defined as the summation of the factored gravity loads and the shear that
record is responsible for substantiating the Published testing, such
results from the required flexural strengths on the two ends of the beam seg-
as that conducted as part of the SAC project and in FEMA 350 and 355
ment between the hinge points, which can be determined as 1.IRy F y Z (LRFD) or or project-specific testing may be used to satisfy
(1.1I1.5)R y F y Z (ASD). However, in sorne cases, such as when large gravity loads
occur or when panel zones are weak, rational analysis may indicate that lower C9.3. Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column
combinations of end moments are justified. (beam web parallel to column
The reason for disallowing the 0.75 combination factor on the seismic load in Cyclic testirig has demonstrated that significant
ASD load combinations is because 75 percent of the seismic ground motion is shear yielding in column panel zones through
expected to cause full yield at both ends of the beam, and the seismic load effect (Popov, Blondet, Stepanov and Stojadinovic, 1
for this limit state is controlled by the flexural capacity of the member. Fielding and Huang, 1971; Krawinkler, 1978).
necessary to provide a panel zone that is capable
It should be recognized that truss moment frames can be designed with bottom- strength of the connected beams if the available of the panel zone can
chord members or connections that can deform inelastically and such frames are be predicted. However, the usual assumption that Von Mises criterion applies
permitted as SMF if all of the provisions of Section 9 are meto and the shear strength is 0.55Fy dc t does not match actual behavior observed
C9.2b. Conformance Demonstration in many tests into the inelastic range. Due to the UH1;1SCll~C of the column flanges,
strain hardening and other phenomena, panel shear strengths in excess
This section provides requirements for demonstrating conformance with the
of Fydct have been observed. Accordingly, 11 0-11 of the Specifica-
requirements of Section 9.2a. This provision specifically permits the use
tion accounts for the significant strehgth of thick column flanges.
of prequalified connections meeting the requirements of ANSI/AISC 358,
Despite the ductility demohstrated by properIy Pf()óolrti()ne:d panel zones in pre-
vious stud~es, excessive panel zone adversely affect the perfor-
40000~-----¡------r-----¡------¡~~~~~~¡------¡------, mance of beam-to-column connections 1999; EI-Tawil, Mikesell,
Vidarsson and Kunnath, 1999). Consequently, provisions require that the
panel zone design match that of the successfully connections used to qual-
ify the connection being used. The balance of the of Section 9.3a is
intended to provide a minimum strength level to excessively weak panel
zones, which may lead to unacceptable col Where prequalified
connections described in FEMA 350 (FEMA, are used, the design of
panel zones according to the methods given generally meet the require-
ments in Section 9.3a. This should be verified by designer.
The equations in Section 110.6 of the represent the available
strength in the inelastic range and, therefore, are comparison to limiting
·.strengths of connected members. In Section 9.3a the Provisions, <Pvhas been
set equal to unity and Qv set egual to 1.50, to allow direct comparison between
available strength of the beam and the column zone. In the Specification,
the engineer is given the option to consider deformations of the panel
zone in the analysis. Separate sets of equations are for use when these
40000t-----~------~----~------~----_4------4_----_4----~
~.08 .0.06 .0.04 ~.02 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 deformations are and are not considered. In the
one equation was provided (Equation 9-1, which is
Fig. C-I-9.1. Acceptable strength degradation, per Section 9.2b.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucrrON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsÍITUTE bF STEEL CONSTRUcrroN,
6.1-160 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Cornm.C9. Cornm.C9.] PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT '6.1-161
of the Specification) and consideration of the inelastic deformation of the panel all panels meet the requirements of Equation Additionally, since a single
zone in the analysis was required. plug weld would seem to create a bound~ corldttlon that is much different than
1t should be noted thatthe equations used Ín the Provisions differ somewhat from a continuously restrained edge, it would be to place the plug welds in
the recornmendations of FEMA 350 and are slightly less conservative for sorne pairs or lines, dividing the plate into sized rectangles. Plug welds,
situations. However, as noted aboye, the equations of FEMA 350 are used for when used, should, as a mínimum, mee! the of Section J2.3 of the
Specification.
design with the connections prequalified therein, and those in the Provisions are
used only to provide a check for mínimum thickness, with the actual panel zone An altemative detail is shown in Figure C-1-9
thicknesses normally being determined by comparison to tested connections. placed syrnmetrically in pairs spaced away
The application of the moments at the column face to determine the required figuration, both the web doubler plates and the web are required to each
independently meet Equation 9-2 in order to be cOlnsÍdel~ed as effective.
shear strength of the panel zone recognizes that beam hinging will take place
at a location away from the beam-to-column connection, which will result in Web doubler plates may extend between top
amplified effects on the panel zone shear. The previous version of this provision be welded directly to the column flanges and the Icollltírmil:y
included a reduction factor of 0.8 on the beam yielding effects, which was in- extend aboye and below the top and bottom COlll41lUÍlty
tended to recognize that, in sorne cases, gravity loads míght inhibit the develop- the column flanges and web, and the continuity
ment of plastic hinges on both sides of a column. However, there is no assurance welded joint connecting the continuity plate to
that this will be the case, especially for one-sided connections and at perimeter plate is required to be configured to transmit
frames where gravity loads may be relatively small (EI-Tawil and others, 1999; continuity plate to each element of the panel
EI-Tawil, 2000). joint connecting the continuity plate to the web plate is required to be
sized to transmít the load from the continuity to the web doubler plate and
This provision requires that the panel' zone thickness be determined using the
the web doubler plate thickness is required to be to transmít this same
same method as the one used to determine the panel zone thickness in the tested
load.
connection, with a mínimum value as described in the remainder of the section.
The intent is that the local deformation demands on the various elements in the
structure be consistent with the results of the tests that justify the use of the con-
nection. The expected shear strength of the panel zone in relation to the maxi- doubler plate(s) if required per
mum expected demands that can be developed by the beam(s) framing into the 9.3a. Welding as required in
9.3 (See also Figure C-I-9.3.)
column should be consistent with the relative strengths that existed in the tested
connection configuration. Many of the connection tests were performed with a
one-sided configuration. 1f the structure has a two-sided connection configura-
tion with the same beam and column sizes as a one-sided connection test, the
panel zone shear demand will be about twice that of the test. Therefore, in order
to obtain the same relative strength, the panel zone thickness to be provided in
the structure should be approximately twice that of the test.
To mínimíze shear buckling of the panel zone during inelastic deformations, the
mínimum panel zone thickness is set at one-ninetieth (119 0 ) of the sum of its depth
and width. Thus, when the column web and web doubler platees) each meet
the requirements of Equation 9-2, their interconnection with plug welds is not '----- ~'UUI-'.UUL'Y plates and assoeiated
required. Otherwise, the column web and web doubler platees) can be intercon- as required in Seetions 9.5,
nected with plug welds as illustrated in Figure C-1-9.2 and the total panel zone and 11.5.
thickness can be used in Equation 9-2.
Section 9.3b provides no specific guidance on the number or location of plug
welds needed to prevent buckling of the doubler plateo As a mínimum, it is clear Fig. C-I-9.2. Connecting web doubler plates . welds.
that the spacing should divide the plate into rectangular panels in such a way that
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, INc. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON,
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUctION, mc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005,
AMERICAN mSTITlJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-164 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Cornm. C9. Cornm.C9.] PART 1 - SPEClAL MOMENT 6.1-165
was recornmended in all cases unless tests showed that other design features of SCIWB requirements is that the columns are ¡:;,...J~"'~,Clll'l strong enough to force
a given connection are so effective in reducing or redistributing flange stresses flexural yielding in beams in multiple levels the frame, thereby achieving a
that the connection will work without them. Later studies, discussed in FEMA higher level of energy dissipation. Weak frames, particularly those with
355D (FEMA, 2000e), have indicated that the old formulas and approaches may weak or soft stories, are likely to exhibit an response at those stories
not have been wrong, as described below. However, pending further study, aH with the highest column demand-to-capacity
features of SMRF connections are required to be based on either prequalification
or qualification testing. It should be noted that co;mpliance with the concept and Equation 9-3
gives no assurance that individual columns will yield, even when all connec-
The FEMA-sponsored SAC steel project studied the issue of continuity plates tion locations in the frame comply. It can be by nonlinear analysis that,
in depth. According to FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a), continuity plates are not as the frame defonns inelastically, points of ü·lt1~ctÜ)n shift and the distribution
required when: of moments varíes from the idealized Nonetheless, yielding of the
beams rather than the columns will predominate the desired inelastic perfor-
mance will be achieved in frames with members to meet the requirement in
(C9-3) Equation 9-3.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Stee,l Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN !NSTIrUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN INsTITlirE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.ucrloN,
PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Comm.C9. C omm.C9.]
PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT F
6.1-167
beam flanges b ecause Of the potential for flexural yielding, and consequent
beam-column eonnections, Cl = 1. Strictly spe ·ng, the correet solution would
lateral-torsional buckling of the column.
be to use the commentary equation with Cr = 1 d Cd =l at allloeations except
. at the for braees at the inflection point where Cd = 2. s the Provisions now read, we
The required strength for lateral bracmg fl beam-to-column
In ddition theconnection
element(s)is
are essentially implying that the product of Cr(C) = 2.0 by the implied value of
pe~c~nt nOffil~ hav~
f th . al trength of the beam ange. a ,
2 o e s Cr =2 and Cd = 1.
quired to adequate stiffness to inhibit lat-
provldmg lateral bracmg are rfle (B sal 1971). In sorne cases, a bracing
al movement of the column anges an , . In addition to bracing along the beam length, the provisions of this section call
emrember will be required for such lateral bracing. Altematively, CalCUlabtIOnds may
for the plaeementof lateral braeing to be near e location of expected plas-
show that adequate lateral bracing can be proVl.ded by the column we an con-
tic hinges. Such guidance dates to the original evelopment of plastic design
tinuity plates or by the flanges of perpendicular beams. . . procedures in the early 1960s. In moment fram structures, many connection
The 1997 Seismic Provisions requrre . d colIteral
umn a bracing
. . when the ratIO .m details attempt to move the plastic hinge a short .stance away from the beam-
. 9-3 was 1ess th an 1.
EquatIon 25 . The.intent of this provlsIOn
h . was to t requue
be as to-column connection. Testing carried out as part f the SAC program (FEMA,
2000a) indicated that the braeing provided by ty ical composite floor slabs is
braem!~~ ~~e;:~mn in~lastic
. t lateral-torsional buckling for cases w ere It canno -
will not hinge. Studies utilizing analyses (Gupta adequate to avoid excessive strength deterioratio up to the required interstory
sure'iv ·nkl 1999· Bondy 1996) have shown that, m severe e~quakes, drift angle of 0.04 radian. As such, the FEMA rec rnmendations do not require
and aWl er,
Plastic '.
hinging can oceur m
~e
columns even when this ratio is sigmficantly
bl t ff the placement of supplementallateral braeing at lastic hinge locations adja-
cent to column connections for beams with compo ite floor construetion. These
larger than 1.25. The .rev~se . Iffil
. d r · t of 2 O was selected as a reasona e cu -o
. eater than 2.0 only occurs in the provisions allow the placement of lateral braces to be consistent with the tested
beeause eolumn p!astIc ~mgI:~~r ~u=t!t of the revisions to this seetion is connections that are used to justify the designo For onditions where drifts larger
case of extremely arge s o r y . fl th than to force the use
to encourage appropriate bracing of column anges ra er than the anticipated 0.04 radians are anticipated r improved perfonnance is
of much heavier eolumns. desired, the designer may decide to provide additio al lateral bracing near these
plastic hinges. If lateral braces are provided, they hould provide an availabte
C9.7b. Unbraced Connecti~ns . h in two-story frames, at strength of 6 percent of the expected capacity of e beam flange at the plastic
Unbraced eonneetions occur m speclal cases, .sue aS When sueh con- hinge location. If a reduced beam section connecti n detail is used, the reduced
. al fl or in atriums and similar arehltectural spaces. flange width may be considered in calculation of th bracing force. Placement of
meehanle oors. b cklin at the conneetion should
neetions oceur, the poten~a~ for out-~f-Pl~e th: COlu!ms to limit the likelihood bracing connections should consider the requireme ts of Section 9.2d.
be minimized. Three provISlons are glven or C9.9
of column buckling.
Column Splices
In the 1997 Seismic Provisions, there were no spec· requirements for column
C9.S. Lateral Bracing of Beam~ .
ecified not to exeeed splices in SMF systerns other than those in Section 8 3. Section 8.3 was intended
Spacing of lateral b~ac~s ~or beru;:.s ~n ~~;~:g:~ I~~~ previous editions, to take care of column bending at the splice by teq ·ring splices to be at least
y 4 ft (1.2 m) or one-half the column clear height fro the beam-to-column con-
0.086ryEIF . This liffiltatIon, w .Ie t. IS f lateral bracing requirements from
. . ally based on an eXaffilna Ion o nection. This requirement was based on the gener recognition that in elastic
was ongm l . d· and based on limited experimental data on beams analyses of moment frames the columns are typical bent in double curvature
early work on p astIc eSlgn . e uirements for SMF beams have
subjeet to cyclic loading. Lateral bracmg r q . K d Liu (2002) with an inflection point somewhere rtear the middle of the column height, and
.
sinee been investIgate dm. greater detail in Nakashlma, anao. anf O086r ElF . therefore, little bending of the column was expected t the splice.
This study indicates that a beam lateral su~port s~acmg o .ft an Y of
. appropna
IS . te, and slightly eonservative, to aehleve an mterstory dri gle Nonlinear analyses performed during the FEMAlS C project following the
0.04 radian. Northridge Earthquake, clearly demonstrated that be ding moments in the mid-
height of columns can be subs~antial and that, in fact the coluinns may be bent
For caleulating bracing strength aceordmg . to EJ~~I
fon A-6-7
tions of the an
have Specifica-
implicit in single eurvature under sorne conditions. Given thi fact, and the recognition
ti the use of Cd = 1 is justified because the equa . of the potential for severe damage or even collapse due to failure of column
on, . that the beams will be subjected to top flange loading. One see e~.
as~umptIon
splices, the need for special provisions for splices o moment frame columns
. th 1999 LRFD Specification for Structural Steel Buzldmgs was apparent.
this by comparmg e C tary Equation C-C3-4b,
(AISC 2000a) Equation C3-9 to the 1999 ommen. . f
where' the Specificatio~ e~uation is b:sed: :
Cr = 2. In the case of selSffile frames, w ere
~o:::::a:::tr:~:c:r~~: :e The provisions of Section 9.9 are intended to assur that the expected flex-
ural strength of the smaller column is fully develop d, either through use of
complete-joint-penetration groove welds or another onnection that provides
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005,~ncl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, inc . Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, c.
AMERICAN ms11TUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc.
----_. _._---~-
~---~-_._-_.~------~~---------- .. _.. __ .. _._-_ .. _._ .. _--_ ...•.. _...... -
6.1-168 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Comm. C9. Comm. CIO.] PART 1 - INTERMEDIATE MOMENT 6.1-169
similar strength, and that the shear strength of the splice is sufficient to resist the
C10.2. Beam-to-Column Connections
shear developed when Mpc occurs at each end of the spliced column.
The minimum interstory drift angle required for connections is 0.02 radian
The exception permits the design of splices based on appropriate inelastic analy- while that for SMF connections is 0.04 radian. level of interstory drift angle
sis to determine required strength, coupled with the use of principIes of fracture has been established for this type of frame on engineering judgment
mechanics to determine the available strength of the connection. applied to available tests and analytical studies, primarily those included in
FEMA (2000d) and FEMA (2000f).
C10. INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (IMF)
One connection commonly used in the IMF, has welded unreinforced
The intermediate momentframes (IMF) and ordinary momentframes (OMF) are
flanges and a bolted web, is the fully restrained seismic moment connection
considered to be lower ductility systems as compared to special moment frames.
referred to as WUF-B (welded unreinforced bolted web).
Consequently, building codes assign lower response modification and deflec-
tion amplification factors to these systems. Both systems are intended primarily The WUF-B connection is defined in FEMA 350, 3.5.1 (FEMA, 2000a),
for use in buildings classified in lower seismic design categories and heights which specifies all the details for flange welding, access holes and for the
(FEMA, 2003). Sections ClO.1, Scope, and CI1.1, Scope, summarize typical bolted shear tab for connection to the beam web. It very similar to the WUF-W
seismic design categories and height applications anticipated by these Provi- (welded unreinforced flange-welded web) cmmectjí()n specified in FEMA 350,
sions, though the decision to use these systems on any specific building should Section 3.5.2, except that the beam web is bolted welded) to the shear tah.
be made considering the applicable building code and performance expectations
For design of the bolts to the beam web, high strength bolts are uti-
for that building.
lized. However, the capacity of the high strength is based on bearing bolt
The IMF is based on a tested connection design with a qualifying interstory drift capacity using a resistance factor of 1.0. These strength bolts are sized to
angle of 0.02 radian, which is half that required for the SMF. The OMF is based resist the maximum shear that is developed in the when yielding occurs at
on a prescriptive design procedure with no specific rotation angle requirements, both ends of the beam under seismic loads plus tributary gravity loads.
but it may be assumed that these connections should be capable of withstanding
Based upon FEMA 350, the WUF-B connection not perform as well as the
an interstory drift angle of up to about 0.01 radians and should remain mostly
WUF-W connection, and it was not always of sustaining interstory drift
elastic. It is assumed that these limited connection rotations will be achieved by
angles as large as 0.04 radian. This was due to transferring sorne
use oflarger frame members owing to the lower R and Cd values used in designo
shear load from the beam web to the beam flanges by slight slippage of
However, these lower values may not reliably ensure that the resulting frames
the boIts to the shear plateo
will not experience excessive rotation unless reduced drift limits are used. The
designer may wish to consider this issue in the designo Because of the aboye, FEMA 350 prequalified this B connection only for
ordinary moment frames and not special moment Based on recentrevi-
Cornmentary Section C9 for special moment frames offers additional commen-
sions of types of seismic moment connections as by these Provisions
tary relevant to IMF and OMF connections.
(see CI0.l), this connection would now meet the re~luiJ:eIIlents and be prequali-
The statement, "No additional requirements beyond the Specification." which fied for intermediate moment frames, but not for
appears in Sections 10.3, 10.6, 10.7, 11.3, 11.4, and 11.7 indicates that the Pro-
visions require no limitations or provisions beyond what is in the Specification
C10.2b. Conformance Demonstration
Conformance demonstration of IMF connections .
(AISC, 2005) on that particular topic.
nections, except that the required interstory drift is smaller. Refer to Com-
C10.1. Scope mentary Section C9.2b.
The intermediate moment frame (IMF) currently specified is essentially the same
C10.2d. Protected Zone
as the ordinary moment frame (OMF) system defined in the 1997 Seismic Provi-
The requirements in this section are identical to
sions. This new IMF is intended to provide limited levels of inelastic rotation ca-
pability and is based on tested designs. Due to the limited rotational capacity of
IMF as compared to SMF, SEIIASCE 7 (AS CE, 2002) places significant height
C10.4. Beam and Column Limitations
and other limitations on their use. C10.4a. Width-Thickness Limitations
Because the rotational demands on IMF beams columns are expected to be
lower than for SMF, the width-thickness lImlltaltlOIlSI for IMF refer to Table B4.1
of the Specification. See Section C9.4 for further c:1J.~cus:slOn.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, 1Nc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N,
C10.4b. Beam Flanges This system is not anticipated to be as sm;cedtible to column failures as a K-
The requirements in this section are identical to thos.e in Section 9.4b. type braced frame since ,the column is for the moments resulting from
C10.5. Continuity Plates forces from the knee bracees). For columns knee bracing on opposite sides,
consideration should be given to column if the knee brace on one side
The requirements in tbis section are identical to those in Section 9.5. See Section were to fail.
C9.5 for further discussion.
Although not required per Section 11, sorne
C10.8. Lateral Bracing of Beams that would be expected
to improve performance of knee-brace frames
designing beams to span
The requirement for spacing of lateral bracing in this section is les s severe than between columns under fuIl gravity loads
benefit of the knee braces,
that in Section 9.8 because of the lower required drift angle for IMF as compared design of strong column/weak beam frames
use of compact shapes for all
to SMP. In this case, the required spacing of bracing is roughly double that for frame members, and the design of braces for '1 percent of forces per the aboye
SMP. See Section C9.8 for further discussion on lateral bracing ofbeams. design method. .
rewelding with a reinforcing fillet weld; (3) the use of a welded web connection; A welded beam-to-column moment connection a strong-axis configuration
(4) the use of continuity plates; and (5) the use of the weld access hole detail similar to one tested at Lehigh University for SAC Project is illustrated in
as described below. Where the top flange steel backing is left in place, the steel Figure C-I-ll.l. FEMA 35,0 (FEMA, 2000a) rec~mmeJnds this detail for use in
backing is welded to the flange with a continuous fillet. (See Figure C-I-ll.l.) OMF with similar member sizes and other COIldIttons.
The prescribed weld access hole is shown in Figure 11-1 and in FEMA 350 Cyelic testing has shown that use of weld holes can cause premature
(FEMA, 2000a). The requirement to use this weld access hole configuration is fracture of the beam flange at end-plate moment c<!>Ime:ctI~Dns (Meng and Murray,
not stipulated for SMF nor IMF connections since the approved joints are based 1997). Short to long weld access holes were . with similar results.
on testing. Therefore, weld access holes are not for end-plate moment
The steel backing should not be welded to the underside of the beam flange. connections.
Discussion of the connection detailing is provided in FEMA documents 350 and For information on bolted moment end-plate COIm~Ctl4:ms in seismic applications,
353 (FEMA, 2000a; FEMA, 2000b).
refer to Murray and Shoemaker (2002) and 355D (FEMA, 2000e).
FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a) did not prequalify welded connections of beams to
C11.2b. Requirements: PR Moment Con
the weak axis of columns due to lack of sufficient test data. Designs ineluding
Section 11.2b gives strength requirements for
moment connections to the weak axis of columns should take into consideration
provide complete prescriptive design re~IUII·emlenl~s.
the fOllowing detailing recommendations. The bottom flange continuity plate
PR connections, the reader is referred to Leon (1
should be thicker than the beam flange and set lower than the theoretical un-
Ammerman (1990); Leon and Forcier (1992); Bj Colson and Brozzet-
derside of beam to facilitate beam depth tolerance. The continuity plates should
ti(1990); Hsieh and Deierlein (1991); Leon, ......v,ufU<OU' and Staeger (1996); and
project a minimum of 3 in. (75 mm) beyond the column flange and be tapered
FEMA 355D (FEMA, 2000e).
to the width of the beam flange. Continuity plates should be provided on the far
side of the column web. The bottom flange steel backing should be removed, C11.5. Continuity Plates
and a weld transition made to the thickened continuity plateo The steel backing This section requires continuity plates for OMF cOlJrme~ctIlons when the thickness
may remain at the top flange. See LRFD Manual of Steel Construction (AISC, of the column flange to wqich the beam, or
200Ia), Driscoll and Beedle, (1982), and Gilton and Uang (2002) for informa- welded does not meet the requirements of the
tion on fully rigid connections to the column weak axis. formulas was given in the 1992 Seismic rn)vl~,i01t.st
Among the many requirements promulgated for frames immediately
after the Northridge Earthquake of 1994 ~as a req¡ujI.rement that continuity plates
be provided in all moment frame connections employ welded flanges or
welded flange plates. Finite element analyses by El-Tawil and Kun-
nath, and experimental studies by Rieles, as part of the FEMNSAC
program (see FEMA 355D), showed that when the flange met the condi-
tions in the formulas, there was negligible "dlm~rel[}qe in the beam flange stresses
Welded Web at the connection whether ornot continuity plates provided.
The Provisions require that SMF and IMF use plates to match those in
the required tested connections. FEMA 350 use of the same formu-
las given in this section for SMF and IMFfor use the prequalified connec-
tions ineluded therein. In other words, continuity would not be required
with the prequalified connec1ions, even if the tests which they were based
use them, if the conditions of the formulas were
The thicknesses of the continuity plates as required are consistent with the
Fig. C-I-ll.l Schematic illustration of strong-axis moment connection: results of the FEMNSAC sttidies cited aboye.
directly welded. See Kaufmann, Xue, Lu and Fisher (1996).
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONS1RUCTION, mc.
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
'.t..,
6.1-174 PART 1 - SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES [Comm. C12.
Cornm. C12.] PART 1 - SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES 6.1-175
Special Segment
80 ~--------------~------~------~--------P-----~ I•Elastic l. Inelastic. I . Elastic. I
Fig. C-I-12.2. Intended yield mechanism of STM
diagonal web members in special segmento
40 ......................................~ .....................................,··..·······....···1....·········....·
"Ü)'
o.
~ 70
~
(ti
o o .-..
-J
'"c.
e....
QJ
~
111
35
U
j ~
¡¡;¡ -35
f-o
<
..J
-10 L _ _-L_ _ _.L...._ _--L_-t_...
-5.0 -2.5 O 2.5 5.0
-6.0 -4.0 -2.0 0.0 2.0 4.0 8.0
Lateral Displacement (in) LATER.AL DlSPLACSMENT (in.)
Because STMF are relatively new and unique, the span length and depth of the Equation 12-1 was formulated without the contribution from any
truss girders are limited at this time to the range used in the test programo intermediate vertical members within the segment, in other words, other
than those at the ends of!pe special segment. In cases where those intermediate
C12.2. Special Segment vertical members possess :significant flexural their contribution should
It is desirable to locate the STMF special segment near mid-span of the truss
also be included in ca1culating the value of Vne •
girder because shear due to gravity loads is generally lower in that region. The
lower limit on special segment length of 10 percent of the truss span length C12.5. Width-Thickness Limitations
provides a reasonable limit on the ductility demand, while the upper limit of 50 The ductility demand on diagonal web in the special segment can be
percent of the truss span length represents more of a practicallimit. rather large. FIat bars are suggested at this time because of their high ductility.
The required strength of interconnection for X-diagonals is intended to account Tests (Itani and Goel, 1991) have shown that angles with width-thickness
for buckling over half the full diagonallength (El-Tayem and Goel, 1986; Goel ratios that are less than 0.18~E/Fy also adequate ductility for use as
and Itani, 1994b). It is recornmended that half the full diagonal length be used web members in an X configuration. Chord in the special segment
in calculating the design compression strength of the interconnected X-diagonal are required to be compact cross-sections to the formation of plastic
hinges.
members in the special segment.
Because it is intended that the yield mechanism in the special segment form over C12.6. Lateral Bracing
its fulllength, no major structuralloads should be applied within the length of the .The top and bottom chords are required to be braced to provide for the
special segment. In special segments with open Vierendeel panels, in other words, stability of the special segment during cyclic . The lateral bracing limit
when no diagonal web members are used, any structuralloads should be avoid- for flexural members, Lp, as specified in the Sp~e<t~tiC(lticm has been found to be
ed. Accordingly, a restrictive upper limit is placed on the axial load in diagonal adequate for this purpose.
web members due to gravity loads applied directly within the special segment.
C13. SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLV BR FRAMES
C12.3. Strength of Special Segment Members (SCBF)
STMF are intended to dissipate energy through flexural yielding of the chord
members and axial yielding and buckling of the diagonal web members in the C13.1. Scope
special segment. It is desirable to provide minimum shear strength in the special Concentrically braced frames are those braced
segment through flexural yielding of the chord members and to limit the axial of members that meet at a joint intersect at a point form a vertical truss system
load to a maximum value. Plastic analysis can be used to determine the required that resists lateralloads. A few cornmon types ofcqrlCeltltrically braced frames are
shear strength of the truss special segments under the factored earthquake load shown in Figure C-I-13.1, including diagonally cross-braced (X), and
combination. V-braced (or inverted-V-braced). Use of bracing in any configura-
tion is not permitted for SCBE Because of their concentrically braced
C12.4. Strength of Non-Special Segment Members frames provide complete truss action with subjected primarily to axial
STMF are required to be designed to maintain elastic behavior of the truss mem- loads in the elastic range. However, during a to severe earthquake,
bers, columns, and all connections, except for the members of the special seg-
ment that are involved in the formation of the yield mechanism. Therefore, all
members and connections outside the special segments are to be designed for
ca1culated loads by applying the combination of gravity loads and equivalent
lateral loads that are necessary to develop the maximum expected nominal
shear strength of the special segment, Vne, in its fully yielded and strain-hard-
ened state. Thus, Equation 12-1, as formulated, accounts for uncertainties in
the actual yield strength of steel and the effects of strain hardening of yield-
ed web members and hinged chord members. It is based upon approximate
V-Bracing Inverted Diagonal
analysis and test results of special truss girder assemblies that were subjected X-Bracing
V-Bracing Bracing
to story drifts up to 3 percent (Basha and Goel, 1994). Tests (Jain, Goel and
Hanson, 1978) on axially loaded members have shown that 0.3Pnc is repre- Fig. C-I-13.1. Examples 'of concentric bracing cq¡¡¡!iJ<¡Urati01ls.
sentative of the average nominal post-buckling strength under cyclic loading.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mai:eh 9, 2005 inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-178 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. Cl3. Comm, Cl3.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY
6.1-179
the bracing members and their connections are expected to undergo significant braces can sustain large inelastic cyc1ic dejOonnal:iOIls without experiencing pre-
inelastic deformations into the post-buckling range. mature failures.
Since the initial adoption of concentrically braced frames into seismic design Analytical studies (Tang and Goel, 1987; and Goel, 1991) on bracing
codes, more emphasis has been placed on increasing brace strength and stiffness, systems designed in strict accordance with code requirements for con-
primarily through the use of higher design loads in order to minimize inelastic centrically braced frames predicted brace without the development of
demando More recently, requirements for ductility and energy dissipation capa- significant energy dissipation. Failures occurred often at plastic hinges (lo-
bility have also been added. Accordingly, :provisions for special concentrically cal buckling due to lack of compactness) or in connections. Plastic hinges
braced fr4mes (SCBF) were developed to exhibit stable and ductile behavior in normally Occur at the ends of abrace and at the midspan. Analytical mod-
the event of a major earthquake. Earlier design provisions have been retained for els of bracing systems that were designed to stable ductile behavior when
ordinary concentrically bracedframes (OCBF) in Section 14. subjected to the same ground motion records the previous concentrically
During asevere earthquake, bracing members in a concentrically braced frame braced frame designs exhibited full and stable h,j,o~""~,,,";'" without fracture. Simi-
are subjected to large deformations in cyc1ic tension and compression into the lar results were observed ,in full-scale tests in and Krawinkler (1985)
post-buckling range. As a result, reversed cyc1ic rotations occur at plastic hinges and Tang and Goel (1989).
in much the same way as they do in beams and columns in moment frames. In For double-angle and double-channel braces, stitch spacing, in addition
fact, braces in a typical concentrically braced frame can be expected to yield and to more stringent compactness criteria, is to achieve improved ductility
buckle at rather moderate story drifts of about 0.3 percent to 0.5 percent. In a and energy dissipation. This is especially for double-angle and double-
severe earthquake, the braces could undergo post-buckling axial deformations channel braces that buckle imposing large shear forces on the stitches. Studies
lOto 20 times their yield deformation. In order to survive such large cyc1ic de- also showed that placement of double angles a toe-to-toe configuration re-
formations without premature failure the bracing members and their connections duces bending strains and local buckling (Aslani Goel, 1991).
must be properly detailed.
Many of m.e failures reported in concentrically braced frames due to strong
Damage during past earthquakes and that observed in laboratory tests of concen- ground motIOns have been in the connections. , cyc1ic testing of speci-
trically braced frames has generally resulted from the limited ductility and corre- mens designed and detailed in accordance with provisions for concentri-
sponding brittle failures, which are usually manifested in the fracture of connec- cally braced frames has produced connection (Astaneh-AsI, Goel and
tion elements or bracing members. The lack of compactness in braces results in Hanson, 1986). Although typical design practice been to design connections
severe local buckling, resulting in a high concentration of flexural strains at these only for axialloads, good post-buckling response that eccentricities be
locations and reduced ductility. Braces in concentrically braced frames are sub- accounted for in the connection design, which be based upon the maxi-
ject to severe local buckling, with diminished effectiveness in the nonlinear range mum loads the connection may be required to Good connection perfor-
at low story drifts. Large story drifts that result from early brace fractures can im- mance can be expected if the effects of brace cyc1ic post-buckling be-
pose excessive ductility demands on the beams and columns, or their connections. havior are considered.
Research has demonstrated that concentrically braced frames, with proper con- For brace buckling in the plane of the gusset the end connections should
figuration, member design and detailing can possess ductility far in excess of be designed for the full axial load and flexural of the brace (Astaneh-AsI
that previously ascribed to such systems. Extensive analytical and experimental and others, 1986). Note that a realistic value of K be used to represent the
work by Goel and others has shown that improved design parameters, such as connection fixity.
limiting width/thickness ratios (to minimize local buckling), c10ser spacing of
stitches, and special design and detailing of end con:q.ections greatly improve For brace buckling out of the plane of single
the post-buckling behavior of concentrically braced frames (Goel, 1992b; Goel, in the gusset is induced by, member end rotati(m~.
1992c). The design requirements for SCBF are based on those developments. conditions with plastic hing~s at midspan in
the gusset plateo Satisfactory performance can be
Previous requirements for concentrically braced frames sought reliable behavior plate to develop restraint-free plastic rotaÚons.
by limiting global buckling. Cyclic testing of diagonal bracing systems verifies between the end of the brace and the assumed
that energy can be dissipated after the onset of global buckling if brittle failures sufficiently long to pennit plastic rotations, yet
due to local buckling, stability problems and connection fractures are prevented. currence of plate buckling prior to member bu<~kli!Ih!.
When properly detailed for ductility as prescribed in the Provisions, diagonal plate thickness is recommended (Astaneh-AsI and
free distance is measured from the end of the brace
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005 incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERIcAN lNSTITIJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMEruCAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-180 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. e13. Cornrn.C13.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY
6.1-181
to the brace centerline, drawn from the point on the gusset pIate nearest to the
Since the stringent design and detailing recluí~leIIilents for SCBF are expected
brace end that is constrained from out-of-plane rotation. See Figure C-I-13.2.
to produce more reliable performance when to high energy demands
Altematively, connections with stiffness in two directions, suc~ as. cross gusset
imposed by severe earthquakes, model codes have reduced the design
plates, can be detailed. Test results indicate that forc~ng the plasllc hmg~ t~ oc~ur load level below that required for OCBE
in the brace rather than the connection plate results m greater energy dlsslpatlOn
capacity (Lee and Ooel, 1987). Bracing connections should not be configured . such a way that beams or col-
umns of the frame are interrupted to allow for continuous brace element. This
provision is necessary to irnprove the out-of stability of the bracing system
at those connections.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Stee{ Buildings, Mareh 9,
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSlRUCTION, mc. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-182 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm.C13. Comm.C13.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY 6.1-183
ASTM A53 or A500 braces [for example, pipe braces or square, rectangular or leading to fracture may represent a limitation the performance (Yang and
round hollow structural sections (HSS) braces], where the over-slot of the brace Mahin, 2005).
required for erection leaves a reduced section. If this section is left unreinforced,
net section fracture will be the governing limit state and brace ductility may be The same limitations appIy to coIumns in as their flexural strength and
significantly reduced (Korol, 1996; Cheng, Kulak and Khoo, 1998). Reinforce- rotation capacity, and has been shówn to be a SlgljnDlCaJl1t contributor to the stabil-
ment may be provided in the form of steeI pIates weIded to the tube, increasing ity of SCBF (Tremblay, 2001, 2003). It has been demonstrated that SCBF
the effective area at the reduced brace section (Yang and Mahin, 2005). Braces can be subject to significant interstory drift (S Mahin and Chang, 2003),
with two continuous weIds to the gusset wrapped around its edge (instead requiring columns to undergo inelastic rotation.
. of the more typicaI detaiI with four welds stopping short of the gusset edge)
Enhanced ductility and fracture life of re(:taIlg~llar hollow structural sections
performed adequateIy in the tests by Cheng. However, this practice may be (HSS) bracing members can ~e achieved in a of ways. The tube walls
difficult to implement in fieId conditions; it also creates a potential stress riser can be stiffened by using longitudinal stiffeners, as rib plates or small angle
that may lead to crack initiation. sections in a hat configuration (Liu and Goel, 19 . Use of plain concrete infill
Where there is no reduction in the section, or where the section is reinforced so has been found to be quite effective in the severity of local buckling
that the effective net section is at least as great as the brace gross section, this in the post-buckling range of the member (Liu Goel, 1988; Lee and Goel,
requirement does not apply. The purpose of the requirement is to prevent net 1987). Based on their test results, Goel and (1992) formulated an empiri-
section fracture prior to significant ductility; having no reduction in the section cal equation to determinethe effective ratio of concrete-filled
is deemed sufficient to ensure this behavior. Reinforcement, if present, should rectangular tubular bracing members. The width-thickness ratio can be
be connected to the brace in a manner that is consistent with the assumed state of calculated by multiplying fue actual width- ratio by a factor, [(0.0082
stress in the designo It is recornmended that the connection of the reinforcement x KLlr) + 0.264], for KLlr between 35 and 90, r being the effective slender-
to the brace be designed for the strength of the reinforcement on either side of ness ratio of the member. The purpose of in:q.ll as described herein is to
the reduced section. inhibit the detrimental effects of local buckling tube walls. Use of concrete
to achieve composite action of braces is covered p~ 11, Section 13.4.
C13.2c. Lateral Force Distribution
This provision attempts to balance the tensile and compressive resistance across As an alternative to using~ a single large HSS, may be given to
the width and breadth of the building since the buckling and post-buckling using double smaller tube sections stitched and connected at the ends
strength of the bracing members in compression can be substantially les s than to a single gusset plate (or cross shape if in much the same way as
that in tension. Good balance helps prevent the accumulation of inelastic drifts double angle or channel sections are uséd in a . to-back configuration (Lee
in one direction. An exception is provided for cases where the bracing members and Goel, 1990). Such double tube sections a number of advantages,
are sufficiently oversized to provide essentially elastic response. including reduced fit-up problems, smaller ratio for the same
overall width of the section, in-plane buckling most cases eliminating the
C13.2d. Width-Thickness Limitations problem of out-of-plane bending of gusset greater energy dlssipation as
Traditionally, braces have shown little orno ductility after overall (member) buck- three plastic hinges form in the member, and strength because of effec-
ling, which produces a plastic hinge at the brace midpoint. At this plastic hinge, tive length factor, K, being'close to 0.5 as to K=l.O when out-of-plane
local buckling can cause large strains,leading to fracture at low drifts. It has buckling occurs in a single ,tube and single gusset plate member.
been found that braces with compact elements are capable of achieving signifi-
cantIy more ductility by forestalling local buckling (Goel, 1992b; Hassan and
C13.2e. Built-up Members
Goel, 1991; Tang and Goel, 1989). Width-thickness ratios of compression ele- Closer spacing of stitches and higher stitch s
for built-up bracing members in SCBF (Aslani
ments in bracing members have been set to be at or below the requirements for
compact sections in order to minimize the detrimental effects of local buckling 1990) than those required for OCBF. These are to restrict individual
and subsequent fracture during repeated inelastic cycles. element bending between the stitch points and premature fracture of
bracing members. Wider spacing is permitted an exception when buckling
Tests have shown fracture due to local buckling is especially prevalent in rectan- does not cause shear in the stitches. Bolted are not permitted within the
gular HSS with width-thickness ratios larger than the prescribed limits (Hassan middle one-fourth of the clear brace length as the presence of boh holes in that
and Goel, 1991; Tang and Goel, 1989). Even for square HSS braces designed region may cause premature fractures due to the of a plastic hinge in
to meet the seismic width-thickness ratios of these Provisions, local buckling the post-buckling range.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, , inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN mSTITIITE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, lNc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL COiNsTRucnO:NJ me.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, , incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERrCAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Ne. AMERICAN !Ns'I1TÜTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:uCT'ION, !Nc.
6.1-186 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Cornm.C13. Cornm. C13.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY 6.1-187
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. Mareh 9. 2005. inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. Mareh 9. 2005 inel. Supp1ement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON. lNc. AMERICAN lNsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON.
6.1-188 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Cornm.C13. Cornm. C14.] PART 1 - ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRAC D FRAMES
6.1-189
Figures C-I-13.6 and C-I-13.7 show the protected zone of an inverted-V and an X-
braced frame, respectively. Note that for the X-braced frame, the half-Iength of the Additionally, it is assumed that the applicable bui! 'ng code specifies a value of
brace is used and a plastic hinge is anticipated at any of the brace quarter points. the R factor much lower than that ineluded in the 02 edition of SEI/ASCE 7,
corresponding to changes made in the load combi ations specified for bracing
C14. OROINARV CONCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAMES members and connections in these pIOvisions. Pre ious versions of the Provi-
sions have required that the members of OCBF b designed for the amplified
(OCBF)
seismic load, effectively reducing the R factor by 50 percent. To make the design
C14.1. Scope of OCBF consistent with other systems, this require ent has been dropped from
The Provisions as sume that the applicable building code significantly restricts the Provisions, but a comrnensurate reduction in th R factor for these systems
the perrnitted use of OCBF because of their limited ductility. Specifically, it is is being made in Supplement Number 1 to the 2 5 edition of SEI/AS CE 7.
assumed that the restrictions given in SEI/ASCE 7 (AS CE, 2002) govern the use The required strength of the members of OCBF w' 1 now be deterrnined using
of the structural system. SEI/ASCE 7 effectively restricts the use of OCBF as the loading combinations stipulated by the applic ble building code (and the
described in Comrnentary Section CI4.2. reduced R factors prescribed in SEI/ASCE 7), wi out the application of the
amplified seismic load.
Although sorne building codes perrnit the use of O BF beyond the limitations
on height and response reduction factor, R, in SEI/A CE 7, such designs are not
expected to pro vide reliable seismic performance. 1 is recomrnended that con-
centrically braced frames that exceed the OCBF hei ht limit in SEI/ASCE 7, or
that use a response reduction factor R greater than p .tted by that standard, be
designed and detailed in conformance with the requi ements for SCBE
Previous versions of the Provisions required that co ections of OCBFs be de-
signed for the expected brace strength. This had the u .ntended consequence that
comrnercially available rod elevises were not able to atch the required strength
of the threaded rod bracing, unless upset IOds were sed. It is expected that in a
normal IOd (not upset) and elevis system, inelastic de ands will be limited to the
threaded portion of the IOd.
Fig. C-I-13.6. Protected zone ofinverted-V bracedframe. The scope has been modified to inelude the follow' g: "OCBF aboye the iso-
lation system in seismically isolated structures shal meet the requirements of
Sections 14.4 and 14.5 and need not meet the req irements of Sections 14.2
and 14.3." The pIOvisions in Section 14.5 are inten d for use in the design of
OCBFs for which forces havebeen deterrnined using n isolated response reduc-
tion factor, R¡, equal to 1.0. Such OCBFs are expecte to remain essentially elas-
tic during design level earthquakes and, therefore, pr isions that are intended to
accornrnodate significant inelastic response are not r quired for their designo
C14.2. Bracing Members
Bracing members in OCBF are expected tQ undergo imited buckling under se-
vere ground motions. They are therefore required to e seismically compact in
order to limit local buckling and fracture.
In V-, inverted-V-, and K-braced frames, slender bra es are not perrnitted. This
restriction is intended to limit the únbalance forces th develop in frarning mem-
bers after brace buckling; see ISection C13.4.
Hg. C-I-13.7. Protected zone ofX-bracedframe.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NslITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, in 1. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, me
[Comm. C14. COffiffi. C15.] PARTI-ECCEMTIUCALLYBRACED 6.1-191
6.1-190 PART 1 - ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES
It can be shown with plastic frame analyses that, in sorne cases, an inactive link These provisions are prirnarily intended to cover
will yield under the cornbined effect of dead, live and earthquake loads, thereby link is a horizontal framing rnernber located the column and abrace or
reducing the frame strength below that expected (Kasai and Popov, 1984). Fur- between two braces. For the inverted Y-braced configuration shown in Fig-
thermore, because inactive links are required to be detailed and constructed as ure C-I-15.1(d), the link is attached underneath beam. If this configur~tion is
if they were active, and because a predictably inactive link could otherwise be to be used, lateral bracing should be provided at intersection of the diagonal
designed as a pin, the cost of construction is needlessly increased. Thus, an EBF braces and the vertical link, unless calculations provided to justify the design
configuration that ensures that alllink:s will be active, such as those illustrated in without such bracing.
Figure C-I-15.1, are recornmended. Further recornmendations for the design of Columns in EBF should be designed following design principIes so that
EBF are available (Popov and others, 1989). the full strength and deformation capacity of the can be developed without
failure of any individual coltImn and without the to~m~ltlOln of a soft story. Plastic
b a
hinge formation in columns should be avoided when cornbined with
hinge formation in the links, it can resul,t in the of a soft story. The
d e d requirernents of Sections 8.3 and 15.8 address designo
a
C15.2. Links
Inelastic action in EBF is intended to occur nri·m<t,rlil" within the links. The gen-
d eral provisions in this section are intended to that stable inelasticity can
a occur in the link.
d d
a a
a
d d
b
(e) (d)
a =Link·
b = beam segment outside of Link
e =diagonal brace
d =column <\>v.. -link a (active link) < <\>Yn -link b
Seismic ProvisionsforStructural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl10N, lNe. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl10N,
6.1-194 PARTI-ECCENTIUCALLYBRACEDFRAMES [Cornm. C15. Comm. C15.]
PART I - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED
6.1-195
The nominal shear strength of the link, V,¡, is the lesser of that determined from
the plastic shear strength of the link section or twice the plastic moment divided (e ~ 2.6Mp /Vp ). For links in the combined
( 1.6Mp/Vp < e < 2. 6M /v'p) , the limit· on II·nk and flexural yielding range
by the link length, as dictated by statics assuming equalization of end moments. p
. angle is deteimined
Accordingly, the nominal shear strength of the link can be computed as according to link length by linear interpolation 0.08 and 0.02 radian.
¡
follows: It has been demonstrated experimentally.
F Uang and Bertero, 1987;
outch, 1989) as well as analytically (Popov and 1989) that links in the
2Mp first floor usually undergo the largest inelasu·c aerc)fIIJtauon.
for e~--
p In extreme cases this
Vp may resuIt in a tendency to develop a soft story. plastic link rotations tend
V - V (CI5-1)
n - 2~p 2Mp to attenuate at higher floors, and decrease WI·th
Th
.
mcreasing frame periods.
for e>-- erefore for severe seismic applications, a C'oIGse:I!v.:tti,re
Vp the first two or three floors is recommended. -This design for the links in
.
the nunimum be achieved by increasing
available shear strengths of these
The effects ofaxialload on the link can be ignored if the required axial strength on the order of 10 percent
over that specified in Section 15.2.
on the link does not exceed 15 percent of the nominal yield strength of the link,
P y • In general, such an axial load is negligible because the horizontal component
of the brace load is transmitted to the beam segment outside of the link. However,
when the framing aiTangement is such that larger axial forces can develop in the
link, such as from drag struts or a modified EBF configuration, the additional
requirements in Section 15.2b apply and the available shear strength and link
lengths are required to be reduced to ensure stable inelastic behavior.
The link rotation angle can be estimated by assuming that the EBF bay will de-
form in a rigid-plastic mechanism as illustrated for various EBF configurations
in Figure C-1-15.3. In this figure, the link rotation angle is denoted by the symbol
e
"(p. The link rotation angle can be related to the plastic story drift angle, p, using
the relationships shown in the Figure C-I-15.3. The plastic story drift angle, in
turn, can be computed as the plastic story drift, !:!.p, divided by the story height,
h. The plastic story drift can conservatively be taken equal to the design story
drift· Altematively, the link rotation angle can be determined more accurately by
inelastic dynamic analyses.
L L
.1
The inelastic response of a link is strongly influenced by the length of the link
as related to the ratio Mp/Vp of the link cross-section. When the link length is L
selected not greater than 1.6Mp /Vp , shear yielding will dominate the inelastic Yp =-8
e P L
Y =-8
response. If the link length is selected greater than 2.6Mp/Vp,. flexural yielding P 2e p
will dominate the inelastic response. For link lengths intermediate between these L = bay width
values, the inelastic response will occur through sorne combination of shear h = story height
and flexural yielding. The inelastic deformation capacity of links is generally I1p : plas~e story ~ft (eonservatively, take I1p equal to design drift)
greatest for shear yielding links, and smallest for flexural yielding links. Based e p - ~IastIe st~ry drift angle, radians (= f1.. / h)
"(p = link rotatIan angle
on experimental evidence, the link rotation angle is limited to 0.08 radian for
shear yielding links (e ~ 1.6Mp /Vp ) and 0.02 radian for flexural yielding línks Fig. C-I-15.3. Link rotatíon ángle.
Seisniic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC. Seismic Provisions jor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, .
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, INC.
6.1-196 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Cornm. C15. Cornm. C15.] PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED
6.1-197
C15.3. Link Stiffeners simulates the forces and inelastic deformations ¡ex]Jected in an EBE Design-
A properly detailed and restrained link web can provide stable, ductile, and ers are cautioned that beam-to-column which qua1ify for use in an
predictable behavior under severe cydic loading. The design of the link requires SMF may not necessarily,perform adequately used as a link-to-column
dose attention to the detailing of the link web thickness and stiffeners. connection in an EBE Link-to-column must therefore be tested in
a manner that properly simulates the forces and deformations expected
Full-depth stiffeners are required at the ends of alllinks and serve to transfer the
in an EBE For example, the RBS connection has shown to perform well in
link shear forces to the reacting elements as well as restrain the link web against
buckling. SME However, the RBS is generally not suitable link-to-column connections
due to the high moment gradient in links. recent research (Okazaki,
The maximum spacing.of link intermediate web stiffeners in shear yielding links 2004; Okazaki, Engelhardt, Nakashima and 2004b) has demonstrated
(e ~ 1.6Mp lVp ) is dependent upon the size of the link rotation angle (Kasai and that other details that have shown good in moment frame beam-to-
Popov, 1986b) with a doser spacing required as the rotation angle increases. column connections (such as the WUF-W and free flange details) can show
Intermediate web stiffeners in shear yielding links are provided to delay the on- poor performance in EBF link-to-column cOlme:ctIlons
set of inelastic shear buckling of the web. Flexural yielding links having lengths
At the time of publication of these Provisions, de1i1pl~opInel!lt of satisfactory link-
greater than 2.6Mp lVp but less than 5MpIVp are required to have an intermediate
to-column connection details is the subject of research. Designers are
stiffener at a distance from the link end equal to 1.5 times the beam flange width
therefore advised to consult the research for the latest developments.
to limit strength degradation due to flange local buckling and lateral-torsional
Unal further research on link-to-column , it may be advantageous to
buckling. Links of a length that are between the shear and flexural limits are
avoid EBF configurations with links attached to ~Vf""'U.IU".
required to meet the stiffener r~quirements for both shear and flexural yielding
links. When the link length exceeds5Mp /Vp , link intermediate web stiffeners are The Provisions permit the use of link-to-column ctOlme:cti1ons without the need
not required. Link intermediate web stiffeners are required to extend full depth for qualification testing for shear yielding links the connection is rein-
in order to effectively resist shear buckling of the web and to effectively limit forced with haunches or other suitable designed to predude in-
strength degradation due to flange local buckling and lateral-torsional buckling. elastic action in the reinforced zone adjacent to the An example of such
Link intermediate web stiffeners are required on both sides of the web for links a connection is shown in Figure C-I-15.4. This region should remain
25 in. (635 mm) in depth or greater. For links that are less than 25 in. (635 mm) essentially elastic for the fully yielded and strain link strength as de-
deep, the stiffener need be on one side only. fined in Section 15.6 for the design of the diagonal That is, the reinforced
connection should be designed to resist the link and moment developed by
Alllink stiffeners are required to be fillet welded to the link web and flanges.
the expected shear strength of the link, Ry Vm . by 125 percent to account
Link stiffeners should be detailed to avoid welding in the k-area of the link.
for strain hardening. Alternatively, the EBF can configured to avoid link-to-
Recent research has indicated that stiffener-to-link web welds that extend into
column connections entirely.
the k-area ofthe link can generate link web fractures that may reduce the plastic
rotation capacity of the link (Okazaki and others, 2004a; Richards and others,
2004).
e
C15.4. Link-to-Column Connections -1
Prior to the 1994 Northridge Earthquake, link-to-column connections were typi-
cally constructed in a manner substantialIy similar to beam-to-column connec-
tions in SMF. Link-to-column connections in EBF are therefore likely to share
many of the same problems observed in moment frame connections. Conse-
quently, in a manner similar to beam-to-column connections in SMF, the Pro-
visions require that the performance of link-to-column connections be verified
by testing in accordance with Appendix S, or by the use of prequalified link-to-
column connections in accordance with Appendix P.
The load and deformation demands at a link-to-column connection in an EBF are
substantially different from those at a beam-to-column connection in an SMF.
Link-to-column connections must therefore be tested in a manner that properly
Fig. C-I-15.4. Example of a reinforced link-íQ-(:OtlAtrrt,n connection.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005,
AMERICAN !NSTIl'UTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, !Ne. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON,
6.1-198 PART 1 - ECCENfRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C15. Comm. C15.] PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED
6.1-199
The Provisions do not explicitly address the colurnn panel zone design require- The diagonal brace and beam segment outside the link must be designed
ments at link-to-colurnn connections. Based on limited research (Okazaki, 2004) for sorne reasonable estimate of the maximum that can be developed by
it is recornmended that the panel zone oflink-to-colurnn connections be designed the fully yielded and strain hardened link. For purpose, the nominal shear
in a manner similar to that for SMF beam-to-colurnn connections (Section 9.3) strength of the link, v,., as defined by Equation C 1 -1 is increased by two factors.
with the required shear strength of the panel zone determined from the link end First, the nominal shear strength is increased by to account for the possibility
moments given by the equations in Cornmentary Section C15.6. that the link material may have actual yield in excess of the specified
minimum value. Secondly, the resulting expected strength of the link, Ry v,.
C15.5. Lateral Bracing of Link is further increased to account for strain hrurdenirt.a in the link.
Lateral restraint against out-of-plane displacement and twist is required at the
ends of the link to ensure stable ine1astic behavior. This section specifies the Experiments have shown that links can exhibit a degree of strain harden-
required strength and stiffness oflink end lateral bracing. In typical applications, ing. Recent tests on roUed wide-flange links corl~truct(~d of ASTM A992 steel
a composite deck can likely be counted upon to provide adequate lateral bracing (Arce, 2002) showed strength increases due to hardening ranging from
at the top flange of the link. However, a composite deck alone cannot be counted 1.2 to 1.45, with an average value of about 1.30. tests on rolled wide-flange
on to provide adequate lateral bracing at the bottom flange of the link and direct links constructed of ASTM A36 steel have shown strength increases
bracing through transverse beams or a suitable alternative is recornmended. due to strain hardening in excess of 1.5 Popov, 1983; Engelhardt
and Popov, 1989a). Further, recent tests on very welded built-up wide-
C15.6. Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Links flange links for use in major bridge Structures strain hardening fac-
This section addresses design requirements for the diagonal brace and the beam
tors close to 2.0 (McDaniel, Uang and Seible, Dusicka and Itani, 2002).
segment outside of the link in EBE The intent of these provisions is to ensure These sections, however, typically have significantly different from
that yielding and energy dissipation in an EBF occur primarily in the links. Con- roUed shapes.
sequentIy, the diagonal brace and beam segment outside of the link must be
designed to resist the loads developed by the fully yielded and strain-hardened Past researchers have generally recornmended a of 1.5 (Popov and En-
link. That is, the brace and beam should be designed following capacity design gelhardt, 1988) to account for expected link and its strain hardening in
principIes to develop the full inelastic capacity ofthe links. Limited yielding out- the design of the diagonal brace and beam the link. However, for pur-
side of the links, particularly in the beams, is sometimes unavoidable in an EBE poses of designing the diagonal brace, these prC)Vü¡iOI1S have adopted a strength
Such yielding is likely not detrimental to the performance of the EBF, as long increase due to strain hardening oruy equal to 1.25. factor Was chosen to be
as the beam and brace have sufficient strength to develop the link's full inelastic les s than 1.5 for a number of reasons, including the of the Ry factor to account
strength and deformation capacity. for expected material strength in the link but not in brace, and the use of resis-
tance factors or safety factors when computing the of the braceo Further,
In most EBF configurations, the diagonal brace and the beam are subject to large this value is close to but somewhat below the strain hardening
axialloads combined with significant bending moments. ConsequentIy, both the factor for recent tests on rolled wide-flange links A992/A992M steel.
diagonal brace and the beám should be designed as beam-columns. Designers should recognize that strain hardening in may sometimes exceed
A diagonal brace in a concentrically braced frame is subject to cyclic buckling this value, and so a conservative design of the brace is appropriate. Fur-
and is the primary source of energy dissipation in such a frame. Many of the de- ther, if large built-up link sections are used with flanges and very short
sign provisions for OCBF and SCBF systems are intended to permit stable cyclic lengths (e < MplVp), designers should consider the of strain hardening
buckling behavior of the diagonal braces. A properly designed diagonal brace in factors substantially in excess of 1.25 (Richards,
an EBF, on the other hand, should not buckle, regardless of the intensity of the Based on the aboye, the required strength of the brace can be taken
earthquake ground motion. As long as the brace is designed to be stronger than as the forces developed by the following values link shear and link end
the link, as is the intent of these provisions, then the link will serve as a fuse to moment:
limit the maximum load transferred to the brace, thereby precluding the possi-
bility of brace buckling. ConsequentIy, many of the design provisions for braces For e $ 2Mp /Vp :
in OCBF and SCBF systems Íntended to permit stable cyclic buckling of braces Link shear = 1.25 Ry Vp
are not needed in EBE Similarly, the link also limits the loads transferred to the =
Link end moment e (1.25 Ry Vp )12
beam beyond the link, thereby precluding failure of this portion of the beam if it For e > 2Mp /Vp :
is stronger than the link. Link shear = 2(1.25 RyMp)/e
Link end moment = 1.25 RyMp
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005,
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, lNc. AMERICAN INsTlTUfE üF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON,
6.1-200 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C15. Comm. C15.]
PART 1 - ECCENTRlCALLY BRACED F s 6.1-201
The aboye equations as sume link end moments will equalize as the link yields
and deforms plasticalIy. For link lengths les s than 1.6Mp N p attached to columns, F~r most EBF configurati?~s, the beam and th link are a single continuous
link end moments do not fulIy equalize (Kasai and Popov, 1986a). For this situ- wI~e flange member. If thIS IS the case, the avail ble strength of the beam Can
ation, the link ultimate forces can be estimated as follows: ~e I~creased by Rr If the ~ilk an~ the be~ are e same member, any increase
m yIeld strength present m the lInk will also be resent in the beam
For links attached to columns with e S; 1.6 Mp/Vp: outside of the link. segment
Link shear = 1.25 RyVp
Link end moment at column =RyMp Design of the beam segment outside of the link c sometimes be problematic in
Link end moment at brace = [e(1.25 RyVp) - RyMp] ~ 0.75 RyMp EBE In .some cases, the beam segment outside of e link is inadequate to resist
the r~qUIred strength based on the.link ultimate for es. For such cases, increasing
The link shear force will generate axial force in the diagonal brace and, for most t?e SIze of ~e beam may not provIde a solution. Th s is because the beam and the
EBF configurations, will also generate substantial axial force in the beam seg- lmk are tYPIcally the same member. Increasing the
ment outside of the link. The ratio of beam or brace axial force to link shear the link size, which in tum increases the. link ulti ate forces and therefore in-
force is controlled primarily by the geometry of the EBF and is therefore not creases the beam required strength. The relaxati in beam required strength
affected by inelastic activity within the EBF (Engelhardt and Popov, 1989a). based on the 1.1 factor on link strength was adop ed by the Provisions largely
Consequently, this ratio can be determined from an elastic frame analysis and as a result of such problems reported by designer , and by the view that EBF
can be used to amplify the beam and brace axial forces to a level that corre- performance would not likely be degraded by such relaxation due to beneficial
sponds to the link shear force specified in the aboye equations. Further, as long effects of th~ floor slab and limited beam yielding as discussed aboye. Design
as the beam and brace are designed to remain essentially elastic, the distribution problems WIth the beam can also be minimized b using shear yielding links
of link end moment to the beam and brace can be estimated from an elastic frame (: S; 1.6. Mp/Vp) as opposed to longer links. The en moments for shear yielding
analysis. For example, if an elastic analysis of the EBF under lateral load shows lmks wIlI be smaller than for longer links, and co sequently less moment will
that 80 percent of the link end moment is resisted by the beam and the remaining be ~ansferr~d to the beam. Beam moments can be further reduced by locating
20 percent is resisted by the brace, the ultimate link end moments given by the the mtersectIOn of the brace and beam centerlines in ide of the link as d 'b d
bel P'd' d' , escn e
aboye equations can be distributed to the beam and brace in the same propor- o.w. rOVI m.g a Iagonal brac~ with a large flex al stiffness so that a l,arger
tions. Altematively, an inelastic frame analysis can be conducted for a more ac- portIon of the lInk end moment IS transferred to e brace and away from the
curate estimate of how link end moment is distributed to the beam and brace in beam ~an also substantially reduce beam momento 1 such cases, the brace !must
the inelastic range. be desIgned to .resist these larger moments. Further, the connection between the
As described aboye, these Provisions assume that as a link deforms to large brac~ and the lInk must be designed as a fully restr 'ned moment resisting con-
nectI?n. Test results on several brace connection de 'ls subject to axial load and
plastic rotations, the link expected shear strength will increase by a factor of 1.25
bendmg moment are reported in (Engelhardt and Po ov, 1989a).
due to strain hardening. However, for the design of the beam segment outside of
the link, the Provisions permit calculation of the beam required strength based A:~iding very shallow angles between the diagonal race and the beam can also
on link ultimate forces equal to only 1.1 times the link expected shear strength. mItIgate problems with beam designo As the angle
This relaxation on link ultimate forces for purposes of designing the beam seg- and the beam decreases, the axial load developed i the beam increases. Using
ment reflects the view that beam strength will be substantially enhanced by the angles between ~e ~iagonal brace and the beam of a least about 40 degrees will
presence of a composite floor slab, and also that limited yielding in the beam o.ften be beneficIal m reducing beam required axial trength. Problems with de-
will not likely be detrimental to EBF performance, as long as stability of the sIgn of the be~ segment ?~tsi.de of ~he link can als be addressed by choasing
beam is assured. Consequently, designers should recognize that the actual forces EBF confi~ur~tI~ns that mIrnmIze axIalloads in the eam. An example of such a
that will develop in the beam will be substantia1ly greater than computed using configuratIOn IS IIlustrated in (Engelhardt and Popov 1989b).
this 1.1 factor, but this low value of required beam strength will be mitigated by
The req~ired strength of the diagonal brace connect ons in EBF is the same as
contributions of the floor slab in resisting axial load and bending moment in the
the r~qUIred strength of the diagonal braceo The brace onnections in EBF are not
beam and by limited yielding in the beam. Based on this approach, the required
reqUIred to develop the expected yield strength of th brace in tension, as :iti the
axial and flexural strength of the beam can be first computed as described aboye
for the diagonal brace, assuming a strain hardening factor of 1.25. The resulting
cas~ of SCBF brace connections. This is because the .agonal braces in EBF are
axial force and bending moment in the beam can then be reduced by a factor of
~esIgned ~o remain elastic. Nonetheless, to provide so e degree of conservatism
1.111.25 = 0.88. In cases where no composite slab is present, designers should m the des~gn of brace c~nnec?ons in EBF, these con ections must be designed
for a reqUI~ed c.ompresslVe aXIal strength based on t buckling capacity of the
consider computing required beam strength based on a link strain hardening brace, as gIven m Section 13.3c.
factor of 1.25.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, in 1. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTlTIJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc
6.1-202 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C15. Comm. C15.]
PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED
6.1-203
Typically in EBF design, the intersecti?n of the. brac~ and ~eam centerlines is C15.8. Required Strengthof Columns
located at the end of the link. However, as permltted m SectlOn 15.6, the brace
Similar to the diagonal brace and beam se~~mt~ntloutsi<ie of the link, the columns
connection may be designed with an eccentricity so that the brace ~d beam
of an EBF should also be designed using design principIes. That is, the
centerlines intersect inside of the link: This eccentricity in the connectIOn gener-
columns should be designed to resist the forces developed by the fully
ates a moment that is opposite in sign to the link end momento Consequently,
yielded and strain hardened links. As discussed Section C15.6, the maximum
the value given aboye for the link end moment can be reduced by ~e moment
shear force developed by a fully yielded and hardened link can be esti-
deve10ped by this brace connection eccentricity. This may substantlally reduce
mated as 1.25Ry times the link nominal shear V", where the 1.25 factor
the moment that will be required to be resisted by the beam and brace, and may
accounts for strain hardening. For capacity of the columns, this sectíon
be advantageous in designo The intersection of the brace and be~ centerlines
permits reduction of the strain hardening factor 1.1. This relaxatíon reflects
should not be located outside of the link, as this increases the bendmg moment
the view that all links aboye the level of the under consideration will
developed in the beam and braceo See Figures C-I-15.5 and C-I-15.6.
not likely reach their maximum shear strength . Consequently,
C15.7. Beam-to-Column Connections applying the 1.25 strain hardening factor to all aboye the level of the col-
The applicable building code may specify different R values for EBF ~esign, umn under consideratíon ls likely too for a multistory EBE For a
depending on whether the beam-to-column connections away from the ~znk are low rise EBF with only a few stories, designers
designed as pinned connections or moment resisting connections. A hlgher R strain hardening factor on links to 1.25 for
value may be permitted when moment resisting connections are used away ~rom there is a greater likelihood that alllinks may slIll1uJlarleouslly reach their maxi-
the link, reflecting the addítional redundancy provided by these con~ectlOn~. mum shear strength. In addition to the of this section, columns in
However, in cases where moment resisting connections are used, prevlOus edl- EBF must also be checked in accordance with requirements of Sectíon 8.3,
tions of these provisions provided no requirements for the design of these con- which are applicable to all systems.
nections. Consequently, thís section of theProvisions has been updated to pro-
vide minimum requirements for beam-to-column connections away from links,
when designed as moment-resisting connections. Such connectíons must meet
l
the requirements of beam-to-column connections in OMF, as specified in Sec-
tions 11.2 and 11.5.
Lateral bracing ~
I.requ. ired at top and
r Lateral bracing
required at top and
botiom link f1anges
,_ Link Length =e _, FuI! depth web intermediate
stiffeners - both sides tor link
depth ~ 25 in ches (635 mm)
+ bottom Link f1anges
Full depth web intermediate
Full depth stiffeners 1" Link Length =e "1 stiffeners - both sides for Link
on both sides depth ~25 inches (635 mm)
~------
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005,
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlR1JCTION, lNc.
AMEIuCAN lNs1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUcnON,
6.1-204 PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C16. Comm. C16.] PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAlNED '6.1-205
C16. BUCKLING-RESTRAINEO BRACEO FRAMES (BRBF) Buckling-restrained braced frames are c01nplDsedl of columns, beams, and brac-
ing elements, all of which are subjected to axial forces. Braces of
C16.1. Scope
Buckling-restrained braced frames (BRBF) are a special c1ass of concentrically BRBF are composed of a steel core and a bU<;.k!:IIlg-restr:aíníng system encasing
braced frames. Just as in special concentrically bracedframes (SCBF), the cen- the steel coreo In addition to the schematic in Figure C-1-16.1, examples
terlines of BRBF members that meet at a joint intersect at a point to form a of BRBF bracing elements are found in Hitomi, Saeki, Wada and
complete vertical truss system that resists lateral forces. BRBF have more duc- Fujimoto (1988); Wada, Connor, Kawai, Iwata Watanabe (1994); and Clark
tility and energy absorption than SCBF because overall brace buckling, and its and others (1999). The steel core within the
associated strength degradation, is prec1uded at forces and deformations corre- primary source of energy dissipation. Diuing a JiloldeI'ate to severe earthquake
sponding to the design story drift. See Section 13 for the effects of buckling in the steel core is expected to undergo significant deformations.
SCBF. Figure C-I-13.l shows possible BRBF bracing configurations~ note that
BRBF can provide elastic stiffness that is cOlmpar~ble
neither X-bracing nor K-bracing is an option for BRBF. Figure C-I-16.1 shows
laboratory tests indicate that properly designed detailed bracing elements of
a schematic of a BRBF bracing element [adapted from Tremblay, Degrange and
BRBF exhibit symmetrical and stable hysteretic hPlI''''''inr under tensile and com-
Blouin (1999)].
pressive forces through significant inelastic (Watanabe and oth-
BRBF arecharacterized by the ability of bracing elements to yield inelastically ers, 1988; Wada, Saeki, Takeuchi and Watanabe, 998; Clark and others, 1999;
in compression as well as in tension. In BRBF the bracing elements dissipate Tremblay and others, 1999). The ductility and dissipation capability of
energy through stable tension-compression yield cyc1es (Clark, Aiken, Kasai, Ko BRBF is expected to be comparable to that of a moment frame (SMF)
and Kimura, 1999). Figure C-I-16.2 shows the characteristic hysteretic behavior and greater than that of a SCBF. This high is attained by limiting buck-
for this type of brace as compared to that of a buckling braceo This behavior ling of the steel coreo
is achieved through limiting buckling of the steel core within the bracing
The Provisions are based on the use of brace qualified by testing. They
elements. Axial stress is decoupled from flexural buckling resistance~ axial load
are intended to ensure that braces are used only . their proven range of
is confined to the steel core while the buckling restraining mechanism, typically
deformation capacity, and that yield and failure other than stable brace
a casing, resists overall brace buckling and restrains high-mode steel core
yielding are prec1uded at the maximum inelastic corresponding to the de-
buckling (rippling).
sign earthquake. For analyses performed using methods, the maximum
inelastic drifts for this system are defined as corresponding to 200 per-
cent of the design story drift. For nonlinear nrrle-Iu$torv analyses, the maximum
BOtto~"
...
.. . (B" (e" fB" ~'TOP in elastic drifts can be taken directly from the results. A mínimum of
tyP.~
••••••• ~L...-.I
~-
_ _ _ _ _ _ _- - '
::::1
Plan
Plate typical .. _ ...
~~~a~_
Mortar buckling
HSS brace
Plate
Plate-*" Bond- unbonded
brace-------'~::--r-
Preventing Preventing
Layer Layer compression
Section "A-A" Section "8-8" Section "e-e" Axial force-displacement h",,¡n::l\/i'nr
eore Projection Transition Segment Yielding Segment
Fig. C-I-16.2 Typical buckling-restrained (unbonded)
Fig. C-I-16.1 Details ofa type ofbuckling-restrained brace (Courtesy of R. Tremblay). (Courtesy of Seismic Isolation Enr!in,~erl!n{>' J
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONS1RUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-206 PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C16. Comm. C16.] PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED 6.1-207
2 percent story drift is required for detennining expected brace deformations (2) Brace manufacturer's participation in a re(t02:ni;¡~ed quality certification
for testing (see Appendix T) and is recommended for detailing. This approach is programo
consistent with the linear analysis equations for design story drift in SEIIASCE
7 (ASCE, 2002) and the 2003 NEHRP Recommended Provisions (FEMA, 2003). (3) Certification should inelude documentation the manufacturer's Quality
It is also noted that the consequences of loss of connection stability due to the Assurance Plan is in compliance with ihe reC;liIÍl·errlents of the BRBF provi-
actual seismic displacements exceeding the calculated values may be severe; sions, the Seismic Provisions for Structural Buildings, and the Code
braces are therefore required to have a larger deformation capacity than directly of Standard Practice.The manufacturing quality control procedures
indicated by linear static analysis. should be equivalent to, or better, than those to manufacture brace test
specilIlens.
The value of 200 percent of the design story drift for expected brace deforma-
tions represents the mean of the maximum story response for ground motions C16.2. Bracing Members
having a 10 percent chance of exceedance in 50 years (Fahnestock, Sause and
Rieles, 2003; Sabelli and others, 2003). Near-fault ground motions, as well as C16.2a. Steel Core
stronger ground motions, can impose deformation demands on braces larger than The steel core is composed of a yielding and steel core projections;
those required by these provisions. Detailing and testing braces for larger defor- it may also contain transition segments projections and yielding
mations will provide higher reliability and better performance. segment. The cross-sectional area of the segment of the steel core is
expected to be sized so that its yield strength is elose to the demand calcu-
Although this system has not been ineluded in SEIIASCE 7 (ASCE, 2002), the lated from the applicable building codeo Ue:Sl~mnl2 braces elose to the required
Provisions have been written assuming that future editions of SEIIAS CE 7 and strengths will help ensure distribution of over multiple stories in the
of national codes will define system coefficients and limits for BRBE The building. Conversely, overdesigning sorne braces than others (for example,
assumed values for the response modification coefficient, system over strength by using the same size brace on all floors) may in an undesirable concen-
factor, and deflection amplification factor are given in Appendix R, as are height tration of inelastic deformations in only a few The length and area of the
limits and period-calculation coefficients. yielding segment, in conjunction with the lengths areas of the nonyielding
The design engineer utilizing these provisions is strongly encouraged to consider segments, determine the stiffness of the braceo segment length and
the effects of configuration and proportioning of braces on the potential forma- brace inclination also determines the strain corresponding to the design
tion of building yield mechanisms. The axial yield strength of the core, Pysc> can story drift.
be set precisely with final core cross-sectional area detennined by dividing the In typical brace designs, a projection of the steel beyond its casing is nec-
specified brace capacity by actual material yield strength established by coupon essary in order to accomplish a connection to the Buckling of this unre-
testing, multiplied by the resistance factor. In sorne cases, cross-sectional area strained zone is an undesirable failure mode and therefore'be preeluded.
will be governed by brace stiffness requirements to limit drift. In either case,
careful proportioning of braces can make yielding distributed over the building In typical practice, the designer specifies fue core dimensions as well as the
height much more likely than in conventional braced frames. steel material and grade. The steel stress-strain may vary signifi-
cantly within the range perrnjtted by the steel potentially resulting
It is also recornmended that engineers refer to the following documents to gain in significant brace overstrength. This must be addressed in the
further understanding of this system: Uang and Nakashima (2003); Watanabe design of connections as well as of frame beams columns. The designer
and others (1988); Reina and Normile (1997); Clark and others (1999); Trem- may specify a limited range of acceptable yield in order to more strictly
blay and others (1999); and Kalyanaraman, Sridhara and Thairani (1998) to gain define the pennissible range of brace capacity. , the designer may
further understanding of this system. specify a limited range qf acceptable yield stress if approach is followed in
The design provisions for BRBF are predicated on reliable brace performance. order to more strictly define the pennissible of core plate area (and the
In order to assure this performance, a quality assurance plan is required. These resulting brace stiffness). The brace supplier may select the [mal core plate
measures are in addition to those covered in the AISC Code ofStandard Practice dimensions to meet the capaeity requirement using results of a coupon test.
(AISC, 2005b) and Section 16 of the 2002 Seismic Provisions for Structural The designer should b~ aware that this approach result in a deviation from
Steel Buildings. Examples of measures that may provide quality assurance are: the calculated brace axial stiffness. The maximum of the deviatipn is
dependent on the range of acceptable material . . Designers following
(1) Special inspection of brace fabrication. Inspection may inelude confirma- this approach should consider the possible range of in the building anal-
tion of fabrication and alignment tolerances, as well as NDT methods for ysis in order to adequately address both the period and expected drift.
evaluation of the final product.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTIruTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUcnON, mc. AMERICAN rnsTIruTE OF SlEEL CONSTRucnON,
6.1-208 PART I - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES [Cornrn.C16. Cornm. C16.] PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAlNED BRAC D FRAMES
6.1-209
The strength of the steel core has been defined in tenns of a new symbol, F ysc , (1) Reasonable relationship of scale
which is defined as either the specified minimum yield stress of the steel eore,
(2) Similar design methodology
or actual yield stress of the steel core as determined trom a coupon test. The use
of coupon tests in establishing F ysc eliminates the necessity of using the factor (3) Adequate system strength
Ry in calculating the adjusted brace strength (see Cornmentary Section CI6.2d). (4 ) Stable buckling-restraint of the steel core in the prototype
This is in recognition of the fact that coupon testing of the steel core material is
in effect required by the simílítude provisions in Appendíx T, and such coupon (5) Adequate rotation capacity in the prototype
tests can pro vide a more reliable estimation of expected strength. (6) Adequate cumulative' strain capacity in the rototype
C16.2b. Buckling-Restraining System C16.2d. Adjusted Brace Strength
This tenn describes those elements providing brace stability against overall Tests cited serve another function in the design f BRBF: the maximum forces
buckling. This ineludes the casing as well as elements connecting the coreo The that the brace can develop in the system are det rmined from test results. (Cal-
adequacy of the buckling-restraining system must be demonstrated by testing. culatio~ of these maximum forces is necessary for connection design and for
C16.2c. Testing the deslgn of columns and beams.) The compres ·on-strength adjustment factor,
Testing of braces is considered necessary for this system. The applicability of tests
/3, acc~unts fo~ the compression overstrength (w th respect to tension strength)
noted m ~ucklmg-restrained braces in recent te ting (SIE, 1999a and 1999b).
to the designed brace is defined in Appendix T. Cornmentary Section C9.2a, which
describes in general tenns the applicability of tests to designs, applies to BRBE ~e tenslOn strength adjustment factor, ro, a counts for strain hardening.
~lgur~ C-I-16.3 shows a diagrarnmatic bilinear ti rce-displacement relationship
BRBF designs require reference to successful tests of a similarly sized test speci- :v
m h1Ch the compression strength adjustment fac or, /3, and the tension-strength
men and of abrace subassemblage that ineludes rotational demands. The fonner adJustment factor, ro, are related to brace forc and nominal material yield
is a uniaxial test intended to demonstrate adequate brace hysteretic behavior. The strength. These quantities are defined as
latter is intended to verify the general brace design concept and demonstrate that
the rotations associated with trame defonnations do not cause failure of the steel
core projection, binding of the steel core to the casing, or otherwise compromise
the brace hysteretic behavior. A single test may qualify as both a subassemblage
and a brace test subject to the requirements of Appendix T; for certain frame-
type subassemblage tests, obtaining brace axial forces may prove difficult and
separate brace tests may be necessary. A sample subassemblage test is shown in where
Figure C-I-T.l (Tremblay and others, 1999).
Pmax = maximum compression force, kips (N)
During the planning stages of either a subassemblage or uniaxial brace test, cer- Tmax = maximum tension force within deti rmations correspondíng to
tain condítions may exist that cause the test specimen to deviate from the param- 200 percent of the design story drift ( ese defonnations are defined
eters established in the testing appendix. These condítions may inelude as 2.0..1bm in Appendix T), kips (N)
Fysc measured yield strength of the' steel cor , ksi (MPa)
(1) Lack of availability of beam, column, and brace sizes that reasonably match
those to be used in the actual buildíng frame
(2) Test set-up limitations in the laboratory
(3) Transportatíon and field-erection constraints
(4) Actuator to subassemblage connection condítions that require reinforce-
ment of test specimen elements not reinforced in the actual building frame
5
.¡¡;
In certain cases, both the authority having jurisdietion and the peer reviewer may (JI
~
deem such deviations acceptable. The cases in which such deviations are accept- o.
able are project-specific by nature and, therefore, do not lend themselves to fur- §
Ü
ther description in this Cornmentary. For these specific cases, it is recommended
that the engineer of record demonstrate that the following objectives are met:
Fig. C-I-16.3.Diagram of braee fopee displa ement.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural SteelBuildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSfRUcnON, INC. AMERICAN INsTITV'iE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, c.
6.1-210 PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C16. Comm. CI6.] PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED 6.1-211
Note that the specified minimum yield stress of the steel core, Fy , is not typically C16.4. Special Requirements Related
used for establishing these factors; instead, Fysc is used which is determined by Bracing Configuration
the coupon tests required to demonstrate compliance with Appendix T. Braces
In SCBF, V-bracing has been characterized by a in deformation mode after
with values of 13 and ro less than unity are not true buckling-restrained braces and
one of the braces buckles (see Section C13.4a). is primarily due to the nega-
their use is precluded by the provisions.
tive post-buckling stiffness, as well as fue ditter~n(~e between tension and com-
The expected brace strengths, used in the design of connections and of beams pression capacity, of traditional braces .. Since braces do not
and columns, are adjusted upwards for various sources of overstrength, includ- lose strength due to buckling, and have~ only a
ing amplification due to expected material strength (using the ratio Ry) and the and compression capacity, the practical n'~qu:lrem4nts of the design provisions for
strain hardening, ro, and compression adjusJment, 13, factors discussed abo ve. this configuration are relatively minoro Figure 16.4 shows the effect of beam
The amplification due to expected material strength can be eliminated if the vertical displacement under the unbalance load by the brace compression
brace yield stress is determined by a coupon test and is used to size the steel core overstrength. The vertical beam deflection adds the deformation demand on
area to provide the desired available strength precisely. Other sources of over- the braces, causing them to elongate more than compress. Therefore, where
strength, such as imprecision in the provision of the steel core area, may need to V-braced frames are used, it is required that a be provided that has sufficient
be considered; fabrication tolerance for the steel core is typically negligible. strength to permit the yielding of both braces a reasonable story drift consid-
ering the difference in tension and compression determined by testing.
C16.3. Bracing Connections The required brace deformation capacity must . the additional deformation
Bracing connections must not yield at force levels corresponding to the yielding due to beam deflection under this load. Since requirements such as the brace
of the steel eore; they are therefore designed for the maximum force that can be testing protocol (Appendix T, Section T6.3) and stability of connections (Sec-
expected from the brace (see Section C16.2b). In addition, a factor of 1.1 is used. tion 16.3) depend on this deformation, engineers find significant incentive to
This factor is applied in consideration of the possibility of braces being subjected avoid flexible beams in this configuration. Where special configurations shown
to deformations exceeding those at which the factors ro and 13 are required to be in Figure C-I-13.3 are used, the requirements of section are not relevant.
deterrnined (in other words, 200 percent ofthe .ó.bm ; see Section C16.2b.).
C16.5. Beams and Columns
The engineer shoúld recognize that the bolts are likely to slip at forces 30 percent
Columns in BRBF are required to have selsrnilc~llly compact sections because
lower than their design strength. This slippage is not considered to be detrimen-
sorne inelastic rotation demands are possible. and columns are also re-
tal to behavior of the BRBF systeIll and is consistent with the design approach
quired to be designed considering the maximum that the adjoining braces
found in Section 7.2. See also commentary in Section C7.2. Bolt holes may be
are expected to develop.
drilled or punched subject to the requirements of Section M2.5 of the Speeifiea-
tion for Struetural Steel Buildings (AISC, 2005).
Recent testing in stability and fracture (Tsai, Weng, Lin, Chen, Lai and Hsiao,
2003) has demonstrat~d that gusset-plate connections may be a critical aspect of
the design of BRBF (Tsai and others, 2003; Lopez, Gwie, Lauck and Saunders,
2004). The tendency to instability may vary depending on the flexural stiffness
of the connection portions of the buckling restrained brace and the degree of
their flexural continuity with the casing. This aspect of BRBF design is the sub-
ject of continuing investigation and designers are encouraged to consult research
publications as they become available. The stability of gussets may be demon-
strated by testing, if the test specimen adequately resembles the conditions in the
building. It is worth noting that during an earthquake the frame may be subjected
to sorne out-of-plane displacement concurrent with the in-plane deformations, so
a degree of conservatism in the design of gussets may be warranted.
Hg. C-I-16.4. Post-yield ehange in deformation mode for and inverted-V BRBF.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL COINSl'RUCTIOINj
6.1-212 PART I - BUCKl.JNG-RESTRArNED BRACED FRAMES [Comm.C16. Comm. Cl7.]
PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR
6.1-213
Like columns, beams in BRBF are required to have seismically compact sec-
1983; Tirnler and Kulak, 1983; Tromposch 1987; Roberts and
tions because sorne inelastic rotation demands are possible when beam-column
connections are fully restrained, as is expected to be the norm. Likewise, they are Sabouri-Ghomi, 1992; Caccese, EIgaaIy and Ch ,1993; Driver, Kulak, Kennedy
and Elwi, 1997; EIgaaly, 1998; Rezai, 1999; L bell, Prion, Ventura and Rezai,
also required to be designed considering the maximum force that the adjoining
braces are expected to develop. 2000; Berman and Bruneau, 2003a). This ha been confirmed by analytical
studies using finite element analysis and other an sis techniques (Sabouri -Ghomi
C17. SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (SPSW) and Roberts, 1992; EIgaaly, Caccese and Du, 1993; EIgaaly and Liu, 1997;
Driver and others, 1997). '
C17.1. Scope
Yielding of the webs occurs by development of nsion field action at an angle
In SPSW the slender unstiffened steel plates (webs) connected to surround-
ing horiz~ntal and vertical boundary elements (lIBE and VBE) are design~d to close to 45° from the vertical, and buckling of plate in the orthogonal direc-
tion. Past research shows that the sizing of VBE and HBE in a SPSW makes it
yield and behave in a ductile hysteretic manner during earthquakes. See ~l~re
possible to develop this tension field action acr ss the entire webs. Except for
C-I-17-1. A1l HBE are also rigidly connected to the VBE with moment reslstmg
connections able to develop the expected plastic moment of the HBE. Each web cases with very stiff HBE and VBE, yielding in e webs develops in a progre s-
must be surrounded by boundary elements. sive manner across each panel. Because the web do not yield in comptession,
continued yielding upon repeated cycles of loadin is contingent upon the SPSW
Experimental research on SPSW subjected to cyclic i~elastic ~uasi-static being subjected to progressively larger drifts, exc pt for the contribution of pIas-
dynarnic loading has demonstrated their ability to behave m a ductIle manner tic hinging developing in the HBE to the total sy tem hysteretic energy. In past
and dissipate significant amounts of energy (Thorburn, Kulak and Montgomery, research (Driver and others, 1997), the yielding f boundary eIements contrib-
uted approximately 25 to 30 percent of the total 1 ad strength of the system.
Level4 With the exception of plastic hinging at the ends of E, the surrounding horizon-
tal and vertical boundary elements are designed to main essentially elastic when
the webs are fully yielded. Plastic hinging at the en s of HBE is needed to develop
Horizontal Boundary I
1
1 1
the plastic collapse mechanism of this system. PI tic hinging in the middle of
Element (HBE)..., I Panel 4 I HBE, which could partly prevent yielding of the ebs, is deemed undesirabIe.
\ L__________--.JI
I
Cases of both desirable and undesirable yielding i VBE have been observed in
Vertical Boundary \. Level3
past testing. In absence of a theoretical formulation t quantify the conditions lead-
Element (VBE~I-..~.;...-
__.....~~_~_~_~_~~
_ __,=r-1 ing to acceptable yielding (and supporting 'experime tal validation ofthis fotmula-
\ I I tion), the conservative requirement of elastic VBE r sponse is justified.
.\
I1 Panel 3 I1
l' 1 1
I I Research literature often compares the behavior o steel plate walls to that of a
I
L-______________ I __J
vertical plate girder, indicating that the webs of a S SW resist shears by tension
Level2
field action and that the VBE of a SPSW resist verturning moments. While
r--- - -- - -1 this analogy is useful in providing a conceptual u derstanding of the behavior
Web Element- i'... I I of SPSW, many significant differences exist in the ehavior and strength of the
I 'rk
11" Panel 2
1
l II two systems. Past research shows that the use of st ctural shapes for the VBE
I
I
~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __J1
and HBE in SPSW (as well fls other dimensions an detaiIs germane to SPSW)
favorably impacts orientation of the angle of deve opment of the tension field
Level1
action, and makes possible the use of very slender ebs (having negligibIe di-
¡-- - -- - ----,
1 1
1 agonal compressive strength). Sizeable top and bott m HBE are also required in
1
I1 I1 SPSW to anchor the significant tension fields that evelop at these ends of the
Panel 1
I 1 structural system. Limits imposed on the maximu web slenderness of plate
I I
1 girders to prevent flarige buckling, or due to transpo tion requirements, are also
~--
---------~ not applicable to SPSW which are constructed differ ntly. For these reasons, the
use of beam design provisions in the Specification ( se, 2005) for the design
Fig. C-I-17.1. Schematic of special plate shear wall. of SPSW is not appropriate (Berman and Bruneau, 2 04).
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, MaTch 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERIcAN lNSTITUTE OFSTEEL CONSTRUcrrON, INC.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF 8mEL CONSTRUcrrON, IN .
6.1-214 PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS [Comm. C17. Cornm. C17.] PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR
6.1-215
4000
3000
2000
Z 1000
e...
ro
al
o
.c:
f/)
Q¡ -1000
e
ro
Q.
-2000
-3000
~~-
-4000
-60 -40 -20 O 20 60 80
.F-----L---~
Hg. C-I-I7.3. Comparison of experimental resultsfor lower of multi-story SPSW frame
Fig. C-I-I7.2. Strip model of a SPSw. and strength predicted by strip model (after Driver others, 1997).
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. l
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Bui14ings, MaTch 9, 2005 incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNe.
AMEruCAN lNs'I'ITthE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON,
6.1-216 PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS [Comm. C17.
Cornm.C17.] PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WA LS 6.1-217
C17.3. Connections of Webs to Boundary Elements top and bottom HBE are typically of sabstanti size, intermediate HBE are
The required strength of web connections to the surrounding HBE an~ VBE are relatively smalIer. .
required to develop the expected tensile strength of the webs. Net sectlOns must
also provide this strength for the case of bolted connections. Beyond the exception mentioned in Section 17.1, i sorne instances, the engineer
may be able to justify yielding of the boundary el ments by demonstrating that
The strip model can be used to model the behavior of SPSW and the tensile
the yielding of this edge boundary element will no cause reduction on the SPSW
yielding of the webs at angle, a. A single angle of inc1ination taken as the av~r
shear capacity to support the demand and will not ause a failure in vertical grav-
age for all the panel s may be used to analyze the en tire wall. The expected tensIle ity carrying capacity.
strength of the web strips shall be defined as RyFyAs, where
Forces and moments in the members (and connec ions), inc1uding those result-
As area of a strip =(L cos a + H sina)/n
ing from tension field action, may be determined from aplane frame analysis.
L width of panel
The web is represented by a series of inc1ined pin ended strips, as described in
H height of panel
Section CI7.3. A minimum often equally spaced in-ended strips per panel will
n number of strips per panel and n shaIl be taken greater than or equal
be used in such an analysis.
to 10
This analysis method has been shown, through correlation with physical test A number of analytical approaches are possible t achieve capacity design and
determine the same forces acting on the vertical oundary elements. Sorne ex-
data, to adequately predict SPSW performance. It is recognized, however, that
other advanced analytical techniques [such'as the finite element method (FEM)] ample methods applicable to SPSW follow. In al cases, actual web thickness
must be considered, for reasons described earlier.
may also be used for design of SPSW. If such nonlinear (geometric and material)
FEM models are used, they should be calibrated against published test results to Nonlinear push-over analysis. A model of the PSW can be constructed in
ascertain reliability for application. Designs of connections of webs to boundary which bilinear elasto-plastic web elements of str ngth RyFyAs are introduced
elements should also anticipate buckling of the web plateo Sorne minimum out- in the direction a. Bilinear plastic hinges can also be introduced at the ends of
of-plane rotational restraint of the plate should be provided (Caccese, EIgaaly the horizontal boundary elements. Standard push- ver analysis conducted with
and Chen, 1993). this model will provide axial forces, shears, and m ments in the boundary frame
when the webs develop yielding. Separate check are required to verify that
Horizontal and Vertical Boundary Elements plastic hinges do not develop in the horizontal b undary elements, exCl!:pt at
their ends.
C17.4a. Required Strength
Per capacity design principIes, all edge boundary elements (HBE and VBE) shaIl Combined linear elastic computer programs and pacity design concepto The
be designed to resist the maximum force s developed by the tension field action following four-step procedure provides reasonabl estimates of forces in the
of the webs fully yielding. Axial forces, shears, and moments develop in the boundary elements of SPSW systems.
boundary elements of the SPSW as a result of the response of the system to the
(1) Lateral forces: Use combined model, bound elements and web elements,
overall overturning and shear, and this tension field action in the webs. Actual
web thickness must be considered for this calculation, because webs thicker than to come up with the demands in the web and e boundary elements based
required may have to be used due to availability, or minimum thickness required on the code required base shear. The web ele ents shall not be considered
as vertical-load carrying elements.
for welding.
At the top panel of the wall, the vertical components of the tension field shall be (2) Gravity load (dead load and live load): Apply ravity loads to a modeI'with
anchored to the HBE. The HBE shall have sufficient strength to aIlow develop- only gravity frames. The web elements shall n t be considered as vertical-
load carrying elements.
ment of fuIl tensile yielding across the panel width.
At the bottom panel of the wall, the vertical components of the tension field shall (3) Without any overstrength factors, design the undary elements using the
be anchored to the HBE. The HBE shall have sufficient strength to aIlow devel- demands based on combination forces of the a ove steps 1 and 2.
opment of fuIl tensile yielding across the panel width. This may be accomplished (4) Boundary element capacity design ch~ck: Ch k the boundary element for
by continuously anchoring the HBE to the foundation. the maximum capacity of the web elements in ombination with the maxi-
For intermediate HBE of the wall, the anticipated variation between the top and mum possible axial load due to over-turning omento Use the axial force
bottom web normal stresses acting on the HBE is usuaIly smaIl, or nuIl when obtained from step 1 aboye and multiply by o erstrength factor no. Apply
webs in the panel aboye and below the HBE have identical thickness. While load from web elements (RyFyAs) in ~e directi of a. For this capacity de-
sign check use a material strength reduction fac or of 1.0. For determination
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, mc. Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN mSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, C.
6.1-218 PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS [Comm.C17. COffiffi. C18.] PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE 6.1-219
of the required strength of boundary elements and their connection to the Qs = the system overstrength factor, as by FEMA 369, and taken
web, neither the resistance factor (LRFD), nor the safety factor (ASD), are as 1.2 for SPSW (Berman and Bruneau 2003)
applied to the strength of the web. A is initially estimated from an equivalent brace to meet the structure 's drift
Indirect capacity design approach. CSA-S16-02 (CSA, 2002) proposes that requirements.
loads in the vertical boundary members cah be determined from the gravity loads C17.4c. Width-Thickness Limitation~
combined with the seismic loads increased by the amplification factor, Sorne amount of local yielding is expected in
B=v"/Y,, development of the plastic mechanism of SPSW
and VBE shall comply withthe requirements in
where
Ve expected shear strength, at the base of the wall, determined for the C17.4d. Lateral Bracing
web thickness supplied Providing stability of SPSW systems boundary ele::tne~nts is necessary for proper
0.5 RyFy t w L sin2a performance of the system. The lateral btacing for HBE are pro-
Vu factored lateral seismic force at the base of the wall vided to be consistent with beams in SMF for strength and stiffuess. In
addition, all intersections of HBE and VBE must braced to ensure stability of
In determining the loads in VBEs, the amplification factor, B, need not be taken
the entire panel.
as greater !hari R.
The VBE design axial forces shall be determined from overtuming moments Ct7.4f. Panel Zones
defined as follows: Panel zone requirements are not imposed for 1·[lte:r¡meldJ.alte HBE. These are ex-
pected to be small HBE connecting to sizeable
(1) the moment at the base is BMu, where Mu is the factored seismic overtuming judgment to identify special situations in which the
moment at the base of the wall corresponding to the force Vu ; next to intermediate HBE should be verified.
(2) the moment BMu extends for a height H but not less than two stories from
C17.4g. Stiffness· of Vertical Boundary Elements
the base; and
This requirement is intended to prevent excessive flexibility and buck-
(3) the moment decreases linearly aboye a height H to B times the overtuming ling of VBE. Opportunity exists for future
moment at one story below the tbp of the wall, but need not exceed R times applicability of this requirement.
the factored seismic overtuming moment at the story under consideration
corresponding to the force Vu ' C18. QUALITV ASSURANCE PLAN
To assure ductile seismic response, steel framing required to meet the quality
The local bending moments in the VBE due to tension field action in the web
requirements as appropriate for the various COlmpID*~nts of the structure. The ap-
shall be multiplied by the amplification factor B.
plicable building code may have specific·quality plan requirements.
Preliminary designo For preliminary proportioning of HBE, VBE, and webs, a SEIIASCE 7 (AS CE, 2005) provides special for inspection and
SPSW wall may be approximated by a vertical truss with tension diagonals. testing based upon the seismic design category. the Provisions, the
Each web is represented by a single diagonal tension brace within the story. For Specification, the AISC Code of Standard (AISC, 2005b), the AWS
an assumed angle of inc1ination of the tension field, the web thickness, tw , may DI.l Structural Welding Code-Steel (AWS,
be taken as for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
2AQs sinO acceptance criteria for steel building structures.
tw = L sin2a quality assurance plan be implemented as
where code or the engineer of record.
A area of the equivalent tension brace
O
In sorne cases, the fabricator implements al quality system as part oí their
angle between the vertical and the longitudinal axis of the equivalent
diagonal brace normal operations, particularly fabricators that pru1jic:ipa:te in AISC Quality Cer-
L the distance between VBE centerlines tification or similar programs. The engineer of should evaluate what is al-
a ready a part ofthe contractor's quality control in determining the quality
dssumed angle of inclination of the tension field measured from the
assurance needs for each project. Where the s quality control system is
vertical per Section 17.2a
considered adequate for the project, inc1uding with the special needs
Seismic Provisions ¡or Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions ¡or Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INsTITUtE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OP STEEL CONSTRUcnON,
6.1-220 PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN [Comm. C18. 6.1-221
for seismic applications, the quality assurance plan may be modified to reflect APPENDIX P
this. Similarly, where additional needs are identifi'ed, such as for innovative con-
nection details or unfamiliar construction methods, supplementary requirements
should be specified, as appropriate. The quality assurance plan as contained in PREQUALIFICATION OF BEAM- O-COLUMN
Appendix Q is recornmended for adoption without revision because consistent ANO LINK-TO-COLUMN ,CON ECTIONS
application of the same requirements is expected to improve reliability in the
industry.
The quality assurance plan should be provided to the con tractor as part of the bid
documents, as any special quality control or quality assurance requirements may CP1. SCOPE
have substantial impact on the cost and scheduling of the work. Appendix P describes requirements for prequalific tion of beam-to-column con-
Structural observation at the site by the engineer of record is an additional com- nections in special and intermediate moment fram (SMF and IMF) and of link-
ponent of a quality assurance plan that is not addressed as part of Appendix Q, to-column connections in eccentrically braced fr, mes (EBF). The concept of
and should be developed based upon the specific needs of the project. prequalified beam-to-column connections for mo ent frame systems, as used in
the Provisions, has been adopted from FEMA 350 MA, 2000a), and has been
extended to include prequalified link-to-column c ections for EBE
Following observations of moment connection d ge in the 1994 Northridge
Earthquake, these Provisions adopted the philoso hy that the performance of
beam-to-column and link-to-column connections s ould be verified by realistic-
scale cyclic testing. This philosophy is based on e view that the behavior of
connections under severe cyclic loading, iparticul Iy in regard to the initiation
and propagation of fracture, cannot be reliably p edicted by analytical mean s
alone. Consequently, the satisfactory performance f connections must be con-
firmed by laboratory testing'conducted in "accordan e with Appendix S. In order
to meet this requirement, designers fundamentall have two options. The first
option is to provide substantiating test data, either om project specific tests or
from tests reported in the lit~rature, on connections matching project conditions
within the limits specified in Appendix S ~ The sec nd option open to designers
is to use a prequalified connection.
The option to use prequalified connections in the rovisions does not alter the
fundamental view that the performance of beam-to column and link:-to-column
connections should be conflrmed by testing. Howev ,it is recognized that requir-
ing designers to provide substantiating test data for ach new project is unneces-
sarily burdensome, particularly when the same conn ctions are used on a repeated
basis that have already recei,:,ed extensive testing, e uation, and review.
It is the intent of the Provisi,ons that designers be rmitted to use prequalified
connections without the nee<;i to present laboratory est data, as long as the con-
nection design, detailing and quality assurance me sures conform to the limits
and requirements of the prequalification. The use o prequalified connectións is
intended to simplify the design and design approval rocess by removing the bur-
den on designers to present test data, and tlY removi g the burden on the author-
ity having jurisdiction to review and interPret test d tao The use of prequalified
connections is not intended as a guarantee. against d age to, or failure of,' con-
nections in major earthquakes. The engim~er of rec rd in responsible charge of
the building, based upon an understanding of and f; ·liarity with the'connection
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005,· el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucrrON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcrrON, c.
--------------_.----- .. ~._-_.--_._._---_._ .. _-
6.1-222 PART 1 - PREQUALIFICATlON OF CONNECTlONS [Cornm.CP. Cornm.CP.] PART 1 - PREQUALIFICATlON OF ' ..AJ.nnJUL. J. nJJ~'" 6.1-223
perfonnance, behavior, and lirnitations is responsible for selecting appropriate engineering judgment. Co,nsequently, a fUlld~mt~~ntal prernise of these: provi-
connection types suited to the application and implementing designs, either dio. sions is that prequalification can only be based on an evaluation of
rectly or by delegated responsibility. the connection by a panel of knowledgeable Thus, the Provisions
call for theestablishment of a connection review panel (CPRP).
The use of prequalified connections is permitted, but not required, by the
Such a panel should consist of individuals a high degree of experience,
Provisions. knowledge, and expertise in connection design, and construction. It
is the respohsibility of the CPRP to review all data on a connection,
CP2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and then determine if the connection warrants and determine
CP2.1. Basis for Prequalification the associated lirnits of prequalification\ in with Appendix P. It is
In general tenns, a prequalified connection is one that has undergone sufficient the intent of the Provisions that only a single, recognized CPRP be
testing, analysis, evaluation and review so that a high level of confidence exists established. To that end, AISC established the connection prequalification
that the connection can fulfill the perfonnance requirements specified in Section review panel (CPRP) and developed Connections for Special and
9.2 for special momentframes, in Section 10.2 for intermediate momentframes, Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic ANSIIAISC 358-
or in SectÍon 15.4 for eccentrically braced frames. Prequalification should be 05 (AISC, 2005a).
based primarily on laboratory test data, but supported by analytical studies of
Use of connections reviewed by connection panels other than the AISC
connection perfonnance and by the development of detailed design criteria and
CPRP, as permitted in Section P2.2, and de1:eflnirl~d suitable for prequalification
design procedures. The behavior and expected perfonnance of a prequalified
status in accordance with the Provisions, are to approval of the authority
connection should be well understood and predictable. Further, a sufficient body
having jurisdiction.
of test data should be available to ensure that a prequalified connection will perO.
fonn as intended on a consistent and reliable basis.
CP3. TESTING REQUIREMENTS
Further guidance on prequalification of connections is provided by the cornrnen- It is the intent of the Provisions that laboratory data fonn the primary basis of
tary for FEMA 350, which indicates that the following four criteria should be prequalification, and that the connection testing c~rlfOIIDs to the requirem~nts of
satisfied for a prequalified connection: Appendix S. FEMA 350 specifies the rninimum of tests on nonidentical
specimens needed to establish prequalification of connectibn, or subsequently
(1) There is sufficient experimental and analytical data on the connection perO.
to chaiJ.ge the lirnits of prequalification. HClwe~velr.lin the Provisions, the number
fonnance to establish the likely yield mechanisms and failure modes for the
of tests needed to support prequalification or to changes in prequalifica-
connection. tion lirnits is not specified. The number !of tests range of testing variables
(2) Rational models for predicting the resistance associated with each mecha- needed to support prequalification decisions be highly dependent bn the
nism and failure mode have been developed. particular featui"es of the cbnnection and·on the of other supporting
data. Consequently, this section requires that the determine whether the
(3) Given the material properties and geometry of the connection, a rational
number and type of tests conducted on a co:nn(~dtion are sufficient to warrant
procedure can be used to estimate which mode and mechanism control s the
prequalification or to wartant a change in lirnits. Both FEMA
behavior and defonnation capacity (that is, interstory drift angle) that can
350 and the Provisions refer to "nonidentical"
be.attained for the controlling conditions. broad range of variables potentially affecting performance should be
(4) Given the models and procedures, the existing database is adequate to investigated in a prequalificaÚon test programo It may also be desirable to test
permit assessment of the statistical reliability of the connection. replicates of norninally identical specimens in to investigate repeatability
of performance prior to and afier failure and to consistency of fail-
CP2.2. Authority for Prequalification ure mechanism. Individuals planning á test to support prequalification
While the general basis for prequalification is outlined in Section P2.1, it is not of a connection are encouraged to consult with CPRP, in advance, for a pre-
possible to provide highly detailed and specific criteria for prequalification, conO. lirninary assessment of the planned testing j.JH.'¡;;l'l1~l.
sidering the wide variety of possible connection configurations, and considero.
ing the continually changing state-of-the-art in the understanding of connection Tests used to support prequruification are to comply with Appendix S.
perfonnance. It is also recognized that decisions on whether or not a particular That appendix requires test specimens be loaded least to an interstory drift
connection should be prequalified, and decisions on establishing limits on angle as specified in Section 9.2 for special or in Section 10.2
prequalification, will ultimately entail a considerable degree of professional for intermediate moment frames, or a link
Seismic Provisions ¡or Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions ¡or Structural Steel Buildings; Mareh 9,
AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMmuCAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL C01NSTRUCTIOlN,I
Section 15.4 for eccentrically braced frames. These provisions do not inelude prequalification record, as required in Section Examples of the format and
the additional requirement for connection rotation capacity at failure, as rec- typical content of such design procedures can found in FEMA 350 (FEMA,
ornmended in FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a). For purposes of prequalification, 200Da).
however, it is desirable to load specimens to larger deformation levels in order
to reveal the ultimate controlling failure modes. Prequalification of a connection CP6. PREQUALIFICATION RECORD
requires a elear understanding of the controlling failure modes for a connec- A written prequalification record is required
tion, in other words, the failure modes that control the strength and deformation a minimum, the prequalification record must
capacity of the connection. Consequently, test data must be available to support Section P6. The prequalification record should a comprehensive listing
connection behavior models over the full range of loading, from the initial elastic of all information needed by a designer to the applicability and limita-
response to the inelastic range of behavior, and finally through to the ultimate tions of the connection, and information needed to design the connection. The
failure of the connection. prequalification record need not inelude records of laboratory tests or
When a connection is being considered for prequalification by the CPRP, all analytical studies. However, a list of references be ineluded for all test re-
test data for that connection must be available for review by the CPRP. This in- ports, research reports, and other publications as a basis of prequalification.
eludes data on unsuccessful tests of connections that represent or are otherwise These references should, to the extent possible, available in the public domain
relevant to the final connection. Testing performed on a preliminary connec- to permit independent review of the data and to .-'I'.......'LLI·... the integrity an,d cred-
tion configuration that is not relevant to the final design need not be submitted. ibility of the prequalification process. FEMA (FEMA, 2000a) provides an
However, parametric studies on weak and strong panel zones of a connection example of the type and formatting oí' needed for a prequalified
connection.
that otherwise match the final connection are examples of developmental tests
that should be submitted. Individuals seeking prequalification of a connection For connections prequalified by the AISC CPRP, the Prequalified Connections
are obliged to present the entire known database of tests for the connection. ¡or Special and Intermediate Steel Moment ¡or Seismic Applications,
Such data is essential for an assessment of the reliability of a connection. Note ANSIIAISC 358-05 (AISC, 2005a) serves as the record.
that unsuccessful tests do not necessarily preelude prequalification, particularly
if the reasons for unsuccessful performance have been identified and addressed
in the connection design procedures. For example, if ten tests are conducted on
varying sized members and one test is unsuccessful, the cause for the "failure"
should be determined. If possible, the connection design procedure should be
adjusted in sucha way to preelude the failure and not invalidate the other nine
tests. Subsequent tests should then be performed to validate the final proposed
design procedure.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COINSTRUCTIoIN,
6.1-228 PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN [Cornrn.CQ. Cornrn.CQ.] PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,
AMERICAN mSTmrrE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, mc. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON,
6.1-230 PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN [Comm.CQ.
6.1-231
CRl. Appendix R is a new appendix that was' . to introduce system factors (R,
ed , no and height limits) for braced systems (BRBF) and
special plate shéar wall (SPSW) systems the applicable building code
does not yet contain reference to those systems Where the applicable building
code does contain these factors, Appendix R is be disregarded in favor of the
factors in the applicable building codeo The and the SPSW were first
introduced hito the NEHRP Provisions (FEMA, ), but since there were no
design requitements to reference, these systems not included in SEI/ASCE
7 (AS CE, 2005) but are expected to be included a supplement to SEI/ASCE 7
to be published in late summer 2005. This is expected to be adopted
by both the 2006 mc and NFPA 5000. When is accomplished, this appendix
will be removed.
1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
Cornm. CS.]
PART 1 - QUALIPYING CYCLIC
6.1-233
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl10N, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl10N, IN .
6.1-234 PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS [Comm.CS. Cornm.CS.] PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC 6.1-235
For tests of link-to-column connections, the key acceptance parameter is the link connection test. However, more extensive and re istic subassemblages that bet-
inelastic rotation, also referred to in these Provisions as the link rotation angle. ter match actual project conditions should be co sidered where appropriate and
The link rotation angle is computed based upon an analysis of test specimen practical, in order to obtain more reliable test re ults.
deformations, and can normally be computed as the inelastic portion of the rela-
tive end displacement between the ends of the link, divided by the link length. Examples of subassemblages used to test link o-column connections can be
Examples of such calculations can be found in Kasai and Popov (1986c); Rieles found in Hjelmstad and Popov (1983); Kasai nd Popov (1986c); Rieles and
and Popov (1987a); Engelhardt and Popov (1989a); and Arce (2002). Popov (1987b); Engelhardt and Popov (1989 ); Dusicka and Itani >(2002);
McDaniel and others (2002); Arce (2002); and kazaki and others (2004b).
Interstory drift angle. The interstory drift angle developed by a moment con-
nection test specimen is the primary acceptance criterion for a beam-to-column CS5. ESSENTIAL TEST VARIABLES
moment connection in a moment frame. In an actual building, the interstory drift
angle is computed as the interstory displacement divided by the story height, CS5.1. Sources of Inelastic Rotation
and ineludes both elastic and inelastic components of deformation. For a test This section is intended to ensure that the inelas e rotation in the test specimen
specimen, interstory drift angle can usually be computed in a straightforward is developed in the same members and connec on elements as anticipated in
manner from displacement measurements on the test specimen. Guidelines for the prototype. For example, if the prototype mo ent connection is designed so
computing the interstory drift angle of a connection test specimen are provided that essentially all of the inelastic rotation is dev oped by yielding of the beam,
by SAC (1997). then the test specimen should be designed and p rform in the same way. A test
specimen that develops nearly all of its inelastic tation through yielding of the
Total link rotation angle. The total link rotation angle is the basis for control- column panel zone would not be acceptable to ualify a prototype connection
ling tests on link-to-column connections, as described in Section S6.3. In a test wherein flexural yielding of the beam is expected o be the predominant inelastic
specimen, the total link rotation angle is computed by simply taking the relative action.
displacement of one end of the link with respect to the other end, and dividing
by the link length. The total link rotation angle reflects both elastic and inelastic Because of normal variations in material prope ies, the actual location of in-
deformations of the link, as well as the influence of link end rotations. While the elastic action may vary somewhat from that inten ed in either the test specimen
total link rotation angle is used for test control, acceptance criteria for link-to- or in the prototype. An allowance is made for s ch variations by permitting a
column connections are based on the link inelastic rotation angle (referred to in 25 percent variation in the percentage of the tota inelastic rotation supplied by
the Provisions as the link rotation angle). a member or connecting element in a test specime as compared with the design
intent of the prototype. Thus, for the example abo e where 100 percent of the in-
CS4. TEST SUBASSEMBLAGE REQUIREMENTS elastic rotation in the prototype is expected to be eveloped by flexural yielding
A variety of different types of subassemblages and test specimens have been ofthe beam, at least 75percent ofthe total inelas' rotation ofthe test specimen
used for testing moment connections. A typical subassemblage is planar and is required to be developed by flexural yielding o the beam in order to qualify
this connection.
consists of a single column with a beam attached on one or both sid~s of the
column. The specimen can be loaded by displacing either the end of the beam(s) For link-to-column connections in eccentrically aced frames (EBF), the type
or the end of the column. Examples of typical subassemblages for morp.ent con- of yielding (shear yielding, flexural yielding, or a ombination of shear and flex-
nections can be found in the literature, for example in SAC (1996) and Popov ural yielding) expected in the test specimen link sh uld be substantially the same
and others (1996). as for the prototype link. For example, a link-to-c umn connection detailwhich
In the Provisions, test specimens generally need not include a composite slab performs satisfactorily for a shear-yielding link ( $; 1.6Mp /Vp ) may not neces-
or the application ofaxialload to the column. However, such effects may have sarily perform well for a flexural-yielding link ( 2 2.6Mp /Vp ). The loá.d and
an influence on connection performance, and their inclusion in a test program deformation demands at the link-to-column conn ction will differ significantly
for these cases.
should be considered as a means to obtain more realistic test conditions. An
example of test subassemblages that inelude composite floor slabs andlor the ap- Satisfying the requirements of this section will r quire the designer to have a
plication of column axialloads can be found in Popov and others (1996); Leon, elear understanding of the manner in which inelast c rotation is developed in the
Hajjar and Shield (1997); and Tremblay, Tchebotarev and Filiatrault (1997). A prototype and in the test specimen.
variety of other types of subassemblages may be appropriate to simulate spe-
cific project conditions, such as a specimen with beams attached in orthogonal
directions to a column. Aplanar bare steel specimen with a single column and
a single beam represents the mínimum acceptable subassemblage for a moment
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005 inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC. AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, C.
6.1-236 PART I - QUALIFYlNG CYCLIC 1ESTS [Cornm. CS. Comm. CS.] PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC 6.1-237
CS5.2. Size of Members These provisions also require that the depth of the test column be at least
The intent of this section is that the member sizes used in a test specimen should 90 percent of the depth of the prototype Tests conducted as part of the
be, as nearly as practical, a full-scale representation of the member sizes used SAC program indicated that performance of with deep columns may
in the prototype. The purpose of this requirement is to ensure that any poten- differ from the performance with W12 'and Wl columns (Chi and Uang, 2002).
tially adverse scale effects are adequately represented in the test specimen. As Additional recent research on moment with deep columns is re-
beams become deeper and heavier, their ability to develop inelastic rotation may ported by Ric1es, Zhang, Lu and Fisher (2004).
be somewhat diminished (Roeder and Foutch, 1996; Blodgett, 2001). Although
such scale effects are not yet completely understood, at least two possible det- In addition to adhering separately to the size for beams and to the
rimental scale effects have been identified. First, as a beam gets deeper, larger size restrictions for columns, the combination beam and column sizes used in
inelastic strains are generally required in order to develop the same level of in- a test specimen should reasonably reflect the of beam and column sizes
elastic rotation. Second, the inherent restraint associated with joining thicker used in the prototype. For example, say a design calls for the use of a
materials can affect joint and connection performance. Because of such poten- W36 beam attached to a W36 column. Say that for the connection type
tially adverse se ale effects, the beam sizes used in test specimens are required to proposed for this building, successful tests been ron on specimens using
a W36 beam attached to a W14 column, and other specimens using a W24
adhere to the limits given in this section.
beam attached to a W36 column. Thus, test data is available for this connection
This section only specifies restrictions on the degree to which test results can be on specimens meeting the beam size limitations Section S5.2, and separately
scaled up to deeper or heavier members. There are no restrictions on the degree on specimens meeting the column size of Section S5.2. Nonetheless,
to whic~ test results can be scaled down to shallower or lighter members. No these tests would not be suitable for qualifying connection for the case of a
such restrictions have been imposed in order to avoid excessive testing require- W36 beam attached to a W36 column, since combination of beam and col-
ments and because currently available evidence suggests that adverse scale ef- umn sizes used in the test specimens does not
fects are more likely to occur when scaling up test results rather than when scal- and column sizes in the prototype, within the
ing down. Nonetheless, caution is advised when using test results on very deep
or heavy members to qualify connections for much smaller or lighter members.
CS5.5. Material Strength
It is preferable to obtain test results using member sizes that are a realistic repre- The actual yield stress of structural steel can considerably greater than its
sentation of the prototype member sizes. specified minimum value. Higher levels of yield stress in members that
supply inelastic rotation by yielding can be d~lrin[lerltal to connection per-
As an example of applying the requirements of this section, consider a moment formance by developing larger forces at the prior to yielding. For
connection test specimen constructed with a W36x150 beam. This specimen example, consider a moment connection in which inelastic rotation is
could be used to qualify any beam with a depth up to 40 in. (= 36/0.9) and a developed by yielding of the beam, and the has been specified to be of
weight up to 200 lb/ft (=15010.75). The limits specified in this section have been ASTM A36/A36M steel. If the beam has an yield stress of 55 ksi (380
chosen somewhat arbitrarily based on judgment, as no quantitative research re- MPa) , the connection is required to resist a that is 50 percent higher
sults are available on scale effects. than if the beam had an actual yield stress of 36 (250 MPa). Consequently,
When choosing a beam size for a test specimen, several other factors should be this section requires that the material s used for test specimen represent this
considered in addition to the depth and weight of the section. One of these fac- possible overstrength condition, as this will for the most severe test of
the connection.
tors is the width-thickness (bit) ratio of the beam flange and web. The bit ratio s
of the beam may have an important influence on the performance of specimens As an example of applying these provisions, again a test specimen in
that develop plastic rotation by flexural yielding of the beam. Beams with high which inelastic rotation is ¡ntended to be de'{elc:)Od~d by yielding of the beam. In
bit ratio s develop local buckling at lower inelastic rotation levels than beams order to qualify this connection for ASTM beams, the test beam is
with low bit ratios. This local buckling causes strength degradation in the beam, required to have a yield stress of at least 47 ksi MPa) (= 0.85Ry F y for ASTM
and may therefore reduce the load demands on the connection. A beam with very A992/A992M). This minimum yield stress is . to be exhibited by both
low bit ratios may experience little if any local buckling, and will therefore sub- the web and flanges of the test beam.
ject the connection to higher moments. On the other hand, the beam with high bit
ratios will experience highly localized deformations at locations of flange and The requirements of this section are applicable y to members or connect-
web buckling, which may in turn initiate a fracture. Consequently, it is desirable ing elements of the test specimen that are 111l'''l1l1''lI- to contribute to the inelastic
to test beams over a range of bit ratios in order to evaluate these effects. rotation of the specimen through yielding. The of this section are
not applicable to members, or connecting that are intended to remain
essentially elastic.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Máreh 9,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN lNsTITÍlTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS [Cornm.CS. Comm. CS.] PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC 6.1-239
6.1-238
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INS1TI1JTE OF STEBL CONSTRUCfION,
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
~-~-~-.--...-.-----_.-..---- ---
6.1-240 PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS [Comm.CS. Comm. CS.]
PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC ESTS
6.1-241
ASTM standards for tension testing permit the reporting of the upper yield point.
Yield strength may be reported using either the 0.2 percent offset or 0.5 percent qualified under the Provisions, since rwo succ ssful tests are required Clearl
elongation under load. For steel members subject to large cyclic inelastic strains, ho~ever, the number of failed tests indicates otential problems with' the reIr'
the upper yield point can provide a misleading representation of the actual mate- ablhty of the connection. On the other hand th f.·l f .. .-
the 1 b .. ' al ure o a tested cOnnectlOn In
rial behavior. Thus, while an upper yield point is permitted by ASTM, it is not . a ~ratory should not, by Itself, eljminate t at connection from further con
permitted for the purposes of this Section. Determination of yield stress using sIderatlOn. ~s l~ng as the causes of the failure e understood and corrected an~
the 0.2 percent strain offset method based on independent testing using common the conn~ctlOn IS successfully retested, the con ection may be quite acce t~ble
specimen size for all members is required in this Appendix. This follows the ~husI' whIle the .acceptance criteria in the Provis ons have intentionally be! kep~
protocol used during the SAC investigation. sImp e, the ChoIce of a safe l' bl I •
' . ' re la e, and eco mlcal connection stilI .
consIderable Judgment. reqUIres
Since this tension testing utilizes potentially different specimen geometry, test-
ing protocol, and specimen location, differences from the material test report
are to be expected. Appendix X2 of ASTM A6 discusses the variation of tensile
properties within a heat of steel for a variety of reasons. Based on previous work,
this appendix reports the value of one standard deviation of this variance to be
8 percent of the yield strength using ASTM standards.
This special testing is not required for project materials as the strength ratios in
Table 1-6-1 were developed using standard producer material test report data.
Therefore, supplemental testing of project material should only be required if the
identity of the material is in question prior to fabrication.
Only tension tests are required in this section. Additional material s testing, how-
ever, can sometimes be a valuable aid for interpreting and extrapolating test re-
sults. Examples of additional tests, which may be useful in certain cases, include
Charpy V-Notch tests, hardness tests, chemical analysis, and others. Consider-
ation should be given to additional materials testing, where appropriate.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITIlTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INe. Seismic Provisians lar Structural Steel Buildings Mareh 9 2005 l' el Su 1 N 1
. '.'" pp ement o.
AMERICAN INslTIUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION, IN .
Most testing programs developed for prirnarily axial-load-carrying components It ~s r~cogni~ed that subassemblage testing is mo e difficult and expensive than
focus largely on uniaxial testing. However, these provisions are intended to direct um~xlal testIng of brace specimens. However, th complexity of the brace be-
the primary focus of the program toward testing of a subassemblage that imposes havlOr due to the combined rotational and axial emands, and the relative lack
combined axial and rotational deformations on the brace specimen. This reflects of t~st data on the performance of these systems, indicates that subassemblage
the view that the ability of the brace to accornrnodate the necessary rotational testmg should be perforrned.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings Mareh 9 200 . 1 S 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc. . ' " me. upp ement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION INC.
6.1-244 PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [Cornm. CT. Cornrn.CT.]
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TEST OF BRB
6.1-245
900 kN Actuator
(typ.)
Loading of Brace and
Column
Loading of Braced
Frame
16 ft
Fig. C-/-T.l Example oftest subassemblage. Fig. C-I-T.2. Schematic ofpossible test suba semblages.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplernent No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 200 ,incl. Supplernent No. 1 I
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC.
AMERICAN INsTiTUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON INc.
6.1-246 PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [Cornm. CT. Cornm. CT.]
PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TES S OF BRB
6.1-247
Rotational demands may be concentrated in the steel core extension in the region
just outside the buckling restraining mechanism. Depending on the mag~itude of A considerable number of uniaxial tests hay been performed on sorne brace
the rotational demands, limited flexural yielding of the steel core extenslOn may systems and the engineer is encouraged, wher ver possible, to submit previous
occur. Rotational demands can also be accommodated by other means, such as test data to meet these provisions. Relatively D subassemblage tests have been
tolerance in the buckling restraint layer or mechanism, elastic flexibility of the performed. This type of testing is considered a ore demanding test of the over-
all brace performance.
brace and steel core extension, or through the use of pins or spherical bearing
assemblies. It is in the engineer's best interest to inelude in a subassemblage CT5.4. Connection Details
testing all components that contribute significantly to accommodating rotational In many cases it will not be practical or reaso able to test the exact brace con-
demands. nections .present in the prototype. These provi ions are not intended to require
It is intended that the subassemblage test specimen be larger in axial-force ca- such tes.tmg. In general, the demands on the ste 1 core extension to gusset-plate
pacity than the prototype. However, the possibility exists for braces to be de- connectlOn are welI defined due to the known ial capacity of the brace and the
signed with very large axial forces. Should the brace yield force be so large as limited flexural capacity of the steel core extensi n. While the subseql.Jent design
to make subassemblage testing impractical, the engineer is expected to make of the bolted or welded gusset-plate connection .s itself a complicated issue and
use of the provisions that allow for alternate testing programs, based on building the sl.Jbject of continuing investigation, it is not .ntended that these connections
official approval and qualified peer review. Such programs may inelude, but are become the focus of the testing programo
not limited to, nonlinear finite element analysis, partial specimen testing, and For the purposes of utilizing previous test data meet the requirements of this
reduced-scale testing, in combination with full-scale uniaxial testing where ap- Appendix, the requirements for similarity betwe n the brace and subassemblage
plicable or required. brace test specimen can be considered to exelu e the steel core extension con-
nection to frame.
The steel core material was not ineluded in the list of requirements. The more
critical parameter, calculated margin of safety for the steel core projection stabil- CT5.5. Materials
ity, is required to meet or exceed the value used in the prototype ..The me~od
The intent of the provisions is to allow test data om previous test programs to
of calculating the steel core projection stability should be ineluded m the deslgn
be presented where possible. See Section CT4 fo additional commentary.
methodology.
CT5.6. Connections
CT5. BRACE TEST SPECIMEN The intent of this provision is to ensure that the e d connections of the brace test
The objective of brace test specimen testing is to establish basic design param- specimen reasonably represent those of the prot type. It is possible that due to
eters for the BRBF system. fabrication or assembly constraints variations in t-up, faying-surface prepara-
tion, or bolt or pin hole fabrication and size ma Occur. In certain cases, such
It is recognized that the fabrication tolerances used by brace manufacturers to
variations may not be detrimental to the qualifica ion of a successful cyelic test.
achieve the required brace performance may be tighter than those used for other
The final acceptability of variations in brace-end onnections rests on the opin-
fabricated structural steel members. The engineer is cautioned against ineluding ion of the building oflicial.
excessively prescriptive brace specifications, as the intent of these provisions is
that the fabrication and supply of the braces is achieved through a performance- CT6. LOADING HISTORV
based specification process. It is considered sufficient that the manufacture of
the test specimen and the prototype braces be conducted using the same quality CT6.3. Loading Sequence
control and assurance procedures, and the braces be designed using the same The subassemblage test specimen is required to ndergo combined axial and
design methodology. rotational deformations similar to thosetn the pr totype. It is recognized that
identicaI braces, in different Iocations in the bui ding, will undergo different
The engineer should also recognize that manufacturer process improvements
maximum axial and rotationaI deformation deman s. In addition, the max,imum
over time may result in sorne manufacturing and quality control and assurance
rotational and axial defornlation demands may b different at each end ·~f the
procedures changing between the time of manufacture of the brace test specimen
braceo The engineer is expected to make simplifyi g assumptions to determine
and of the prototype. In such cases reasonable judgment is required.
the most appropriate combination of rotational an axial deformatiOR demands
The allowance of previous test data (similarity) to satisfy these provisions is less for the testing programo .
restrictive for uniaxial testing than for subassemblage testing. Subassemblage
test specimen requirements are described in Section CT4.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural StÚl Buildings, March 9, 2005, incI. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITIlTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC.
AMEruCAN INsTITt!TE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, c.
6.1-248 PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [Comm. CT.
Cornm. CT.]
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS F BRB
earthquake, but testing of braces has shown this value to be easIly achlev.ed. It
is expected that as more test data and building analysis results become avaIlable Dynamical1y applied loads are not required by the rovisions. The use of slowly
these requirements may be revisited. ~pplied cyclic loads, widely described in the liter re for brace specimen tests,
IS acceptable for the purposes of these provisions. It is recognized that dynamic
The ratio of brace yield deformation, /).by, to the brace deformation correspo~d loading can considerably increase the cost of testi g, and that few laboratory fa-
ing to the design story drift, /).bm, must be calculate~ in order t? define the testm.g cilities have the capability to apply dynamic loads o very large-scale test speci-
protocol. This ratio is typically the same as the ratio of the dlsplacement amph- mens. Furthermore, the available research on dyn .c loading effects on steel
fication factor (as defined in the applicable building code) to the actual over- test specimens has not demonstrated a compelIing eed for such testing.
strength of the brace; the minimum overstrength is determined by the resistance
factor (LRFD) or the safety factor (ASD) in Section 16.2a. If rate-of-Ioading effects are thought to be poten aUy significant for the steel
core material used in the prototype, it may be poss 'ble to estimate the expected
Engineers should note that there is a minimum brace d~f~rmation demand, /).bm, change in behavior by performing coupon tests a low (test cyclic loads) and
corresponding to 1 percent story drift (Section T2); provlslOn of overstreng~ be- high (dynamic earthquake) load rates. The results om brace tests would then
yond that required to so limit the design story drift may not be .used ~s a ~~SIS to be factored accordingly.
reduce the testing protocol requirements. Testing to at least tWlce thlS mmlmum
(in other words, to 2 percent drift) is required. CTa. MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREM
Table C-T6-1 shows an example brace test protocol. For this example, it is as- Tension testing of the steel core material used in the manufacture of the test
sumed that the brace deformation corresponding to the design story drift is four specimens is required. In general, there has been g od agreement between cou-
times the yield deformation; it is also assumed that the design story drift is larger pon test results and observed tensile yield strength in full-scale uniaxial tests.
than the 1 percent minimum. The test protocol is then con.s~cted f~om steps 1 Material testing required by this appendix is cons' stent with that required for
through 4 of Section T6.3. In order to calculate the cumulatlVe l~elast1c defo~a testing of beam-to-column moment connections. Fo further information on this
tion, the cycles are converted from multiples of brac~ deformat.lOn at the deslgn topic refer to Cornmentary Appendix S, Section CS of the Provisions.
story drift, /).bm, to multiples of brace yield deformatlOn, /).by' Smce t~e .cumula-
tive inelastic drift at the end of the 2.0/).bm cycles is less than the mlmmum of
CT10. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
200/).by required for brace tests, additional cy~les. to 1.5~bm are req~ired. At the
The acceptance criteria are written so that the mini um testing data that must
end of tbree such cycles, the required cumulatIve melastlc deformatlOn has been be submitted is at least one subassemblage test an at least one uniaxial test.
reached. In many cases the subassemplage test specimen al o qualifies as a brace test
specimen provided the requirements of Appbndix T, S ction T5 are met. If project
specific subassemblage testing is to be performed it ay be simplest to perform
two subassemblage tests to meet the requirerp.ents of is section. For the purposes
of tbese requirements a single subassemblage test in orporating two braces in a
chevron or other configuration is also considered acc ptable.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, IN .
6.1-250 PART 1- QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [Cornrn. CT.
6.1-251
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Stúi Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITÜTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, !Nc.
AMERlCAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STR.ucrlO~ !Nc.
Reinforcing fillet welds are typically used in tee and comer joints where the Research and SAC studies have shown a .de variation of ultrasonic testing
load is perpendicular to the weld axis. A reinforcing fillet weld applied to a joint (UT) personnel skills for flaw detection using current AWS D 1.1, Section 6, Part
reduces the stress concentration of a nearly 90° intersection between the weld F procedures. Although not required by the rovisions, a practical examination
face or root, and the adjacent steel member. Such reinforcement is not required to determine UT technician abilities; using m ckups of joints similar to project
for most groove welds in tee or comer joints. conditions is suggested. It is also suggested that third party organizations be
Anal ysis and research have shown that the shape of the weld access hole can used to conduct these examinations of UT te hnicians because they would pro-
have a significant effect on the behavior of moment connections. The use of vide objective, comparable, and consistent te ting with the potential to use the
weld access holes, other than those prescribed by the Specification, has not been mockup samples for many examinees. Joint ockups with representative flaws
found necessary for locations such as column splices. Care should be exercised used for such examinations are expensive and difficult to fabricate.
to avoid specifying special weld access hole geometries when not justified.
In sorne situations, no weld access holes are desirable, such as in end plate CW4. NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING ROCEDURES
connections. In order to improve the reliability of ultrasoni testing (UT), written procedures
specific to the type or types of joints to be teste must be developed and tested on
In common frame configurations, specific assembly order, welding sequence, weld samples using standard reflectors. These procedures contain more specific
welding technique and other special precautions should not be necessary. It is information than the more generic provisions fAWS D 1.1 Section 6, Part F.
anticipated that such additional requirements will only be required for special
cases, such as those of unusually high restraint. ASTM E709 provides specific provisions reg ·ng the techniques of performing
magnetic particle testing (MT) and the evaluati n techniques of welds using MT.
CW3. PERSONNEL
CW5. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVI
CW3.1. QC Welding Inspectors
The inspector should be familiar with the Provisions and the AWS Dl.1 Struc- CW5.1. Intermixed Filler Metals
tural Welding Code-Steel. Because the Contractor's welding inspector typically When intermixing weld deposits made usin self-shield flux-cored welding
has a more limited range of inspection tasks, repeated consistently on the same (FCAW-S) electrodes with weld deposits mad using other welding processes,
type of work and the same types of materials, it is not required that the QC weld- the weld where the intermix has occurred y exhibit degradation of notch
ing inspector have the same broad range of knowledge, nor as many years of toughness in the interrhixed deposit. Testing s done to ensure the minimum
experience, as QA welding inspectors, who may encounter a broader range of notch toughness requirements of these provi ·ons are met in this i'ntermixed
materials, details, and situations. Also, see Commentary CW3.2. region. Testing of interinixed weld metal is o y required when the FCAW-S
process is used in compination with. another elding process, which includes
CW3.2. QA Welding Inspectors FCAW-G. It is not required when welding one FCAW-S electrode over another
AWS B5.l contains the same requirements for experience, education, training, FCAW-S electrode. It is not required when wel .ng processes other than FCAW-
and body of knowledge as the AWS QCl-Standard for AWS Certification of S are used, regardless of combination.
Welding Inspectors. The primary difference is in the examination provisions.
Under AWS B5.1, the employer of other appropriate entity may test the candi- A variety of intermix tests were performed befo e the issuance of the Provisions,
date, whereas under AWS QC1, the testing must be conducted by AWS. including tests performed in accordance with MA 353, research performed in
conjunction with various SAC invesiigations, d other independent research.
CW3.3. Nondestructive Testing Technicians Even though sorne of the details of these other t sts are somewhat different than
Ultrasonic technicians are typically certified by the employer in accordance with those of FEMA 353, results from altemative te s may be accepted by the engi-
ASNT guidelines (SNT-TC-la). ASNT CP-189 contains similar provisions, but neer. The engineer should evaluate the relative imilarity of the altemative tests
is written as a standard rather than a guideline. to those described in FEMA 353. The contracto should provide sufficient back-
ground documentation to the engineeJ:" for this valuation. It is anticipated that
Requirements for Level II certification may vary significantIy between inspec-
AWS or another organization will adopt specifi standards for perfonlling tests
tion and testing agencies. ASNT Level ID technicians are not required to perform
on intermixed filler metals similar to those tests f FEMA 353, and these will be
a hands-on practical test as a part of their ASNT examination, but typically have suitable for the purposes of the Provisions.
the skills to perform testing on a project. Those technicians classified as Level
III, without ASNT examination, typically serve more training and supervisory
roles and may not maintain the skills to perform project testing.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2 5, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NS'l'lTUíE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, !Ne. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEa CONSTRUcn N, !Nc.
6.1-254 PART 1 - WELDING PROVISIONS [Cornm.Cw. Comm. CW.] PART I - WELDING nn',\TJ'''Tt"",,,,,,
6.1-255
CW5.2. Filler Metal Diffusible Hydrogen . . . The 550 °P (300 oC) mhx.imum temperature is conservative value selected based
All welding electrodes are expected to meet the dlffus~ble hydrogen reqmre- upon the type of steels used in the SLRS. interpass temperattires may be
ments for H16 (AWS A4.3). This requirement also applIes to each ~AW elec- acceptable, and are permitted if the higher is established by testing.
trodelflux combination to be used on the project. The Provisions reqmre that. the
filler metals used not exceed a hydrogen content of 16 ml/IOO g of deposlted CW5.5. Weld Tabs
weld metal.The manufacturer's standard test for conforman ce with the H16Ii:n- Welds are sometimes specified for fue full of a connection. Weld tabs are
it is adequate, provided the manufacturer's certificate of conformance contams used to permit the starts and stops of the passes to be placed ~utside the
the test results. weld region itself, allowing for removal of the and stop conditions and their
associated discontinuities. Because the end the weld, afier tab removal, is an
The applicable filler metal specifications for P~AW, ~d ?MAW when p~r
outside surface that needs to be notch-free, removal methods and sub se-
formed with composite electrodes, do not reqmre testmg m accordance Wlth querit finishing is necessary.
AWS A4.3 to determine diffusible hydrogen content. This testing is beyond that
required by the filler metal specifications for these filler metals. At continuity plates, the end of the continuity to column flange weld near
the column flange tip perririts the use of a full tab, and removal is generally
Rather than test for diffusible hydrogen, SMAW electrodes with 10w hydrogen
efficient if properly detailed. At the bpposite of the continuity plate to col-
coatings are required by the applicable filler metal s~ecifi~ations .to have the umn flange weld, near the colümn radius,
coating moisture content measured as part of the classlfi~atlOn testmg. ~he re- tabs are not generally desirahle
and may not be practicable beeause of clip and k-area conceros. Weld tabs
sults are expressed as a percent moisture content, on a weIght (mas~) basIs: Sat- at this location, if used, ,should not be rernmredl
isfactory conformance with these moisture content requirements IS a smtable the potential of causing more harro than good.
substitute for diffusible hydrogen testing, and such electrodes should be deemed
to comply with the H16 requirement. CW5.6. Bottom Flange Welding Seque
Staggering the weld starts and stops on sides of the beam web, and
Solid electrodes for GMAW routinely deposit weld metal well within the limits
completion of each weld layer prior to starting next layer, avoids the problem
of H16, and therefore testing is waived. GMAW with composite (metal-cored)
electrodes require testing. of incomplete fusion iand trapped slag the beam web against the
column face, provided proper weld cleaning performed after each weld pass
CW5.3. Gas-Shielded Welding Processes is deposited.
When gas-shielded processes are used, weld metal ductility and CVN to~gh~ess
may degrade from moderate air movement and the subsequent loss of shleldmg. CW6. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVI
Even before porosity is noted in visual inspection, notch toughness has been DEMAND CRITICAL WELDS ON
shown to decrease in gas-shielded welds. Self-shielded processes (SMAW, SAW,
PCAW-S) are considerably more tolerant of air movement.
CW6.1. Welding Processes
The SMAW and PCAW processes have been sjl(:ce:~stiIlly used for connection
AWS Dl.l has a maximum wind speed limit of 5 mph (8 kph). The more con- qualification testing in the SAC project and other connection qualifi-
servative value of 3 mph (5 kph) has been imposed to ensure adequate CVN cation tests. In Japan, GMAW has also been The SAW process; although
toughness in welds that are part of the SLRS. not specifically used in seismic mom.ent testing, has been included
Wind speed is to be estimated in the irnmediate vicinity of the ~eld, ,:here the as an acceptable process for demand critical because the heat input levels
shielding gas may be affected. Precise monitoring of wind speed IS not mtended. may be similar to those of the other' three and because appropriate
Three mile per hour winds (5 kph) will cause modest drifting of smoke or weld- mechanical properties can be achieved. These welding processes are also
ing fume. Higher wind speeds can be felt on the face and as well as cause modest considered prequalified by AWS D 1.1.
rippling of water surfaces. Por processes such as ESW and EGW, the heat level is considerably high-
CW5.4. Maximum Interpass Temperatures er than that of the other four processes, and has not been general testing
Very high interpass temperatures cause very slow weld c~oling rates .that ad- proving the acceptability of these processes for critical welds. However,
versely affect weld and heat-affected zone (HAZ) mecharucal propertIes, par- these processes may have had limited COImeCtI(~ qualification tests performed
ticularly notch toughness and strength, and therefore may need to b~ limited for certain applications; and their use !in such may be approved by
the engineer.
to ensure adequate performance. In contrast, minimum preheat and mterpass
temperatures are based on avoidance of cracking.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provision.s for StrUctural Steel Buildings, March 9, mc!. Supplement No. i
AMERICAN mSTITlITE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC.
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CO'lisnlUCI1o/li, INC.
6.1-256 PART 1 - WELDING PROVISIONS [Comm.Cw.
6.1-257
CW6.3. Exposure Limitations on FCAW Electrodes All component tests conducted in the SAC .ect were conducted at room
FCAW electrodes may contain a seam along the electrode length as a part of the temperature, approximately 70 °P (21°C), which it was determined that an
manufacturing process. The seam may allow the flux core to absorb moisture adequate Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness 40 ft-lbs (54 J). Thelowest an-
when exposed to humid conditions during use. The rate of moisture absorption ticipated service temperature (LAST) of buildings is 50 0p (10 oC). Con-
is dependent on many factors, including the manufacturing process of the PCAW sidering the difference in loading rates seismic motions and CVN test-
wire and the nature of the flux contained within the wire, and therefore these ing, and the temperature increase of weldnlents under seismic loads, the CVN
provisions are specific to the filler metal manufacturer's brand and type of testing temperature of 70 0p (21°C) is adequate for use at 50 0p (lO
oC) LAST. '
electrode.
In the absence of specific manufacturer's recornmendations, 72 hours is a con- During the SAC study [see PEMA 355B, 2.3.3.5 (FEMA, 2000d)], it was
servative upper limit for electrode exposure. This limit is based upon tests on a deemed important to verify the filler metal welding procedure specification
variety ofPCAW wires from various manufacturers. (WPS) to ensure that this notch toughness provided. Appendix X testing
requirements for 40 ft-lb (54 J) at 70 0p (21 are intended to verify that at
When welding is suspended, one may store the electrode in protective packag- most cornmon service temperatures, ¡the milmpum notch toughness is provided
ing, where no additional accumulation of moisture is expected to occur. The type to ensure satisfactory performance in seismic
of protective packaging needed depends upon the conditions that the electrodes
will be exposed too The exposure time resumes when the filler metal is removed FEMA (FEMA, 2000b) first published this prpcedure for qualifying filler met-
from the protective packaging and put back onto the welding machine. als to meet the recornmended CVN toughness of 40 ft-lb (54 J) at
70 0p (21°C). The test procedure and test vary from existing AWS
CW6.4. Tack Welds requirements used in existing AWS filler classification test' standards.
By placing the tack welds within the joint, the potential for surface notches and In the time since publication of the FEMA filler metal manufactur-
hard heat-affected zones is minimized. The HAZ of the tack weld will be tem- ers have been conducting these tests and been certifying those materials
pered by subsequent passes when placed within the joint. that meet this requirement. It is anijcipated AWS or another accredited
Tack welds for beam flange to column welds are to be made in the weld groove. organization will adopt this AppencÜx or a test program within their
Steel backing may be tack welded to the column under the beam flange, where standards, and therefore this Appendix is on an interim basis pending
such adoption.
a reinforcing fillet weld will be placed; Tack welds between steel backing and
the underside of beam flanges are prohibited, as they create a notch effect in the Piller metal classificatio~ testing is governed by AWS A5 specifications that re-
beam flange. Any tack welds holding weld tabs, if made on the outside of the quire specific tests on weld metal that has been de(>osi·lted using prescribed electrode
joint, are required to be removed. diameters with prescribed welding cohditions. production welding may be
performed with electrodes of different and using considerably different
welding variables (amperage, voltage, travel electrode extension, position,
pIate thickness, joint geometry, preheat and . temperatures, shielding gas
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ine!. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, lNc. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STR:ucrkoN.
,-------------------------------------------------
6.1-258 PART 1 - WELD METALfWELDING PROCEDURE Cornm.CX.] Cornm.CX.] PART 1 - WELD METAL/WELDING
6.1-259
, I
type and fiow rate, for example). Such variablesmay considerably affect the ac~al
Production WPS for demand critical welds e required to be based on the heat
tensile and CVN properties achieved in production welds. Although the reqUlre-
inputs used for testing the filler metal to be ed in production. Production WPS
ment of Section 7.3a, that all filler metals be classified under AWS A5 tests for a
may utilize any combination of welding vari bIes that result in a computed heat
minimum of 20 ft-Ibf at O °P (27 J at minus 17 oC), ensures that sorne minimum
input that is not greater than the high heat i put test limit, or less than the low
level of notch toughness will be provided, there is no guarantee that 40 ft-lbf (54 J)
heat input test limit. It is not necessary for th Contractor to use the exact param-
at 70 0p (21°C) CvN toughness will be achieved under either the A5 prescribed
eters listed in this test (volts, amps, lfavel spe d), but the parameters chosen must
conditions or the wide variety of possible welding procedures and cooling rates.
result in a calculated heat input bet~een the .gh and low heat inputs tested. The
Por demand critical welds, additional testing is used to verify that the production
use ofheat input liinits outside the l~mits of able I-X-l are acceptable provided
we1d will achieve the required higher level of notch toughness under conditions
the higher limits have heen successfully teste. It is expected that heat input lev-
similar to those to be encountered in production.
els between these limits will result ih accept le mechanical properties.
Seismic Provisions Jor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1
Seismic Provisions Jor Structural Steel Building~, Mareh 9, 005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc.
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INC.
PART 1 - WELD METAL/WELDING PROCEDURE [Cornm.CX.
6.1-261
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Tensile and e10ngation resu1ts obtained from welds made with heat input va!ues PART 11. COMPOSITE STRUC URAL STEEL AND
between the high and low limits wi111ikely be bracketed by the valu.es obtal~ed REINFORCED CONCRET BUILDINGS
in the high and low heat input tests. The tensile strength an~ ~longatlOn reqUl~e
ments for we1d metal tensile test specimens stated are al1 mmlmum values, Wlth
no maximum values specified. AH tensile testing is done at room temperature,
regardless of LAST.
C1. SCOPE
Notch toughness tends to deteriorate at both very highand very low heat in~ut
These Provisions forthe seismic design of omposite Structural steel and rein-
levels Values obtained from welds made with heat input values between the hlgh
forced concrete building s are based upon th 1994 NEHRP Provisions (FEMA,
and l~w limits willlikely be greater than the values obtained at the e~tremes. The
1994) and subsequen\ modifications made i the 1997, 2000, and 2003 NEHRP
. .
CVN toughness values stated are al1 IDlrumum values,.with no maXImum values
Provisions (FEMA, 2003) and in ASCE 7 ( SCE, 2002). Since coinposite sys-
s ecified. If adequate CVN values are achieved by testmg at temp~r~tures below
~e actual test temperatures required for the demand critical weld, lt IS not neces-
tems are assemblies of steel and concrete co ponents, Part 1 of these Provisions,
the 2005 AISC Specification for Structural eel Buildings (AISC, 2005), here-
sary to perfonn the test at the higher test temperature warranted for that weld.
after referred to as the Specification and ACI 318 (ACI, 2002b), form an impor-
This Appendix is not applicable to filler metal s with a classificati?~ strength tant basis for Part n. Notable chang~s in the c mposite column design provisions
greater than E80 (E550), as the use of such filler metal s in demand cntlcal welds in Chapter 1 of the Specification will signifi antIy reduce sorne of the conflicts
is not addressed by the Provisions. between the Specification and ACI 318, and us encourage the use of composite
columns in all lateral load resistingsystems.
The most important changes in this version f Part n are the inelusion of the
new allowable strength design (ASD) format om the Specification and the ad-
dition and moving of several sections to m e Parts 1 and n more consistent.
The intent to render the Part 1 and n provisi s more uniform also led to sorne
significant technical changes, ineluding the i troduction of the concept of pro-
tected zones for the hlnging regions in sorne structural systems. In addition, a
number of important changes for the system behavior factors (R, C and no)
d
have been introduced in ASCE 7 for composit systems. The latter was an effort
to render the behavior factors more consiste t between the different structural
materials. Finally, because Sections12 and 13 have been interchanged to follow
Part 1, numerous editorial changes have been made where the previous version
referred to these sections. However, 'the techni al changes in Sections 12 and 13
are minimal.
The available research demonstrates that prop rly detailed composite members
and connections can perform reliably when ubjected to seismic ground mo-
tions. The most recent research in this area is e product of a U.S.-'1apan joint
project, whose results arrived too late for inel sion in the provisions (El-Tawil
and Bracci, 2004; Goel, 2004); however, so of that research is cited in this
Cornmentary. In particular, significant advanc s have taken place in the ability
to analyze such structures (Spacone and El-Ta il, 2004); such advances are ex-
pected to be incorporated into cornmercial so are soon.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCI'ION, lNc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRU
6.1-262 PART Il- SCOPE [Cornrn. Cl. Cornrn.CS.]
PART TI - MATERlALS
6.1-263
can equal or exceed the performance of reinforced concrete ~nly. oro structural C3.
steel on1y buildings (Deierlein and Noguchi, 2004; Yam~ouchl, Nl~hlyama ~nd
GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN EQUIREMENTS
This section is consistent with Part 1 Se tion 3. See Part 1 Cornmentary
Kobayashi, 1998). Composite systems have been extens.lveIy. used m tall bmld- Section C3.
ings throughout the world, and independent design speclficatlOns have been de-
veloped for nonseismic loading cases [Eurocode 4 (ECS, 1994)]. C4. LOADS, LOAD COMBINATION ,ANO
Careful attention to all aspects of the design is necessary in the design of com- NOMINAL STRENGTHS:
posite systems, particularly with respect to ~e general.buiIdin~ layo~t and de- ~he. requirements for loads and load combin tions for composite structures are
slffillar to those described in Part 1 ~ection 4, nd this section has been rewritten
tailing of members and connections. Composlte connectron detall s are lllustrated
throughout this Commentary to convey the basic character of the ~orce transfer
to ~arallel that sec~on. Specific seismic desig ,loading criteria, and usage limi-
in composite systems. However, these details sho~ld not neces~anI~ be trea~ed tatlOns for composlte structures are specified i the 2002 SEIIASCE 7 provisions
as design standards and the cited references provide m?re sp~clfic mfo~atlOn (AS CE, 2002).
on the design of composite connections. For a general dlscusSlOn of ~ese Issues
and sorne specific design examples, refer to Viest, Colaco,- Furlong, Gnffis, Leon The calculation of seismic loads for comp site systems per the 2002 SEII
and Wyllie (1997). AS CE 7 provisions is the same as is desc . ed for steel Structures in Part 1
Cornmentary Section C4. The seismic respons modification factors R and C for
The design and construction of composite elements and syst~~s continues. to sorne structural systems have been changed i SEIIASCE 7 to make' them more
d
evolve in practice. Except where explicitly stated, thes~ Provl~lOns are not 1~ consistent with similar systems in structural eel on1y and reinforced concrete
.tended to limit the application of new systems for WhlCh testmg and analYS1S only systems. This is based on the fact that, hen carefully designed and de-
demonstrates that the structure has adequate strength, ductility, and toughness. tailed according to these Provisions, the over inelastic response for composite
It is generally anticipated that the overall behavior of the composite .systems systerns should be similar to comparable steel and reinforced concrete systems.
herein will be similar to that for counterpart structural steel systems o~ remforced Therefore, where specific loading requireme ts are not specified in the appli-
concrete systems and that inelastic deformations will occur in conventlOnal ways, cable building code for composite systems, a propriate values for the seismic
such as flexural yieIding of beams in fully restrained (FR) moment ~rames .or response factors can be' inferred from specified values for steel andlo! reinforced
axial yielding andlor buck1ing of braces in braced fram~s. ~owev~r, dlfferentIal concrete systems. These are predicated upon eeting the design and detailing
stiffness between steel and concrete elements is more slgmficant m the calcula- requirements for the composite systems speci ed in these Provisions. As stated
tion of internal forces and deformations of composite systems than for s~ctur~l in the User Note, for systems not included in e applicable building code, the
values should be taken from SEIIASCE 7.
steel only or reinforced concrete only systems. For exampIe, defo~atlOns m
composite elements can vary considerably due to the effects of cracking.
cs. MATERIALS
When systems have both ductile and nonductile elements, the relative ~tiffne~s
ThelimitationsinSection5.1 onstruct~ralsteelgr des used withPartIlrequirements
of each should be properly modeled; the ductile elements ~an deform .melastl-
are the sarne as those given in Part 1, Sections 6 and 7. The limitations"in Section
cally whiIe the nonductile elements remain nominalIy elastlc. When usmg e1as-
5.2 on specified concr¿te compressive strengt in composite members are the
tic analysis, member stiffness should be reduced to account for ~e degre~ ~f
same as those given in the Specification Chapter and ACI 318 Chapter 21. While
cracking at the onset of significant yielding in the structure. Addlt~onalIy, lt IS
these limitations are p3fticularly appropriate f¡ construction in seismic design
necessary to account for material overstrength that may alter relatlve strength
categories D and higher, they apply in any seis c design category when systems
and stiffness.
are designed with the assumption that inelastic eformation will be required.
C2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, At this time, there is in~ufficient data to genera specification requirements for
the shear strength of stU?S subjected to inelastic cyclic loads, although it is cIear
ANO STANDARDS
that sorne strength and stiffness reduction occ s with cycling (McMullin and
The majority of the specifications needed for Part 11 have already bee.n refe~-
· Part 1 and are thus inc1uded by reference. Those listed here Wlth Astaneh, 1994; Civjan and Singh, 2003). The egradation in behavior is par-
enced m . . thelr
h' ticularly serious if the studs are subjeéted to co bined tension and shear (Saari,
appropriate revision date are appIicable to Part 11 onIy. A notable Shlft m t IS
section is that the reference to ACI 318 has now been moved to Part I. Hajjar, Schultz and Shield, 2004), and a speci c reduction for combined load
cases is given in Section 16. For other composi e members that are part of the
SLRS, a reduction to 75 percent of the stud str ngth given in the Spécification
is suggested to allow for the effect of cyc1ic lo ds if the studs are expected to
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplernent No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 20 5, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL tONsTRucn , INc.
PART TI - MATERIALS Cornm. C6.]
6.1-264 [Cornm.C5.
6.1-265
yield. At this time, the ductility demands on shear studs in floor beams and dia- p~nciples of reinforced concrete design (ACI 2002b) using the conCrete and
phragms are not wel1 characterized, and thus only a suggestion is given in this remforcement aboye the metal deck ribs and ig oring the beneficial effect of the
Cornmentary. concrete in the flutes.
Shear forces are transferred through welds an or shear devices in the collector
C6. COMPOSITE MEMBERS and boundary elements. Fasteners between the iaphragm and the steel frarning
C6.1. Scope should be capable of transferring forces usin either welds or shear devices.
These Provisions address the seismic design requirements that should be applied Where concrete fill is present, it is generally dvisable to use mechanical de-
in addition to the basic design requirements for gravity and wind loading. vices such as headed shear stud connectors to tr sfer diaphragm forces' between
the slab an~ col~ector0>0~~dary elements, parti ularly in complex shaped dia-
C6.2. Composite Floor and Roof Slabs p~rag~s ':l.th ~lscontmUltIes. However, in lo -rise buildings without abrupt
In composite construction, floor and roof slabs typically consist of either com- dlscontmUltIes m the shape of the diaphragms r in the seismic loadresisting
posite or noncomposite metal deck slabs that are connected to the structural system, the standard metal deck attachment proc dures may be acceptable.
frarning to provide an in-plane composite diaphragm that collects and distributes
seismic loads. Generally, composite action is distinguished from noncomposite
C6.3. Composite Beams
action on the basis of the out-of-plane shear and flexural behavior and design These provisions apply only to composite beams that are part of the seismic load
assumptions. resisting system.
Composite metal deck slabs are those for which the concrete fill and metal deck When the design of a composite beam satisfies Equation 6-1, the strain in the
work together to resist out-of-plane bending and out-of-plane shear. Flexural steel at the ext~eme fiber .will be at least five time the tensile yield strain prior to
strength design procedures and codes of practice for such slabs are well estab- c~ncrete crushing at stram equal to 0.003. It is e pected that this ductility limit
lished (ASCE, 1991a and 1991b; AISI, 2001; SDI, 2001a, 2001b). wIll control the beam geometry only in,extreme eam/slab proportions.
Noncomposite metal deck slabs are one-way or two-way reinforced con- While th.ese Provi~ions permit the design of com osite beams based solely upon
crete slabs for which the metal deck acts as formwork during construction, the reqUIrements l~ the Specijication, the effect of reversed cyc1ic loading on
but is not relied upon for composite action. Noncomposite metal deck slabs, the s~ength and stIffness .of shear studs should e considered. This is 'particu-
particularly those used as roofs, can be formed with metal deck and overlaid larly lmport~t. for C-SMI; where the design load are calculated assuming large
with insulating concrete fill that is not relied upon for out-of-plane strength me~ber ductI.hty and toughness. In the absence f test data to support specific
and stiffness. Whether or not the slab is designed for composite out-of- reqUIrements m these Provisions, the folIowing s ecial measures should be con-
plane action, the concrete fill inhibits buck1ing of the metal deck, increasing sidered .in C-SMF: (1) implementation' of an ins ectionand quality assurance
the in-plane strength and stiffness of the diaphragm over that of the bare steel ~lan to msure proper welding of shearstud con ectors to the beams (see Sec-
deck. tIon~ 18 ~nd 19); and (2) use of additional shear stud connectors beyond those
reqUlred m the Specification immediately adjacen to regions of the beams where
The diaphragm should be designed to collect and distribute seismic loads to the plastic hinging is expected.
seismic load resisting system. In sorne cases, loads from other floors should also
be inc1uded, such as at a level where a change in the structural stiffness results in C6.4. Encased Composite Columns
redistribution. Recornmended diaphragm (in-plane) shear strength and stiffness T~e basic requirements and limitations for dete ·ning the design strength of
values for metal deck and composite diaphragms are available for design from reznforced-concrete encaslfd composite i columns e the same as those in the
industry sources that are based upon tests and recornmended by the applicable Specijication. Additional ~quirements for reinfor ing bar details of composite
building code (SDI, 2004; SDI, 2001a, 2001b). In addition, research on compos- columns that are not covered in the Specijication are inc1uded based on provi-
ite diaphragms has been reported in the literature (Easterling and Porter, 1994). sions in ACI 318.
As the thickness of concrete over the steel deck is increased, the shear strength Comp?s~te columns can be an ideal solrttion for u e in seismic regions because
can approach that for a concrete slab ofthe same thickness. For example, in com- of thelr mherent structural redundancy (Viest an others, 1997; El-Tawil and
posite floor deck diaphragms having cover depths between 2 in. (51 mm) and Deierlein, 1999).For example, if a composite col mn is designed such that the
6 in. (152 mm), measured shear stresses on the order of 3.5..Ji:
(where ..Ji: structural steel can carry most or all of the dead lo d acting alone, then an extra
and f: are in units of psi) have been reported. In such cases, the diaphiagm degree of protection and safety is afforded, even i asevere earthquake where
strength of concrete metal deck slabs can be conservatively based on the excursions into the inelastic range can be expected to deteriorate concrete cover
Seismic Provisions Jor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic ProvisionsJor Structural Steel Buildings, M~eh 9, 2005 inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, 1Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, NC.
-----------------------------------~_._._._._ .. _----~--------------
6.1-266 PART TI - COMPOSITE MEMBERS [Cornm. C6. Comm.C6.]
PARTII-COMPOSITEME~MI~ER~S
6.1-267
and buckle reinforcing steel. However, as with any column of concrete and (5) The requirements for the steel 'core are les:setltiallv the same as those for
reinforcement, the designer should be aware of the constructability concerns with composite columns as specified'in the and ACI 318. In addi-
the placement of reinforcement and potential for congestiono This is particularly tion, earthquake da.mage to encased columns in Japan (Azizin-
true at beam-to-co!umn connections where potential interference between a steel ami ni and Ghosh, i 996) highIights the to consider the effects of abrupt
spandrel beam, a perpendicular floor beam, vertical bars, joint ties, and shear changes in stiffness and strengtli where composite colUIhns transi-
stud connectors can cause difficulty in reinforcing bar placement and a potential tion into reinforced concrete col~mns
for honeycombing of the concrete.
C6.4b. Intermediate Seismic System
Seismic detailing requirements for composite columns are specified in the fol-
The more stringent tie spacing requirements intermediate seismic systems
lowing three categories: ordinary, intermediate, and special. The required level folIow those for reinforced concrete tolumns .
of detailing is specified in these Provisions for seismic systems in Sections 8 reglOns of moderate seismicity
as specified in ACI 318 Chapter 21 (Section 1.8). These requirements are ap-
through 17. The ordinary detailing requirements of Section 6.4a are intended plied to aH composite columns for s"~tems peqrutl[ea . .
as basic requirements for all cases. Intermediate requirements are intended for J m selsmic design category
C to make the composite column details at equivalent to the minimum level
seismic systems permitted in seismic design category C, and special require-
of detailing for columns in intermediate frames of reinforced concrete
ments are intended for seismic systems permitted in seismic design categories (FEMA, 2000e; ICC, 2003).
D and aboye.
C6.4c. Special Seismic System Requir~rnAIr'tt~
C6.4a. Ordinary Seismic System Requirements The additional requirements for encased "OInpll)Sil:e
". columns used in special seis-
These requirements are intended to supplement the basic requirements of the míc systems are based upon comparable rec[UII~eItlents for structural steel and rein-
Specification for encased composite columns in all seismic design categories.
forced concrete columns in systems permitted seismic design categories D and
(1) Specific instructions are given for the determination of the nominal shear aboye (FEMA, 2003; ICC, 2003). For additional . of these requirements,
strength in concrete encased steel composite members including assignment see the Cornmentary for Part 1 in these and ACI 318 Chapter!21.
of sorne shear to the reinforced concrete encasement. Examples for deter-
The minimum tie area requirement in Equation 1 is based upon a similar provi-
mining the effective shear width, b w' of the reinforced concrete encasement
sion in ACI 318 Section 21.4.4, except that the uired tie area is reduced to take
are illustrated in Figure C-II-6.1. These provisions exc1ude any strength, Ve'
into account the steel coreo The tie area in Equation 6-1 and related
assigned to concrete alone (Furlong, 1997). tíe detailing provisions are waived if the steel f th
o· e composite m~mber can
(2) The provisions in this subsection require that shear connectors be provided alone resist the expected (arbitrary point in gravity load on the column
to transfer all caIculated axial forces between the structural steel and the because additional confinem.ent of the concrete i
not necessary if the steel core
concrete, neglecting the contribution of bond and friction. Friction between can inhibit colIapse afier an extreme. seismic The load combination of
the structural steel and concrete is assumed to transfer the longitudinal shear 1.0D + 0.5L is based upon a similar cOllllbirlatiion/
proposed as loading criteria for
stresses required to develop the plastic bending strength of the cross sec- structural safety under fue conditions (bl.1m!;!w()hcl and Corotis, 1991).
tion. However, ~imum shear studs snould be provided according to the
maximum spacing limit of 16 in. (406 mm). Further information regarding
the design of shear connectors for encased members is available (Furlong,
1997; Griffis, 1992a, 1992b).
(3) The tie requirements in this section are essentially the same as those for
composite columns in ACI 318 Chapter 10.
(4) The requirements for longitudinal bars are essentially the same as those
that apply to composite columns for low- and nonseismic design as speci-
fied in ACI 318. The distinction between load-carrying and restraining bars
is made to allow for longitudinal bars (restraining bars) that are provided
solely for erection purposes and to improve confinement of the concrete.
Due to interference with steel beams frarning into the encased members, the
restraining bars are often discontinuous at floor levels and, therefore, are not Fig. C-II-6.1. Effective widths lor sh~ar strength cdlculation
encased composite columns.
inc1uded in determining the column strength.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.ucrIO*,
_ _-----------------------------_.
........ __ .....__.._.~--------
6.1-268 PART TI - COMPOSlTE MEMBERS [Cornm.C6. Cornm. C7.] PART II - COMPOSITE ~n''''''''rT">''''''''¡''r''T~
I 6.1-269
The requirements for composite columns in C-SMF are based upon similar re- up to 30 in. (762 mm). AIternatively, the shear for filled tubes ban be de-
quirements for steel and reinforced concrete columns in SMF (FEMA, 2003; termined in a manner that is similar to that for concrete columns with
ICC, 2003). For additional commentaries, see Part I in these Provisions and SEII the steel tube consider~d as shear and its shear yielding strength
ASCE7. neglected. However, glven the upper limit on shear strength as a functio f
h. . no
The strong-column/weak.-beam (SC/WB) concept foHows that used for steel and concrete crus mg m ACI 318, this approach only be advantageous for
reinforced concrete columns in SMF. Where the formation of a plastic hinge at columns with low ratios of structural steel to areas (Furlong, 1997).
the column base is likely or unavoidable, such as with a fixed base, the detail- The more stringent slenderness critena for the thickness in square or rect-
ing should provide for adequate plastic rotational ductility. For seismic design angular HSS is based upo, n comparable "~cluiI·eI!rlents f rom P
, H artI ·m th'ese Provi-
category E, special details, such as steel jacketing of the column base, should be sions for unfilled HSS used in SMF. the provisions in the Specifica-
considered to avoid spalling and crushing of the concrete. tion and Part I in these Provisions, the ratio for unfilled HSS in
Closed hoops are required to ensure that the concrete confinement and nominal SMF is about 80 percent of those for ÓMF same ratio of 0.8 was applied
shear strength are maintained under large inelastic deformations. The hoop de- to the standard (nonseisl~lÍc) bit ratio for fill~d S in the Specification. The re-
tailing requirements are equivalent to those for reinforced concrete columns in duced slenderness criterion was imposed as a measure until further
SMF. The transverse reinforcement provisions are considered to be conservative research data becomes available on the cyc1ic of filled square and rect-
since composite columns generally will perform better than comparable rein- angular tubes. More stringent Dlt ratio limits circular pipes are not applied as
forced concrete columns with similar confinement. However, further research is data are available to show the standard Dlt is sufficient for seismic design
(Boyd, Cofer and McLean, 1995; Schneider, 1 ).
required to determine to what degree the transverse reinforcement requirements
can be reduced for composite columns. It should be recognized that the c10sed
hoop and cross-tie requirements for C-SMF may require special details such as
C7. COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS
those suggested in Figure C-ll-6.2 to facilitate the erection of the reinforcement C7.1 Scope
around the steel coreo Ties are required to be anchored into the confined core of The use of composite connections often slrnpJljifiles sorne of the special chal-
the column to provide effective confinement. lenges associated with traditional steel and construction. For example,
Filled Composite Columns cornpared to structural steel, cornposite often avoid or minimize
C6.5.
The basic requirements and limitations for detailing and determining the de- the use of field welding, and cornpared to relntp1rce:d
instances where anchorage and development of
sign strength of fiHed composite columns are the same as those in Specification
a problem.
Chapter 1.
The shear strength of the filled member is conservatively limited to the nominal Given the rnany alternative configurations of co~nplosílte structures and connec-
shear yield strength of the hoHow structural section (HSS) because the actual tions, there are few standard details for in composite construction
shear strength contribution of the concrete fill has not yet been determined in (Griffis, 1992b; Goel, 1992; Goel, 1993). tests are available for several
testing. This approach is recommended until tests are conducted (Furlong, 1997; connection details that are suitable fOl- seismic References are given in
ECS, 1994). Even with this conservative approach, shear strength rarely governs this Section of the Commentary and Sections C8 to C17~ In rnost
the design of typical filled composite columns with cross-sectional dimensions cornposite structures built to date, engineers designed connectidns using
basic rnechanics, equilibriurn, existing standards steel and concrete Construc-
tion, test data, and good judgrnent. The in this Section are intended
r:;:==::;¡¡:::==::;;:I- Load Carrying Bar to help standardize and irnprove design practice establishing basic b~havioral
assurnptions for developing design rnodels that equilibrium of internal
forces in the connection for seisrnic designo
ShearStuds
C7.2 General Requirements
Restralning Bar The requirernents for deformation capacity to both connections designed
for gravity load only and connections that are of the seismic load 'resisting
system. The ductility req~irernent for gravity only connections is intended
to avoid failure in gravity connections that rnay rotational restrain~ but lirn-
Fig. C-Il-6.2. Example of a closed hoop detailfor an encased composite column. ited rotation capacity. For example, shown in C-I1-7.1 is a co~ection
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INSlTTIlTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIO*.
6.1-270 PART TI - COMPOSlTE CONNECTlONS [Cornm. C7. Comm. C7.] PART TI -'COMPOSlTE \",V!'Il'IJ.J\...11\",'1'l0 6.1-271
between a reinforced concrete wall and steel beam that is designed to resist C7.3. Nominal Strength of Connectio
gravity loads and is not considered to be part of the seismic load resisting system.
In general, forces between structural steel and will be transf~rred by a
However, this connection is required to be designed to maintain its vertical shear
combination of bond, adhesion, friction and bearing. Transfers by bond
strength under rotations andlor moments that are imposed by inelastic seismic
and adhesion are not permitted for nominal calculation purposes be-
deformations of the structure.
cause: (1) these mechanisms are not effective inltransfeming load undet inelastic
In calculating the required strength of connections based on the nominal strength load reversals; and (2) the effectiveness of the is highly variabl~ depend-
of the connected members, allowance should be made for aH components of the ing on the surface cop.ditions of the steel and and consolidadon of the
members that may increase the nominal strength aboye that usually calculated concrete.
in designo For example, this may occur in beams where the negative moment
Transfer by friction shall be calculated using shear friction provisiolls in ACI
strength provided by slab reinforcement is often neglected in design but will
318 where the friction is provided by' the clamlbing action of steel tieS or studs
increase the moments applied through the beam-to-column connection. Another
or from compressive stresses under applied Since the provisions for shear
example is in filled tubular braces where the increased tensile and compressive
friction in ACI 318 are based largely on tests, the values are reduced
strength of the brace due to concrete should be considered in determining the
by 25 percent where large inelastic stress are expected. This reduction
required connection strength. Because the evaluation of such conditions is case
is considered to be a conservative requirement does not appear in ACI 318
specific, these provisions do not specify any allowances to account for over-
but is applied herein due to the relativelack of with certain configura-
strength. However, as specified in Part 1, Section 6.2, calculations for the re- tions of composite structures.
quired strength of connections should, as a minimum, be made using the expect-
ed yield strength of the connected steel member. Where connections resist forces In many composite connections, steel co:mr;loneÍ11ts are encased by concrete that
imposed by yielding of steel in reinforced concrete members, ACI 318, Section will inhibit or fully prevent local buckling. seismic deign where inelastic
21.5 implies an expected yield strength equal to 1.25Fy for reinforcing bars. load reversals are likely, concrete encasement 1 be effective only if it is prop-
erly confined. One method of confinement is reinforcing bars that are fully
anchored into the confined core of the (using requirements for hoops
in ACI 318, Chapter 21 ).' Adequate also may occur without special
reinforcement where the concrete cover is thick. The effectiveness of the
latter type of confinement should be by tests.
For fully encased connections between steel composite) beams and rein-
forced concrete (or composite) columhs such shown in Figure C-Il-7.2, the
panel zone nominal shear strength can' be as the sum of contributions
from the reinforced conGrete and steel shear (see Figure C-Il-7.3). This
superpo~ition ~f strengths for ca1culating the zone nominal shear strength
is used in detailed design guidelines (Deierlein, and Yura, 1989; ASCE,
1994; Parra-Montesinos 'and Wight, 2001) for connections that are
supported by test dat~ (Sheikh, DeierMin, Yura 1989; Kannoand Dei-
erlein, 1997; Nishiyama, Hasegawa ahd ., 1990; Parra-Montesinos
and Wight, 2001). Further information on the
is included in Commentary Part Il, Section C9.
Reinforcing bars in and around the joint region the dual functions ofresist-
ing ca1culated internal tension forces and nr{~,,;,rl;In,CT confinement to the concrete.
Internal tension forces can be ca1culated using engineering models
8teel Roor Beam that satisfy equilibrium (for example, classical theory, the truss
analogy, strut and tie models). Tie for confinement usually are
based on empirical models based on test data past performance of structures
(ACI, 2002a; Kitayama, Otani and Aoyama, 1
Fig. C-JI-J.]. Steel beam-to-RC wall gravity load shear connection.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc. AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIQN,
6.1-272 PART II - COMPOSlTE CONNECTIONS [Comm. C7.
Comm. C7.]
PART II - COMPOSlTE CONNE TIONS
6.1-273
(1) In connections such as those in C-PRMF, the force transfer between the con-
crete slab and the steel column requires careful detailing. For C-PRMF con-
nections (see Figure C-II-7.4), the strength of the concrete bearing against
the column flange should be checked (Green, Leon and Rassati, 2004). Only
the solid portion of the slab (area aboye the ribs) should be counted, and
the nominal bearing strength should be limited to 1.2f'c (Ammerman and
Leon, 1990). In addition, because the force transfer implies the formation
of a large compressive strut between the slab bars and the column flange,
1 •
adequate transverse steel reinforcement should be provided in the slab to
form the tension tie. From equilibrium calculations, this amount should be
the same as that provided as longitudinal reinforcement and should extend
at least 12 in. (305 mm) beyond either side ofthe effective slab width.
(2) Due to the limited size of joints and the congestion of reinforcement, it often
is difficult to provide the reinforcing bar development lengths specified in
ACI 318 for transverse column reinforcement in joints. Therefore, it is im-
portant to take into account the special requirements and recommendations
for tie requirements as specified for reinforced concrete connections in ACI
318, Section 21.5 and in ACI (2002a), Kitayama and others (1987), Sheikh
I
and Uzumeri (1980), Park, Priestley and Gill (1982), and Saatcioglu (1991).
Test data (Sheikh and others, 1989; Kanno and Deierlein, 1997; Nishiyama
and others, 1990) on composite beam-to-column connections similar to the
one shown in Figure C-II-7.2indicate that the face bearing (stiffener) plates
attached to the steel beam provide effective concrete confinement.
(3) As in reinforced concrete connections, large bond stress transfer of loads
to column bars passing through beam-to-column connections can result in
slippage of the bars under extreme loadings. Current practice for reinforced
concrete connections is to control this slippage by limiting the maximum
longitudinal bar sizes as described in ACI (2002a).
Column
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCITON, !Nc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings M' arch 9 200 . 1 S I '
, " m e . upp ement No. 1!
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION !Nc. '
Cornrn.C8.]
PART n - COMPOSITE PR MOMENT FRAMES [Cornm.C8. PART TI - ~OMPOSITE PR.
6.1-275
COMPOSITE PARTIALLV RESTRAINED (PR) In the design of PR composite cOIDiections, is assumed that bendi~g and shear
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steell)uildings, March 9, 2005~ncl. Supplernent No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Building~, March 9,
AMERICAN INS1TIUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, C. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEt Cm~srn~uc1~N
6.1-276 PART TI - COMPOSITE PR MOMENT FRAMES [Comm.C8. Comm. C9.]
PART TI - COMPOSlTE SPECIAL MO ENT FRAMES
6.1-277
Because the moments of inertia for composite beams in the negative and positive C9.4. Moment Connections I
regions are different, the use of either value alone for the beam members in the A schematic connection drawing f(j)r com o ite . .
analysis can lead to significant errors. Therefore, the use of a weighted average concrete columns is shown in Figure C-II-~ hmoment frames Wlth remforced
is recommended (Arnmerman and Leon, 1990; Leon and Ammerman, 1990; ously through the column and is s' liced a' w ere the steel beam nms continu-
Zaremba, 1988). nection. Often, a sma,ll steel cOlum~ that is =~::::m the beam-to-<¡:o!umn con-
erection and is later encased in th . t pted by the beam lS used for
C9. .COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (C-SMF) Since the late e rem orce concrete column (Griffis, 1992b).
1980s, more than 60 large-sc le tests of thi .
have been conducted in the United'St t J s type o~ connection
C9.1. Scope cyelic loading (Sheikh and others V98~~~an apan u~der ?oth monotonic and
Composite moment frames inelude a variety of configurations where steel or and others 1990' Parra M t ." ,an o and Delerlem, 1997; Nishiyama
composite beams are combined with reinforced concrete or composite columns. L' ' , : - on esmos and Wi ht, 2000; Chou and Uan 20 .
lang and Parra-Montesinos 2004) Th . g, 02,
fully detailed connections c~ perf~~ a: ~ l:t:sof ~e~e tests sh.ow that care-
In particular, composite frames with steel floor framing and composite or rein-
forced concrete columns have been used in recent years as a cost-effective alter-
reinforced concrete connections. In¡ articul s.elsffilcally deslgned steel or
native to frames with reinforced concrete floors (Furlong, 1997; Griffis, 1992b).
For seismic design, composite moment frames are elassified as special, interme- Figure C-11-7.2 avoid the need for fi~~d weldi ~~;:l: ~~: ~ the one sho,:~ in
diate, or ordinary depending upon the detailing requirements for the members beam-to-column junction. Therefore the .. ange at the cntIcal
to the fracture behavior that . .' se ~ mts are generally nOLsusceptible
and connections of the frame. Based on SEIIASCE 7 (AS CE, 2002), C-SMF are lS n0'V recogm ed as a critical as t f Id
primarily intended for use in seismiC design categqries D and aboye. Design and steel moment connections Tests h' h pec o we ed
. ave s own at of the man 'bl
strengthening the joint face b . 1 ' YpOSSl e ways of
plates (Figure C-II-9.1) attach::;:~~ ::es (s e Figure C-I~-7.2) and steel band
detailing provisions for C-SMF are comparable to those required for steel and
reinforced concrete SMF and are intended to confine inelastic deformation to the am
ing the joint shear strength of ..¡: d e very effectIve for both mobiliz-
beams. Since the inelastic behavior of C-SMF is comparable to that for steel or reml0rce co crete and prov'di fi
to the concrete. Further informatl' d' 1 ng con nement
reinforced concrete SMF, the R and Cd values are the same as for those systems. on on eSlg methods and t' t
composite connections is available in .d l' equa lOns or these
C9.2. Columns and others 1990) and Parra M t . gUl e m s prepared by ASCE (Nishiyama
, - on esmos and . h (200
In the past, little specific research had been conducted on the cyclic performance scope of the current ASCE G 'd l' 19 t i ) . Note that while the
Ul e mes (AS 1994) r 't th . .
of encased and filled columns, except as part of work on connection behavior to regions of low to moderate . " '. lml s err apphcation
Gu' d l' . selsffilclty, rece test data indicate that the ASCE
and design (Kanno and Deierlein, 1997). Recently that has begun to change, 1 e mes are adequate for regions of hi h s· "
particularly with respect to filled tubes at both the experimental and theoretical Deierlein 1997' N' h' , g elsffilclty as well (Kanno and
, ,1S lyama and others 199 P M .
levels. (Varma, Rieles, Sause and Lu, 2002, 2004; Hajjar, Gourley and Olson, Wight, 2003). , a r r a - ontesmos, Liang and
1997; Tort and Hajjar, 2004).
C9.3. Beams
The use of composite trusses as flexural members in C-SMF is not permitted un-
less substantiating evidence is provided to demonstrate adequate seismic resis- Stiffeners
tance of the system. This limitation applies only to members that are part of the
seismic load resisting system and does not apply to joists and trusses that carry
gravity loads oniy. Trusses and open web joists generally are regarded as ineffec-
tive as flexural members in lateral load systems unless either (1) the web mem-
bers have been carefully detailed through a limit-state design approach to delay,
•
control, or avoid overall buckling of compression members, local buckling, or
failures at the connections (Itani and Goel, 1991) or (2) a strong-beam/weak-
~=.==:!I. /
Longitudinal Steel Beam (Through iJoint)
column mechanism is adopted and the truss and its connections proportioned Reinforcement .........-cLL--+~_--L-
accordingly (Camacho and Galambos, 1993). Both approaches can be used for Reinforced Concrete Column
one-story industrial-type structures where the gravity loads are small and ductil-
ity demands on the critical members can be sustained. Under these conditions
F:19. C-1I-9.1. Steel band piates usedi lor streng hening the joint.
and when properly proportioned, these systems have been shown to provide
adequate ductility and energy dissipation capability.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings .Mareh 9 20 5' 1S
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, INc. AMEru IN '," me. upplement No. 1
CAN STITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcn , INC.
Connections between steel beams and encased composite columns (see Figure C10.
C-I1-9.2) have been used and tested extensively in Japan where design provisions ENTFRAMES
are ineluded in Architectural Institute of Japan standards (AIJ, 1991). Altema-
tively, the connection strength can be conservatively calculated as the strength The basic construction and con~ections C-IMF are similar to C-SMF
of the connection of the steel beam to the steel column. Or, depending upon the except that many of the seismic U .... l.<l.UJlU~ requirements have been relaxed.
joint proportions and detail, where appropriate, the strength can be calculated C-IMF are limited for use in seismic category C and below, and provi-
using an adaptation of design models for connections between steel beams and sions for C-IMF are comparable to those . for reinforced concrete IMF
reinforced concrete columns (AS CE, 1994). One disadvantage of this connec- and between those for steel IMF and The R and Cd values for C-IMF
tion detail compared to the one shown in Figure C-I1-7.2 is that, like standard are equal to those for reinforced concrete and between those for steel IMF
andOME
steel construction, the detail in Figure C-I1-9.2 requires welding of the beam
flange to the steel column. C11. COMPOSITE OROINARV MORIIC ..,...... FRAMES (C-OMF)
Connections to filled composite columns (see Figure C-I1-9.3) have been used C-OMF represent a type of composite frame that is designed and de-
less frequently but there has been substantial recent research that will lead to tailed following the Specification and ACI 3 (ACI, 2002b), excluding Chapter
practical design recornmendations in the near future (Azizinamini and Sch- 21. C-OMF are limited to seismic!design A and B, and the design
neider, 2004; Rieles, Peng and Lu, 2004). Where the steel beams run continu- provisions are comparable to those for' concrete and steel frames that
ously through the composite column, the intemalload transfer mechanisms and are designed without any special seismic The R and Cd values for C-
behavior of these connections are similar to those for connections to reinforced OMF are chosen accordingly.
concrete columns (Figure C-I1-7.2). Otherwise, where the beam is interrupted at
the column face, special details are needed to transfer the column flange loads C12. COMPOSITE,SPECIAL CONC, NTRICALLV BRACEO
through the connection. FRAMES (C-CBF)
These Provisions require that connections in C-SMF meet the same story drift C-CBF is one of the two types ofcompo' braced frames that is specially
capacity of 0.04 radian as required for steel SMF in Part 1. In connection details detailed for seismic design categories C and ; the other is C-EBE While
where the beam runs continuously through the joint (Figure C-I1-7.2) and the experience using C-CBF is limited in high regions, the design provisions
connection is not susceptible to fracture, then the connection design can be sub- for C-CBF are intended to result in behavior cplmparable to steel SCBF, wherein
stantiated from available test data that is not subjected to requirements such as the braces often are the elements most to inelastic deforrhations (see
those described in Part 1, Appendix S. However, where the connection is inter- Part 1 Commentary Section C13). The R and d values and usage lirrtitations for
rupted and fracture is of concem, then connection performance should be sub- C-CBF are similar to those for steel SCBE
stantiated following requirements similar to those in Part 1, Appendix S.
Concrete Alled
Tube or Pipe
11
Face Bearlng Plates 11
longitudinal 11
Retn
. forcementl ~
~.
~ ..
~ • ~cp
~
:~
~:
11
la • .• 1==;:::=1 !t:=======-:~~==I
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STR:ucrt>N, INe.
PART TI - COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCEN1RICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C12. Comm. C12.] PART TI - COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRIC LY BRACED FRAMES
6.1-280 6.1-281
In cases where composite braces are used (either filled or encased), the concrete
has the potential to stiffen the steel section and prevent or deter brace buckling
while at the sarne time increasing the capability to dissipate energy. The filling
of hollow structural sections (HSS) with concrete has been shown to effectively ShearStuds
stiffen the HSS waHs and inhibit local buckling (Goel and Lee, 1992). For en-
cased steel braces, the concrete should be sufficiently reinforced and confined to
prevent the steel shape from buckling. It is recornrnended that composite braces
be designed to meet aH requirements of composite columns as specified in Part
Il, Sections 6.4a through 6.4c. Composite braces in tension should be designed
based on the steel section alone unless test data justify higher strengths. Braces
that are all steel should be designed to meet aH requirements for steel braces in
Part 1 of these Provisions. Reinforced concrete and composite columns in C-
CBF are detailed with similar requirements to colurnns in C-SMF, and special
attention should be paid to the detailing of the connection elements (MacRae,
Roeder, Gunderson and Kimura, 2004). Encasad Steel CoIumn
Examples of connections used in C-CBF are shown in Figures C-II -12.1 through
C-Il-12.3. Careful design and detailing ofthe connections in a C-CBF is required
to prevent failure before developing the strength of the braces in either tension or
compression. AH connection strengths should be capable of developing the full Fig. C-Il-12.2. Reinforced concrete (or composite) colu n-to-steel concentric braceo
strength of the braces in tension and compression. Where the brace is composite,
the added brace strength afforded by the concrete should be considered. In such
cases, it would be unconservative to base the connection strength on the steel
section alone. Connection design and detailing should recognize that buckling
of the brace could cause excessive rotation at the brace ends and lead to local
connection failure.
ShearStuds
i
i
Concrete Filled Tube
!
or Pipe CoIUrM
---1
I
Encased Steel Column
Seismic Provisions far Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Pravisians far Structural Steel Buildings; Mareh 9, 2 05, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITIlTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, INC. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcn N, me.
6.1-282 PART TI - COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. Cl3. Comm. C15.] PART 11 - ORDINARY REINFORCED rV"'>.T"",.,h~~ SHEAR WALLS 6.1-283
C13. COMPOSITE OROINARV BRACEO FRAMES (C-OBF) to composite beam-to-column moment cOImel~ti()ns in C-SMF (see Part U, Sec-
Composite braced frames consisting of steel, composite and/or reinforced con- tion 9) and to steel coupling beam-to-wall (see Part 11, Section 15).
crete elements have been used in low- and high-rise buildings in regions of low
and moderate seismicity. The C-OBF category is provided for systems without C15. OROINARV REINFORCEO CRETE SHEAR
special seismic detailing that are used in seismic design categories A and B. WALLS COMPOSITE WITH CTURAL STEEL
Because significant inelastic load redistribution is not relied upon in the design, ELEMENTS (C-ORCW)
there is no distinction between frames where braces frame concentrically or ec-
The provisions in this Section apply to variations of structural systems
centrically into the beams and columns.
using reinforced concrete walls. One type where reinforced concrete walls
serve as infill panels in what are otherwise or composite frames. Examples
C14. COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAMES of typical sections at the wall-to-column ,',,t",lrt-.",,," for such cases are shown in
(C-EBF) Figures C-U-15.1 and C-I1-15.2. The details Figure C-U-15.2 also can occur
Structural steel EBF have been extensively tested and utilized in seismic regions in the second type of system where encased sections are used as vertical
and are recognized as providing excellent resistance and energy absorption for reinforcement in what are otherwise concrete shear walls. Finally,
seismic loads (see Part 1, Cornmentary Section CI5). While there has been little the third variation is where steel or beams are used to couple two or
use of C-EBF, the inelastic behavior of the critical steellink should be essentially more reinforced concrete walls. Examples of beam-to-wall connections
the same as for steel EBF and inelastic deformations in the composite or rein- are shown in Figures C-II-15.3 and C-U-15.4. When properly designed, each of
forced concrete columns should be minimal. Therefore, the R and Cd values and these systems should have shear strength stiffness comparable to those of
lisage limitatipns for C-EBF are the same as those for steel EBE As described pure reinforced concrete shear wall ~ystems. structural steel sections in the
below, careful design and detailing of the brace-to-column and link-to-column boundary members will, however, increase in-plane flexural strength of the
connectionS is essential to the performance of the system. columns and delay flexural hinging in tall . R and Cd values for reinforced
concrete shear walls with composite :elements the same as those fór tradition-
The basic requirements for C-EBF are the same as those for steel EBF with ad-
al reinforced concrete shear wall systems. in this sec~on are for
ditional provisions for the design of composite or reinforced concrete columns
ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls that limited to use in seismic d~sign
and the composite connections. While the inelastic deformations of the columns
categories e and below; requirements for reinforced concrete shear walls
should be small, as a conservative measure, detailing for the reinforced concrete
permitted in seismic design categories D and are given in Section 16.
and encased composite columns is based upon ACI 318, Chapter 21. In addition,
where links are adjacent to the column, elosely spaced hoop reinforcement is
required similar to that used at hinge regions in reinforced concrete SME This
requi~ement is in recognition of the large moments and load reversals imposed
in the columns near tlie links. Link
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildingf' March 9,
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STRlJcrtoN.
6.1-284 PART ll- ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS [Comm. C15. Cornm. C16.] PART ll- SPECIAL REINFORCED CONClRE11E SHEAR WALLS 6.1-285
For cases where the reinforced concrete walls frame into nonencased steel shapes
(Figure C-U-15.1), mechanical connectors arefequired to transfer vertical shear
between the wall and column, and to anchor the wall reinforcement. Addition-
ally, if the wall elements are interrupted by steel beams at floor levels, shear con-
nectors are needed at the wall-to-beam interface. Tests on concrete infill walls
have shown that if shear connectors are not present, story shear loads are carried
primarily through diagonal compression struts in the wall panel (Chrysostomou,
1991). This behavior often ineludes high loads in localized areas of the walls,
beams, columns and connections. The shear stud requirements will improve per-
formance by providing a more uniform transfer of loads between the infill pan-
els and the boundary members (Hajjar, Tong, Schultz, Shield and Saari, 2002).
Two examples of connections between steel coupling beams to concrete walls are
shown in Figures C-U-15.3 and C-U-15.4. The requirements for coupling beams
and their connections are based largely on tests of unencased steel coupling ShearStuds
beams (Harries, Mitchell, Cook and Redwood; 1993; Shahrooz, Remmetter and
Qin, 1993). These test data and analyses show that properly detailed coupling
beams can be designed to yield at the face of the concrete wall and pro vide stable
hysteretic behavior under reversed cyelic loads. Dnder high seismic loads, the
coupling beams are likely to undergo large inelastic deformations through either
flexural andlor shear yielding. However, for the ordinary elass of shear wall, there
are no special requirements to limit the slendemess of coupling beams beyond Fig. C-l/-I5.2. FuUy encased composite hnl./Yulnnl elemento
those in the Specification. More stringent provisions are required for the special
c1ass of shear wall (see Part n, Section 16). Recently, outrigger beams (Shahrooz,
Deason and Tune, 2004a; Shahrooz, Tune and Deason, 2004b) and post-tensioned
schemes have been proposed as coupling elements to simplify construction.
h
\_ h _\_
-1 Reinforcement not
shown for clarity
- /
/ Fig. C-l/-I5.3. Steel coupling beam to reil'1torce'd concrete wall.
é .L
CrossTles
Defonned Wire Anchor
(Welded 10 Cotumn)
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, ind. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL C01~sn~uCTioN, INC.
6.1-286 PART II - SPEClAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS [Cornrn.C16. Cornrn.C17.] PART II - COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE HEAR WALLS 6.1-287
(AS CE, 2002), the R-value for special reinforced concrete walls is larger than
for unencased steel ~embers. For encased c upling beams, it may be possible
for ordinary walls.
to reduce the web stiffener requirements of art TI, Section 16.3, which are the
Limited research suggests that hybrid coupled walls, where steel beams couple same as those in Part 1, Section 15l3, but c ently, there are no data available
reinforced concrete members are particularly well suited for application in zones that provides design g,uidance on ~s.
of high seismic risk (Gong and Shahrooz, 2001a, 2001b; Rarries, 2001). The
inelastic seismic behavior of coupled wall systems is strongly dependent on the C17. COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE S EAR WALLS (C-SPW)
coupling nítio, which is the ratio of the overtuming moments resisted by the Steel plate reinforced composite shear walIs an be used most effectively where
coupling beams to the overall overtuming moments. Limited research has shown story shear Ioads are large and the required thickness of conventionally rein-
that systems with large coupling ratios (60 percent or greater) can be detrimental forced shear walls is excessive (Z4ao and A taneh-AsI, 2004). The provisions
to the behavior of the RC shear walls. Coupled walls with low levels of coupling Iimit the shear strength of the wall to the yie d stress of the plate because there
(below 30 percent) are structurally inefficient and perform more like systems is insufficient basis from which to develop d sign rules for combining the yield
with individual cantilever walls (Rassan and El-Tawil, 2004). stress of the steeI plate and the reinforced c ncrete paneL Moreover, since the
Concems have been raised that walls with encased steel boundary members may shear strength of the steeI plate usually is uch greater than that of the rein-
have a tendency to split along vertical planes inside the wall near the column. forced concrete encasement, neglecting the ontribution of the concrete does
Therefore, the provisions require that transverse steel be continued into the wall not have a significant practical impacto The NERRP Provisions assign struc-
for the distance 2h as shown in Figures C-TI-15.1 and C-TI-15.2. tures with composite walls a sIightly higher R value than special reinforced con-
crete walIs because the shear yielding mech .sm of the steeI plate will result in
As a conservative measure until further research data are available, strengths more stable hysteretic Ioops than for reinforc d concrete walls (see Table C-TI-
for shear studs to transfer load into the structural steel boundary members are 4.1). The R. value for C-SPW is also the sam as that for light frame walIs with
reduced by 25 percent from their static yield strength. This is done because shearpanek
provisions in the Specification and most other sources for calculating the nominal
strength of shear studs are based on static monotonic tests. The 25 percent Two examples of connections between co posite walls to either steeI or
reduction in stud strengths need not apply to cases where the steel member is fully composite boundary elements are shown in igures C-TI-17,1, C-TI-17.2, and
encased since the provisions conservatively neglect the contribution of bond and C-TI-17.3. The provisions require that the con ections between the plate and the
friction between the steel and concrete. boundary members (columns and beams) be esigned to develop fue full yield
stress of the plate. Minimum reinfotcement i the concrete cover is required to
Several of the requirements for links in steel EBF are applied to coupling beams maintain the integrity of the walI under revers d cyc1ic Ioading and out-of-plane
to insure more stable yielding behavior under extreme earthquake loading. It Ioads. Until further research data are availabI , the minimum required walI re-
should be noted, however, that the link requirements for steel EBF are intended inforcement is based upon the specified mini um value for reinforced concrete
walls in ACI 318.
The thickness of the concrete encasement and e spacing of shear stud connec-
Reinforced Concrete Wall
tors should be calculated to ensure that the pla e can reach yield prior to overall
or local buckling. It is recornmended that over 1buckling of the composite panel
cp be checked using elastic buckling th~ory using a transformed section stiffness of
the walL For plates with concrete on only on side, stud spacing requirements
that will meet local plate buckling criteria can be calculated based upon
hit provisions for the sheár design of webs i steel girders. For example, in
Specification Section G2, the Iimitin hit value specified for compact webs sub-
jected to shear is h/tw= 1.10 kv E/ lf,w. Assu .ng a conservative value of the
plate buckling coefficient kv = 5 andO Fyw =50 k i (345 MPa), this equation gives
the limiting value of hltw :::;; 59. For a Ys-in. ( O rnm)-thick plate, this gives a
maximum value of h =¡ 22 in. (560 mm) that i representative of the maxiinum
center-to-center stud spacing that should suffi e for the plate to reach its full
shear yielding strength.
Fig. C-II-15.4. Steel coupling beam to reinforced concretewall with composite boundary member.
Seismic Provisions far Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplernent No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel BuildingS, March 9,
AMERICAN mSTI11ITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, INC.
05, incl. Supplernent No. 1
AMERICAN mSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, mc.
6.1-288 PART II - COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR WALLS [Comm. Cl7. Comm. C19.] PARTU-QUALITY AS..,v.~·,~+, 6.1-289
C19.
- 1 - . - c¡a
- A quality assurance plan, siInilar tothat for all-steel structures shall be
developed for a composite structure. For the ~lntclrc~~d concrete portion of the
~ work, in addition to the requirements in ACI 3 Section 1.3 attention is called to
-- the ACI Detailing Manual (ACI, 1999a), with on the provisions of ACI
Fig. C-II-17.2. Concrete stiffened steel shear wall with composite (encased) boundary member.
Fig. C-II-17.3. Concrete filled composite shear wall with two steei piates.
\
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Building~, Mareh 9, , inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL , INC.
6.2-ii 6.2-iií
The AISC logo is a registered trademark ofAISC and is used under license.
Corresponding Members
The information presented in this publication has been prepared in accordance with Cynthia Duncan
recognized engineering principIes and is for general information only. While it is be- Lanny Flynn
y
lieved to be accurate, tbis iDformation should not be used or relied upon for any spe- Roberto Leon
cific application without competent professional examination and verification of its James Malley
accuracy, suitability, and applicability by a licensed professional engineer, designer, or Hank Martin
architect. The publication of the material contained herein is not intended as a repre-
sentation or warranty, on the part of the American Institute of Steel Construction or
of any other person named herein, tbat this information is suitable for any general or par-
ticular use or of freedom from infringement of any patent or patents. Anyone making use
of this information assumes allliability arising from such use.
Caution must be exercised when relying upon other specifications and codes developed
by other bodies and incorporated by reference herein since such material may be mod-
ified or amended from time to time subsequent to the printing of this edition. The
Institute bears no responsibility for such material other than to refer to it and incorpo-
rate it by reference at the time of the initial publication of this edition.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Momen Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, lNc.
6.2-v
TABLE OF CONTE TS
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermed{ate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, !Nc. Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment rames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIO ,!Nc.
b.2-vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.2-vii
3.3 Backing at Beam to CoIumn and Continuity PIate
6.7
to Column Joints ........................................ 6.2-11 Continuity PIates ........................................ 6.2-26
3.3.1 6.8
SteeI Backing at Continuity PIates ........................... 6.2-11 Bolts ...................... ' ............................ 6.2-26
3.3.2 6.9
Steel Backing at Beam Bottom FIange ....................... 6.2-11 Connection DetaiIing ......... ' ..... " .................... 6.2-27
3.3.3 6.9.1
Steel Backing at Beam Top Flange .......................... 6.2-11 Gage .... " ..................... " .................... 6.2-30
3.3.4 6.9.2
Prohibited Welds at Steel Backing ........................... 6.2-12 Pitch and Row Spacing .............. . ................... 6.2-30
6.9.3
3.3.5 Non-Fusible Backing at Beam Flange-to-Column Joints ......... 6.2-12 End-PIate Width .................. " .................... 6.2-30
3.4 Details and Treatment ofWeld Tabs ......................... 6.2-12 6.9.4 End-PIate Stiffener ....................................... 6.2-30
3.5 Tack Welds ............................................. 6.2-13 6.9.5 Finger Shims ........................................... 6.2-32
3.6 Continuity Plates ........................................ 6.2-13 6.9.6 Composite SIab DetruIing for IMF ........................... 6.2-32
3.7 Quality Control and Quality Assurance ....................... 6.2-13 6.9.7 Welding DetaiIs ......................................... 6.2-33
CHAPTER 4 BOLTING REQUlREMENTS ............................ 6.2-14 6.10 Design Procedure ........................................ 6.2-33
4.1 Fastener Assemblies ...................................... 6.2-14 COMMENTARY .....•.•..•.•...•..••...•....•.. . ..............•..• 6.2-47
4.2 InstalIation Requirements .................................. 6.2-14 C1. GENERAL ......•.••...••..••............•. . .................. 6.2-48
4.3 Quality Control and Quality Assurance ....................... 6.2-14 C1.1 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. 6.2-48
CHAPTER 5 REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS)
C1.2 References ............................................. 6.2-49
MOMENT CONNECTION ............................... 6.2-15
Cl.3 General ................................................ 6.2-49
5.1 General ................................................ 6.2-15
C2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ....••••....•...................••.... 6.2-50
5.2 Systems ............................................... 6.2-15 C2.1 Special and Intermediate Moment Frame Co ection Types ...... 6.2-50
5.3 Prequalification Limits .................................... 6.2-15 C2.3 Members ................................................ 6.2-50
5.3.1 Beam Limitations ........................................ 6.2-16 C2.3.2 Built-up Members ....................................... 6.2-50
C2.3.2b Columns ............................................... 6.2-50
5.3.2 CoIumn Limitations ...................................... 6.2-17 (2) Boxed Wide-Flange CoIumns ....... " .................. 6.2-52
5.4 Beam-Column ReIationship Limitations ...................... 6.2-17 (4) Flanged Cruciform Columns ......... . ................. 6.2-52
5.5 Beam FIange to CoIumn Flange WeId Limitations .............. 6.2-18 C2.4 Connection Design Parameters .......... . ................. 6.2-52
C2.4.1 Load Combinations and Resistance Factors. . ................. 6.2-52
5.6 Beam Web to Column Connection Limitations ................. 6.2-18 C2.4.2 PIastic Hinge Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................. 6.2-52
5.7 Fabrication ofFlange Cuts ................................. 6.2-19 C2.4.3 Probable Maximum Moment at PIastic Hinge .................. 6.2-53
5.8 Design Procedure ........................................ 6.2-19 C2.4.4 Beam Flange Continuity PIates ............................. 6.2-53
C2.4.4b Continuity PIate to CoIumn Attachment ...................... 6.2-54
CHAPTER 6 BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED
END·PLATE MOMENT CONNECTIONS .................. 6.2-23 C3. WELDING REQUIREMENTS ..................................•. 6.2-55
6.1 General ................................................ 6.2-23 C3.3 Backing at Beam-to-Column and Continuity-p te-to-Column Joints . 6.2-55
6.2 C3.3.! Steel Backing at Continuity Plates ........................... 6.2-55
Systems ............................................... 6.2-23
6.3 C3.3.2 Steel Backing at Beam Bottom Flange ..... . ................ 6.2-55
Prequalification Limits .................................... 6.2-24
6.4 C3.3.3 Steel Backing at Beam Top Flange ........ . ................ 6.2-55
Beam Limitations ........................................ 6.2-24
6.5 C3.3.4 Prohibited Welds at Steel Backing ....... " ................. 6.2-56
CoIumn Limitations ...................................... 6.2-25
6.6 C3.3.5 Non-fusible Backing at Beam Flange-to-Colu Joints .......... 6.2-56
Beam-Column ReIationship Limitations ...................... 6.2-26
C3.4 Details and Treatment ofWeld Tabs ......................... 6.2-56
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITOTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment F. ames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION !Nc.
6.2-viii TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.2-1
Prequalijied Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalijied Connections for Special aoo intermediate St~el Moment rames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NS11TtJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI , lNe.
6.2-2 SYMBOLS
6.2-3
s Distance from the centerline of the most inside or most outside tension bolt row to
the edge of a yield line pattem, in. (mm) Root. Portion of a multi-pass weld deposited in the first
Thickness of beam web, in. (mm) Thermal cutting. Group of cutting processes that severs
Thickness of column web, in. (mm) removes metal by localized
melting, burning, or vaporizing of the workpiece.
Thickness of plate or panel zone inc1uding doubler plates, in. (mm)
w Uniform beam gravity load, kips per linear ft (N per linear mm) Weld tab. Piece of metal affixed to the end of a welded· .
to facilitate the initiation and
Resistance factor for ductile limit states termination of weld passes outside the structural joint.
Resistance factor for non-ductile limit states
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITITrE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. Prequalified Connections lor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL !Nc.
6.2-4
6.2-5
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER2
GENERAL
DESIGN REQUIRErv ENTS
1.1 Scope
2.1
This Standard speeifies design, detailing, fabrieation and quality eriteria for Special ~nd Intermediate Mon~ent Frame
eonneetioris that are prequalified in aeeordanee with the AISC Seismic Provisions Connectlon Types
for Structural Steel Buildings (herein referred to as the AISC Seismic Provisions) ~he connection types listed in Table 2.1 are 1 requalified for use in connectin
for use with speeial moment fraines (SMF) and intermediate moment frames eams to column flanges in special moment frames (SMF) and int d' g
(IMF). The eonneetions eontained in this Standard are prequalified to meet the moment frames (IMF) .th· th . erme late
Wl ID e luID.tations specified in this Standard.
requirements in the AISC Seismic Provisions only when designed and eon-
strueted in accordance with the requirenients of this Standard. Nothing in this
Standard shall preclude the use of connection types contained herein outside TABLE2.1.
the indicated limitations, or the use of other connection types, when satisfactory Prequalified Moment Co tlnections
evidenee of qualifieation in aeeordance with Appendix S of the AISC Seismic
Provisions is presented to the authority having jurisdietion. Connection Type ~eference
Section Systems
Reduced beam section (RSS) I
1.2 References ~hapter 5 SMF, IMF
The following standards form a part of this Standard to the extent that they Solted unstiffened extended end plate (SUEEP)
phapter 6 SMF*, IMF
are referenced and applicable: Solted stiffened extended end plate (SSEEP)
(~hapter 6 SMF*, IMF
2005 AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings *Not prequalified for special moment fram (SMF .
with the steel es s) wlth concrete ~ tructural slabs in direct contact
2004 AWS DI.I Structural Welding Code - Steel (herein referred to as AWS
Dl.l)
2004 RCSC Specijicationfor Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts 2.2
(herein referred to as the RCSC Specification)
Connection Stiffness
AH connections eontained in this Standard shal
2005 AISC Specijication for Structural Steel Buildings (herein referred to as (Type FR) for the purpose of seismic analysis. be considered fully restrained
the AISC Specijication)
2.3 Members
1.3 General
All design, materials, and workmanship shall conform to the requirements of The eonnections contained in this Standard are p equalified' d .
the· f ID accor anee Wlth
the AISC Seismic Provisions, and this Standard. The connections eontained in this reqU1T~mentS? ~e.AISC Seismic Provision~ when used to eonnect mem-
Standard shall be designed aeeording to the Load and Resistanee Factor Design bers meeting the lIIDltatlOns of Sections 2.3.1 or ~.3.2, as applieable.
(LRFD) provisions. Conneetions designed according to this Standard are per-
mitted to be used in struetures designed aceording to the LRFD or Allowable
2.3.1 Rolled Wide-Flange Members
Strength Design (ASD) provisions of the AISC Seismie Provisions. RoHed wide-flange me b -+' •
. . m ers eOUJ.OTIDIng to the c oss-section profile limitations
apphcable to the speclfic connection in this Stanc ard shall be permitted.
1
( ) F~a;g~S and we~s have width, depth, and thid~ess profiles similar to roUed (
WI ~- ange sections ~eeting the profile limita~ons for wide-flange sections
applIcable to the speelfie eonnection in this St¡mdard, and
Prequalified Connections jor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames jor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUI'E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION. !Nc. Prequalified Connections jor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment F1'pmes far S· . A r .
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. elsmlC pp lcatzons
6.2-6 CHAPTER 2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
CHAPTER 2. DESIGN REQUlREMENTS
6.2-7
(2) Webs are continuously connected to flanges in accordance with the re-
The width-to-thickness ratio (h;t ) of
quirements of Sections 2.3.2a or 2.3.2b, as applicable. used only as webs shall con-
form to the requirements of the AISC
Provisions.
2.3.2a Beams Within a zone extending from 12 in. (300
aboye the upper beam flange
Within a zone extending from the beam end to a distance not less than one beam to 12 in. (300 mm) below the lower
flange, flange and web plates
depth beyond the plastic hinge location, Sh' unless specifically indicated in this of box columns shall be joined by CJP
welds. Outside this zone, box
Standard the web and flanges shall be connected using complete joint penetratíon column web and flange plates s:hall be
welds or groove welds. . sly connected by fillet
(ClPJ groove welds with a pair of reinforcing fillet welds. The minimum size of these
fillet welds shall be the lesser of 5116 in. (8 mm) or the thickness of the beam web. 4. Flanged Cruciform Columns
Exception: This provision shall not apply where individual connection pre- The elements of flanged cruciform "'V>UUJUll1.
-. whether fabricated from rolled
qualifications specify other requirements. shapes or built up frOPl plates, shall meet the
Provisions. . of the AISC Seismic
2.3.2b Columns
BuiIt-up columns shalI conform to the provisions of subsections (1) through
(4), as applicable:Built-up columns shall satisfy the requirements of AISC
Specification Section E6 except as modified in this Section. Transfer of all
internal forces and stresses between elements of the built-up column shall be Within a zone extending from 12 in (300
through weIds. to 12 in. (300 mm) below the lower' beam aboye the upper beam flange
1. I-Shaped Welded Columns sections shall be welded to the web of the the ;eb of the te~-shap.ed
CJP groove welds with . f' -shaped sectlOn Wlth
The eIements ofbuilt-up I-shaped coIumns shall conform to the requirements a prur o welds. The minimum size
of the AISC Seismic Provisions. of fillet welds shall be the lesser of 5116 in (300 ) th .
th 1 . mm or e thICkness of
e co umn web. Continuity plates shall to th .
Within a zone extending from 12 in. (300 mm) aboye the upper beam flange to wide-flange coIumns.' e reqUlrements for
12 in. (300 mm) beIow the lower beam flange, unless specificalIy indicated in
this Standard, the coIumn webs and flanges shall be connected using OP groove 2.4
welds with a pair of reínforcing fillet we1ds. The minimum size of fillet welds Connection Design Parameters
shalI be the lesser of 5/16 in. (8 mm) or the thickness of the column web.. 2.4.1 Load Combinations and Re:sis'tan
2. Boxed Wide-Flange Columns Where available strengths are calculated in accord1anc:e
The wide-flange shape of a boxed wide-flange coIumn shall conform to the the resistance factors specified therein shall with the AIsc Specification,
al 1 When available strengths are
requirements of the AISC Seismic Provisíons. c cu ated in accordance with this Standard, the
be used as specified in the applicable s¿ction of factors ct>d and ct>n shall
The width-to-thickness ratio (bit) of pIates used as flanges shall not exceed and ct>n shali be taken as: Standard. The values of ct>d
0.6JE/~, where b shall be taken as not les s than the c1ear distance between
plates. (a) Por ductile limit states:
The width-to-thickness ratio (hltwJ of pIates used only as webs shall conform ct>d = 1.00
to the provisions of Table 1-8-1 of the AISC Seismic Provisions.
(b) Por non-ductile limit states:
Within a zone extending from 12 in. (300 mm) aboye the upper beam flange to ct>n = 0.90
12 in. (300 mm) below the lower beam flange, flange and web plates of boxed
wide-flange columns shall be joined by CJP groove weIds. Outside this zone, 2.4.2
plate elements shall be continuously connected by fillet or groove welds. Plastic Hinge Location
The d~stance of the plastic hinge from the face
3. Built-up Box Columns
The width-to-thickness ratio (bit) of pIates used as flanges shall not exceed
0.6JE/~, where b shalI be taken as not less than the clear distance between
take~ m accordance with the requirements for
specIfied herein.
the column, Sh' shall be
individual connection as (
web pIates.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC.
Prequalified Connections ¡or Special and Intermediate Steel Moment
¡or Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITUlE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.2-8 CHAPTER 2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER 2. DESIGN REQUlREMENTS
6.2-9
taken as: M =e R FZ (2.4.3-1) ~b = specified minimum yield stress of th beam flartge, ksi (MPa)
pr pr y y e ~c =specified minÚnum yield stress of th column flange, ksi (MPa)
~b =ratio of the expected yield stress of
Wh:; = robable maximum moment at pÚlstic hinge, kip-in. (N-mm) minimum yield stress, per the AISC
e beam material to the specified
ismic Provisions
~r = ~atio of the expected yield stress ~~ the specified IDlnImUm yleld ~c = ratio of the expected yield stress of th
column material to the specified
y stress F' see AISC Seismic PrOVlSlons . minimum yield stress, per the AISC S ismic Provisions
Z = effecti:e' plastic modulusofthe section (or connection) at the location
e . hin . 3 (mm3) (3) When the beam flange connects to the ange of the I-shape in a boxed
of the plastic ge, m. . . . wide-flange column having a thickness at satisfies Equations 2.4.4-3
e =factor to account for the peak: connec~on strength, lncdl~:~; stram and 2.4.4-4, continuity plates need not b provided.
dditional reinforcement , an
hardeni~g,
connection 10Caldi~ti~straI~~~ess
pr .
bbfJ~1.8b ~bRyb
con ons. otherwise specifically indicated in this
Standard, the value of Cpr shall be: ef
t -
>04 [1-
o
bbf[b _
b 2 ef 4
t
f bf F R (2.4.4-3)
ef ye ye
F +F
C =~:::;}.2 (2.4.3-2)
pr 2F
y
(2.4.4-4)
where .
F = speclfied . .
IDlmmum . Id stress of the type of steel to be used in the
yle
y yielding elemen!, ksi (MPa) . th
2.4.4a Continuity Plate Thickness
. .
F = specified IDlnImUm tensi1e strength of the type of steel to be used m e Where contimiity plates are required, the thickness f the plates shall be determined
as follows:
u yielding element, ksi (MPa)
(a) For one-sided (exterior) connections, contin ity plate thickness shall be at
2.4.4 Beam Flange Continuity Plates Ieast one-half of the thickness of the beam ge.
Continuity plates shall be provided.
(b) For two-sided (interior) connections, the con °nuity plate thickness shall be
Exceptions: at Ieast equal to the thicker of the two be flanges on either side of the
column.
(1) For bolted end-plate connections, the provisions of Section 6 shall a~PlY. I
Continuity plates shall also conform to the' requirem nts of Section 11 Oof the AISC
fl:~~ng
connects to the flange of a wide-flange or bUllt-up Specification.
I-shapethdeco
(2) When belam
umn a thickness that satisfies
. . Equations 2.4.4-1 and
2.4.4-2, continuity plates need not be provlded.
2.4.4b Continuity Plate to Column Attac
Cpntinuity plates, if provided, shalI be welded t column flanges using CJP
groove welds.
(2.4.4-1)
Continuity plates shall be welded to column webs using groove welds or fillet
welds. The required strength of the sum of the we ded joints of the continuity
plates to the colUnin web shall be the smallest of following:
(2.4.4-2)
(a) The sum of the design stI;engths in tension of the ontact areas of the continuity
plates to the column flanges that have attached eam flanges.
t =IDlnImUm
where .. . d th·ICkness of column flange when no continuity
requrre (b) .The design strength in shear of the coiltact area
cf plates are provided, in. (mm) web.
. fi Speelal
Prequalified Conneettons or
. and lntermed'la te Steel Moment Frames for Seismie Applieations
IN OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. Prequalified Conneetions for Speeial and Intermediate Steel N/oment Fra s for Seismie Applieations
-------------------------------
AMERICAN STITU1E
AMERICAN INslTrUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, c.
-
6.2-10 CHAPTER 2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
6.2-11
(c) The design strength in shear of the column panel zone. . .
(d) The sum of the expected yield strengths of the beam flanges transrruttmg CHAPTER3
force to the continuity plates.
WELDING REQUIRE ENTS
2.5 PanelZones
3.1 Filler Metals
to the minimum requirements for SMF or IMP, as
Panel zones shall c?nform . 10 3 f the AISC Seismic Provisions.
a licable in SectlOn 9.3 or SectlOn . o Filler metal s shall conform to the requiremen of Section 7.3 andAppendix W
'¿~erences'to matching of tested connections shall not apply. of the AISC Seismic Provisions.
Steel bacldng used at continuity plate to colu welds need not be removed. At
column flanges, steel backing left in place s aH be attached to the column
flange using a continuous 51I6-in. (8:-mm) fiH t weld on the edge below the
CJP gro ove weld.
When backing is removed, following the remov of backing, the root pass shall
be backgouged to sound weld metal and back elded with a reinforcing fillet.
The reinforcingfillet shall be continuous with a 'nimum size of 51I6 in. (8 mm).
Following the removal of backing, the root pass hall be backgouged to sound
weld metal and backwelded with a reinforcing fil et. The size of the reinforcing
fillet leg adjacent to the coluIDlI shall be a minim m of 5116 in. (8 mm), and the
reinforcing fillet leg adjacent to the beam flange all be such that the fillet toe
is located on the beam flange base metal.
Exception: If the base metal and weld root are gr und smooth after removal of
backing, the reinforcing fillet adjacent to the be flange need not extend to
base metal.
~~~~~_~~_ru_e_~~!N_S_~~~O_F~~~~~~_'~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~_~ ~ ~
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment h
s for Seismic Applications
AMErueAN INsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, e.
______ ____
6.2-12 CHAPTER 3, WELDING REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER 3, WELDING REQUIREMENTS
6.2-13
(
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications PrequaUfied Connections lor Special and Intermediate Steel Mo ' ,
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL C ' mentp,., meslor SelsmlC Applications
O~STRUCTION, c,
~~~--------------~~------------~
6.2-14 6.2-15
CHAPTER4 CHAPTER5
BOlTING REQUIREMENTS REDUCED ,BEAM SECTI(PN (RBS)
MOMENT CONNEC·r-ION
4.1 Fastener Assemblies
Bolts shall be pretensioned high-strength bolts conforming to ASTM A32~ or 5.1 General
A490. Twist-off type tension control bolt assemblies of equivalent mechamcal In a reduced beam section (RBS) moment ccnnection (Figure 5.1), portions
properties and chemical composition may be substituted for A325 and A490 of the beam flanges are :selectively trtmmed in ~e region adjacent to the beam-
fastener assemblies. to-column connection. Yielding and hinge fl rmation are in tended to occur
primarily within the reduced section of the be amo
4.2 Installation Requirements
Installation requirements shall be in accordance with AISC Sei.sm~c Prov.isio~s 5.2 Systems
and the RCSC Specification, except as otherwise specifically Indlcated In thIS RBS connections are prequalified for use in spec al moment frame (SMF) and in-
Standard. termediate moment frame (IMF) systems withi the limits of these provisions.
I
2 2
R =Radiu of Cut = 4e + b
Be
/
v j ~ +_
~~~~~~I ,,~ -=- o~o:. oo~"
~1. e
a b
p
o
o
~
-'-~'-'-
. ~ __ Protactad Zona (
Fig. 5.1.: Reduced bearn section c.pnnection.
Prequalified Connectionsfor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Framesfor Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mament F; ames far Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN lNsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION lNc.
(3) Beam weight is limited to 300 lbs/ft (447 kg/m). (1) Colurnns shall be any of the roIled shapes r built-up sections permitted in
Section 2.3.
(4) Beam flange thickness is limited to 13/4 in. (44.5 mm).
(2) The beam shall be connected to the flange
(5) The c1ear span-to-depth ratio of the beam shaU be limited as follows:
(3) RoIled shape column depth shall be limite to W36 (W920). The depth of
(a) For SMF systems, 7 or greater. built-up wide-flange colurnns shaU not exce that for roUed shapes. Ranged
(b) For IMP systems, 5 or greater. cruciform colurnns shall not have a width r depth greater than the depth
aIlowed for roUed shapes. Built-up box c lumns shaU not have a width
(6) Width-thickness ratios for the flanges and web ofthe beam shall conform to or depth exceeding '24 in. (610 rhm). Bo d wide-flange columns shaU
the limits of the AlSC Seismic Provisions. not have a width or depth exceeding 24 i . (610 mm) if participating in
When determining the width-thickness ratio of the flange, the value of b¡ orthogonal moment frames.
shall not be taken as less than the flange width at the ends of the center (4) There is no limit on the weight per foot of
two-thirds of the reduced section provided that gravity loads do not shift the
location of the plastic hinge a significant distance from the center of the (5) There are no additional requirements for fl
reduced beam section. (6) Width-thickness ratios for the flanges and eb of columns shall conform
(7) Lateral bracing of beams shall be provided as foUows: to the limits in Table 1-8-1 of the AISC Sei mic Proyisions.
(a) For SMF systems, in conformance with Section 9.8 oftheAlSC Seismic (7) Lateral bracing of colurnns shall conform to ection 9.7 or 10.7 for SMF or
Provisions. Supplemental lateral bracing shall be provided at the IMP, as applicable, in the AlSC Seismic Pro isions.
reduced section in conformance with Section 9.8 of the AISC Seismic
Provisions for lateral bracing provided adjacent to the plastic hinges. 5.4 Beam-Column Relationship Limi ations
References to the tested assembly in Section 9.8 of the AISC Seismic Beam-column connections shall satisfy the follo ing limitations:
Provisions do not apply.
( 1) Panel zones shall conform to the requireme ts for Sections 9.3 or 10.3 for
When supplementallateral bracing is provided, attachment of supple- SMF or IMP, as applicable, in the AlSC Sei ic Provisions.
mental lateral bracing to the beam shaU be located no greater than d/2
(2) Column-beam ratio s shaIl be limited as foIl s:
beyond the end of the reduced beam section farthest from the face of the
column, where d is the depth of the beam. No attachment of lateral (a) For SMF systems, the column-beam oment ratio shaIl confprm to
bracing shall be made to the beam in the region extending from the the requirements of the AlSC Seismic P 'Ovisions. The value of L M* b
' , p
face of the colurnn to end of the reduced section farthest from the face shall be taken equal to L (Mpr + M), w ere Mpr is computed accord-
of the column. ing to Equation ?8-5, and where Mv is e additional moment due to
(b) For IMF systems, in conformance with Section 10.8 of the AlSC Seismic shear amplification from the center of th reduced beam section to the
Provisions. centerline of the colurnn. Mv can be com uted as VRBS (a + b/2 + dJ2),
where VRBS is the shear at the center f the reduced beam section
Exception: For both systems, where the beam supports a concrete struc- computed per Step 4 of Section 5.8, a an b are the dimensions shown
tural slab that is connected between the protected zones with welded shear in Figure 5.1, and de is the depth of the column. " ,
connectors spaced a maximum of 12 in. (300 mm) on center, supplemental I
top and bottom flange bracing at the reduced section is not required. (b) For IMP systems, the colurnn-beam mo ent ratio shall conform to the
requirements of Section 10.6 of the AIS Seismic Provisions.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON. !Nc. Prequalified Connections lor Special and l1'J.termediate Ste~l Moment
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfIO
CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT CONNECTION CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT C
6.2-18 6.2-19
Beam flange to colurrm flange connections shall satisfy the following limitations: The reduced beam section shall be made u ing thermal cutting to produce a
smooth curve .. Th~ maximum surface roug ness of the thermally cut surface
(1) Beam flanges shall be connected to colurrm flanges using complete joint shalldbe 500
penetration (CJP) groove welds. Beam flange welds shall conform to the . IDlcromches (13 microns) in acc rdance with ANSI B46. 1,as mea-
s.ure usmg AWS C4.1-77 Sample 4 or si lar visual comparator. All transi-
requirements for demand critical welds in Section 7.3 and Appendix W of the nons be~een the. reduced beam section and e unmodified beam flange shall be
AISC Seismic Provisions. rounded m ~e drrection of the flange leng to minimize notch effects due to
(2) Weld access hole geometry shall conform to the requirements of the AISC abrupt translUons. Comers between the redu ed section surface and the top and
Specification Section J1.6. bottom of the ~an~es shall be grotind to re ove sharp edges, but a minimum
chamfer or radius IS not required.
5.6 Beam Web to Column Connection Limitations Thermal cutting tolerances shall be plus or ·nus 1/4 in. (6 mm) from the theo-
Beam web to colurrm web connections shall satisfy the following limitations: retical cut lineo The beam effective flange idth at any section shall have a
tolerance of plus or minus 3/8 in. (10 mm).
(1) The required shear strength of the beam web connection shall be determined
according to Equation 5.8-9. Gouges and notches that occur in th~ thermall cut RBS surface may be rep"'~"ed
b . din if : 1 u..u.
y ~n g ~ot ~ore than /4 in. (6 mm) dee . The gouged or notched area shall
(2) Web connection detailsshall be limited as follows:
be farred by gnnding so that a smooth transitio exists, and the totallength of the
(a) For SMF systems, the beam web shall be connected to the column area ground for the transition shall be no less an five times the depth of the re-
flange using a CJP groove weld extending.between weld access holes. ~oved gouge on each side of the gouge. If a s arp notch exists, the area shall be
The single plate shear connection shall be permitted to be used as back- mspected by MT after grinding to ensure that e entire depth of notch has been
ing for the CJP groove weld. The thickness of the plate shall be at least removed Grin~g that increases the depth of th RBS cut more than 1/4 in. (6 mm)
3/ 8 in. (10 mm). Weld tabs are not required at the ends of the CJP groove beyond the specified d~pth of cut is not permi ted.
weld at the beam web. Bolt holes in the beam web for the purpose of
Gouges and notches that exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm) in depth, but not to exceed 112 in
erection are permitted.
~12 mm) in depth, and those notches and goug s where repair by grinding would
(b) For IMF systems, the beam web shall be connected to the column flange mcre~se the effective depth of the RBS cut bey nd tolerance, may be repaired by
per as required for SMF systems. we~dmg. The notch or gouge shall be remove and ground to provide a smooth
radius of not less than 1/4 in. in preparation for welding. The repair area shall be
Exception: For IMF, it is permitted to connect the beam web to the
. pre~eated t~ a temperature of 1500 F Qr the valu specified in AWS D 1.1 Table 3.2,
colurrm flange using a bolted single plate shear connection. The bolted
whichever IS greater, measured at the location f the weld repair.
single plate shear connection shall be designed as a slip-critical con-
nection, with the design slip resistance per bolt determined according Notches and gouges exceeding 112 in. (12 mm)· depth shall be repaired only with
to Section J3.8 of the AISC Specification. The nominal bearing strength a method approved by the engineer Oí record.
at bolt holes shall not be taken greater than the value given by Equation
J3-6a of the AISC Specification. The design shear strength of the sin- 5.8 Design Procedure
gle plate shear connection shall be determined based on shear yield-
STEP 1 - Choose trial values for the beam se tions, column sections and RBS
ing of the gross section and on shear fracture of the net section. The
dimensions ti, b, and e (Figure 5.l) ubject to the limits:
plate shall be welded to the colurrm flange with a CJP groove weld, or
with fillet welds on both sides of the plateo The minimum size of the
0.5bbf~ a ~ 0.75b (5.8-1)
fillet weld on each side of the plate shall be 75 percent of the thickness bJ
of the plateo Standard-size holes shall be provided in the beam web and 0.65d ~ b ~ 0.85d (5.8-2)
in the plate, except that short-slotted holes (with the slot parallel to the
beam flanges) may be used in either the beam web or in the plate, (5.8-3)
but not in both. Bolts are permitted to be pretensioned either before or
after welding.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mome t Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INc.
6.2-20 CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT CONNECTION
CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MQMENT C 6.2-21
where where
bbf =width of beam flange, in. (mm) JI =load factor det~rrnined by ~e applic le building code for live loads,
d = depth of beam, in. (mm) but not less than 0.5 .
a = distance from face of colurnn to start of RBS cut, in. (mm)
b= length of RBS cut, in. (mm) STEP 5 - Compute fue probable maximum oment at the face of the colurnn.
c = depth of cut at center of the reduced beam section, in. (mm)
The moment at the face of the colullID shall e computed from a free-bodydia~
gram of the segrnent of the beam between th center of the reduced bearn section
Confirrn that the beams and colurnns are adequate for aH load combinations and the face of the colurnn, as illustrated in igure 5.2.
specified by the applicable building code, ineluding the re~uced .section .of the
beam and that the design story drift for the frame comphes Wlth apphcable Based on this free-body diagram, the mome t at the face of the colurnn is com-
limit: specified by the applicable building codeo Calculation of elastic drift puted as foHows:
shall consider the effect of the reduced beam section. In lieu of specific cal- (5.8-6)
culations, effective elastic drifts may be calculated by multiplying elastic drifts
based on gross beam sections by 1.1 for flange reductions up to 50 percent of where
the beam flange width. Linear interpolation may be used for lesser values of Mf =probable maximum moment at fac of column, kip-in. (N-mm)
beam width reduction. VRBS =larger of the two values of shear ~
ce at the center of the reduced
beam section at each end of the be , kips (N)
STEP 2 - Compute the plastic section modulus at the center of the reduced beam Sh = a + bl2, in. (mm)
section:
Equation 5.8-6 neglects the gravity load on the portion of the beam between
(5.8-4)
the center of the reduced beam section and e face of the column. If desired,
the gravity load on this small portion of the beam is perrnitted to be ineluded
where . . 3 3
in the free-body diagram shown in Figure .2 and in Equation 5.8-6,
Z =plastic section modulus at center of the reduced beam se~non, m. (mm)
e . . . 3( 3)
Zx =plastic section modulus for fuH beam cross-secnon, m. mm
STEP 6 - Compute the plastic mom:ent of th beam based on the expected yield
tbf = thickness of beam flange, in. (mm) stress:
STEP 3 - Compute the probable maxirnum moment at the center of the reduced (5.8-7)
beam section:
(5.8-5)
where
Mpr =probable maximum moment at center of the reduced beam section, 1. RBS
kip-in. (N-mm)
j)et
1-
)
STEP 4 - Compute the shear force at the center of the reduced bearn sections at
each end of the beam.
) j)
The shear force at the center of the reduced bearn sections shall be deterrnined by
=== )
Vu M, M, tj::::::n:rnnif VRBS Mpr
a free body diagram of the portion of the beam between the centers of the re-
duced beam sections. This calculation shall assume the moment at the center of
each reduced beam section is Mpr and shall inelude gravity loads acting on the
beam based on the load combination 1.2D + J1L + 0.2S
Fig. 5.2. Free-b04y diagram beiween cent r of RBS and face of column~
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNS1TTIITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
Prequalified Connections for Special dnd IntermediatJ Steel Mo
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEBL CONSTRU
6.2-22 CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT CONNECTION
6.2-23
where . ki .
M pe =p lastie moment of beam based on expeeted yleld stress, p-m. CHAPTER
(N-mm)
SOlTED UNSTIFFENED AND S IFFENED EXTENDED
STEP 7 - Check thatM¡does not exeeed <l>dMpe' as follows: END-PLATE MOMgNT C NNECTIONS
M¡~<I>dMpe (5.8-8)
6.1 General
If Equation 5.8-8 is not satisfied, inerease the value of c ami/or deerease the Bolted end-plate eonneetions arernade by eldingthe bearn to an end-plate and
values of a and b, and repeat Steps 2 through 7. bolting the end-plate to a eolunin flange. The three end-plate eonfigurations
shown in Figure 6.1 are eovered: in this s tion and are prequalified under the
STEP 8 - Determine the required shear strength ~ of beam and beam web-to- AISC Seismic Provisions within the limita .ons of this Standard.
~-- eolumn eonneetion from:
The behavior of thistype of eonneetion can eontrolled by a number of different
2M limit states including flexural yielding of e bearn seetion, flexural yielding of
V =-----.l!!....+V . (5.8-9)
u L' gravzty the end-plates, yielding of the eQlumn p el zone, tension failure of the end-
plate bolts, shear failure of the end-plate bo ts, or failure of various welded eon-
where neetions. The intent of the design eriteria p ovided here is to provide suffieient
V =required shear strength of beam and beam web-to-eolumn strength in the elem~nts of the eonneetions o ensure that the inelastie deforma-
u eonneetion, kips (N) tion of the eonneetion is aehieved by beam ielding.
L' = distanee between the eenters of the redueed beam seetions,
in. (mm) 6.2 Systems
V . = beam shear force resulting from 1.2D + f1L + 0.2S, kips (N). Extended end-plate eonneetions are prequali ed for use in special moment frarne
gravx = load factor determined by the applieable building eode for hve (SMF) and intermediate moment (rarne ( ) systems.
loads, but not less than 0.5
Exception: SMF systems in direet eontact ith concrete structural slabs are not
prequalified.
Check design shear strength of beam aeeording to Chapter G of the AISC
Specification.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Fra;;:/ for Seismic Applications
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate,Steel Mo
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, •
AMERICAN lNS1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU
6.2-24 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTlFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTlFFENED AND
STlFFENEDE
ED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-25
6.3 Prequalification Limits web and flanges shall be connected sin .th
Table 6.1 is a summary of the range of parameters that have been satisfactorily pair of filIet welds each having . 3/ g ~l er a CJP groove weld or a
tested. AH connection elements shall be within the ranges shown. but not less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) Fo:~: 4 ~lmes the beam web thiclcness
shall not be less than that requked t emru~der of the beam, the weld size
to the flanges. o ac omplish shear transfer from the web
TABLE 6.1.
Parametric Limitations on Prequalification (2) Beam depth, d, is limited ro values sh
in Table 6.1.
Four-Bolt Unstiffened Four-Bolt Stiffened Eight-Bolt Stiffened (3) There is no limit on the weight per foo of beams.
(4E) (4ES) (8ES) 4
( ) Beam flange thickness is limited to the values shown in Table 6 1
Parameter MáXimum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum (5) The clear span-to-d th . . .
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) ep ratio of the be shall be limited as follows:
tp 21/4 (57) (13) 11/2 (38) (13) 21/2 (64) 3f4 (19)
I (a) For SMF systems, 7 or greater.
1/2 1/2
i
10 3/4 (273) 103/4 (273) 103/4 (273) (b) For IMF systems, 5 or greater.
.bp 7 (178) 15 (381) 9 (229)
i
j
6 (152) 4 (102) 6 (152) 31/4 (83) 6 (152) 5 (127) I (6) Width-thiclcness ratios for the flan es d
9
the limits of the :AISC Seismz.c P g .. web of the beam shall conform to
41/2 (114) 11/2 (38) 51/2 (140) 13/4 (44) 2 (51) 13/4 (44) rovzslO s.
Pfi; Pfo
I
(7) Lateral bracing of beams shall be provi ed as follows:
Pb - - - - 3 3/4 (95) 3112 (89)
(a) For SMF systems, in conf6nnance
d 55 (1400) 25 (635) 24 (610) 13 3/4 (349) 36 (914) 181/2 (470) Provisions. , ·th Section 9.8 of the AISC Seismic
tbf 3/4 (19) 3fs (10) 3/4 (19) 3fs (10) 1 (25) 19132 (16)
(b) For IMF systems, in conformance
bbf 91/4 (235) 6 (152) 9 (229) 6 (152) 121/4(311) 7 3/4 (197) Provisions. th Section 10.8 of the AISC Seismic
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connectionsfor Special and Intermediate Steel Mo . .
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CoNSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEa C nt Frames lor SelsmlC Applications
ONSTRU ON, !Nc.
6.2-26 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND S~NED EXjrnNDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-27
.....~ t
c,J•
(2) The colurrm-bearn moment ratio shall conforrn to the requirements for SMF
7 ..o.Q..J
.Q
~
~
,I 1
6.7 Continuity Plates
Continuity pIates shall satisfy the following Iimitations:
~"-t
(1) The need for continuity plates shall be determined in accordance with
Section 6.10.
de
.1 I
required strength of the fillet weld shall not be less than ~Ac' where Ac is defined 1 p
as the contact areas between the continuity pIate and the column flanges that ~I c:t l
have attached bearn flanges and ~ is defined as the specified minimum yieId
stress of the continuity plateo
6.8 Bolts
Bolts shall conforrn to the requirements of Section 4. ,
I
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermedia~e Steel Mo Inent Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTR~CTION, INc.
6.2-28 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS C.l:1At' lhK ó. HOLTED UNSTlFFENED AND STÍFFENED I:;XTEND
f"- ED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-29
~bI -~~
t tllt •
_fI)
-j .0':0
.00..
l. de :1
- ~
o
o ~ -ofl> -S;! ~
_fI)
Q.._ ....
\... ., -.)..J ,
cr
I
'ii)
Q.
ttc tp _:. -O
L .s;:ti
st
-r-.-- -
I
f
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel M01~ent Frames lor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUI'E OF STEEL CONsTRuenoN, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF Sl'EEL CONSTR enON, !Nc.
6.2-30 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTlFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIUNS CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTlFFENED ANO STlFFENED
XTENDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-31
6.9.1 Gage
The gage, g, is as defined in Figures 6.2 through 6.4. The maximum gage dimen-
sion is limited to the width of the connected beam flange.
where hst is the height of the end-plate from the outside face of the beam flange
to the end of the end-plate (see Figure 6.5).
The stiffener plates shall be terminated at the beam flange and at the end of the
end-plate with landings approximately 1 in. (25 mm) long. The stiffener shall
be clipped where it meets the beam flange and end-plate to provide clearance
between the stiffener and the beam flange weld.
When the beam and end-plate stiffeners have the same material strengths, the
thickness of the stiffeners shall be greater than or equal to the beam web thick-
ness. If the beam and end-plate stiffener have different material strengths, the
thickness of the stiffener shall be greater than the ratio of the beam-to-stiffener
plate material yield stress times the beam web thickness.
Prequalified Connectionsfor Special andlntermediate Steel Moment Framesfor Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediale Steel Mo ent F: fi S' .
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL C rames or ezsmzc Applications
ONSTR CITON,INC.
6.2-32 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTnNUnU ... LUNNbCIIVr'l;)
CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STlFFENED XTENDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-33
(2) The beam web to end-plate joint sh 1 be made using either fillet welds or
completejoint penetration (CJP) gro ve welds. When used, the fillet welds
shall be sized to develop the full str gth of the beam web in tension from
• ___ 1: ___ _ the inside face of the flange to 6 in. (l50 mm) beyond the bolt row farthest
'W. ___ ,. ___ _ from the beam flange. "
•
..... -1'- (3) The beam flange to end-plale joint s all be made using a CJP gro ove weld
without backing. The CJP groove w Id shall be made such fu.at the roO! of
--~~~ ~~~- the weld is on"the beam web side of e flange. The inside face ofthe flange
shall have a 5f¡6-in. (8-mm) fillet wel These welds shall be demand critical.
~------- -------
(4) Backgouging of the root is not requ red in the flange directly aboye and
below the beam web for a length eq al to l.5k I . A full-depth PJP groove
weld shall be permitted at this locatÍ n.
(5) When used, all end-plate stiffener j 'nts shall be made using CJP groove
welds.
Exception: When the stiffener is 3/8 in. (lO-mm) thick or less, it shall be
permitted to use fillet welds that de lop the strength of the stiffener.
• • Connection geometry is shown in Figures .2, 6.3, and 6.4 for the 4E, 4ES, and
8ES connections, respectively.
End-Plate and Bolt Design
• • (1) Determine the sizes of the connecte members (beams and column) and
compute the moment at the face of th column, M .
f
h (6.9-2)
Fig.6.6. Typical use offinger shims. where
Mpe = CprRy~Zx (6.9-3)
~ =2Mp/L ' + Vgravity
6.9.6 Composite Slab Detailing for IMF Sh = distance from the face of e column to the plastic hinge,
In addition to the protected zone limitations, welded shear stud connect~rs ~hall in. (mm)
not be placed along the top flange of the beam for a distance equal to 1 h times =the les ser of dl2 or 3bbf Í< unstiffened connection
the depth of the beam, measured from the face of the column. (4E) (6.9-4)
Compressible expansion joint material, at least Ih-in. (12-mm) thick, shall be =Lst+ tp (6.9-5)
installed between the slab and the column face, in the protected zone. Ry =the ratio of the expected y eld stress to fue specified
minimum yield stress, frothe AISC Seismic Provisions
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Ste~l ment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTIfUTE OF STEBL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NSTl'I'UTE OF STEEL CONS ucrroN,INc.
6.2-34 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED ANO STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFfENED ANO STIFfENED E~ TENDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-35
d = depth of the connecting beam, in. (mm) (5) Determine the required end-~late thic Imess, tp req'd'
bbf= width of the beam flange, in. (mm)
Lst = length of the end-plate stiffener, as shown in Figure 6.2,
in. (mm) (6.9-8)
tp = thickness of the end-plate, in. (mm)
M pe = probable maximum moment at plastic hinge, kip-in. (N-mm)
where
L' =distance between plastic hinges, in. (mm)
~p = specifiyd mínimum yield stre1 s of the end-plate material, ksi
. = beam shear force resulting from 1.2D +JIL + O.2S, kips (N)
Vgravlty (N/mm2)
e = Factor to account for peak connection strength, inc1uding ~ =the end:..plate yield line mech~~sm parameter from Table 6.2, 6.3,
pr strain hardening, local restraint, additional reinforcement, and or 6.4, in. (mm)
other connection conditions, as given in Equation 2.4.3-2
Vu = shear force at the end of the beam, kips (N) (6) Select an end-plate thickness, tp ' not l€ ss than the required value.
JI = load factor determined by the applicable building code for (7) Calculate the factored beam flange fOI~e.
live loads, but not less than 0.5
(2) Select one of the three end-plate moment connection configurations and (6.9-9)
establish preliminary values for the connection geometry (g, Pfi' Pfo' Pb'
hst ' L st ' etc.) and bolt grade. where
(3) Determine the required bolt diameter, db req'd' using one of the following d =depth of the beam, in. (mm)
expressions: tbf = thickness of beam flange, in. (lhm)
(8) Check shear yielding resistance of thl> extended portion of the four-bolt
2M for four-bolt extended unstiffened end-plate (4E):
d - f connections (4E, 4ES) (6.9-6)
b req'd - ~11t<\> F (h + h )
~ n nt O 1
(6.9-10)
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUfE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUfE OF S1EEL CONSTI<~CTION, !Nc.
,..... ,a
~
N
." I
~ Table 6.2. Summary of Four-Bolt Extended Unstiffened End-Plate Vl
0\
~ Yield Line Mechanism Parameter
Si (J
~
~
~ End-Plate Geometry and Yield Une Pattern 80lt Force Model
~
C")
tI
?'
lJj
o
¡g~
(j '"
- - - . ----- 2Pt ~
I;j
r
~ 5'
~~ .----- 2Pt ~
en
~~
~I
~~
Pl~
(J~
o",
( M np ho
h¡ i >
8en
z-
~~
B§
o'"
.:z:~
.~~~
• •
r i ~
'o...>
~
~
~. ~
1)'
~ Y p= bp[hl(~+~)+ho(_l )-~l+~[hl(P.f¡+s)] n
o
~
~ End-Plate 2 Pf; s p/ 2 g o
~
15·
~
s = ~~bp g Note: IfPfi > s, usepfi = s
o
j
Z
en
~-
~
~
."
~ Table 6.3. Surnrnary of Four-Bolt Extended Stiffened End-Plate
¡ ~
Yield Line Mechanisrn Pararneter
?'
~ End-Plate Geometry and Yield Line Pattern Bolt Force Model lJj
~
O
Case 1 (d. ~ s) Case 2 (d. > s)
~
~I
I;j
~~
~
(j
~
'"
5-
Z' .....
- 2 Ft
--~
~~ ~
~ ~
~ ~
~~
Pl~
(J~
~
oz .....
CIl!;¡.o
• •
tp
• •
tp ( c::: ~
~
~
.....
r ~~
I
¡
§~
.z
.~~..,
'o...>
~
Case 1
de~s Yp = b
p
2
[h¡(~+.!.)+ho(~+~)1+2[
Pfi 8p¡o g
h¡(Pfi +s)+ho(de +
28
p¡o) ]
i
n
I
! ~
~. End;.
t
!t
1)'
~
Plate Case 2
de>s y
p
= b
p
2
[h¡(~+.!.)+ho(.!.+~)l+
Pfi s p¡o8
2[h¡ (pfi +8)+110(8+ P¡o)]
g
~
~
¡ 2'
~'
I
!
s= ~.Jb;i Note: IfPfi > 8, use Pfi = 8
f;
~ I
Vl
....¡
6.2-38 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS
CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTlFFENED AND STIFFENED E ENDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-39
(10) If using either the four-bolt extende stiffened end-plate (4ES) or eight-
bolt extended stiffened end-plate (8 S) connection, select the end-plate
stiffener thickness and design the st ffener-to-beam flange and stiffener-
to-end-plate welds.
t
s,min
=t
bw
(Yb J
ys
(6.9-13)
tt t t where
\ 1 ~:¿_I tbw = thickness of the beam web, i
1\ ~~'-
lo-++---~ t-'
Sb =specified minimum yield stre s of beam material, ksi (MPa)
I---tt--- ... Ss = specifi,ed minimum yield stre s of stiffener material, ksi (MPa)
The stiffener geometry shaU conform to the requirements of Section 6.9.4.
In addition, to prevent local bucklin of the stiffener plate, the following
width-to-thickness criterion shalI be s tisfied.
h
...E... <0.56 (6.9-14)
t -
s
where
hst =the height of the stiffener, in.
The stiffener-to-beam flange and sti ner-to-end-plate welds shalI be de-
C
\1)
signed to develop the stiffener plate i shear at the beam flange and in ten-
:::¡
"a
sion at the end-plate. Either fillet or co 'P1ete joint penetration (CJP) groove
"i welds are suitable for the weld of the s ffener plate to the beam flange. If the
>=
'tl stiffener plate thickness is greater th 3/ 8 in., CJP groove welds shall be
·C
:¡~ ~-4--------------------------~
used for the stiffener-to-end-plate weld Otherwise, double-sided fillet welds
are permitted to be used.
E ~~ sf:~cS:.st. ~
o
t!
\1)
11111111 l (11) The bolt shear rupture strength of the c nnection is provided by the bolts at
one (compression) flange; thus
'ti
ii:
-aC (6.9-15)
w
where
nb =number of bolts at the compre sion flange, four for 4ES, and
eight for 8ES connections
F;; = nominal shear stress of bolts fr m Table 13.2 of the AISC
Specification, ksi (N/mm2)
Ab =nominal gross area of bolt, in. 2 (mm2)
2M
V =--E.+V . (6.9-16)
u L' ravlly
. Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel M. ment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONS UCTlON, !Nc.
(6.9-17)
where
ni = number of inner bolts (two for 4E and 4ES, and four for 8ES
connections)
no =number of outer bolts (two for 4E and 4ES, and four for 8ES
connections)
for each inner bolt (6.9-18)
r = 1.2 LetFu < 2.4 dbtFu for each outer bolt (6.9-19)
no
Le = clear distance, in the direction of force, between the edge of the
hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material,
"1IIII! /'
in. (mm)
t = end-plate or column flange thickness, in. (mm)
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of end-plate or column flange ~
\ ~'t;.IN ~'t>IN
Y = unstiffened column flange yieId line mechanism parameter from 1 11
-IN 11
-IN
e ;:...." ..,11
;:...." .,11
TabIe 6.5 or Table 6.6, in. (mm)
te! = column flange thickness, in. (mm)
'C
GI i:: . ¡Ce.,
If Equation 6.20 is not satisfied, increase the column size or add web ile& cEa»
=:sC!: ,:sc
-ca
stiffeners (continuity pIates). =o!!
¡gu lL ;;s8¡¡:
::)
If stiffeners are added, Equation 6.20 must be checked using Ye for the
stiffened column flange from TabIes 6.5 and 6.6.
(15) If stiffeners are required for column flange flexural yieIding, determine the
required stiffener force.
The column flange flexural design strength is
(6.9-21)
<l> dMe! =<l> d~eY/~!
Prequalified Connections for Special arid Intermediate Steelik oment Frames for Seismic Applications
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications AMERICAN ÍNS1TTIJTE OF STEEL CONS ('RuCTION,INC.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,INC.
6.2-42 CHAPI'ER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS
CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EX NDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-43
where
Yc =unstiffened column yield line m chanism parameter from Table 6.5
or 6.6, in. (mm).
(6.9-22)
Q)
el
e
ca ~ Using <1>d Rn' the required force for stiffe er design is determined in Step 19.
¡¡: 1ii
e ~ ¿: s!..:ri. -t ~
(16) Check the local column web yielding s ength of the unstiffened column
e 2
C)¡
c
.$ web at the beam flanges.
E G)1; ~I~
:J ~a.. +
'O laG)
¡¡,5 ~ (6.9-23)
O c...J ~ C>()
"O EB ~
+ ~
CD ... ::::1 G) ul~ N~
eQ) 'O):
U"O
+ + (6.9-24)
CD- ~I~
=Q) "Oc ~
~I""" where
G)1a
;:E c '--"
-sr
ti) ca
"Oca
... :!
~
~
+
ul"""
+
'--"'" et = 0.5 if the distance from the colu top to the top face of the beam
Q)Q. +
.3::....
flange is less than the depth of e column
+
"gE ~I~
-
,.---....
,--,o = 1.0 otherwise
fA Q';I"""
.-
Q)
><e
..,f'
+ +
kc =distance from outer face of the c lumn flange to web toe of fillet
Wca
_,c
~
(design value) or fillet weld, in. mm)
+
-u
o Q) ul~
+ tp = end-plate thickness, in. (mm)
'9:5
-Q) ~ ~ ~c = specified yield stress of the colu web material, ksi (MPa)
~
áe 1ii
eo ~ tcw = column web thickness, in. (mm)
¡¡¡::i ~
'5:2 :!e ~ ,.---....
-1'" lbf= thickness of beam flange, in. (
el)
~.-
&~ '---"
~@
:J OCD (17) Check the unsti~ened column web buc ing strength at the beam com-
u s;:
ti) "0"0 " -III~ pression flange. ¡
u:)
G)c
~C\I
;:...... '"
u:) Strength requirement:
CD ie
j5 ::::>
ca (6.9-25)
t-
where <1> =0.75
(a) When Ffu is applied a distance greater an or equal to d/2 from the end
of the column o
24 t 3
R = cw
n h (6.9-26)
Prequalified Connections jor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames jor Seismic Applications
Prequalified Connections jor Special and Intermediate Steel Mo nt Frames Jor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INc.
6.2-44 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS
CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED] XTENDED ... CONNECTIONS
6.2-45
(b) When Ffu is applied a distance less than d/2 from the end of the column
de = overall depth of the column, in. (mm)
3
12 tcw fEF If the strength requirement (~~n ~ F¡u) is not satisfied, then column
vLj~ye
R =-----'--- (6.9-27) web continuity plates are r ~quired.
n h
(19) If stiffener plates are required for ru y of the column side limit states, the
where . required strength is
h = ciear distance between flánges less the fillet or comer radms
for roUed shapes; clear distance between flanges when welds (6.9-32)
are used for built-up shapes, in. (mm) where
If the strength requirement (<I>nRn ~ Ffu) is not satisfied, then column web min <l>Rn =the minimum design st ength value from Steps 15 (column
continuity platés are required. ~ange bending), 16 (co umn web yielding), 17 (column web
buck1ing), and 18 (colufnn web crippling)
(18) Check the unstiffened column web crippling strength at the beam compres-
sion flange. The design of the continuity plates spall also conform to section 110.8 of
the AISC Specification, and the weld~ shall be designed in accordance with
Strength requirement: Section 6.7.3.
(6.9-28)
(20) Check the panel zone in accordance "lith Section 6.6.1.
where <1> = 0.75
(a) When Ffu is applied a distance greater than or equal to d/2 from the end
of the column
(6.9-29)
(b) When Ffu is applied a distance less than d/2 from the eI1d of the column
where
N = thickness of beam flánge plus 2 times the groove weld
reinforcement leg size, in. (mm)
Prequalified Conneetions for Special and IntermediateSteel Moment FrCl;mes for Seismie Applieations
AMERICAN lNSTITIITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, lNc. Prequalified Conneetions for Speeial and Intermediate Steel MG'(nent Frames for Seismie Applieations
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsnpCfIoN, INc.
-J
6.2-46 6.2-47
COMMENTARY on tbe
Prequalified Connec ions for
Special and Internteiate
Steel Montent Frant S for
Seisntic Applications
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate S eel Moment Frames
for Seismic Applications
December 13, 2005
Prequalified Connections for Special and Interrnedsiate SCteOeNIMS;~:;;:o~a;;:2 for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special alid Intermediate Steel Mome t Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF TEEL , AMERlCAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INc.
COMMENTARY
6.2-48 6.2-49
C1. GENERAL the us~ of conIÍectioIi geometries that h d been demonstrated by testin and
~althYSISfrtO be capablé of resisting appro riate levels of inelastie defon!tion
C1.1 Scope WI out acture. Most of these d .
th AISC S · · .. . recornme atlOns have been ineorporated into
Special moment frames (SMF) and intermediate moment frames (IMF) designed e elsmlC ProvlSlons as well as á pnding AWS . .
AWS D 1.1 Structtiral Welding Codeo seIsnnc supplement to the
in accordance with the AISC Seismic Provisions are designed with the expecta-
tion that they will experience substantial inelastic deformations when subjected
Foll~~ing the ~ecommendations of the S C Joint Venture, the AISC Seismic
to design-level earthquake ground shaking, generally concentrated at the
ProvlslOns reqUlre that moment connectio s used in special or intermediate steel
moment-resisting beam-to-column connections. In the 1994 Northridge earth-
moment frames be demonstrated by testi to be capable of provI·dm·g th
quake, a number of steel moment frame buildings were found to have experienced essar d tir Tw e nec-
.. y ue. Ity: .. 0 means of demonstra ion are aceeptable. One means eon-
brittle fractures that initiated at the welded beam flange to column flange joints SIStS of proJect-specIfic testing in which a li .ted number of full· - al .
of moment connections. These brittle fractures were unexpected and were quite rep "ti th ' . se e speclIDens
.resen ng e ~onnectlOns to be used in structure, are construeted and tested
different from the anticipated behavior of ductile yielding of the beams in so-
m ,ae~~rdance WIth.a .protocol prescribed in Appendix S of the AISC Seismfc
called zones of plastic hinging. Where they occurred, these brittle fractures ProvlslOns. Recogmzmg that it is costly d f . to perform sueh
prevented the formation of ductile plastic hinge zones and resulted in frame . . . Ime consunnng
te~ts,. ~e AISC S~lsmlc Provisi0ns. also prov de for prequalifieation of connections
behavior substantially different from that upon which the design requirements
Co~sIstmg of a ngorous program'oftesting analytical evaluation and review by
for these systems were based. an mdependent body
. . ' the connec ' t·IOn pre. . . . review panel (CPRP)
uahficatlOn
Following this discovery, the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) ~onnectlOns c?ntamed i~ this Standard h ve met the criteria for prequalifica~
provided funding to a coalition of universities and professional associations, tion when ap~lied t<:> frannn~ that complies ith the limitations contained herein
known as the SAC Joint Venture. Over a period of six years, the SAC Joint , and when desIgnedand detailed in accord ce with this Standard.
Venture, with participatibn from AISC, AISI, AWS and other industry groups,
conducted extensive researeh into the causes of the damage that had oceurred C1.2 References
in the Northridge earthquake and effective means of redueing the possibility of References for this Standard are listed in the Bibli h ~ d
Cornmentary. ograp y, J.oun at the end of the
such damage in future earthquakes.
Numerous issues were identified in the SACstudies as contributing causes of
these brittle fractures. This Standard specifically addresses the following four C1.3 General
causes that were identified in the SAC study: ~onne~tions that are prequalified under thi Standard are intended to withstand
(1) Connection geometries that resulted in large stress eoncentrations in regions ~elaStic defo~ation thr?ugh controiled yi lding in specific behavioral modes.
of high triaxiality and limited ability to yield; t order
. to
. obtam
f connectlOns that will beha in the indicated manner, proper de-
ernnnatio~ o the strength of the eonnectio in various 1imit states is necess
(2) Use of weld filler metals with low inherent notch toughness and limited The capacIty formulations contained in th LRFD method ar . ~.
this approach. e consIstent WIth
ductility;
(3) High variability in the yield strengths of beams and columns resulting in
unanticipated zones of weakness in connection assemblies; and
(4) Welding practice and workmanship that fell outside the acceptable para-
meters under the AWS D 1.1 Structural Welding Codeo
A more complete listing of the causes of damage sustained in the Northridge
earthquake may be found in a series of publications (FEMA 350, 2000; FEMA
351,2000; FEMA 352,2000; FEMA 353, 2000b; FEMA 355C, 2000; FEMA
355D, 2000) published by the SAC Joint Venture that presented recornmendations
for design and construction of moment resisting frames designed to experience
substantial inelastic deformation during design ground shaking. These recom-
mendations inc1uded changes to material specifications for base metals and weld-
ing filler metals, improved quality assurance procedures during construction and
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mo ent Frames for seismic A l· .
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTR enON, !Nc. pp lcatlOns
COMMENTARY
6.2-50 6.2-51
C2.3 Members
C2.3.2 Built-up Members c. Box section . Boxed W-shape section
The behavior of built-up I-shaped members has been extensively tested in bolted
end-plate connections and has been demonstrated to be capable of developing
Fig. e-2.].
the necessary inelastic deformations. These members have not generally been
tested in other prequalified connections; however, the conditions of inelastic de-
formation imposed on the built-up shapes in these other connection types are to the flanges of roUed wide-flange colu ns. A limited number of tests of
similar to those tested for the bolted end-plate connections. co~nections of wide-flange beams to buíl up box section columns were also
revlewed. All of these tests were uniaxial i nature. That is, the beam or beams
connecting ~o the column were i~ a single plane and moments applied to the
C2.3.2b Columns column dunng the test induced flexure ab ut a single axis.
Four built-up column cross-section shapes are covered by this Standard. These are
illustrated in Figure C-2.1 and inelude !he flanged cruciform column and boxed w de-flange columns have not specif-
Ically been teste~. However, it was the jud ment of the CPRP that as long as
(1) I-shaped welded columns that resemble standard roUed wide-flange shapes
suc~ column sec~lOns met the limitations fo I-shaped sections and box-shaped
in cross-section shape and profile.
sectlOns, respectIveIy, and connection asse blies are designed to ensure that
(2) Cruciform W-shape columns, fabricated by splitting a wide-flange section most i.nelastic behavior occurred within the eam as opposed to the column, the
in half and welding the webs on either side of the web of an unsplit wide- behavlO~ of a~semblies employing these secti ns would be acceptable. Therefore,
flange section at its mid-depth to form a cruciform shape, each outstanding prequahficatlon h~s bee.n extended to these ross sections for connections types
leg of which terminates in a rectangular flange. where the predommant melastic behavior is n the beam rather than the column.
(3) Box coIumns, fabricated by welding four pIates together to form a closed box- Similarly, although there has been virtually o testing of connections in assem-
shaped cross section. blies subjected to biaxial bending of the col , the judgment of the CPRP was
that as long as columns are designed to remai essentially elastic and inelastic be-
(4) Boxed W-shape columns constructed by adding side plates to the sides of an
havior is concentrated within the beams, it w Id be possible to obtain acceptable
1-shaped cross section. behavior of beam-column connection as se blies subjected to biaxial loading.
The preponderance of connection tests reviewed as the basis for prequalifica- Therefore, flanged cruciform section colu s, built-up box columns and boxed
tions contained in this Standard consisted of rolled wide-flange beams connected wide-flange columns are permitted to be use in assemblies subjected to bi-axial
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mo ent Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRuenoN, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTR enON, !Nc.
6.2-52 COMMENTARY
6.2-53
loading for those connections types where inelastic behavior is concentrated in ~ly distrib~ted to sorne extent throughout the connection assembly. The plastic
the beam, rather than in the colurnn. hinge locations specified herein are based o observed behavior during conn ti
Limited testing of connections of wide-flange beams to the webs of I-shaped ~ssembly t~sts and indicate the locations of ost anticipated inelastic defoa:ti~~
columns had been conducted prior to the Northridge earthquake by Popov, m connection assemblies conforming to th particular prequalified type.
Engelhardt and others. This testing demonstrated that these "minor-axis" con-
nections were incapable of developing reliable inelastic behavior even at a time C2.4.3 Probable M~Ximum Momen at Plastic Hinge
when major axis connections were thought capable of developing acceptable be- Th~ probable plastic moment at the plastic .nge is intended to be a conservative
havior. No significant testing of such minor axis connections following the esti~a~e of ~e maximum moment likely to e developed by the connection under
Northridge earthquake has been conducted. Consequently, such connections are cyclIc melastic response. It ineludes consid ration of likely material overstrength
not prequalified under this Standard. and strain hardening.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mo ent Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, !Nc.
CUMNlliN'lAKX
6.2-55
• the weld has uniform and sound fusíon a the root. When ultrasonic testing is
• performed, this left-in-place backing may mask significant flaws that may exist
at the weld root. These flaws may create a ore severe notch condition than that
caused by the backing itself (Chi and othe s, 1997).
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment FralNmes for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connectionsfor Special and Intermediate Steel Mo ent Framesfor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, c.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF S'IÉEL CONSTR enON, INc.
6.2-56
COMMENTARY
6.2-57
the backinglcolumn interface at the top flange is at a lower le':el, compare~ ~o that
at the bottom flange. Therefore, backing removal is not requ~ed. The ad~ltlOn of
C3.S Tack Welds
the reinforcing fillet weld makes the inherent notch at the mterface an mter~al Tack welds outside ~eld joints may create nintended load paths and may create
notch rather th an an ex ternal notch, further reducing the effect. Because backing stress concentration~ that become¡ crack ini .ation sites when highly strained. By
, . and backwelding would be perforrned through an access
~:7e°;:~~:~eo~~¿:~ge,
placing tack welds within the joint, the p tentiaI for surface notches and hard
these operations should be avoided whenever possible. heat affected zones (HAZs) is rninírnized. en placed within the joint, the HAZ
oí a tack weld is tempered by the¡subseque t pass es for the final weld.
C3.3.4 Prohibited Welds at Steel Backing Tack welds for bearn flange-to-cdlurnn co nections are preferabIy made in the
weld grpove. Tack welds of bachng to lhe nderside of bearn flanges would be
Tack welds for bearn flange-to-colurnn connections should be made within ~he
unaccepta):>1e, aud ariy tack welds between eld backing and bearn flanges are to
::Ul:
Id oove Tack welds or fillet welds to the underside of beam at the backmg
diree; stress into lhe backing itseIf, increasing lhe notch effeet a:dlhe
báckin /colurnn flange interface. In addition, the weld toe o.f the tack we .or
be removed in accorclance with Seétion 3.3.4 Steel backing may be welded tothe
column under the bearn flange, where a rei forcing fillet is typicalIy placed.
fillet w!ld on the bearn flange would act as a stress concentratlOn and a potentlal When tack weIds for the attachment of w Id tabs are placed with.i.n the weld
fracture initiation site. joint, they become pan of the final weld.
Prequalified Connections lor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Fra¡mes lor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, NC. Prequalified Connections lor Special and Interme4iate Steel Mame t Frames lor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INc.
6.2-58 COMMENTARY COMMENTARY 6.2-59
k+ 1% in. QA inc1udes those tasks to be perlonned b an agency or fnni other than the
(min.) CONTINUITY contractor. QA inc1udes monitoriÍlg of the performance of the contractor in
PLATE implementing the contractor's QC progr ,ensuring that designated QC
functions are perfonned properly by the con actor on a routine basis. QA may
.S -:- also inc1ude specificinspection tasks that e inc1uded in the contractor's QC
,<\1x plan, and may inc1ude nondestructive testin of completed joints.
-" as
+ E
.:;¿--
R= % in.
(min.)
ACCESS HOlE
CONTINUITY CONT. Pl TO
PLATE COL. WEB AND FLANGE-
CASCADE CJP DR PJP WElD
CONTPl
1(MAX) PJP ROOT FACE
(IFUSED)
SECT-A
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mom nt Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, !Nc.
6.2-60
6.2-61
C4.2 Installation Requirements , Review of the research literature indicat s that a large number of RBS connections
Section 7.2 of the Seismic Provisions designates all bolted joints to be pretensIOned have been tested under a variety of con 'tions by different investigators at insti-
joints, with the additional requirement that the jOint's, faying surf~ces meet tutions throughout the world. A listing of relevant research is presented in the
Class A conditions for slip-critical joints. Sorne connectlOn types desIgnate the bibliography section at the end of this d cument. A significant amount of testing
bolted joint to be designed as slip-critical, and others waive the faying surface on RBS connections was also conducte under the FEMAlSAC program (FEMA
requirements of the Seismic Provisions. 355D, 2000d). Consequently, a large ody of test data was available for pur-
poses of connection prequalification. R view of available test data indicates that
Quality Control and Quality Assurance RBS specimens, when designed and onstructed according to the limits and
C4.3
procedures presented herein, have dev loped interstory drift angles of at least
See Section C3.7.
0.04 radian under cyclic loading on a onsistent basis.
Tests on RBS c0!llections sho?l that yiel . g is generally concentrated within the
reduced section of the beam and may ext nd, to a limited extent, to the face of the
column. Peak strength of specimens is usually achieved at an interstory drift
angle of approximately 0.02 to 0.03 ra ian. Specimen strength then gradually
reduces due to local and lateral torsion buckling of the beam. Ultimate faiIure
typically occurs at interstory drift angles f approximateIy 0.05 to 0.07 radian, by
low cycle fatigue fracture at local flang buckles within the RBS.
RBS connections have been U~sted usin single-cantilever type specimens (one
beam attached to column), and double-s ded specimens (specimen consisting of
a single column, with beams attached o both flanges). Tests have been con-
ducted primarily on bare-steel specimen , although sorne testing is also reported
on specimens with composite slabs. Test with composite slabs have shown that
the presence of the slab provides a benefi ¡al effect by helping to maintain the sta-
bility of the beam at larger interstory dri angles.
Most RBS test specimens have been te ted pseudo-statically, using a loading
protocol in which applied displacements e progressively increased, such as the
loading protocol specified in ATC-24 (A: C, 1992) and the loading protocol de-
veloped in the FEMAlSAC program an adopted in Appendix S of the AISC
Seismic Provisions. Two specimens were ested using a loading protocol intended
to represent near-source ground motio s that contain a large pulse. Several
specimens were :also tested dynamicall . The radius-cut RBS .specimens have
performed well under all of these loadi g conditions.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E dF STEEL Co STRUCTION, !Nc.
6.2-62 COMMENTARY COMMENTARY
6.2-6:
C5.2 Systems reasonable to perrnit the calculation o the width-to-thickness ratio a reasonabl(
distance into the RBS cut.
Review of the research literature presented in the reference section at the end of
this document and surnrnarized in Section C5.l indicates that the RBS connec- In developing this prequalification, th CPRP also reviewed lateral bracing re.
tion meets the prequalification requirements for special and intermediate mo- quirernents for beams with RBS conn ctions. Sorne concerns were raised in th{
ment frames in Appendix P of the AISC Seismic Provisions. past that the presence of the RBS flan e cuts rnight rnake the beam more prom
to lateral torsional buckling and that s pplementallateral bracing should be pro.
vided at the RBS. The issue of lateral racing requirernents for beams with RBS
C5.3 Prequalification Limits connections was subsequentIy investi ated in both experimental and analyticaJ
C5.3.1 Beam Limitations studies (FEMA 355C, 2000c; Yu and thers, 2000). These studies indicated tha1
A wide range of beam sizes has been tested with the radius-cut RBS. The small- for bare steel specimens (no cornposite lab), interstory drift angles of 0.04 radian
est beam size reported in the literature was a W530x82 (Canadian designation), can be achieved without a supplernent lateral brace at the RBS, as long as the
which is roughly equivalent to a W21x50. The heaviest beam reported is a normal lateral bracing requir~ for be s in SMF systems is provided, per Section
W36x300 (FEMA 355D, 2000d). Although the AISC Seismic Provisions per- 9.8 of the AISC Seismic ProVisions.
mit limited increases in beam depth and weight compared to the maximum sec- Studies also indicated that although supp ernental bracing is not required at the RBS
tions tested, the prequalification limits for maximum beam depth and weight to achieve 0.04 radian interstory drift gles, the addition of a supplernental brace
were established based on the test data for W36x300. It was the judgment of can provide for improved performance. Tests on RBS specimens with cornposite
the CPRP that for the purposes of establishing initial prequalification limits, slabs indicated that the presence of the lab provided a sufficient stabilizing effect
adherence to the maximum tested specimen would be appropriately conserv- that a supplemental brace al" the RBS s not likely to provide significantly irn-
ative. There is no evidence that modest deviations from the maximum tested proved performance (FEMA'355C, 20 Oc; Engelhardt, 1999; Trernblay, 1997).
specimen would result in significantly different performance, and the limit Based on the available data, beams wi RBS connections that support a concrete
on maximum flange thickness is approximately 4 percent thicker than the structural slab are not requirect to hay a supplernental braceat the RBS. If no
flange in a W36x300. floor slab is present, then a supplernent brace is required at the RBS.
Both beam depth and beam span-to-depth ratio are significant in the inelastic In cases where a supplernental.brace is p ovided, the brace should not be connected
behavior of beam-to-column connections. For the same induced curvature, deep within the reduced section (protected z ne). Welded or bolted brace attachrnents
beams will experience greater strains than shallower beams. Similarly, beams in this highly strained region of the be rnay serve as fracture initiation sites.
with shorter span-to-depth ratio will have a sharper moment gradient across the Consequently, if a supplemental brace i provided, it should be located at or just
beam span, resulting in reduced length of the beam participating in plastic beyond the end of the RBS th,at is farth st frorn the face of the colurnn.
hinging and increased strains under inelastic rotation demands. Most of the
beam-to-column assemblies that have been tested used configurations approxi- The protected zone is defined as show in Figure 5.1 and extends frorn the face
mating beam spans of about 25 feet and beam depths varying from W30 to W36 of the colurnn to the end of the RBS f est frorn the column. This definition is
so that beam span-to-depth ratios were typically in the range of eight to ten based on test observations that indicate ielding typically does not extend past the
(FEMA 355D, 2000d). Given the degree to which most specimens significantly far end of the RBS cut.
exceeded the minimum interstory drift demands, it was judged reasonable to set
the minimum span-to-depth ratio at seven for SMF and five for !MF. C5.3.2 Column Limitations
Nearly all tests of RBS connections ha e been performed with the beam flange
Local buckling requirements for members subjected to significant inelastic rotation
welded to the column flange (Le., strong 's connections). The limited amount of
are discussed in the AISC Seismic Provisions. For the purposes of calculating
weak-axis testing has shown aéceptable rformance. In the absence of more tests,
the width-to-thickness ratio, it is permitted to take the flange width at the two-thirds
the CPRP recornmended lirniting prequ . cation to strong-axis connections only.
point of the RBS cut. This provision recognizes that the plastic hinge of the beam
forms within the length of the RBS cut where the width of the flange is less than The majority ofRBS specirnens were c nstructed withW14 columns. However,
at the uncut section. This provision will result in a lower width-to-thickness ratio a nurnber of tests have also been cond cted using deeper columns, including
when taken at the RBS cut compared to that at the uncut section. Many of the RBS W18, W27 and W36 colurnns. Testing f deep-column RBS specirnens under
tests conducted as a part of the FEMNSAC program used a W30x99 beam, the FEMNSAC program indicated that tability problerns rnay occur when RBS
which does not quite satisfy the flange width-to-thickness ratio at the uncut sec- connections are used with deep column (FEMA 355C, 2000c). In FEMA 350,
tion. Nevertheless, the tests were successful. For these reasons, it was judged 2000a, RBS connections were; only pre ualified for W12 and W14 columns.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Ste 1Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL C NSTRUCTION, !Nc.
6.2-64 COMMENTARY COMMENTARY
6.2-6':
The specimens in the FEMA/SAC tests conducted showed a considerable amount also.be expected to provideacceptab e performance. Consequently, RBS con.
of column twisting (Oilton and others, 2000). However, two of the three spec- nectlOns are prequalified for use wit boxed wide-flange columns. When mo.
imens tested achieved 0.04-radian rotation, albeit with considerable strength ment co~nections are made only to th flanges of the wide-flange portion of the
degradation. The third specimen just feU short of 0.04-radian rotation and failed b~xed wlde-flange, the column may e up to W36 in depth. When the boxed
by fracture of the column web near the k-area. Subsequent study attributed this wlde-flange column participates in o ogonal moment frames, then neither the
fracture to column twisting. ~epth nor the width of the column is lowed to exceed 24 in. (600 mm), apply-
mg the same limits as for built-up box s.
Subsequent to the FEMAlSAC tests, an analytical study (Shen, 2002) coneluded
that boundary conditions used in these tests may not be representative of what
would be found in an actual building. Consequently, the large-column twisting C5.4 Beam-Column Relations. ip Limitations
(and presumably resultant k-area column fracture) seen in the FEMAlSAC tests Column panel zone strength 'provided n RBS t~st specimens has varied over a
would not be expected in real buildings. The study also coneluded that deep ~ide range. This ineludes specimens ith very strong panel zones (no yielding
columns should not behave substantially different from W14 columns and that m panel zone), specimens with very w ak panel zones (essentially all yielding in
no special bracing is needed when a slab is present. This was foUowed by a more panel zone and no yielding in beam), and specimens where yielding has been
extensive analytical and large-scale experimental investigation on RBS connections shared between the panel zone and the b . Good performance has been achieved
with columns up to W36 in depth (Rieles and others, 2004). This investigation for alllevels of panel zone strength, in luding panel zones that are substantially
showed that good performance can be achieved with deep columns when a com- weaker than permitted in Section 9.3a of the AISC Seismic Provisions (FEMA
posite slab is present or when adequate lateral bracing is provided for the beam 355C, 2000c). However, there are conc ms that very weak panel zones may pro-
and/or column in the absence of a slab. Based on a review of this recent research, mote fracture in the vicinity bf the bea -flange groove welds due to "kinking"
the prequalification of RBS connections is extended herein to include W36 columns. of. t~e column flanges at the' boundari s of the panel zone. Consequently, the
IDlmmum panel zone strength specifi d in Section 9.3a of the AISC Seismic
The behavior of RBS connections with cruciform columns is expected to be sim-
Provisions is rdluired for prequalified BS connections.
ilar to that of a roUed wide-flange column because the beam flange frames into
the column flange, the principal panel zone is oriented parallel to that of the
beam and the web of the cut wide-flange column is to be welded with a CJP C5.5 Beam Flange-to-Column lange Weld Limitations
gro ove weld to the continuous web one foot aboye and below the depth of the Complete joint penetration groove we ds joining the beam flange; to the col-
frame girder. Given these similarities and the lack of evidence suggesting be- umn flang~s provided on the majority o RBS test specimens have been made by
havioral limit states different from those associated with rolled wide-flange the self-shlelded flux cored arc welding . rocess (FCAW-S) using electrodes with
shape, the Committee determined to limit cruciform column depths to those im- a mínimum specified CVN tbughness Three ~ifferent electrode designations
posed on wide-flange shapes. have commonly be en used in these t sts: E71T~8, E70TG-K2, and E70T-6.
Further, for most specimens, the bptto flange backing was removed and a re-
Successful tests have also been conducted on RBS connections with built-up inforcing filIet added, top flange backing as fillet welded to the column, and weld
box columns. The largest box column for which test data was available was 24 in. tabs were removed at both tM top and ottom flanges.
by 24 in. Consequently, RBS connections have been prequalified for use with
built-up box columns up to 24 in. Limits on the width-thickness ratio s for the Test specimens¡ have employed a rang of weld access-hole geometries, and
walls of built-up box columns are specified in Section 2.3.2b(3) and were chosen results suggest that connection perfo ance is not highly sensitive to the weld
to reasonably match the box columns that have been tested. access-hole geometry. Consequently, prequalified RBS connections do not
require specific access-hole geometry. Bowever, as a ininirpum, access holes
The use of box columns participating in orthogonal moment frames, that is, with must conform to the requirements of F gure C-J1.2 of the AISC Specification.
RBS connections provided on orthogonal beams, is also prequalified. Although Although not required, the access-hole geometry shown in Figure 11-1 of the
no data were available for test specimens with orthogonal beams, it was the judg- AISC Seismic Provisions may result in mproved reliability of the connection.
ment of the committee that this condition should provide ostensibly the same
performance as single-plane connections, since the RBS does not rely on panel
zone yielding for good performance, and the column is expected to remain es-
CS.6 Beam Web-tp-Column Co nection Limitations
Two types of web connection details 've been u~ed for radius-cut RBS test
sentially elastic for the case of orthogonal connections.
specimens: a welded and a bdlted détai . In the, welded detail, the beam web is
Based on successful tests on wide-flange columns and on built-up box columns, welded directly to the column flange us ng a cpmplete joint penetration groove
it was the judgment of the Cornmittee that boxed wide-flange columns would weld. For the bolted detail, pretensioned .gh-strength bolts are used. Specimens
Prequalified Connectionsfor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Ste l Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
.AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL C STRUCTION, !Nc•
COMMENTARY
6.2-66 COMMENTARY 6.2-67
with both types of web connections have achieved at least ~.04-radi.an interstory flange width removed at the minimum s tion of the RBS has varied from about
drift angles, and consequentIy both types of web cOnnectlOn detall s were per- 38 to 55 percent. Flange removal for p equalified RBS connections is limited,
mitted for RBS connections in (FEMA 350, 2000a). based on judgment, to a maximum of 50 percent, to avoid excessive loss of
Previous test data (Engelhardt and others, 2000) indicate that beyond an interstory strength or stiffness. .
drift angle of 0.04 radian, specimens with bolted web connections show a higher The design procedure presented herei for prequalified RBS connections is
incidence of fracture occurring near the beam-flange groove welds, as compared similar to that presented in FEMA 350 2000a. The overall basis for sizing the
to specimens with welded web connections. Thus, while satisfac~o~ perfor- RBS cut in this design procedure is to imit the maximum beam moment that
mance is possible with a bolted web connection, previous test data mdlc~te that can develop at the face of tqe colum to the beam's actual plastic moment
a welded web is beneficial in reducing the vulnerability of RBS connectlOns to (based on expected yield stress) when e minimum section ofthe RBS is fully
fracture at the beam-flange groove welds. yielded and strain hardened. Test data i dicate that connecting the beam at the
Subsequent to the SACIFEMA testing on RBS connections, a test program face of the column in accordance with he requirements herein aHows the con-
(Lee and others, 2004) was conducted which directly compare~ RBS c~nnec nection to resist this level of moment w ile minimizing the chance of fracture at
tions that were nominally identical, except for the web connectlOn detall. The the beam-flange gro ove welds.
RBS specimens with welded web connections achieved 0.04-rad~an int~rstory Step 4 of the design procedute require computation of the shear force at the
drift angle, whereas as RBS specimens with bolted web connectlOns falled to center of the RBS cut. This shear force is function of the gravity load on the beam
achieve 0.04 radian. and the plastic moment capacity of the S. An example calculation is shown in
Thus, while past successful tests have been conducted on ~S conn~ctions with Figure C-5.1 for the case of a beamwi a uniformIy distributed gravity load.
bolted web connections, recent data has provided contradlctory eVldence, sug- For gravity load conditions other than uniform load, the appropriate adjust-
gesting bolted web connections may not be s~itabl~ for R~S conne~tions when ment should be made to the free-body di gram in Figure C-5.1 and to Equations
used for SMF applications. Until further data IS aVallable, lt was t~e Judgment ~f C-5.8-1 and C-5.8-2.
the CPRP to require a welded web connection for RBS connectlOns prequah-
fied for use in SMF. For IMF applications, bolted web connections are acceptable. Equations C-5.8-1 and C-5.8-2 assume at plastic hinges will form at the RBS
at each end of the beam. If the :gravity lo d on the beam is very large, the plastic
hinge at one end ,of the beam may move toward the interior portion of the beam
C5.7 Fabrication of Flange Cuts span. Ifthis is the case, the free-body d' gram in Figure C-5.1 should be mod-
Various shapes of flange cutouts are possible for RBS connections, in~luding a
ified to extend between the actual plasti hinge locations. To determine whether
constant cut, a tapered cut, and a radius cut. Experimental work has mc1uded
Equations C-5.8-l and C-5.8-2 are v id, draw the moment diagram for the
successful tests on aH of these types of RBS cuts. The radius cut avoids ab~pt
segment of the beaIll shown in Figure -5.1(b), that is, for the segment of the
changes of cross section, reducing the chances of a premature fra~ture o~cumng
beaIll between the centers of the RBS uts. If the maximum moment occurs
within the reduced section. Further, the majority of tests reported m the hteratu~e
at the ends of the span, then Equations C-5.8-1 and C-5.8-2 are valido Jf the
used radius-cut RBS sections. Consequently, only the radius-cut RBS shape IS
maximum moment occurs within the s an and exceeds Mpe of the beam (see
prequalified. Equation 5-8), then the modification d scribed aboye will be needed.
An issue in the fabrication of RBS connections is the required surface fin~sh and
smoothness of the RBS flange cuts. No research data was found that specIf'ically 2M wL'
addressed this issue. Consequently, finish requirements for RBS cuts were cho- V =---.l?!.... (C-5.8-1)
RES L' 2
sen based on judgment and are consistent with those specified in (FEMA 350,
2000a). 2M wL'
V' =---.l?!.... (C-5.8-2)
RBS L' 2
C5.S Design Procedure . .
Dimensions of the RBS cuts for the test specimens reported m the hterature vary
over a fairly small range. The distance from the face of the column to the start of
the RBS cut (designated as "a" in Figure 5.1) ranged from 50 to 75 percent ofthe
beam-flange width. The length of the cuts (designated as "b" in Figure 5.1) has
varied from approximately 75 to 85 percent of the beam depth. Tbe amount of
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Stee Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF SlEEL Co STRUCTION, INC.
COMMENTARY 6.2-69
C6.2 Systems
The three extended end-plate moment c nnections in Figure 6.1 are prequali-
fied for use in IMF and SMF systems, exc pt in SMF systems where the beam is
in direct contact with concrete structural s abs. The exception applies only when
shear studs are used to attach the concrete slab to the connected beam and is be-
cause of the lack of test data to date. A1l the prequalification testing has been
performed with bare steel specimens, exc t for one test reported in Sumner and
Murray, 2000. In this test, headed studs ere installed from near the end-plate
moment connection to the end of the be , and the concrete'was in contact
with the column flanges and web. The lo er bolts failed prematurely by tension
rupture because of the increase in the dis ance from the neutral axis due to the
presence of the composite slab.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel oment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF SlEEL CONsTRuenoN, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF SlEEL CON TRUenON, !NC.
6.2-70 COMMENTARY COMMENTARY
6.2-71
Similar to RBS testing, most of the tested beam-column assemblies had config- The requirements for the lengfu of be -flange-to-end-plate stiffeners are es-
urations approximating beam span-to-depth ratios in the range of eight to ten. tablished to ensure a smooth 16ad path. he 30° angle is the same as used for
However, it was judged reasonable to set the minimum span-to-depth ratio at determining the Whitmore sec~on width in other types of connections. The re-
seven for SMF and five for IMF. quired l-in. (25-mm) land is needed to en ure the quality of the vertical and hor-
izontal weld terminations. \
The protected zone, the distance from the face of the end-plate for unstiffened, or
from the end of the stiffener for stiffened, which is specified as the smaller of the Tests have shown Ithat the use of finger sh ms between the end-plate and the col-
beam depth and three times the flange width, is based on test observations. umn flange do not affect the performance of the connection (Sumner and others,
2000a).
C6.5 Column Limitations Design procedures are not available for co ections of beams witb composite ac-
Extended moment end-plate connections may be used only with roUed or built- tion at an end-plate moment connection. herefore, careful composite slab de-
up I-shaped sections and must be flange connected. There are no other specific tailing is necessaIJ:' to prevent composite ac ·on, which may increase tension forces
column requirements for extended end-plate moment connections. in the lower bolt~. Welded stud shear co nectors are not permitted within 1112
times the beam depth, and compressible aterial is required between the con-
crete slab and the column face (Sumner an Murray, 2002; Yang arid others, 2003).
C6.6 Beam-Column Relationship Limitations
There are no specific beam-to-column relationship limitations for extended end- Cyclic testing hasshown that use of weld ccess holes can cause premature frac-
plate moment connections. ture of the beam flange at end~plate mo ent connections (Meng and Murray,
1997). Short to l~ng weld access holes ere investigated with similar results.
C6.7 Continuity Plates Therefore, weld access holes are not permi ed for end-plate moment connections.
Continuity plate design must conform to the requirements of Section 2.4.4. The Strain gage measurements have shown th the web plate material in the vicinity
design procedure in Section 6.10 contains provisions specific to end-plate moment of the inside tension bolts genera1ly reache the yield strain (Murray and Kukreti,
connections, and the procedure is discussed generally in AISC Design Guide 1988). ConsequenUy, it is required that the web-to-end-plate weld(s) in the viein-
No. 13 (Carter, 1999). ity of the inside bolts be sufficient to dev op the strength of the beam web.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel oment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CON TRUenON, INC.
6.2-72 COMMENTARY
6.2-73
The design procedure in this section, with sorne modification, was used to design
the prequalification test specimens. The procedure is very similar to that in the
AISC Design Guide No. 4, 2nd Edition (Murray and Sumner, 2003) except that dif-
ferent resistance factors are used. Example calculations are found in the Design
AISC (2005a), AISC/ANSI 360-05, Specificationfo Structural Steel Buildings, American
Guide. Column stiffening example calculations are also found in the AISC Design Institute of Steel Construction, lnc., Chicago, ll.,.
Guide No. 13 (Carter, 1999).
AISC (2005b), AISC/ANSI 341-05, Seismic Provisions or Structural Steel Buildings, American
Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., Chicago, ll.,.
ATC (1992), Guidelines for Cyclic Seismic Tésting of e mponents of Steel Structures, ATC-24,
Applied Technology Council, Redwood G:ity, CA
AWS (2004), AWS/ANSI 01.1, Structural Welding Co e - Steel, American Welding Society,
Miami, FL.
Barsom, J. and Korvink, S. (1998), "Effects of Stra n Hardenening and Strain Aging on
the K-Region of Structural Shapes," Report No. ACIBD-98/02, SAC Joint Venture,
Sacramento, CA
Carter, c.J. (1999), "Stiffening ofWide-Flange Colu s at Moment Connecti.ons: Wind and
Seismic Applications," AISC Design,Guide No. 13, erican Institute of Steel Construction,
Chicago, ll.,.
Castellani, A, Castiglioni, C.A., Chesi, C., and Plu . r, A (1998), "A European Research
Program on the Cyclic Behaviour ofWelded Beam Column Connections," Proceedings
of the NEHRP Conferenceand Workshqp on Res arch on the Northridge, California
Earthquake of January 17,1994, Vol. nI·B, pp. 51 517, National Earthquake Hazards
Reduction Program, Washirigton, DC.
Chi, W.M., Deierlein, G. and Tngraffea, A' (1997),' inite Element Fracture Mechanics
Investigation ofWelded Beam-Column COlinections," eport No. SAClBD-97/05, SAC Joint
Venture, Sacramento, CA
FEMA 302 (1997), NEHRP Recommended Provisio sfor Seismic Regulationsfor New
Buildings and Other Structures, FEMA 302, Part - Provisions, Federal Emergency
Management Ageilcy, Washington, OC.
FEMA 350 (2000), Recommended Seismic Design C iteria for New Steel Moment-Frame
Buildings, Federal Emergency ManagementAgenc ,Washington, OC.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NS1TfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, INC. Prequalified Connections for Special and Interme(iiate Steel oment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONS uenON, !Nc.
6.2-82
INDEX
Base shear ......................... '..... " ......................... 1-6
Beam design
Braced frame (R = 3) ............. '. . . . . .. . ....................... 2-27
EccentricalIy braced frame .................................. 3-120, 6.1-53
Intennediate rnornent frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 4-38
Ordinary concentrically braced frarne .................................. 3-8
Ordinary rnornent frarne ........................................... 4-13
SpeciaI concentricalIy braced frame .. l ............................... 3-46
SpeciaI rnornent frame ............ l ............................... 4-53
BoItedjoints ............. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..................... 6.1-21
Brace design
Braced frame (R = 3) .............................................. 2-3
EccentricalIy braced frame ......... , .............................. 3-125
Ordinary concentricalIy braced frame .................................. 3-3
Special concentricalIy braced frarne
Pipe . ..................................................... 3-38
W-Shape ......... '...........: ............................... 3-42
Braced frame systerns
R = 3 systerns ......... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 2-2
R > 3 systerns ....................: . . . . . .. . ....................... 3-1
Buckling-restrained braced frame .'. . . . . .. . ................ 5-23, 6.1-55
EccentricalIy braced frame ............. . ..................... 3-107
Ordinary concentrically braced frame . . . .. . ....................... 3-2
Special concentricalIy braced frame ...... . ...................... 3-35
Bracing connection ,
Braced frame (R = 3) ... ~ ..... " . . .. . . . . .. . ....................... 2-6
EccentricalIy braced frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......... 3-134,3-138,6.1-54
Ordinary concentrically braced frame . . . . . . . .. . ........... 3-12,3-25,6.1-49
Special concentricalIy braced frame ...... . . .. . ...... 3-52, 3-65, 3-79, 6.1-46
Buckling-restrained braced frarne ................................. 5-23, 6.1-55
Adjusted brace strength .......................................... 6.1-56
Beams and coIurnns ....................................... '..... 6.1 ~58
Bracing connections ......... ; .................................. 6.1-57
Bracing rnernbers .............................................. 6.1-55
Buckling-restráining systern ................ . .................... 6.1-55
Gusset pIates .......... " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 6.1-57
Protected zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 6.1-58
Qualifying cyclic testing ............ . . . . . .. . .................... 6.1-84
Required strength ........................ . .................... 6.1-57
SpeciaI requirernents reIated to bracing ~onfigurati n ................... 6.1-57
Splices .............. '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 6.1-58
Steel core .............................. . .................... 6.1-55
Testing ................................ . .................... 6.1-56
Width-thickness lirnitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 6.1-58
Prequalijied Connections for Special and lntermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUI'E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, !NC. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONST UCTION, !Nc.
2
3
~.--------------------------~-------------------------
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONS UCTION, !Nc.
4
5
K-Type bracing ................................................ 6.1-47 Steel plate shear walls; see Special plate shear wall
Lateral force distribution ......................................... 6.1-45 Stiffeners; see Continuity plates and stiffeners
Members ................................. '.................... 6.1-45 Story drift ..............' ................... 1-11,2-19,3-111,4-4,4-28,4-42
Required compressive strength .................................... 6.1-47 Terminology ......................................................... 1-2
Required flexural strength ........................................ 6.1-46 Weld access holes ........................ . .................... 1-13, 1-18
Required strength .............................................. 6.1-45 Welded Joints ..................................................... 6.1-22
Required strength of bracing connections ............................ 6.1-46 Demand critical welds .......... '.' ............................... 6.1-22
Required tensile strength ........... , ............................. 6.1-46 General requirements ........... ' ................................ 6.1-90
Slendemess ...................... ' ............................. 6.1-45 Welding provisions ....................... . ................. 6.1-90, 6.2-11
Seismically compact sections ................................... 1-13, 1-19 Demand critical welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 6.1-22
Special bracing configuration requirements ........................... 6.1-47 Nondestructive testing procedures . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 6.1-92
V-type and inverted V-type bracing .....' ............................ 6.1-47 Notch toughness verification test. . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 6.1-20
Width-thickness limitations ....................................... 6.1-45 Personnel ........................... . ....................... 6.1-91
Special moment frame (SMF) ............................... 4-24, 4-42, 6.1-29 Shop drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 6.1-90
Beam and column limitations ..................................... 6.1-32 Structural design drawings and specifications ........................ 6.1-90
Beam design ................................................... 4-53
Beam flanges ................................................. 6.1-32
Beam-to-column connections ..................................... 6.1-29
Brace connections .............................................. 6.1-34
Column design .................................................. 4-45
Column splices ..................................... 4-73, 6.1-27, 6.1-36
Column-beam moment ratio ...................................... 6.1-33
Conformance demonstration ...................................... 6.1-30
Continuity plates ............................................... 6.1-32
Lateral bracing at beam-to-column connections ........................ 6.1-34
Lateral bracing ofbeams ......................................... 6.1-34
Panel zone doubler plates ........................................ 6.1-32
Panel zone of beam-to-column connections ........................... 6.1-31
Panel zone thickness ............................................ 6.1-32
Protected zones ................................................ 6.1-31
Seismically compact sections .................................. 1-13, 1-19
Shear strength ................................................. 6.1-31
Unbraced connections ........................................... 6.1-35
Welds ....................................................... 6.1-31
Width-thickness limitations ....................................... 6.1-32
Special plate shear walls ........................................ 5-24, 6.1-58
Connections of webs to boundary elements ........................... 6.1-59
Horizontal and vertical boundary elements ........................... 6.1-59
HBE-to-VBE connections ........................................ 6.1-60
Openings in webs .............................................. 6.1-59
Special truss moment frame .......................................... 6.1-42
Lateral bracing ................................................ 6.1-44
Special segment ............................................... 6.1-42
Strength of non-special segment members ............................ 6.1-43
Strength of special segment members ............................... 6.1-43
Width-thickness limitations ....................................... 6.1-44
Stability coefficient ..............................'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE ÓF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL C NSTRUCTION, !Nc.